auto emoción

L
E
O
N
o
w
n
e
r

s
m
a
n
u
a
l
Foreword
This owner's manual and the corresponding supplements should be read carefully to familiarise yourself with
your vehicle.
Also, the regular care, maintenance and correct handling of the vehicle will contribute to preserve its value.
For safety reasons, note the information concerning accessories, modifications and parts exchange.
If selling the vehicle, give all of the onboard documentation to the new owner as this should be kept with the
vehicle.
Contents 3
Contents
The structure of this manual . . . . .
Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Proper sitting position for occupants . . . . . . . . .
Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stowing luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Belt tension devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deactivating airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital display in the instrument panel . . . . . . .
Instrument panel menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using these instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering wheel lighting controls . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio frequency remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sliding/tilting roof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seats and stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The importance of correct seat adjustment . . . .
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear seat bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stowage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ashtrays*, cigarette lighter* and electrical
sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
First-aid kit, warning triangle, fire extinguisher
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning . .
Heating and ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Climatic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2C-Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic gearbox* / DSG automatic gearbox*
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acoustic parking aid system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise control system (CCS)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tips and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intelligent technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-lock brake system and traction control M-ABS
(ABS and TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic stabilisation program (ESP)* . . . . . . .
Driving and the environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exhaust gasses purification system . . . . . . . . . .
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
6
7
7
7
10
16
16
19
19
21
24
28
30
30
34
37
41
44
46
46
48
50
55
55
55
56
59
65
72
84
84
84
88
92
93
93
99
100
102
104
106
108
111
111
117
118
119
123
126
126
127
129
130
131
134
137
138
140
140
142
145
149
150
150
151
152
153
156
157
162
163
165
169
169
169
170
171
173
173
174
175
Contents 4
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving economically and with respect for the
environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle . . . . . . .
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care of the vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care of the vehicle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories, parts replacement and
modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories and parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roof aerial* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mobile telephones and two-way radios . . . . . . .
Fitting a towing bracket* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washer fluid and windscreen wiper blades . . . .
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If and when . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools, tyre repair kit and spare wheel . . . . . . . .
Wheel change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tyre repair kit (Tyre-Mobility-System)* . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing and tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General notes on the technical data . . . . . . .
What you should be aware of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How are the figures measured? . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking fluid levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 1.4 litre 63 kW (86 bhp) . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 1.6 litre 75 kW (102 bhp) . . . . . .
Petrol engine 2.0 110 kW (150 bhp). Manual . .
Petrol engine 2.0 110 kW (150 bhp). Automatic
Petrol engine 2.0l 136 kW (185 bhp) . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 2.0l 147 kW (200 bhp). Manual .
Petrol engine 2.0l 147 kW (200 bhp). Automatic
Petrol engine 2.0l 177 kW (240 bhp) . . . . . . . .
Diesel engine 1.9l TDI 77 kW (105 bhp) . . . . . .
Diesel engine 2.0l 103 kW (140 bhp). Manual .
Diesel engine 2.0 103 kW (140 bhp). Automatic
Diesel engine 2.0l 100 kW (136 bhp). Manual .
Diesel engine 2.0 100 kW (136 bhp). Automatic
Diesel engine 2.0l 125 kW (170 bhp) . . . . . . . .
Dimensions and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
178
180
182
182
183
188
191
191
191
192
192
193
195
195
196
197
198
201
205
208
211
212
214
222
222
224
230
232
239
248
251
255
255
255
257
258
258
260
260
261
262
263
264
266
267
268
269
271
272
273
274
276
277
279
281
The structure of this manual 5
The structure of this manual
Before reading this manual it must be understood
This manual describes the vehicle equipment at the time of publication.
Some of the equipment described here will not be available until a later date,
or is available only in certain markets.
Because this is a general manual for the LEON, some of the equipment and
functions that are described in this manual are not included in all types or
variants of the model or model year; they may vary or be modified in accord-
ance with technical or market requirements or model year; this can not be
interpreted as dishonest advertising.
Illustrations are intended as a general guide, and may vary from the equip-
ment fitted in your vehicle in some details.
The direction indications (left, right, front, rear) appearing in this manual
refer to the normal forward working direction of the vehicle except when
otherwise indicated.
The equipment marked with an asterisk* is fitted as standard only in deter-
mined model versions, are supplied as optional only for some versions or
model year, or are only offered in different countries.
® All registered marks are indicated with ®. Even if the copyright symbol
does not appear this does not mean that the mark is not copyrighted.
> The section is continued on the following page.
M Indicates the end of a section.
WARNING
Texts with this symbol contain safety information. They warn you of serious
dangers, possibly involving accident or injury.
Caution
Texts with this symbol draw your attention to a possible risk of damage to
your vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
Texts with this symbol refer to points relevant to the protection of the environ-
ment.
Note
Texts with this symbol contain additional information of a more general
nature. In certain countries there may be different units of measurement than
the ones used in this manual. For example, miles and gallons may be used
instead of kilometres and litres.
Content 6
Content
This manual is structured to give you the information you need as quickly and
clearly as possible. The contents of this Manual are grouped into relatively
short sections making up chapters (e.g. “Air conditioning”). The entire
manual is divided into five large chapters:
1. Safety First
Information on the vehicle equipment relating to passive safety such as seat
belts, airbags, seats, etc.
2. Controls and equipment
Information about the distribution of controls in the driver position of the
vehicle, about the seat adjustment possibilities, how to create a suitable
climate in the passenger compartment, etc.
3. Tips and Maintenance
Advice relating to driving, care and maintenance of your vehicle and certain
problems which you may solve yourself.
4. Technical Data
Figures, data, dimensions and measurements (for example fuel consump-
tion) of your vehicle.
5. Alphabetic index
At the end of this manual there is a detailed alphabetical index, this will help
you to rapidly find the information you require.
Safe driving 7
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Safety First
Safe driving
Brief introduction
Dear SEAT Driver
Safety first!
This chapter contains important information, advice, suggestions
and warnings that should be read and followed in the interest of
your own safety and the safety of your passengers.
WARNING
• This manual contains important information concerning vehicle
handling both by passengers and the driver. The other booklets in the
vehicle wallet also contain further information that you should be aware of
for your own safety and for the safety of your passengers.
• Ensure that the complete vehicle wallet is always in the vehicle. This is
especially important when you lend or sell the vehicle to others.
Safety equipment
The safety equipment is a part of the occupant protection
system and can reduce the risk of injury during an accident.
Never “gamble” with your safety and the safety of your passengers. In the
event of an accident, the safety equipment could reduce the risk of injury. The
following list includes most of the safety equipment in your SEAT:
• optimised three-point seat belts,
• belt tension limiter for the front and rear seats,
• belt tension devices for the front seats,
• belt height adjustment for the front seats,
• front airbags,
• side airbags in the front seat backrests,
• side airbags in the rear seat backrests*,
• curtain airbags,
• crash-active front head restraints*,
• “ISOFIX” anchor points for “ISOFIX” child seats on the outer seats in the
second row,
• height-adjustable head restraints,
• head restraints with in-use position and non-use position
• adjustable steering column.
The safety equipment mentioned above works together to provide you and
your passengers with the best possible protection in accident situations. But
this safety equipment cannot help you or your passengers if you or your
Safe driving 8
passengers assume an incorrect sitting position or do not properly adjust or
use this equipment.
Therefore, information is provided about why this equipment is so important,
how it protects you, what you have to observe when using it and how you and
your passengers can achieve the greatest possible benefit from the safety
equipment fitted. This manual includes important warnings that you and your
passengers should observe in order to reduce the risk of injury.
Safety is everyone's business!
Before starting every trip
The driver bears the responsibility for his passengers and the
operational worthiness of the vehicle.
For your own safety and the safety of your passengers, always note
the following points before every trip:
– Ensure that the vehicle's lights and turn signals operate flaw-
lessly.
– Check tyre pressure.
– Ensure that all windows provide a clear and good view of the
surroundings.
– Securely restrain all parcels Ÿpage 16.
– Make sure that no objects can interfere with the pedals.
– Adjust front seat, head restraint and mirrors properly for your
size.
– Ensure that the passengers in the rear seats always have the
head restraints in the in-use position Ÿpage 14.
– Instruct passengers to adjust the head restraints according to
their height.
– Protect children with appropriate child seats and properly
applied seat belts Ÿpage 46.
– Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct your passengers
also to assume a proper sitting position Ÿpage 10.
– Always fasten your seat belt correctly before driving off. Instruct
your passengers also to fasten their seat belts properly
Ÿpage 19.
What affects driving safety?
Driving safety is largely determined by your driving style and
the personal behaviour of all occupants.
As driver, you are responsible for yourself and your passengers.
When your concentration or driving safety is affected, you endanger
yourself as well as others on the road Ÿ , for this reason:
– Do not allow yourself to be distracted from the traffic around you,
e.g. by passengers or telephone conversations.
– Never drive when your driving ability is impaired (e.g. by medica-
tion, alcohol, drugs).
– Observe traffic laws and speed limits.
Safe driving 9
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
– Always reduce your speed as appropriate for road, traffic and
weather conditions.
– When travelling long distances, take breaks regularly - at least
every two hours.
– If possible, avoid driving when tired or anxious.
WARNING
When driving safety is impaired during a trip, the risk of injury and acci-
dents increases.
Safe driving 10
Proper sitting position for occupants
Proper sitting position for driver
The proper sitting position for the driver is important for safe
and relaxed driving.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accident, we recommend the following adjustments for the driver:
– Adjust the steering wheel so that there is a distance of at least
25 cm between the steering wheel and the centre of your chest
Ÿfig. 1.
– Move the driver's seat forwards or backwards so that you are able
to press the accelerator, brake and clutch pedals to the floor with
your knees still slightly angled Ÿ .
– Ensure that you can reach the highest point of the steering
wheel.
– Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same
level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same
level as the top of your head Ÿfig. 2.
– Move the backrest to an upright position so that your back rests
completely against it.
Fig. 1 The proper
distance between driver
and steering wheel
Fig. 2 Proper head
restraint position for
driver
Safe driving 11
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
– Always fasten your seat belt correctly before driving off
Ÿpage 19.
– Keep both feet in the foot well so that you have the vehicle under
control at all times.
Adjustment of the driver's seat Ÿpage 126.
WARNING
• An incorrect sitting position of the driver can lead to severe injuries.
• Adjust the driver's seat so that there is at least 25 cm distance between
the centre of the chest and the hub of the steering wheel Ÿpage 10, fig. 1.
If you are sitting nearer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you
properly.
• If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the
minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a qualified workshop. The workshop
will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.
• When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the
outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. This reduces the
risk of injury when the driver airbag is triggered.
• Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position, or in any other
manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In such cases, you may
sustain injuries to the arms, hands and head.
• To reduce the risk of injury to the driver during sudden braking manoeu-
vres or an accident, never drive with the backrest tilted far back! The airbag
system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the back-
rest is in an upright position and the driver is wearing his or her seat belt
properly. The further the backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk
of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web or the incorrect sitting
position!
• Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve optimal protection.
Proper sitting position for front passenger
The front passenger must sit at least 25 cm away from the
dash panel so that the airbag can provide the greatest
possible protection in the event that it is triggered.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accident, we recommend the following adjustments for the front
passenger:
– Move the front passenger seat back as far as possible Ÿ .
– Move the backrest to an upright position so that your back rests
completely against it.
– Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same
level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same
level as the top of your head Ÿpage 13.
– Keep both feet in the foot well in front of the front passenger seat.
– Always fasten your seat belt correctly before driving off
Ÿpage 19.
It is possible to deactivate the passenger airbag in exceptional circum-
stances Ÿpage 25.
For detailed information on how to adjust the front passenger's seat, see
Ÿpage 129.
WARNING
• An incorrect sitting position of the front passenger can lead to severe
injuries.
Safe driving 12
• Adjust the front passenger seat so that there is at least 25 cm between
your breastbone and the dash panel. If you are sitting nearer than 25 cm,
the airbag system cannot protect you properly.
• If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the
minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a qualified workshop. The workshop
will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.
• Always keep your feet in the foot well when the vehicle is moving; never
rest them on the instrument panel, out the window or on the seat. An incor-
rect sitting position exposes you to an increased risk of injury in the event
of a braking manoeuvre or an accident. If the airbag is triggered, you could
sustain severe injuries due to an incorrect sitting position.
• To reduce the risk of injury to the front passenger during sudden
braking manoeuvres or an accident, never travel with the backrest tilted far
back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection
when the backrest is in an upright position and the front passenger is
wearing his or her seat belt properly. The further the backrests are tilted to
the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the
belt web or the incorrect sitting position!
• Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve maximum protection.
Correct sitting position for passengers in the rear seats
Passengers in the rear seats must sit up straight, keep their
feet in the foot wells and wear their seat belts properly.
To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking
manoeuvre or an accident, passengers on the rear bench seat must
observe the following:
– Adjust the headrest to the correct position Ÿpage 14.
– Keep both feet in the foot well in front of the rear seat.
– Always fasten your seat belt correctly before driving off
Ÿpage 19.
– Use an appropriate child restraint system when you take children
in the vehicle Ÿpage 46.
WARNING
• If the passengers on the rear seat are not sitting properly, they could
sustain severe injuries.
• Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve maximum protection.
• Seat belts can only provide optimal protection when backrests are in an
upright position and the passengers are wearing their seat belts properly.
If passengers on the rear seat are not sitting in an upright position, the risk
of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web increases.
WARNING (continued)
Safe driving 13
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Correct adjustment of front seat head restraints
Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of
occupant protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in
most accident situations.
Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve maximum protection.
– Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same
level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same
level as the top of your head and, at the very least, at eye level
Ÿfig. 3 and Ÿfig. 4.
Adjusting the head restraints Ÿpage 126.
WARNING
• Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted
increases the risk of severe injuries.
• Incorrectly adjusted head restraints could result in death in the event of
a collision or accident.
• Incorrectly adjusted head restraints also increase the risk of injury
during sudden or unexpected driving or braking manoeuvres.
• The head restraints must always be adjusted according to the occu-
pant's size.
Headrests in use*
Vehicle occupants are pressed into their seats during a rear end collision. The
resulting body pressure on the backrest activates the crash-active head
restraint* on the front seat, which moves rapidly forwards and upwards at the
same time. This movement reduces the distance between the occupant's
head and the head rest, thus reducing the risk of head injuries such as brain
trauma.
Fig. 3 Properly adjusted
head restraint viewed
from the front
Fig. 4 Properly adjusted
head restraint viewed
from the side
Safe driving 14
WARNING
Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted
increases the risk of severe injuries.
• Incorrectly adjusted head restraints could result in death in the event of
a collision or accident.
• Incorrectly adjusted head restraints also increase the risk of injury
during sudden or unexpected driving or braking manoeuvres.
• The head restraints must always be adjusted according to the occu-
pant's size.
Note
The crash-active head restraints* could also be triggered if a vehicle occupant
applies a high level of pressure on the backrest (e.g. by “falling” back into the
seat when entering the vehicle) or if pressure is applied to a front seat head
restraint from the rear. This accidental activation is, however, not dangerous
as the crash-active head restraints will return to the original position immedi-
ately and are thus once again ready.
Correct adjustment of rear seat head restraints
Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of the
occupant protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in
most accident situations
Rear outer seat head restraints
– The rear outer seat head restraints have 4 positions.
– Three positions for use Ÿfig. 5. In these positions, the head
restraints are used normally, protecting passengers along with
the rear seat belts.
– And one position for non-use.
– To fit the head restraints in position for use, pull on the edges
with both hands in the direction of the arrow.
Fig. 5 Head restraints in
correct position
Safe driving 15
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Centre rear head restraint
– The centre head restraint only has two positions, in-use (head
restraint up) and non-use (head restraint down).
WARNING
• Under no circumstances should the rear passengers travel while the
head restraints are in the non-use position.
• Do not swap the centre rear head restraint with either of the outer seat
rear head restraints.
• Injury risk in case of an accident!
Caution
Note the instructions on the adjustment of the head restraints Ÿpage 127.
Examples of incorrect sitting positions
An incorrect sitting position can lead to severe injuries to
occupants.
Seat belts can provide optimal protection only when the belt webs
are properly positioned. Incorrect sitting positions substantially
reduce the protective function of seat belts and increase the risk of
injury due to incorrect belt web position. As the driver, you are
responsible for all vehicle occupants, especially children.
– Never permit anyone to assume an incorrect sitting position in
the vehicle while travelling Ÿ .
The following list contains examples of sitting positions that could be
dangerous for all occupants. The list is not complete, but we would like to
make you aware of this issue.
Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in motion:
• never stand in the vehicle,
• never stand on the seats,
• never kneel on the seats,
• never tilt your backrest far to the rear,
• never lean against the dash panel,
• never lie on the rear bench,
• never sit on the front edge of a seat,
• never sit sideways,
• never lean out of a window,
• never put your feet out of a window,
• never put your feet on the dash panel,
• never put your feet on the surface of a seat,
• never travel in a foot well,
• never travel on a seat without wearing the seat belt,
• never carry any person in the luggage compartment.
WARNING
• Every incorrect sitting position increases the risk of severe injuries.
• Sitting in an incorrect position exposes the occupants to severe injuries
if airbags deploy, striking an occupant who has assumed an incorrect
sitting position.
• Before the vehicle moves, assume the proper sitting position and main-
tain it throughout the trip. Before every trip, instruct your passengers to
assume the proper sitting position and to maintain it during the trip
Ÿpage 10, “Proper sitting position for occupants”.
Safe driving 16
Pedal area
Pedals
The operation and freedom of movement of all pedals must
never be impaired by objects or floor mats.
– Ensure that you can always press the accelerator, brake and
clutch pedals unimpaired to the floor.
– Ensure that the pedals can return unimpaired to their initial posi-
tions.
Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area free and can be securely
fastened in the foot well.
If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must be free to move further than
normal in order to bring the vehicle to a stop.
Wear suitable shoes
Always wear shoes which support your feet properly and give you a good feel
for the pedals.
WARNING
• Restricting pedal operation can lead to critical situations while driving.
• Never place objects in the driver foot well. An object could move into the
pedal area and impair pedal operation. In the event of a sudden driving or
braking manoeuvre, you will not be able to operate the brake, clutch or
accelerator pedal. Risk of accident!
Floor mats on the driver side
Only floor mats may be used which can be securely fastened
in the foot well and do not impair operation of the pedals.
– Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened during the trip
and do not obstruct the pedals Ÿ .
Only use floor mats which leave the pedals clear and which are secured to
prevent them from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor mats from a quali-
fied dealership.
WARNING
• If the pedals are obstructed, you could cause an accident. Risk of
serious injuries.
• Ensure that the floor mats are always securely attached.
• Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor coverings over the original floor
mats. This would reduce the pedal area and could obstruct the pedals. Risk
of accident.
Stowing luggage
Loading the luggage compartment
All luggage and other loose objects must be safely secured in
the luggage compartment.
Unsecured objects which shift back and forth could impair the
driving safety or driving characteristics of the vehicle by shifting the
centre of gravity.
Safe driving 17
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
– Distribute the load evenly in the luggage compartment.
– Lay and stow heavy luggage as far forward as possible in the
luggage compartment.
– Stow heavy luggage as low as possible in the luggage compart-
ment.
– Secure heavy objects to the fitted fastening rings Ÿpage 17.
WARNING
• Loose luggage and other objects in the luggage compartment can
cause serious injuries.
• Always stow objects in the luggage compartment and secure them on
the fastening rings.
• Use suitable specialist straps to secure heavy objects.
• During sudden manoeuvres or accidents, loose objects can be thrown
forward, injuring vehicle occupants. This increased risk of injury will be
further increased if a loose object is struck by an inflating airbag. If this
happens, objects can be transformed into “missiles”. Risk of fatal injury.
• Please note that the centre of gravity may shift when transporting
heavy objects; this may affect the vehicle's handling and lead to an acci-
dent. Therefore, it is essential to adjust your speed and driving style
accordingly, to avoid accidents.
• Never exceed the allowed axle loads or allowed maximum weight. If the
allowed axle load or the allowed total weight is exceeded, the driving char-
acteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, injuries and
damage to the vehicle.
• Never leave your vehicle unattended, especially when the tailgate is
open. Children could climb into the luggage compartment closing the door
behind them; they will remain trapped without help and there is a mortal
risk.
• Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. Close and lock
both the tailgate and all the doors when you leave the vehicle. Before you
lock the vehicle, make sure that there are no adults or children in the
vehicle.
• Never transport passengers in the luggage compartment. Every
passenger must be properly belted in Ÿpage 19.
Note
• Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce fogging of the windows. Used
air escapes through ventilation slits in the side trim of the luggage compart-
ment. Ensure that the ventilation slits are never covered.
• Straps for securing the load to the fastening rings are commercially
available.
Fastening rings
There are four fastening rings in the luggage compartment
which can be used to secure luggage and other objects.
– Always use suitable and undamaged straps to secure luggage
and other objects to the fastening rings Ÿ in “Loading the
luggage compartment” on page 16.
– Pull up the fastening rings to attach the straps.
During a collision or an accident, even small and light objects can build up so
much energy that they can cause very severe injuries. The amount of “kinetic
energy” depends on the speed of the vehicle and the weight of the object.
The most significant factor, however, is the speed of the vehicle.
WARNING (continued)
Safe driving 18
For example: an object weighing 4.5 kg is lying unsecured in the vehicle.
During a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, this object generates a force
corresponding to 20 times its weight. That means that the effective weight of
the object increases to about 90 kg. You can imagine the severity of the inju-
ries which might be sustained if this “projectile” strikes an occupant as it flies
through the passenger compartment. This increased risk of injury will be
further increased if a loose object is struck by an inflating airbag.
WARNING
• If pieces of baggage or other objects are secured to the fastening rings
with inappropriate or damaged retaining cords, injuries could result in the
event of braking manoeuvres or accidents.
• To prevent pieces of luggage or other objects from flying forward,
always use appropriate retaining cords which are secured to the fastening
rings.
• Never secure a child seat on the fastening rings.
Seat belts 19
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Seat belts
Introduction
Always fasten seat belts before driving!
Properly worn seat belts can save lives!
In this chapter you will learn why seat belts are so important, how
they work and how to properly fasten, adjust and wear them.
– Read and observe all the information as well as the warnings in
this chapter.
WARNING
• If the seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe inju-
ries increases.
• Properly worn seat belts can reduce severe injuries in the event of
sudden braking manoeuvres or accidents. Therefore, you and your passen-
gers should always wear the seat belts properly as long as the vehicle is in
motion.
• Pregnant women or persons with physical disabilities must also use
seat belts. Like all other occupants, these persons can also sustain severe
injuries if they are not wearing their seat belts properly.
Number of seats
Your vehicle has five passenger places, two individual front seats and three
places on the rear seat. Each seat is equipped with a three-point seat belt.
WARNING
• Never transport more people than there are seats available in the
vehicle.
• Every occupant in the vehicle must properly fasten and wear the seat
belt belonging to his or her seat. Children must be protected with an appro-
priate child restraint system.
Seat belt warning lamp* ¤
The warning lamp acts as a reminder to the driver to fasten
the seat belt.
Before you drive:
– Always fasten your seat belt correctly before driving off.
– Instruct your passengers to fasten their seat belts properly before
driving off.
– Protect your children with child restraint systems appropriate for
the size and age of the children.
Seat belts 20
The warning lamp ¤ in the combi-instrument lights up
1)
if the driver seat belt
is not fastened when the ignition is switched on. In addition, an acoustic
signal is given for a few seconds and a text is displayed on the combi-instru-
ment asking you to
1)
fasten your seat belt.
The warning lamp* ¤ does not go out until the driver seat belt is fastened
while the ignition is switched on.
1)
Depending on the model version
Seat belts 21
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Why wear seat belts?
Frontal collisions and the laws of physics
In the event of a frontal collision, a large amount of kinetic
energy is generated.
The action of the laws of physics in the case of a frontal collision may be
explained in the following way: As the vehicle moves Ÿfig. 6 the vehicle and
the passengers alike accumulate a stored energy called “kinetic energy”.
The amount of “kinetic energy” depends on the speed of the vehicle and the
weight of the vehicle and passengers. The higher the speed and the greater
the weight, the more energy there is to be “released” in an accident.
The most significant factor, however, is the speed of the vehicle. If the speed
doubles from 25 km/h to 50 km/h, for example, the kinetic energy increases
by a factor of four.
Because the passengers in our example are not restrained by seat belts, the
entire amount of kinetic energy has to be absorbed at the point of impact
Ÿfig. 7.
Even at speeds of 30 km/h to 50 km/h, the forces acting on bodies in a colli-
sion can easily exceed one tonne (1,000 kg). At greater speed these forces
are even higher.
Passengers not wearing seat belts are not “attached” to the vehicle. In a
frontal collision they will continue to move forward at the speed their vehicle
Fig. 6 Passengers of a
vehicle heading for a brick
wall. They are not wearing
seat belts.
Fig. 7 The vehicle with
unbelted occupants
strikes the wall.
Seat belts 22
was travelling just before the impact. This example applies not only to frontal
accidents, but also to all accidents and collisions.
The danger of not using the seat belt
Many people believe that the occupants can protect them-
selves with their hands in a minor collision, this is false.
Even at low speeds the forces acting on the body in a collision are so great
that it is not possible to brace oneself with one's hands. In a frontal collision,
unbelted passengers are thrown forward and will make violent contact with
the steering wheel, dashboard, windscreen or whatever else is in the way
Ÿfig. 8.
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts. When deployed,
airbags provide only additional protection. All occupants (including the
driver) must be wearing seat belts properly during the trip. This will reduce
the risk of severe injuries in the event of an accident – regardless of whether
an airbag is fitted for the seat.
Note that airbags can be triggered only once. To achieve the best possible
protection, the seat belt must always be worn properly so that you will be
protected in accidents in which no airbag is deployed.
It is also important for the rear passengers to wear seat belts properly, as they
could otherwise be thrown forward violently in an accident. Rear passengers
who do not use seat belts endanger not only themselves but also the front
occupants Ÿfig. 9.
Fig. 8 A driver not
wearing a seat belt is
thrown forward violently.
Fig. 9 The unbelted rear
passenger is thrown
forward violently, hitting
the driver wearing a seat
belt.
Seat belts 23
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Seat belts protect
Passengers not wearing seat belts risk severe injuries in the
event of an accident.
Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle occupants in the correct sitting posi-
tions and substantially reduce the kinetic energy in the event of an accident.
Seat belts also help to prevent uncontrolled movements that could lead to
severe injuries. In addition, properly worn seat belts reduce the danger of
being thrown from the car.
Passengers wearing their seat belts correctly benefit greatly from the ability
of the belts to absorb kinetic energy. The front crumple zones and other
passive safety features (such as the airbag system) are also designed to
absorb the kinetic energy generated in a collision. Taken together, all these
features reduce the forces acting on the occupants and consequently the risk
of injury.
Our examples describe frontal collisions. Of course, properly worn seat belts
reduce substantially the risk of injury in all other types of accidents. This is
why it is so important to fasten seat belts before every trip, even when "just
driving around the corner".
Ensure that your passengers wear their seat belts as well. Accident statistics
have shown properly worn seat belts to be an effective means of substantially
reducing the risk of injury and improving the chances of survival in a serious
accident. Furthermore, properly worn seat belts improve the protection
provided by airbags in the event of an accident. For this reason, wearing a
seat belt is required by law in most countries.
Although your vehicle is equipped with airbags, the seat belts must be
fastened and worn. The front airbags, for example, are only triggered in some
frontal accidents. The front airbags will not be triggered during minor frontal
collisions, minor side collisions, rear collisions, rolls or accidents in which the
airbag trigger threshold in the control unit is not exceeded.
Therefore, you should always wear your seat belt and ensure that your
passengers have fastened their seat belts properly before you drive off!
Safety notes on using seat belts
If seat belts are used correctly, they can reduce the risk of
injury in an accident.
– Always wear the seat belt as described in this booklet.
– Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened at all times and are not
damaged.
WARNING
• If the seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe inju-
ries increases. The optimal protection from seat belts can be achieved only
if you use them properly.
Fig. 10 Driver protected
by the properly worn seat
belt during a sudden
braking manoeuvre.
Seat belts 24
• Fasten your seat belt before every trip - even when driving in town. That
applies also to your front and rear passengers – danger of injury!
• The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the belt web is not posi-
tioned correctly.
• Never allow two passengers (even children) to share the same seat belt.
• Keep both feet in the foot well in front of your seat as long as the vehicle
is in motion.
• Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. Risk of fatal
injury.
• The belt webbing must never be twisted while it is being worn.
• The belt webbing should never lie on hard or fragile objects (such as
glasses or pens, etc.) because this can cause injuries.
• Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or jammed, or to rub on any
sharp edges.
• Never wear the seat belt under the arm or in any other incorrect posi-
tion.
• Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoat over a jacket) impairs the
proper fit and function of the belts, reducing their capacity to protect.
• The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be blocked with paper or other
objects, as this can prevent the latch plate from engaging securely.
• Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings or similar instruments to alter
the position of the belt webbing.
• Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the connections, belt retractors
or parts of the buckle could cause severe injuries in the event of an acci-
dent. Therefore, you must check the condition of all seat belts at regular
intervals.
• Seat belts that have been worn in an accident and stretched must be
replaced by a qualified workshop. Renewal may be necessary even if there
is no apparent damage. The belt anchorage should also be checked.
• Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts
must not be removed or modified in any way.
• The belts must be kept clean, otherwise the retractors may not work
properly Ÿpage 190.
Seat belts
Seat belt adjustment
The seat belts for the front and rear occupants are locked into
position by a latch.
The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the belt web is not
positioned correctly.
WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)
Fig. 11 Belt buckle and
latch plate of seat belt
Seat belts 25
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
– Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly.
– To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch plate and pull it slowly
across your chest and lap.
– Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the appropriate seat and
push it down until it is securely locked with an audible click
Ÿpage 24, fig. 11.
– Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in
the buckle.
The seat belts are equipped with an automatic retractor on the shoulder
strap. Full freedom of movement is permitted when the shoulder belt is pulled
slowly. However, during sudden braking, during travel in mountains or bends
and during acceleration, the automatic retractor on the shoulder belt is
locked.
The automatic belt retractors on the front seats are fitted with belt tension
devices Ÿpage 28.
WARNING
• An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event
of an accident.
• The seat belts offer best protection only when the backrests are in an
upright position and the seat belts have been fastened properly.
• Never put the latch plate in the buckle of another seat. If you do this, the
seat belt will not protect you properly and the risk of injury is increased.
• If an occupant is incorrectly belted in, the belt cannot protect him or her
properly. An incorrectly positioned belt web can cause extremely severe
injuries.
• Always engage the retractor lock when you are securing a child seat in
group 0, 0+ or 1 Ÿpage 46.
Seat belt position
Seat belts offer their maximum protection only when they are
properly positioned.
Fig. 12 Correct belt web
and head restraint posi-
tions, viewed from front
Fig. 13 Correct belt web
and head restraint posi-
tions, viewed from side
Seat belts 26
The following features are available to adjust the seat belt in the shoulder
region:
• belt height adjustment for the front seats.
• front seat height adjustment*.
WARNING
• An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event
of an accident.
• The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoulder,
never across the neck. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the torso
Ÿpage 25, fig. 12.
• The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across the
stomach. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the pelvis Ÿpage 25,
fig. 13. Pull the belt tight, if necessary to take up any slack.
• Read and observe the warnings Ÿpage 23.
Pregnant women must also fasten their seat belts properly
The best protection for the unborn child is for the mother to
wear the seat belt properly at all times during the pregnancy.
The seat belt provides maximum protection only when the belt web
is properly positioned Ÿpage 25.
– Adjust the front seat and head restraint correctly Ÿpage 10.
– Holding the latch plate, pull the belt evenly across your chest and
as low as possible over the pelvis Ÿfig. 14.
– Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the corresponding seat
and push it down until it is securely locked with an audible click
Ÿ .
– Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in
the buckle.
Fig. 14 Positioning seat
belts during pregnancy
Seat belts 27
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
WARNING
• An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event
of an accident.
• For pregnant women, the lap part of the seat belt must lie as low as
possible over the pelvis, never across the stomach, and always lie flat so
that no pressure is exerted on the abdomen.
• Read and observe the warnings Ÿpage 23.
Seat belt release
The seat belt must not be unfastened until the vehicle has
come to a standstill.
– Press the red button on the belt buckle Ÿfig. 15. The latch plate
is released and springs out Ÿ .
– Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls up easily and the trim
is not damaged
WARNING
Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. If you do, you
increase the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries.
Adjusting the seat belt height
Seat belt height adjusters can be used to adjust the position
of the seat belt at the shoulder.
The seat belt adjuster for the front seats can be used to adjust the
proper belt position at the shoulder.
Fig. 15 Removing latch
plate from buckle
Fig. 16 Location of the
belt height adjuster
Seat belts 28
– Press the upper part of the shoulder belt guide and hold it in this
position Ÿpage 27, fig. 16.
– Move the shoulder belt guide up or down until you have adjusted
the seat belt Ÿpage 25.
– After adjusting, pull the shoulder belt sharply to check that the
catch on the shoulder belt guide is engaged securely.
Incorrectly fastened seat belts
Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe injuries.
Seat belts can provide optimal protection only if the belt web is
properly worn. The seat belts must be fastened exactly in the order
described in this chapter. An incorrect sitting position impairs
substantially the protection a seat belt offers and can lead to severe
or fatal injuries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is especially
increased when a deploying airbag strikes an occupant who has
assumed an incorrect sitting position. As driver, you are responsible
for all vehicle occupants, especially children. Therefore:
– Never permit anyone to assume an incorrect sitting position in
the vehicle while travelling Ÿ .
WARNING
• An incorrectly worn seat belt increases the risk of severe injuries.
• Before every trip, instruct your passengers to adjust their seat belts
properly and to wear them during the trip.
• Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use
of seat belts Ÿpage 23.
Belt tension devices
Function of the belt tension device
During a frontal collision, the seat belts on the front seats are
retracted automatically.
The seat belts for the front occupants are equipped with belt tension devices.
Sensors will only trigger the belt tension devices during severe head-on,
lateral and rear collisions, and only if the seat belt is actually being worn. This
retracts and tightens the seat belts, reducing the forward motion of the occu-
pants.
The belt tension device can be triggered only once.
The belt tension devices will not be triggered in the event of a light frontal,
side or rear collision, if the vehicle overturns, or in situations where no large
forces act on the front, side or rear of the vehicle.
Note
• If the belt tension devices are triggered, a fine dust is produced. This is
normal and is no indication that there was a fire in the vehicle.
• The relevant safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or
components of the system are scrapped. A qualified workshop is familiar with
these regulations and will be pleased to pass on the information to you.
Service and disposal of belt tension devices
The belt tension devices are components of the seat belts that are installed
in the seats of your vehicle. If you work on the belt tension devices or remove
and install parts of the system when performing other repair work, the seat
Seat belts 29
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
belt may be damaged. The consequence may be that, in the event of an acci-
dent, the belt tension devices function incorrectly or not at all.
So that the effectiveness of the belt tension device is not reduced and that
removed parts do not cause any injuries or environmental pollution, regula-
tions, which are known to the qualified workshops, must be observed.
WARNING
• If repairs are not carried out by a professional, or if the belt tension
devices are used incorrectly, the risk of severe or fatal injuries increases.
The belt tension devices may fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong
circumstances.
• Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or install parts of the belt
tension devices or seat belts.
• The belt tension device and seat belt including its automatic retractor
cannot be repaired.
• Any work on the belt tension devices and seat belts, including the
removal and refitting of system parts in conjunction with other repair work,
must be performed by a qualified workshop only.
• The belt tension devices will only provide protection for one accident
and must be changed it they have been activated.
Airbag system 30
Airbag system
Brief introduction
Why wear a seat belt and assume the correct sitting
position?
For the inflating airbags to achieve the best protection, the
seat belt must always be worn properly and the correct sitting
position must be assumed.
For your own safety and the safety of the passengers, please ensure
the following before you drive:
– Always wear the seat belt properly Ÿpage 19.
– Adjust the driver seat and the steering wheel correctly
Ÿpage 10.
– Adjust the front passenger seat correctly Ÿpage 11.
– Adjust the head restraint seat correctly Ÿpage 13.
– Use the correct child restraint system to protect children in your
vehicle Ÿpage 46.
The airbag deploys in fractions of a second and with a high velocity. If you
have assumed an incorrect seating position at that moment, you could
sustain critical injuries. Therefore, it is essential that all occupants maintain
a correct sitting position while travelling.
Braking heavily the moment before an accident may cause an occupant not
wearing a seat belt to be thrown forward into the area of the deploying airbag.
In this case, the inflating airbag may inflict critical or fatal injuries upon the
occupant. This applies particularly to children.
Always maintain the greatest possible distance between yourself and the
front airbag. This way, the front airbags can completely deploy when trig-
gered, providing their maximum protection.
The most important factors for triggering the airbag are the type of accident,
the angle of impact and the vehicle speed.
Whether the airbags are triggered depends primarily on the vehicle deceler-
ation rate resulting from the collision and detected by the control unit. If the
vehicle deceleration occurring during the collision and measured by the
control unit remains below the specified reference values, the front, side
and/or curtain airbag will not be triggered. Take into account that the visible
damage in a vehicle following an accident, for whatever reason, are not an
indication as to why the airbags were triggered.
WARNING
• Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or assuming an incorrect sitting posi-
tion can lead to critical or fatal injuries.
• All occupants, including children, who are not properly belted can
sustain critical or fatal injuries if the airbag is triggered. You should always
transport all children up to 12 years of age on the rear seat. Never transport
children in the vehicle if they are not restrained or the restraint system is
not appropriate for their age, size or weight.
• If you are not wearing a seat belt or if you lean forward or to the side or
assume an incorrect sitting position, the risk of injury is increased
substantially. This increased risk of injury will be further increased if you
are struck by an inflating airbag.
• To reduce the risk of injury from an inflating airbag, always wear the
seat belt properly Ÿpage 19.
Airbag system 31
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
• Always properly adjust the front seats.
The danger of fitting a child seat on the front passenger seat
Rear-facing child seats must never be used on the front
passenger seat when the front passenger airbag is enabled.
An enabled front airbag on the front passenger side is potentially a major
danger to a child. The front passenger seat is life threatening to a child if you
transport the child in a rear-facing child seat. You should always transport all
children up to 12 years of age on the rear seat.
If a rear-facing child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, an inflating
airbag can strike it with such great force that critical or fatal injuries may
result.
Therefore we urgently recommend that you transport children on the rear
seats. That is the safest place in the vehicle for children. Alternatively, the
front passenger airbag can be disabled with a key-operated switch
Ÿpage 44. When transporting children, use a child seat appropriate to the
age and size of each child Ÿpage 46.
For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the airbag off,
an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted.
WARNING
• If a child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, the risk to the child
of sustaining critical or fatal injuries in the event of an accident increases.
• Never secure a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat if the
front passenger airbag is enabled. The child can suffer critical or fatal inju-
ries when the front passenger airbag is triggered.
• An inflating front passenger airbag can strike the rear-facing child seat
and hurl it with great force against the door, the roof or the backrest.
• For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the
airbag off, an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted.
• If, under special circumstances, it should be necessary to transport a
child in a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat, it is absolutely
essential that you observe the following safety measures:
− Disable the front passenger airbag Ÿpage 44, “Deactivating
airbags*”.
− The child seat must be approved by the child seat manufacturer for
use on a front passenger seat with front or side airbag.
− Follow the installation instructions of the child seat manufacturer
and absolutely observe the warnings Ÿpage 46, “Child safety”.
− Before properly installing the child seat, push the front passenger
seat all the way to the rear so that the greatest possible distance to the
front passenger airbag is ensured.
− Ensure that no objects prevent the front passenger seat from being
pushed completely back.
− The backrest of the front passenger seat must be in an upright
position.
Warning lamp for airbag and belt tension device system °
This warning lamp monitors the airbag and belt tension
device system.
The warning lamp monitors all airbags and belt tension devices in the
vehicle, including control units and wiring connections.
WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)
Airbag system 32
Monitoring of airbag and belt tension device system
The functionality of the airbag and belt tension device system is constantly
monitored electronically. Each time the ignition is switched on, the warning
lamp ° lights for several seconds and the display in the instrument panel*
shows AIRBAG / TENSIONER.
The system must be checked when the warning lamp ° :
• does not come on when the ignition is switched on,
• does not go out about 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
• goes out and then comes on again after the ignition is switched on,
• or if it comes on or flickers while the car is moving.
In the event of a malfunction, the warning lamp remains on continuously. In
addition, depending on the malfunction, a fault message appears in the
display of the combi-instrument for approx. 10 seconds and a short acoustic
signal is given. In this event, you should have a qualified workshop check the
system immediately.
If any of the airbags are deactivated by the Authorised Service Centre, the
indicator lights for several seconds more after the verification and will turn off
if there is no fault.
WARNING
• If there is a malfunction, the airbag and belt tension device system
cannot properly perform its protective function.
• If a malfunction should occur, have the system checked immediately by
a qualified workshop. Otherwise there is a risk that, in the event of an acci-
dent, the airbag system and belt tension devices may not be triggered, or
may not be triggered correctly.
Repair, care and disposal of the airbags
The parts of the airbag system are installed in various places in your vehicle.
If you work on the airbag system or remove and install parts of the system
when performing other repair work, parts of the airbag system may be
damaged. The consequence may be that, in the event of an accident, the
airbag inflates incorrectly or does not inflate at all.
The relevant safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or
components of the airbag are scrapped. The specialist workshops and the
Vehicle disposal centres are familiar with these requirements.
WARNING
• If repairs are not carried out by a professional, or if the airbags are used
incorrectly, the risk of severe or fatal injuries is increased. The airbags may
fail to inflate, or could inflate in the wrong circumstances.
• Do not cover or stick anything on the steering wheel hub or the soft
plastic surface of the airbag unit on the passenger side of the dashboard,
and do not obstruct or modify them in any way.
• It is important not to attach any objects such as cup holders or tele-
phone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units.
• To clean the steering wheel or dash panel, you may use only a dry cloth
or one moistened with water. Never clean the dash panel and surface of the
airbag module with cleansers containing solvents. Solvents cause the
surface to become porous. If the airbag inflates, disintegrating plastic
parts can cause substantial injuries.
• Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or install parts of the airbag
system.
• Any work on the airbag system or removal and installation of the airbag
components for other repairs (such as repairs to the steering wheel) should
be performed only by a qualified workshop. Qualified workshops have the
necessary tools, repair information and qualified personnel.
Airbag system 33
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
• We urgently recommend that you go to a qualified workshop for all
work on the airbag system.
• Never attempt to alter the front bumper or the body.
• The airbags provide protection for one accident only, if they have been
deployed they must be replaced.
WARNING (continued)
Airbag system 34
Front airbags
Description of front airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.
The front airbag for the driver is located in the steering wheel Ÿfig. 17 and
the airbag for the front passenger is located in the dash panel Ÿfig. 18.
Airbags are identified by the text “AIRBAG”.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the front airbag system gives the front
occupants additional protection for the head and chest in the event of a
severe frontal collision Ÿpage 37, “Safety notes on front airbag system”.
In addition to their normal function of restraining the occupants, the seat
belts also hold the driver and front passenger in a position where the airbags
can provide maximum protection in a frontal collision.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but is an integral part of
the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the
airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their
seat belts correctly and have adjusted the head restraints properly. For this
reason, it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times - not only
because this is required by law in most countries, but also for your safety
Ÿpage 19, “Introduction”.
The main parts of the front airbag system are:
• an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit),
• the two front airbags (airbag with gas generator) for the driver and front
passenger,
• a warning lamp ° in the dash panel insert Ÿpage 31.
The functionality of the airbag system is monitored electronically. The airbag
warning lamp will light up for a few seconds every time the ignition is
switched on (self-diagnosis).
There is a fault in the system if the warning lamp °
• does not come on when the ignition is switched on Ÿpage 31,
• does not go out about 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
• goes out and then comes on again after the ignition is switched on,
• or if it comes on or flickers while the car is moving.
Fig. 17 Driver airbag
located in steering wheel
Fig. 18 Front passenger
airbag located in dash
panel
Airbag system 35
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
The front airbag system will not be triggered if:
• if the ignition is switched off,
• during a minor frontal collision,
• during a minor side collision,
• during a rear-end collision,
• or if the vehicle rolls.
WARNING
• The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if the
occupants are seated correctly Ÿpage 10, “Proper sitting position for
occupants”.
• If a fault should occur in the airbag system, have the system checked
immediately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise there is a danger that
during a frontal collision, the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger
correctly.
Function of front airbags
Inflated airbags reduce the risk of head or chest injury.
The airbag system is designed so that the airbags for the driver and front
passenger are triggered in a severe frontal collision.
In certain types of accident the front, curtain and side airbags may be trig-
gered together.
When the system is triggered, the airbags fill with a propellant gas and
deploy in front of the driver and front passenger Ÿfig. 19. The fully deployed
airbags cushion the forward movement of the front occupants and help to
reduce the risk of injury to the head and the upper part of the body.
The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
lant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag. Once the impact has been
absorbed, the airbag deflates sufficiently for the front occupants to see
forward.
Fig. 19 Inflated front
airbags
Airbag system 36
In order to provide the desired extra protection in an accident, the airbags
have to deploy extremely rapidly (within fractions of a second). A fine dust
may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and is no indication
that there was a fire in the vehicle.
The function of the airbag covers if the airbags are triggered
The airbag covers fold out of the steering wheel or dash panel when the driver
and front passenger airbags deploy Ÿfig. 20. The airbag covers remain
connected to the steering wheel or the dash panel.
Fig. 20 Airbag covers reacting when the airbags are trig-
gered
Airbag system 37
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Safety notes on front airbag system
If you use airbags correctly, they can considerably reduce the
risk of injury in many kinds of accident.
WARNING
• It is important for the driver and front passenger to maintain a distance
of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dash panel. If the minimum
distance is not observed then the airbags do not correctly protect the
vehicle occupants; risk of fatal injuries! In addition, the front seats and
head restraints must always be positioned correctly for the height of the
occupant.
• If you are not wearing a seat belt or if you lean forward or to the side or
assume an incorrect sitting position, the risk of injury is increased
substantially. This increased risk of injury will be further increased if you
are struck by an inflating airbag.
• Never let a child travel on the front seat without an appropriate restraint
system. If the airbag is triggered in an accident, children can sustain
serious or fatal injuries from the airbag as it inflates Ÿpage 46, “Child
safety”.
• Occupants sitting in the front of the vehicle must never carry any
objects or pets in the deployment space between them and the airbags, or
allow children or other passengers to travel in this position.
• The airbags provide protection for one accident only, if they have been
deployed they must be replaced.
• It is also important not to attach any objects such as cup holders or
telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units.
• Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any
way.
Side airbags*
Description of side airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.
The side airbags are located in the backrest cushions of the driver seat
Ÿfig. 21 and the front passenger seat as well as in the outer rear seats. The
locations are identified by the text “AIRBAG” in the upper region of the back-
rests.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the side airbag system gives the front seat
occupants additional protection for the upper body in the event of a severe
side collision Ÿpage 40, “Safety notes on the operation of the side airbag
system”.
In a side collision, the side airbags reduce the risk of injury to passengers on
the front seats to the areas of the body facing the impact. In addition to their
normal function of protecting the occupants in a collision, the seat belts also
Fig. 21 Side airbag in
driver seat
Airbag system 38
hold the passengers on the front seats and the outer rear seats in a position
where the side airbags can provide maximum protection.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but is an integral part of
the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the
airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their
seat belts. For this reason, it is most important to wear the seat belts at all
times - not only because this is required by law in most countries, but also for
your safety Ÿpage 19, “Introduction”.
The side airbag system will not be triggered
• if the ignition is switched off,
• during a minor side collision,
• during a minor frontal collision,
• during a minor rear-end collision,
• or if the vehicle rolls.
The main parts of the airbag system are
• an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit),
• the side airbags in the sides of the backrests of the front and rear seats,
• a warning lamp ° in the dash panel insert Ÿpage 31.
The functionality of the airbag system is monitored electronically. The airbag
warning lamp will light up for approx. 4 seconds every time the ignition is
switched on (self-diagnosis).
WARNING
• In a side-on collision, the side airbags will not work, if the sensors do
not correctly measure the pressure increase on the interior of the doors,
due to air escaping through the areas with holes or openings in the door
panel.
• Never drive the vehicle if the interior panels have been removed.
• Never drive if the interior door panels have been removed or if the
panels have not been correctly fitted.
• Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeakers in the door panels have
been removed, unless the holes left by the loudspeakers have been
correctly closed.
• Always check that the openings are closed or covered if loudspeakers
or other equipment are fitted in the interior door panels.
• Any work carried out to the doors should be made in a qualified author-
ised workshop.
• The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if the
occupants are seated correctly Ÿpage 10, “Proper sitting position for
occupants”.
• If a fault should occur in the airbag system, have the system checked
immediately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise there is a danger that
during a side collision, the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger
correctly.
WARNING (continued)
Airbag system 39
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Function of side airbags
Inflated airbags can reduce the risk of head or chest injury in
many side impact collisions.
In some side collisions the side airbag is triggered on the impact side of the
vehicle Ÿfig. 22.
In certain types of accident, the front curtain and side airbags may be trig-
gered together.
When the system is triggered, the airbag is filled with propellant gas.
In order to provide the desired extra protection in an accident, the airbags
have to deploy extremely rapidly (within fractions of a second). A fine dust
may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and is no indication
that there was a fire in the vehicle.
The fully deployed airbags cushion the movement of the occupants of the
front seats and the outer rear seats and help to reduce the risk of injury to the
upper body.
The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
lant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag.
Fig. 22 Illustration of
principle: inflated side
airbags on left side of
vehicle
Airbag system 40
Safety notes on the operation of the side airbag system
If airbags are used correctly, they can considerably reduce the
risk of injury in side impact collisions.
WARNING
• If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean forward, or are not seated
correctly while the vehicle is in motion, you are at greater risk of injury,
should the side airbag system be triggered in an accident.
• In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the
prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts
fastened while travelling.
• Occupants of the outer seats must never carry any objects or pets in the
deployment space between them and the airbags, or allow children or
other passengers to travel in this position. It is also important not to attach
any accessories (such as cup holders) to the doors. This would impair the
protection offered by the side airbags.
• The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do
not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.
• Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, must not be exerted upon the
backrest bolster because the system may be damaged. In this case the side
airbags would not be triggered.
• Under no circumstances should protective covers be fitted over the
driver seat or front passenger seat unless the covers have been expressly
approved for use in your vehicle. Because the airbag deploys from the side
of the backrest, the use of non-approved seat covers would obstruct the
side airbag seriously reducing the airbag's effectiveness Ÿpage 191,
“Accessories, parts replacement and modifications”.
• Any damage to the original seat upholstery or around the seams of the
side airbag units must be repaired immediately by a qualified workshop.
• The airbags provide protection for one accident only, if they have been
deployed they must be replaced.
• When children assume an incorrect sitting position, they expose them-
selves to an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident. This is
particularly the case if the child is travelling on the front passenger seat
and the airbag system is triggered in an accident; this could have critical
consequences including serious injury or death Ÿpage 46, “Child safety”.
• Any work on the side airbag system or removal and installation of the
airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of the front seat)
should only be performed by a qualified workshop. Otherwise, a fault may
be introduced into the operation of the airbag system.
• Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.
• The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in the
interior of the front doors. To ensure the correct functioning of the side and
head airbags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modified in
any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the front door is damaged in any way,
this may affect the correct working of the system. All work carried out on
the front door must be made in a qualified workshop.
WARNING (continued)
Airbag system 41
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Curtain airbags
Description of curtain airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.
The curtain airbags are located on both sides in the interior above the doors
Ÿfig. 23 and are identified with the text “AIRBAG”.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the curtain airbag system gives the occu-
pants additional protection for the head and upper body in the event of a
severe side collision Ÿpage 42, “Safety notes on the operation of the
curtain airbag system”.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but is an integral part of
the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the
airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their
seat belts correctly and have adjusted the head restraints properly. For this
reason, it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times - not only
because this is required by law in most countries, but also for your safety
Ÿpage 19, “Introduction”.
The main parts of the curtain airbag system are:
• an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit),
• the curtain airbags (airbags with gas generator) for the driver, front
passenger and passengers on the rear seats,
• a warning lamp ° in the dash panel insert Ÿpage 31.
The functionality of the airbag system is monitored electronically.
The curtain airbag system will not be triggered
• if the ignition is switched off,
Fig. 23 Location of left curtain airbag
Airbag system 42
• during a frontal collision,
• during a rear-end collision,
• if the vehicle rolls,
• or during a minor frontal collision.
WARNING
If a fault should occur in the airbag system, have the system checked imme-
diately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise there is a danger that during a
collision, the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.
Function of curtain airbags
Fully inflated airbags reduce the risk of head or chest injury in
a side collision.
During some side collisions the curtain airbag is triggered on the impact side
of the vehicle Ÿfig. 24.
In certain types of accident the front, side and curtain airbags may be trig-
gered together.
When the system is triggered, the airbag is filled with propellant gas. In the
process, the curtain bag covers the side windows and door pillars.
In order to provide the desired extra protection in an accident, the airbags
have to deploy extremely rapidly (within fractions of a second). A fine dust
may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and is no indication
that there was a fire in the vehicle.
The fully deployed airbags cushion the movement of the front occupants and
help to reduce the risk of injury to the upper body.
The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
lant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag.
Safety notes on the operation of the curtain airbag system
If you use airbags correctly, they can considerably reduce the
risk of injury in many kinds of accident.
WARNING
• In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the
prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts
fastened while travelling.
• For safety reasons, the head air bag must be disconnected in those
vehicles fitted with a passenger compartment separation screen. See an
Authorised Service Centre to make this adjustment.
Fig. 24 Deployed curtain
airbags
Airbag system 43
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
• There must be no other persons, animals or objects between the occu-
pants of the outer seats and the deployment space of the curtain airbags
so that the curtain airbag can deploy without restriction and provide the
greatest possible protection. Therefore, sun blinds which have not been
expressly approved for use in your vehicle may not be attached to the side
windows Ÿpage 191, “Accessories, parts replacement and modifica-
tions”.
• The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do
not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. When using the
coat hooks, do not hang the clothes on coat hangers.
• The airbags provide protection for one accident only, if they have been
deployed they must be replaced.
• Any work on the curtain airbag system or removal and installation of
the airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of the roof lining)
should only be performed by a qualified workshop. Otherwise, a fault may
be introduced into the operation of the airbag system.
• Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.
• The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in the
interior of the front doors. To ensure the correct functioning of the side and
head airbags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modified in
any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the front door is damaged in any way,
this may affect the correct working of the system. All work carried out on
the front door must be made in a qualified workshop.
WARNING (continued)
Airbag system 44
Deactivating airbags*
Disabling front passenger airbag
If you fit a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat,
the front passenger airbag must be deactivated.
When the passenger airbag is deactivated, this means that only the
frontal airbag is deactivated. All the other airbags in the vehicle
remain functional.
Disabling front passenger airbag
– Switch off ignition.
– Turn the ignition switch in the key operated switch in the glove
box to the position OFF Ÿfig. 25.
– Check that the warning lamp “AIRBAG OFF” in the dash panel
Ÿfig. 26 remains lit Ÿ when the ignition is switched on.
Enabling front passenger airbag
– Switch off ignition.
– Turn the ignition switch in the key-operated switch in the glove
box to the position ON Ÿfig. 25.
Fig. 25 In the glove box
there is key switch for
disabling and enabling
the airbags on the front
passenger side
Fig. 26 Warning lamp for
deactivated passenger
airbag in centre console
Airbag system 45
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
– Check that the warning lamp in the dash panel does Ÿpage 44,
fig. 26 not light up when the ignition is switched on Ÿ .
WARNING
• The driver is responsible for the proper position of the key-operated
switch.
• You should deactivate the front passenger airbag only if you have to use
a rear-facing child seat in exceptional cases. Ÿpage 46, “Child safety”.
• For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the
airbag off, an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted.
• Never install a child seat facing backwards (or rear-facing) on the front
passenger seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. This
represents a risk of fatal injuries to the child! However, if it is necessary in
exceptional circumstances to transport a child in a rear-facing child seat on
the front passenger seat, you must always disable the front passenger
airbag.
• As soon as the child seat is no longer needed on the front passenger
seat, enable the front passenger airbag again.
• Only deactivate the passenger airbag when the ignition is off, other-
wise a fault may occur in the airbag system, this will create a danger that
in case of an accident, the airbag does not deploy properly or does not
deploy at all.
• When the passenger airbag is deactivated, if the warning lamp is not
continuously lit up when the front passenger airbag is disabled, there may
be a fault in the airbag system:
− Have the airbag system inspected immediately by a qualified work-
shop.
− Do not use a child seat on the front passenger seat! The front
passenger airbag could be triggered despite the fact that there is a fault
in the system and, as a result, a child could sustain serious or fatal inju-
ries.
− It is not certain whether the front passenger airbag will deploy
during an accident! Inform your passengers of this.
• When using the ignition key to activate / deactivate the passenger front
airbag, only the passenger front airbag will be activated / deactivated. The
side airbag and head airbag on the passenger side will remain active.
WARNING (continued)
Child safety 46
Child safety
Brief introduction
Introduction
Statistics show that children are generally safer on the rear
seat than on the front passenger seat.
We recommend that children under 12 years of age be transported on the rear
seats. Children travelling on the rear seat must use a child restraint system or
the seat belts provided, depending on their age, height and weight. For
safety reasons, the child restraint system should be installed in the centre of
the rear seat or behind the front passenger's seat.
The physical principles involved and the forces acting in a collision apply to
children just as much as adults Ÿpage 21, “Why wear seat belts?”.
But unlike adults, children do not have fully developed muscle and bone
structures. This means that children are subject to a greater risk of injury.
To reduce this risk, children must always use special child restraint systems
when travelling in the vehicle.
We recommend the use of child safety products from the SEAT Genuine Acces-
sories Program including systems for all ages made by “Peke”
2)
.
These systems have been especially designed and approved, complying with
the ECE-R44. regulation.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats. Always read and observe
Ÿpage 47.
We recommend that you include the manufacturer's directions for child seat
use in the vehicle wallet and always keep them in the vehicle.
2)
Not for all countries.
Child safety 47
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Safety notes on using child seats
Proper use of child seats substantially reduces the risk of
injury in an accident!
As the driver, you are responsible for any children you transport in
your vehicle.
– Protect your children by properly using appropriate child seats
Ÿpage 48.
– Always ensure that the belt webbing is properly positioned
according to the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the
child seat.
– When travelling, do not allow children to distract you from traffic.
– Take breaks regularly during long trips. Take a break at least
every two hours.
WARNING
• Never install a child seat facing backwards (or rear-facing) on the front
passenger seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. This
represents a risk of fatal injuries to the child! However, if it is necessary, in
exceptional cases, to transport a child in the front passenger seat, the front
passenger airbag must always be disabled Ÿpage 44, “Deactivating
airbags*”. If the passenger seat has a height adjustment option, move it to
the highest position.
• For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the
airbag off, an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted.
• All passengers, especially children, must assume the proper sitting
position and be properly belted in while travelling.
• Never hold children or babies on your lap, this can result in potentially
fatal injuries to the child!
• Never allow a child to be transported in a vehicle without being properly
secured, or to stand up or kneel on a seat while travelling. In an accident,
the child could be flung through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal injuries
to themselves and other occupants.
• If children assume an improper sitting position when the car is moving,
they expose themselves to greater risk of injury during a sudden braking
manoeuvre or in an accident. This is particularly the case if the child is trav-
elling on the front passenger seat and the airbag system is triggered in an
accident; this could have consequences including serious injury or death.
• A suitable child seat can protect your child!
• Never leave a child unsupervised in a child seat or alone in the vehicle.
• Depending on weather conditions, it may become extremely hot or cold
inside the vehicle. This can be fatal.
• Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall must not wear a normal seat
belt without a child restraint system, as this could cause injuries to the
abdominal and neck areas during a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an
accident.
• Do not allow the belt webbing to become twisted or jammed, or to rub
on any sharp edges.
• Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause injuries even in a minor collision
or sudden braking manoeuvres.
• The seat belt provides maximum protection only when the belt web is
properly positioned Ÿpage 24, “Seat belts”.
• Only one child may occupy a child seat Ÿpage 48, “Child seats”.
WARNING (continued)
Child safety 48
Child seats
Categorisation of child seats into groups
Use only child seats that are officially approved and suitable
for the child.
Child seats are covered by the European standard ECE R 44 (issued by the
Economic Commission of Europe).
The child seats are grouped into 5 categories:
Group 0: to 10 kg
Group 0+: to 13 kg
Group 1: 9 to18 kg
Group 2: 15 to 25 kg
Group 3: 22 to 36 kg
Child seats that have been tested and approved under the ECE R 44 standard
bear the test mark on the seat (the letter E in a circle with the test number
below it).
Group 0 and 0+ child seats
A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can
help to protect your child.
Group 0: For babies from about 9 months old and 10 kg in weight the most
suitable seats are those appearing in the illustration Ÿfig. 27 .
Group 0+: For babies from about 18 months old and 13 kg in weight the most
suitable seats are those appearing in the illustration.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats.
We recommend that you include the manufacturer's directions for child seat
use in the vehicle wallet and always keep them in the vehicle.
WARNING
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of
child seats Ÿpage 47.
Fig. 27 A group 0 rear-
facing child seat fitted on
the rear seat.
Child safety 49
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Group 1 child seats
A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can
help to protect your child.
Child seats using the “ISOFIX” and “Toptether” system (or even the antirota-
tion system) or seats in which the child faces the rear of the car are most
appropriate for babies and small children weighing between 9 and 18 kg.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats.
We recommend that you include the manufacturer's directions for child seat
use in the vehicle wallet and always keep them in the vehicle.
WARNING
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of
child seats Ÿpage 47.
Group 2 and 3 child seats
A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can
help to protect your child.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats.
We recommend that you include the manufacturer's directions for child seat
use in the vehicle wallet and always keep them in the vehicle.
Group 2 child seats
Children under 7 years of age weighing between 15 and 25 kg are best
protected by group 2 child seats in conjunction with properly adjusted seat
belts.
Group 3 child seats
Children over 7 years of age weighing between 22 and 36 kg but less than 1.5
metres tall are best protected by seat cushions with head restraints in
conjunction with properly worn seat belts Ÿfig. 29.
Fig. 28 A category 1
forward-facing child seat
fitted on the rear seat.
Fig. 29 Forward-facing
child seat installed on rear
seat.
Child safety 50
WARNING
• The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie approximately on the centre
of the shoulder, never across the neck or the arm. The seat belt must lie
close to the torso. The lap belt part must lie across the pelvis, not across
the stomach, and always fit closely. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take
up any slack Ÿpage 24, “Seat belts”.
• Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use
of child seats Ÿpage 47.
Securing child seats
Ways to secure a child seat
A child seat can be secured differently on the rear seat and on the front passenger seat.
You can secure a child seat to the rear seat or front passenger seat in the
following ways:
• Child seats in groups 0 to 3 can be secured with a seat belt.
• Child seats from the groups 0, 0+ and 1 using the “ISOFIX” and
“Toptether” systems or the antirotation system may be secured without using
the adult seatbelt and using the “ISOFIX” and “Toptether” anchors or the anti-
rotation mechanism/brackets Ÿpage 51.
U: Suitable for universal approved restraining systems for use in this age
category (universal retention systems are those fitted using the adult
seat belt.
*: Move the passenger seat as far to rear as possible, as high as possible
and always deactivate the airbag.
L: Suitable for retention systems using the “ISOFIX” and “Toptether”
anchors or antirotation mechanism/bracket.
WARNING (continued)
Weight class Weight
Seat locations
Front passenger Rear outer Rear centre
Group 0 <10 kg U* U/L U
Group 0+ <13 kg U* U/L U
Group 1 9-18 kg U* U/L U
Group 2 / 3 15-36 kg U* U U
Child safety 51
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
WARNING
• When travelling, children must be secured in the vehicle with a
restraint system suitable for age, weight and size.
• Never install a child seat facing backwards (or rear-facing) on the front
passenger seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. This
represents a risk of fatal injuries to the child! However, if a child must,
under exceptional circumstances, travel in the front passenger seat, the
passenger airbag must be deactivated Ÿpage 44, “Deactivating airbags*”
and the seat put into the highest position where possible.
• Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use
of child seats Ÿpage 47.
Securing the child seat using the “ISOFIX” and “Toptether”
system or the antirotation mechanism/system.
The child seat with “ISOFIX” system can be secured quickly,
easily and safely on the rear outer seats using the system
When removing or fitting the child seat, please be sure to follow the
manufacturer's instructions.
– Move the seat as far to rear as it will go.
– Press the child seat onto the “ISOFIX” retaining rings until the
child seat can be heard to engage securely. If the child seat is
fitted with “Toptether” anchoring, connect it to the corre-
sponding ring. If the child seat is fitted with any other antirota-
tion system, follow the manufacturer instructions carefully.
– Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure that it is secure.
Fig. 30 ISOFIX securing
rings
Child safety 52
Two “ISOFIX” retaining rings are fitted on each rear seat. In some vehicles, the
rings are secured to the seat frame and in others they are secured to the rear
floor. The “ISOFIX” rings can be accessed between the seat back and the seat
cushion. The “Toptether” rings are located in the rear space in the back. They
are often located on the rear of the seat backs.
Child seats with “ISOFIX” and “Toptether” mountings are available from the
Authorised Service Centres.
WARNING
• The retaining rings are designed only for use with “ISOFIX” and
“Toptether” systems.
• Never secure child seats that do not have the “ISOFIX” or “Toptether”
system, retaining belts or objects to the fastening rings – this can result in
potentially fatal injuries to the child!
• Ensure that the child seat is secured correctly using the “ISOFIX” and
“Toptether” anchors.
53
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
54
Fig. 31 Instrument panel
Cockpit 55
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Operating instructions
Cockpit
Overview
Overview of the instrument panel
This overview will help you to familiarise yourself with the
controls and displays.
Door release lever
Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air vent
Lighting control for instrument and control lighting . . . . . . . .
Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turn signal and main beam lever and cruise control system* .
Instrument panel:
− Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Indication lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horn (works only when the ignition is on)/ and driver front
airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windscreen wiper and windscreen wash lever and operation of
the multi-function display* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thumb wheel for left seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controls for
− Heating* and ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Air conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Air conditioner* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio
Thumb wheel for right seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glove compartment lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear selector lever
Cup holder compartment
Rotary control for adjustment of the exterior rear view mirrors
Switches for
− Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Electronic Stabilisation Program (ESP)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handbrake
Indication lamp for deactivated front passenger airbag . . . . .
Pedals
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handle for releasing the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Button for opening and closing the front windows . . . . . . . . .
Safety switch* for the rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controls* for opening and closing the rear windows . . . . . . . .
Note
Some of the items of equipment listed here are fitted only on certain
models/model years or are optional extras.
A1
A2 111
A3
A4 113
A5 113
A6 115,165
A7
56
59
72
A8
30
A9
119, 61
A10 130
A11
140
142
145
A12
A13 130
A14 30
A15 131
A16
A17
A18 124
A19
93
151
80
A20
A21 44
A22
A23 152
A24 198
A25 106
A26 106
A27 106
Cockpit 56
Instruments
Instrument overview
The instruments display the vehicle operating status.
Detail of the dash panel: Instruments
Fuel gauge Ÿpage 57
Multi-function display
Engine coolant temperature gauge Ÿpage 57
Rev counter Ÿpage 58
Time adjustment button / trip recorder reset button Ÿpage 58
Speedometer
Fig. 32 Detail of the dash panel: Instruments
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
Cockpit 57
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Fuel gauge ø and reserve indicator
Details of the instrument panel: Fuel gauge
The fuel tank has a capacity of approx. 55 litres.
When the needle reaches the reserve zone Ÿfig. 33 (arrow), the warning
lamp will light and an acoustic signal will sound reminding the driver to
refuel. At this point there are still about 7 litres of fuel in the tank.
The following text appears in the instrument panel display
3)
PLEASE
REFUEL*
Engine coolant temperature display ±
This gauge shows the engine coolant temperature.
Needle in cold zone
Avoid high engine speeds and heavy engine loads Ÿfig. 34.
Needle in normal zone
In normal driving conditions, the needle should be in the middle section of
the scale. The temperature may also rise when the engine is working hard,
especially at high outside temperatures. This is no cause for concern as long
as the warning lamp does not light up and no warning* text appears in the
combi-instrument display.
Needle in warning zone
The warning lamp* Ÿpage 72, fig. 46 will light up if the needle is in the
warning zone. The following warning appears in the instrument panel
3)
Depending on the model version
Fig. 33 Details of the
instrument panel: Fuel
gauge
Fig. 34 Details of the
instrument panel: Engine
coolant temperature
gauge
AA
AB
AC
A2
Cockpit 58
display
4)
. Stop the car and switch off the engine. Check the coolant level
Ÿpage 205 Ÿ .
Even if the coolant level is correct do not continue driving. You should obtain
technical assistance.
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, always bear in mind the safety
warnings Ÿpage 198.
Caution
Accessories in front of the air inlet reduce the cooling effect of the coolant. At
high outside temperatures and high engine loads, there is a risk of the
engine overheating.
Rev counter
The rev. counter displays the engine speed in revolutions per
minute.
The start of the red zone on the dial Ÿpage 56, fig. 32 indicates the
maximum engine speed which may be used briefly when the engine is warm
and after it has been run in properly. However, it is advisable to change up a
gear or move the selector lever to D (or lift your foot off the accelerator) before
the needle reaches the red zone.
Caution
The rev counter needle must never enter the red zone on the scale. Risk of
engine damage.
For the sake of the environment
Changing up a gear early will help you to save fuel and minimise engine
noise.
Setting the digital clock*
The digital clock is located in the instrument panel display.
– Turn the setting knob Ÿpage 56, fig. 32 anti-clockwise to
the stop to set the hour. If the knob is turned briefly anti-clock-
wise the clock will advance one hour further.
– Turn the setting knob clockwise to the limit stop to set the
minutes. If the knob is turned briefly clockwise the clock will
advance one minute further.
4)
Depending on the model version
A4
A5
Cockpit 59
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Digital display in the instrument panel
Display (without warning or information texts)
The display in the instrument panel shows, amongst other
things, the mileage and trip recorder as well as the selector
lever position.
Digital clock display Ÿpage 58
Distance display or service interval display Ÿpage 60
Selector lever position display for the automatic gearbox*.
Display for the gears in Tiptronic mode (automatic gearbox)*. The
selected gear appears in the display field with a light background
Ÿfig. 36
Fig. 35 Detail of the
instrument panel: Screen
with various displays
Fig. 36 Detail of instru-
ment panel: Display with
Tiptronic gear selection
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
Cockpit 60
Displayed categories
The display in the instrument panel shows the mileage and
trip recorder as well as the selector lever position.
Control and warning lamps: “Control and warning lamps”
Clock: “Setting the time”. In some vehicles the ambient temperature is
displayed to the right of the clock.
There are optional and automatic displays in this field.
- Selectable displays: e.g. Multi-function display (MFD) and ambient
temperature display
- Automatic indications: information or warning messages: “Information
or warning messages on the screen”
- Menus with diverse information are shown on the screen allowing many
adjustments to be made: “Instrument panel menus”
Mileage display or Service Interval Display “Mileage display or Service
Interval Display”
Selector lever position display for the automatic gearbox. The actual
position of the selector lever or the gear which is engaged (for Tiptronic)
are highlighted.
Mileage display or Service Interval Display
Distance display
The left-hand counter in the display registers the total amount of distance
covered by the vehicle.
The right-hand counter registers the short journeys. The last digit indicates
steps of 100 metres. The trip recorder counter may be reset by the reset
button Ÿpage 56, fig. 32 .
Service interval display
A Service pre-warning will appear in the mileage display if a service is due
soon. A “spanner” symbol appears and the display “km” with the distance
that can be driven until the next service appointment is due. The display will
change after approximately 10 seconds. A “clock symbol” appears and the
number of days until the service appointment should be carried out. The
message displayed in the instrument panel display is
5)
: SERV. IN ... KM OR
... DAYS. The service message will disappear approximately 20 seconds after
the ignition is switched on or the engine is running. The normal display can
be resumed by pressing the reset button on the trip counter or by pressing the
rocker switch of the MFI Ÿpage 61, fig. 38 .
With the ignition switched on, you can call up the current service message by
pressing the trip counter reset knob for 2 seconds.
Fig. 37 Digital display in
the instrument panel
A1
A1
A2
5)
Depending on the model version
A3
A4
A5
AB
Cockpit 61
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
An overdue service is indicated by a minus sign in front of the mileage or day
information.
Display with multi-function display (MFD)*
The multi-function display (MFD) shows you diverse journey
and consumption data.
The multi-function display is equipped with two automatic memo-
ries: 1 - Trip memory and 2 - Total journey memory. The selected
memory will be shown in the upper right-hand corner of the display.
Selecting memory
– With the ignition switched on, briefly press the button Ÿfig. 38
on the windscreen wiper lever to move between the two
memories.
Resetting the memory
– Select the memory that you would like to reset.
– Press and hold button on the windscreen wiper lever for at
least 2 seconds.
The trip memory 1 collects the travel and consumption data from the moment
the ignition is switched on until it is switched off. If the journey is continued
within two hours of switching off the ignition, the new values will be added to
Fig. 38 Windscreen wiper
and washer lever: Button
A and rocker switch B
Fig. 39 Digital screen on
the instrument panel:
Average fuel consumption
display
AA
AA
Cockpit 62
the existing trip recorder memory. The memory will automatically be deleted
if the journey is interrupted for more than two hours.
The total journey memory 2 collects the journey data for any number of indi-
vidual journeys (even if the ignition is switched off for longer than two hours)
up to a total of 99 hours and 59 minutes travel time, 9999 miles distance trav-
elled and 999 litres of fuel consumed. The memory will automatically be
deleted if one of the named values is reached.
Displays in the multi-function display (MFD)*
You can switch between the following displays in the multi-function display
(MFD) by operating the rocker switch Ÿfig. 40 on the windscreen wiper
lever.
Memory displays
• Journey duration
• Speed warning
• Average speed
• Distance
• Distance to empty (the distance you can travel with the remaining fuel)
• Average fuel consumption
• Current fuel consumption
min - Journey duration
The display shows the amount of time that has elapsed since the ignition was
switched on.
The maximum display value in both memories is 99 hours and 59 minutes.
The memory will automatically be deleted once this value has been reached.
Fig. 40 Windscreen wiper
and washer lever: Button
A and rocker switch B
Fig. 41 Digital screen on
the instrument panel:
Average fuel consumption
display
AB
Cockpit 63
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Set speed indicator
When driving at the required speed, enter the speed indicator mode and
press the button (Reset), the display remembers the indicated speed. If
the indicated speed is exceeded, a warning text is displayed on the screen
6)
and a warning signal sounds.
This may be deactivated by pressing the button (Reset).
The speed may be altered using the rocker switch in steps of 5 km/h
within 5 seconds of the initial memory value.
Ø mph - Average speed
The average speed will be shown after a distance of approximately 100
metres has been travelled. Dashes will appear in the display until that time.
The display will be updated every 5 seconds whilst the vehicle is in motion.
Miles - Distance travelled
The display shows the distance travelled since the ignition was switched on.
The maximum display value in both memories is 9999 miles. The memory will
automatically be deleted once this value has been reached.
ø Miles - Fuel range
The fuel range is calculated using the figures for tank content and current fuel
consumption. It shows how far the vehicle can travel using the same condi-
tions as a reference.
Ø litre/100km - Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption will be shown Ÿpage 62, fig. 41 after a
distance of approximately 100 metres has been travelled. Dashes will appear
in the display until that time. The display will be updated every 5 seconds
whilst the vehicle is in motion. The amount of fuel used will not be shown.
litres/100km or litres/hr - Current fuel consumption
The display will show the current fuel consumption in litre/km whilst the
vehicle is in motion or in litre/hour when the vehicle is in a stationary position
with the engine running.
Using this display you can see how your driving style affects fuel consump-
tion Ÿpage 180.
Ambient temperature display
The measurement margin extends from -45°C to +58°C. At temperatures
lower than +4°C, an “ice crystal symbol” is displayed and a “warning” sounds
if the vehicle is moving at more than 20 km/h (ice warning). This symbol will
flash for about 10 seconds and remains lit until the exterior temperature rises
above +4°C or 6°C if it was already lit.
WARNING
There could be black ice on the road surface even if the “snowflake symbol”
is not shown. You should, for this reason, not rely exclusively on this
display - Risk of accident!
Note
When the vehicle is stationary or travelling at very low speeds, the tempera-
ture displayed may be slightly higher than the actual ambient temperature as
a result of the heat radiated from the engine.
Warning or information text in the display
Faults are shown in the display with warning lamps and
warning/information reports.
The system runs a check on certain components and functions when the igni-
tion is switched on and while the vehicle is moving. Functional faults are indi-
6)
Depending on the model version, the message on the screen may vary and may be
represented by flashing of the speed indication or by a speed message.
AA
AA
AB
Cockpit 64
cated by symbols with warnings and information texts in the display. An
audible warning is given in certain cases.
Warning symbols
There are red warning symbols (priority 1) and yellow warning symbols
(priority 2)
Information text
In addition to warning messages given on a fault, you will receive information
in the display on procedures or will be asked to carry out certain tasks.
Note
In the case of screens without warning or information texts, faults are indi-
cated exclusively by the warning lamps.
Warning reports, Priority 1 (red)
If one of these faults occurs, the warning lamp will flash or light up and will
be accompanied by three audible warnings. This is a danger warning. Stop
the car and switch off the engine. Check the fault and correct it. Obtain profes-
sional assistance if necessary.
If several priority 1 faults are detected at the same time, the symbols will be
displayed one after the other for about 2 seconds at a time and will continue
until the fault is corrected.
No menus will be shown in the display for the duration of a priority 1 warning
report.
Examples of priority 1 warning reports (red)
7)
• Brake system symbol C with warning text STOP BRAKE FLUID
INSTRUCTION MANUAL or STOP BRAKE FAULT INSTRUCTION MANUAL
• Coolant symbol ± with the warning text STOP CHECK COOLANT
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
• Engine oil pressure symbol ± with the warning text STOP ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE LOW! SERVICE MANUAL
Warning reports, Priority 2 (yellow)
If one of these faults occurs, the warning lamp lights up, and is accompanied
by one audible warning. The function should be checked as soon as possible.
If several priority 2 warning reports are detected at the same time, the
symbols are displayed one after the other for about 2 seconds at a time. After
a set time, the information text will disappear and the symbol will be shown
as a reminder at the side of the display.
Priority 2 warning reports will not be shown until all Priority 1 warning
reports have been dealt with!
Examples of priority 2 warning reports (yellow):
• Fuel symbol with the information text PLEASE REFUEL
• Windscreen washer fluid symbol S with the information text REFILL
WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID. Refill the windscreen washer tank Ÿpage 208
• Electronic immobiliser symbol with the information text SAFE. A valid
key was not used, for this reason the vehicle may not start
7)
Depending on the model version
Cockpit 65
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Instrument panel menus
Main menu
The menu enables access to the different display functions.
Open main menu
– Switch on the ignition.
– Press and hold the eject button for at least 2 seconds. It may
be necessary to repeat this operation until the main menu is
displayed.
Select a menu from the main menu
– To choose an option from the menu, press the upper or lower end
of the rocker switch. The selected option is displayed between
two horizontal lines.
– Press button to select the entry.
Example of menu use: “Example of menu use”
Fig. 42 Windscreen wiper
lever: button A to confirm
the menu point and rocker
switch B to change the
menu
Fig. 43 Digital display on
the instrument panel:
Main menu
AB
AA
Cockpit 66
Note
For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be
displayed.
Main menu Function
Multi-function display Change to multi-function display (MFD): “Multi-function display (MFD)”
Audio The current station will be shown when the radio is switched on.
Navigation This menu is only available if the vehicle is fitted with a navigation system. The navigation system must be
switched on. When the destination guide is activated, the turning arrows and proximity bars are displayed. The
display is similar to that of the Navigation system.
If the destination guide is not activated, the direction of travel (compass) and the name of the street along which
you are driving are shown.
Telephone This menu is only available if the vehicle is fitted with a telephone mounted by the manufacturer: “Fixed tele-
phone installation”
Vehicle condition This menu displays the actual warning or information texts: “Menu Vehicle condition”
This option flashes when any of these texts are displayed.
Configuration This option allows the time, the speed warning when using winter tyres, units, language, independent heating,
the Light and visibility menu and the Convenience menu to be reset.
Display off The display is switched off.
It comes on again on entering the main menu or when a warning, breakdown or service message appears. The
main menu will be shown in the display for approximately 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on. The display
will then switch off again.
Cockpit 67
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Example of menu use
All the menus on the instrument panel may be used according to the following procedure.
The setting of a speed warning will be used as an example of how to
use the menus. This is a good idea if you are, for example, using
winter tyres which are not suited for the top speed of the vehicle.
1. Open the main menu
– Switch on the ignition.
– Hold down button for two seconds to return to main menu
from other menu. It may be necessary to repeat this operation
until the main menu is displayed.
2. Open the main menu “Configuration”
– To choose an option from the menu, press the upper or lower end
of the rocker switch. The selected option is displayed between
two lines and there will also be a triangle on the right.
– Select menu Configuration.
– Press button on the windscreen wiper lever. The Configura-
tion menu is opened.
3. Open the main menu “Winter tyres”
– Select option Winter tyres using the rocker switch.
– Press button . The menu Winter tyres is opened.
4. Program a speed limit warning
– Use the rocker switch to select the menu entry +10 km/h or -10
km/h and press the button to either increase or decrease the set
speed.
Fig. 44 Windscreen wiper
lever: button A to confirm
the menu point and rocker
switch B to change the
menu
Fig. 45 Digital screen on
the instrument panel:
winter tyre display
AB
AA
AA
Cockpit 68
5. To activate and deactivate the speed limit warning
– Use the rocker switch to select the menu point On/Off and press
the button to switch the speed warning either on or off. If the
speed warning is deactivated, three dashes will be displayed ---
6. To close the menu “Winter tyres”
– In the menu select Back.
The function “Winter tyres” sends an optical and an acoustic signal when the
vehicle reaches the set speed.
Example menu “Winter tyres”
Note
For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be
displayed.
On the display
Winter tyres
Function
Name of menu displayed
X km/h The current set speed is displayed
or --- or dashes will be shown if the function is deactivated.
On / Off If the function is activated or deactivated
+10 km/h The set value increases by 10 km/h
-10 km/h The set value decreases by 10 km/h
Back The menu “Winter tyres” is closed and the last displayed menu is shown.
Cockpit 69
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Vehicle status menu
This menu shows warning or information texts
Open Vehicle Condition menu
– Choose option Vehicle condition from main menu: “Main menu”
and press the button on the windscreen wiper lever.
Priority 2 warning messages and information texts: “Warning and information
texts on the screen” automatically disappear after a certain time and are
saved in the menu “Vehicle condition”.
The warning and information texts may be viewed in this menu. If there are no
messages, ok appears on the display. If there are several messages, each one
is shown for four seconds.
Configuration menu
This menu is used to make the settings for the vehicle functions.
Open Configuration menu
– Choose the Configuration option from main menu “Main menu”
and press the button on the windscreen wiper lever.
Example of use of menus: “Example of use of menus”.
Configuration Function
Time The hours and minutes of the clock and the navigation system can be changed. Both 12- and 24-hour
formats are available and the time may be changed to summer time (an S appears in the upper part of
the screen)
Winter tyres The menu allows the setting of a speed at which an optical and acoustic warning will be given by the
system. You can use this function, for example, if you have fitted winter tyres which are not suited for the
top speed of your vehicle . See chapter “Wheels” in owner's manual
Settings: Language The display texts and the navigation system texts can be seen in seven different languages
Units This option allows you to select the units for displaying temperature, fuel consumption values and dis-
tances.
Comfort and Convenience From this menu it is possible to alter the Comfort function settings.
Cockpit 70
Note
For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be
displayed.
Comfort menu
From this menu it is possible to alter the different Comfort function settings.
To open the Comfort and Convenience menu
– Choose the option Configuration from main menu and press the
button on the windscreen wiper lever.
– Choose the option Comfort from main menu and press the button
on the windscreen wiper lever.
Example of menu use: “Example of menu use”
Lights & visibility From this menu it is possible to alter the vehicle lighting settings: “Lights and visibility menu”
Display off Only emergency messages appear
Back This returns to the main menu
AA
AA
Convenience Function
Door opening Selective opening/ Total opening
Auto-lock
Auto-unlock
Audible warning function Activate/deactivate(acoustic signal for central locking)
Comfort opening Deactivate
All
1 door
Synchronised control of wing mirrors Synchronised/individual
Back This returns to the Configuration menu
Cockpit 71
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Note
For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be
displayed.
Lights and visibility menu
From this menu it is possible to alter the vehicle lighting settings.
Open Lights and visibility Menu
– Choose the option Configuration from main menu: “Main menu”
and press the button on the windscreen wiper lever.
– Select the option Lights & visibility from the menu and press
button on the windscreen wiper lever.
Example of menu use: “Example of menu use”
Note
For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be
displayed.
AA
AA
Lights & visibility Function
Coming Home/
Leaving Home
The lighting duration may be modified, in steps of 10 seconds, from a minimum of 10 seconds to a maxi-
mum of 90 seconds
The function may also be deactivated.
Indicator conf. With the convenience mode activated, the indicator will blink at least three times when turned on.
Manufacturer's settings The manufacturer's predefined values for the functions of this menu are restored.
Back This returns to the Configuration menu
Cockpit 72
Warning lamps
Overview of the warning lamps
The warning lamps indicate a number of different functions and possible faults.
Fig. 46 Instrument panel with warning lamps. Some of
the items of equipment listed here are fitted only on
certain models/model years or are optional extras.
Cockpit 73
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Item Symbol Meaning of warning and control lamps Further information
ø
Fuel level / reserve Ÿpage 75
±
Coolant level / coolant temperature Ÿpage 75
O
Rear fog light switched on Ÿpage 76
´¯
Turn signals in operation Ÿpage 76
~
Trailer turn signals in operation Ÿpage 76
¯
Main beam switched on Ÿpage 76
"
Bulb defective Ÿpage 76
%
Cruise control system switched on Ÿpage 77
<
Washer fluid level Ÿpage 77
C
Parking brake applied
or low brake fluid level or
fault in brake system
Ÿpage 77
±
Engine oil pressure Ÿpage 78
C
ABS system fault Ÿpage 78
=
Pollen accumulation in the diesel engine particulate filter Ÿpage 79
¯
Alternator fault Ÿpage 79
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
Cockpit 74
WARNING
• Failure to observe warning lamps and warning messages can result in
serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
• The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. Use a
warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users to your
stationary vehicle so that it does not represent a danger.
A
Fasten seat belts! Ÿpage 19
±
Tyre pressure Ÿpage 80
î"C
Engine fault (petrol engine) Ÿpage 81
¯
Glow plug system (diesel engine)
Lit up: Glow plug system switched on
Flashing: engine fault.
Ÿpage 81
°
Airbag or belt tension device system fault or airbag disabled Ÿpage 28
B
Fault in the emission control system Ÿpage 81
¹
Flashing: electronic stabilisation programme (ESP) in opera-
tion,
Lit up: ESP fault or switched off
Ÿpage 81
G
Selector lever lock (automatic gearbox) Ÿpage 82
D
Electromechanical steering Ÿpage 82
C
Brake pad wear indicator Ÿpage 82

Door open indicator Ÿpage 82
SAFE Electronic immobiliser Ÿpage 83
Item Symbol Meaning of warning and control lamps Further information
A15
A16
A17
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
WARNING (continued)
Cockpit 75
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
• The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a dangerous area!
Before you open the bonnet to work on the engine or in the engine compart-
ment, you must switch off the engine and allow it to cool to reduce the risk
of scalding or other injuries. Read and observe the relevant warnings
Ÿpage 198.
Note
• The appropriate warning lamp for a fault will light up in vehicles without
warning or information texts in the display.
• In vehicles with warning or information texts in the display, the appro-
priate warning lamp for a fault will light up and a warning or information text
will also appear in the display.
Fuel level / reserve ø
This symbol lights up to indicate that the fuel tank is down to
the reserve level.
This lights when only 7 litres of fuel remain in the tank. Also, an audible
warning is given. This serves as a reminder to fill up with fuel at the earliest
opportunity Ÿpage 195.
The message displayed in the instrument panel display is
8)
: PLEASE
REFUEL.
Coolant Level* / temperature ±
The warning lamp lights up if the coolant temperature is too
high or if the coolant level is too low.
There is a fault if:
• The warning symbol does not go out again after a few seconds.
• The warning lamp lights up or flashes while the vehicle is moving, while
three acoustic warning signals Ÿ are emitted.
This means that either the coolant level is too low or the coolant temperature
is too high.
Coolant temperature too high
The following text is displayed in the instrument panel display
9)
: CHECK
COOLANT! INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL.
First look at the coolant temperature gauge. The coolant temperature is too
high if the needle is over the warning area on the dial. Stop the vehicle,
switch off the engine and wait for it to cool down. Check the coolant level.
If the coolant level is correct, the overheating may be caused by a malfunction
of the radiator fan. Check the radiator fan fuse and have it replaced if neces-
sary Ÿpage 232.
If the warning lamp lights up again after driving on for a short distance, stop
the vehicle and switch off the engine. Contact an Authorised Service Centre
or a qualified workshop.
Coolant level too low
The following text is displayed in the instrument panel display
10)
: CHECK
COOLANT! INSTRUCTION MANUAL Ÿpage 205.
8)
Depending on the model version.
WARNING (continued)
9)
Depending on the model version.
10)
Depending on the model version.
Cockpit 76
First look at the coolant temperature gauge. If the needle is in the normal
range, top up with coolant at the earliest opportunity Ÿ .
WARNING
• If your vehicle is immobilised for any technical reasons, move it to a
safe distance from traffic. Turn off the engine, turn on the hazard lights and
place the warning triangle.
• Never open the bonnet if you can see or hear steam or coolant escaping
from the engine compartment. Risk of scalding. Wait until you can no
longer see or hear escaping steam or coolant.
• The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a dangerous area!
Before carrying out any work in the engine compartment, switch off the
engine and allow it to cool down. Always note the corresponding warnings
Ÿpage 198.
Rear fog light O
This warning lamp lights up when the rear fog light is switched on O. Further
information Ÿpage 111.
Turn signals ´¯
The warning lamp flashes when the turn signals are in oper-
ation.
Depending on which turn signal is operated, either the left ´ or right ¯ indi-
cator lamp flashes. Both warning lamps will flash at the same time when the
hazard warning lights are switched on.
If one turn signal fails, the warning lamp will start flashing twice as fast.
Further information on the turn signals Ÿpage 115.
Trailer turn signals ~
This warning lamp also flashes when the turn signals are
operated while towing a caravan or trailer.
The warning lamp ~ flashes when the turn signals are operated, provided a
trailer is correctly attached and connected to the vehicle.
The warning lamp will not flash if one of the turn signals on the trailer fails.
Main beam headlights ¯
This warning lamp lights up when the main beams are on.
The warning lamp ¯ lights up when the main beams are on or when the
headlight flasher is operated.
Further information Ÿpage 115.
Bulb defect "
The warning lamp lights up when a bulb in the vehicle's exte-
rior lighting is defective.
The warning lamp " lights up when a bulb in the vehicle's exterior lighting
(e.g. left-hand main beam) is defective.
The following text is displayed in the instrument panel display
11)
: MAIN
BEAM LEFT DEFECT.
Cockpit 77
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Cruise control system* %
The warning lamp comes on when the cruise control system
is switched on.
The warning lamp % lights up when the cruise control system is switched on.
Further notes on the cruise control system Ÿpage 165.
Washer fluid S
This warning lamp lights up to indicate that the windscreen
washer level is too low.
This serves as a reminder to fill up the reservoir at the earliest opportunity
Ÿpage 208.
The information text displayed in the instrument panel display is
12)
: REFILL
WASHER FLUID
Brake system* / handbrake C
The warning lamp lights up if the handbrake is applied, if the
brake fluid level falls too low or if there is a fault in the brake
system.
This warning lamp C lights up if
• If the handbrake is on
If you drive faster than 6 km/h with the handbrake on, the following message
will appear in the combi-instrument display
13)
: HANDBRAKE ON. Also, an
audible warning is given.
• If the brake fluid level is too low Ÿpage 211.
The following text is displayed in the instrument panel display
13)
: STOP
BRAKE FLUID INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL.
• If there is a fault in the brake system
The following text is displayed in the instrument panel display
13)
: BRAKE
FAULT INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL.
This warning lamp can light up together with the anti-lock brake system
warning lamp.
WARNING
• Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings on
Ÿpage 198, “Working in the engine compartment”.
• If the brake warning lamp does not go out, or if it lights up when
driving, the brake fluid level Ÿpage 211, “Brake fluid” in the reservoir is
too low. Risk of accident. Stop the vehicle and do not drive on. Obtain tech-
nical assistance.
• If the brake warning lamp C lights up together with the ABS warning
lamp C, the control function of the ABS could be out of action. This could
cause the rear wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This could cause the
rear to break away. Risk of skidding. Drive carefully to the nearest qualified
workshop and have the fault corrected.
11)
Depending on the model version
12)
Depending on the model version.
13)
Depending on the model version.
Cockpit 78
Engine oil pressure ±
This warning lamp indicates that the engine oil pressure is
too low.
If this warning symbol starts to flash, and is accompanied by three audible
warnings, switch off the engine and check the oil level. If the oil level is too
low, add more engine oil Ÿpage 201.
The following text is displayed in the instrument panel display
14)
: STOP
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL.
If the symbol flashes although the oil level is correct, do not drive on. The
engine must not even run at idle speed. Obtain technical assistance.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) C
A warning lamp system monitors the ABS.
The warning lamp C should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is
switched on. It goes out again after the system has run through an automatic
test sequence.
There is a fault in the ABS if:
• The warning lamp C does not light up when the ignition is switched on.
• The warning lamp does not go out again after a few seconds.
• The warning lamp lights up when the vehicle is moving.
The vehicle can still be braked in the normal way (except that the ABS control
function will not function). Please take the vehicle to a qualified workshop as
soon as possible. For further information on the ABS see the Ÿpage 169.
If a fault occurs in the ABS, the ESP* warning lamp will also light up.
Brake system fault
If the ABS warning lamp C lights up together with the brake warning lamp
C, this indicates not only a fault in the ABS function, but also a possible fault
in the brake system Ÿ .
WARNING
• Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings on
Ÿpage 198.
• If the brake warning lamp C should light up together with the ABS
warning lamp C, stop the vehicle immediately and check the brake fluid
level in the reservoir Ÿpage 211, “Brake fluid”. If the fluid level has
dropped below the “MIN” mark you must not drive on. Risk of accident.
Obtain technical assistance.
• If the brake fluid level is correct, the fault in the brake system may have
been caused by a failure of the ABS system. This could cause the rear
wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This could cause the rear to break
away. Risk of skidding. Drive carefully to the nearest qualified workshop
and have the fault corrected.
Differential lock fault (EDL)*
EDL operates along with the ABS in vehicles equipped with an
Electronic Stabilisation Program (ESP)*
A malfunction in the EDL is indicated by the ABS warning lamp C. Please
take the vehicle to a qualified workshop as soon as possible. For further infor-
mation on the EDL Ÿpage 172.
14)
Depending on the model version.
Cockpit 79
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Traction control system (TCS)*
The traction control system prevents the driven wheels from
spinning when the vehicle is accelerating
The warning lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on and should turn
off after about 2 seconds.
When the TCS is operating while driving, the warning lamp flashes. If the
system is deactivated or if there is any fault in the same, the warning lamp will
remain lit.
It will also come on if a fault should occur in the ABS because the TCS oper-
ates in conjunction with the ABS. For further information see Ÿpage 169.
Soot accumulation in the diesel engine particulate filter* =
if the symbol = lights, soot has built up in the diesel engine particulate filter
due to continuous short trips. In this case, drive the vehicle at a constant
speed of at least 60 km/h (with an engine speed of about 1400 rpm) for
about 10 minutes. The increase in temperature generated may burn the accu-
mulated soot in the filter.
If the symbol = is not deactivated, bring the vehicle to a specialized work-
shop to repair the fault.
For more information on the diesel particulate filter Ÿpage 175.
WARNING
• The diesel engine particulate filter may reach extremely high tempera-
tures; it should not enter into contact with flammable materials under-
neath the vehicle. Failure to comply could result in fire.
Caution
Vehicles equipped with a diesel engine particulate filter must not be refuelled
using biodiesel (RME), given that the fuel system may be damaged.
Alternator ¯
This warning lamp signals a fault in the alternator.
The warning lamp ¯ lights up when the ignition is switched on. It should go
out when the engine has started running.
If the warning lamp ¯ lights up while driving, the alternator is no longer
charging the battery. You should immediately drive to the nearest qualified
workshop.
You should avoid using electrical equipment that is not absolutely necessary
because this will drain the battery.
If the indicator flashes, the voltage is insufficient for normal vehicle
operation.
Cockpit 80
Tyre pressure* ±
The tyre monitor indicator compares wheel revolutions and uses this informa-
tion to compare the diameter of each wheel using the ABS sensors. If the
diameter of a wheel changes, the tyre monitor indicator lights ±. The wheel
diameter changes when:
• Tyre pressure is insufficient.
• The tyre structure is damaged.
• The vehicle is unbalanced because of a load.
• The wheels of one axle are under more pressure (for example, driving with
a trailer or on extreme slopes).
• The vehicle is fitted with snow chains.
• The emergency wheel is fitted.
• The wheel on one axle is changed.
Tyre pressure adjustment
Following the modification to tyre pressure or changing one or more wheels,
the button Ÿfig. 47 must be kept pressed while the ignition is on, until an
acoustic signal is heard.
If the wheels are under excessive load (for example, driving with a trailer or
heavy load), the tyre pressure must be increased to the recommended value
for a full load (see the sticker on the inside of the fuel flap). If the tyre monitor
system button is pressed the new tyre pressures are confirmed.
The tyre pressure monitor indicator ± lights
If the tyre pressure of one wheel is much lower than the value set by the driver
then the indicator lights Ÿ .
The tyre pressure monitor indicator ± flashes
If the tyre pressure indicator flashes, this indicates a fault. Go to the nearest
specialist workshop.
WARNING
• When the tyre pressure indicator lights, reduce speed immediately and
avoid any sudden manoeuvre or braking. Stop when possible, and check
the tyre pressure and status.
• The driver is responsible for correct tyre pressure. For this reason, tyre
pressure must be regularly checked.
• Under certain circumstances (for example, in a sports situation, in
winter conditions or on a dirt track) the tyre monitor indicator may light or
function incorrectly.
Note
If the battery is disconnected, the yellow indicator ± lights after turning the
ignition on. This should turn off after a brief trip.
Fig. 47 Centre console:
tyre monitor system
button
Cockpit 81
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Engine management î"C
This warning lamp monitors the engine management system
for petrol engines.
The warning lamp î"C (Electronic Power Control) lights up when the ignition
is switched on to show that the lamp is working properly. It should go out
when the engine has started running.
If a fault develops in the electronic engine management system while you are
driving, this warning lamp will light up. Take the vehicle to an Authorised
Service Centre as soon as possible and have the engine checked.
Glow plug system / Engine fault ¯
The warning lamp lights up to show that the glow plugs are
preheating. It flashes if there is an engine fault.
Warning lamp ¯ is lit
The warning lamp ¯ lights up while the glow plugs are preheating. When the
warning lamp goes off, the engine should be started straight away.
Warning lamp ¯ flashes
If a fault develops in the engine management system while you are driving,
the glow plug lamp will flash ¯. Take the vehicle to an Authorised Service
Centre as soon as possible and have the engine checked.
Emission control system* B
This warning lamp monitors the exhaust system.
Warning lamp B flashes:
when there is misfiring that can damage the catalytic converter. Reduce
speed and drive carefully to the nearest qualified workshop to have the
engine checked.
The following text is displayed in the instrument panel display
15)
: EXHAUST
FUMES GO TO WORKSHOP!
Warning lamp B is lit:
if a fault has developed during driving which has reduced the quality of the
exhaust gas (e. g. lambda probe fault). Reduce speed and drive carefully to
the nearest qualified workshop to have the engine checked.
The following text is displayed in the instrument panel display: EXHAUST
FUMES GO TO WORKSHOP!.
Electronic stabilisation programme (ESP)* ¹
This warning lamp monitors the electronic stabilisation
program.
This program includes the ABS, EDL and TCS.
The warning lamp ¹ has the following functions:
• It will light for about 2 seconds when the ignition is switched on while a
test of the function is carried out.
• It flashes when the ESP is activated when driving.
• It will light up continuously if there is a malfunction in the ESP.
15)
Depending on the model version.
Cockpit 82
• It will light up continuously if the ESP is switched off.
• It will also come on if a fault should occur in the ABS because the ESP
operates in conjunction with the ABS.
If the ESP warning lamp ¹ lights up and stays on after the engine is started,
this may mean that the control system has temporarily switched off the ESP.
In this case the ESP can be reactivated by switching the ignition off and then
on again. If the warning lamp goes out, this means the system is fully
functional.
Operating the foot brake G
The footbrake must be depressed when this warning lamp lights up. This is
necessary when the automatic gearbox* selector lever is moved out of the
positions P or N.
Power steering system* D
For vehicles with power steering, the level of steering assistance depends on
the vehicle's speed and on the steering angle.
The warning lamp should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is
switched on. It should go out when the engine has started running.
If the battery is disconnected, the indicator remains lit, even with the engine
running. The warning light only goes off after a distance of approx. 50 m.
There is a fault in the electromechanical steering system if the lamp does not
go out or light up, whilst the vehicle is in motion. The indicator may appear in
two different colours to indicate faults. If it lights yellow, this indicates a
minor fault. If it lights red, seek workshop assistance immediately, if no
assistance is available stop driving. Stop the vehicle and seek technical
assistance. The power steering does not work if the battery is flat or if the
engine is off (for example, for towing). You should take into account that you
will need considerably more power than normal to steer the vehicle if the
steering assistance is reduced or has failed completely.
Brake pad wear indicator* C
As the brake pad wear indicator only monitors the front brake pads, it is advis-
able to have the rear brake pads inspected at the same time.
The information text displayed in the instrument panel display is
16)
: CHECK
BRAKE PADS.
WARNING
Have the brake pads inspected immediately by a qualified dealership if the
warning display C lights up.
Indicator for open doors or tailgate
This indicator lights if one of the doors or the tailgate is open.
The warning light should go off when all the doors are closed correctly.
The system also works when the ignition is switched off. It should go off
about 15 seconds after the vehicle is locked.
16)
Depending on the model version.
Cockpit 83
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Electronic immobiliser* “Safe”
This warning lamp flashes if an unauthorised key is used.
Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates the electronic immobiliser auto-
matically when the key is inserted into the ignition. The immobiliser will be
activated again automatically as soon as you pull the key out of the ignition
lock.
The message displayed in the instrument panel display is
17)
: SAFE. The
vehicle cannot be used in that case Ÿpage 153.
The engine can, however, be started if the appropriate coded SEAT genuine
key is used.
Note
The vehicle cannot be operated properly if you do not have a genuine SEAT
key.
17)
Depending on the model version.
Steering wheel controls 84
Steering wheel controls
Using these instructions
The vehicle includes a multifunction module from where it is possible to
control the audio, telephone and radio / navigation functions and the auto-
matic gearbox* without needing to distract the driver.
There are three versions of the multifunction module:
• Audio version, to control the available audio functions from the steering
wheel.
• Audio + Telephone version, to control the available audio functions and
the telephone system from the steering wheel.
Both versions may be used to control the Audio system (Radio, CD Audio, CD
mp3, CD Changer) and the radio / navigation System, in which case they also
control the Navigation system.
• Automatic gearbox version* Ÿpage 161.
Audio system
Steering wheel audio version controls
Fig. 48 Controls on the
steering wheel
Fig. 49 Controls on the
steering wheel
Steering wheel controls 85
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Button
Short press Long press
Radio CD Audio
CD mp3
a)
a)
Only for mp3 compatible radio.*
CDC Radio CD Audio
CD mp3
a)
CDC
Volume up Continue volume up
Volume down Continue volume down
Station search.
Higher fre-
quency.
Following track
Station search.
Higher fre-
quency.
Fast forward
Station search.
Lower
frequency
Previous track
Station search.
Lower
frequency
Rewind
Cyclic source control
FM - AM - CD - CDC - FM...
No specified function
Silence Pause No specified function
Next preset No function
Change folder
(forward)
Change CD
(forward)
No specified function
Previous preset No function
Change folder
(back)
Change CD
(Back)
No specified function
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
AG
AH
Steering wheel controls 86
Steering wheel Audio + Telephone version controls
Fig. 50 Controls on the
steering wheel
Fig. 51 Controls on the
steering wheel
Button
Short press Long press
Radio CD Audio
CD mp3
a)
CDC Radio CD Audio
CD mp3
a)
CDC
Volume up Continue volume up
Volume down Continue volume down
Station search.
Higher fre-
quency.
Following track
Station search.
Higher fre-
quency.
Fast forward
Change folder
(forward)
Fast forward
Station search.
Lower
frequency
Previous track
Station search.
Lower
frequency
Rewind
Change folder
(Back)
Rewind
AA
AB
AC
AD
Steering wheel controls 87
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Cyclic source control
FM - AM - CD - CDC - FM...
No specified function
Voice recognition activation
Press to speak
No specified function
Make a call
or
Direct access to the phone book
or
Accept a call
No specified function
Terminate call
or
Refuse call
or
Quit telephone menu
No specified function
a)
Only for mp3 compatible radio.*
AE
AF
AG
AH
Steering wheel controls 88
Radio navigation system
Steering wheel audio version controls
Fig. 52 Controls on the
steering wheel
Fig. 53 Controls on the
steering wheel
Button
Short press Long press
Radio CD
CD mp3
a)
CDC Radio CD
CD mp3
a)
CDC
Increase the source volume and the navigation message Increase the source volume and the navigation message continuously
Decrease the source volume and the navigation message Decrease the source volume and the navigation message continuously
Station search.
Higher fre-
quency.
Following track
Station search.
Higher fre-
quency.
Fast forward
AA
AB
AC
Steering wheel controls 89
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Station search.
Lower
frequency
Previous track
Station search.
Lower
frequency
Rewind
b)
Cyclic change of source
Radio - CD / CDC - Radio - ...
When in Navigation mode the system leaves the navigation screen.
Repeat the last Navigation instruction
Only if the Navigation function is activated.
Silence Pause No specified function
Next preset No function
Change folder
(forward)
Change CD
(forward)
No specified function
Previous preset No function
Change folder
(back)
Change CD
(Back)
No specified function
a)
Only for those Radio-Navigation Systems compatible with the MP3 format.
b)
Button E, short press: Depending on the equipment, the radio frequency band may be selected.
AD
AE
AF
AG
AH
Steering wheel controls 90
Steering wheel Audio + Telephone controls
Fig. 54 Controls on the
steering wheel
Fig. 55 Steering wheel
Audio + Telephone
controls
Button
Short press Long press
Radio CD
CD mp3
a)
CDC Radio CD
CD mp3
a)
CDC
Increase the source volume and the navigation message Increase the source volume and the navigation message continuously
Decrease the source volume and the navigation message Decrease the source volume and the navigation message continuously
Station search.
Higher fre-
quency.
Following track
Station search.
Higher fre-
quency.
Fast forward
Change folder
(forward)
Fast forward
Station search.
Lower
frequency
Previous track
Station search.
Lower
frequency
Rewind
Change folder
(Back)
Rewind
AA
AB
AC
AD
Steering wheel controls 91
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
b)
Cyclic change of source
Radio - CD / CDC - Radio - ...
When in Navigation mode the system leaves the navigation screen.
Repeat the last Navigation instruction
Only if the Navigation function is activated.
Voice recognition activation
Press to speak
No specified function
Make a call
or
Direct access to the phone book
or
Accept a call
No specified function
Terminate call
or
Refuse call
or
Quit telephone menu
No specified function
a)
Only for those Radio-Navigation Systems compatible with the MP3 format.
b)
Button E, short press: Depending on the equipment, the radio frequency band may be selected.
AE
AF
AG
AH
Steering wheel controls 92
Steering wheel lighting controls
The lighting is turned on using the simultaneous pressing of the following
keys:
Fig. 56 Steering wheel
Audio + Telephone
version controls
Fig. 57 Steering wheel
audio version controls
Push simultaneously...
Audio Ÿfig. 57
Audio + Telephone
Ÿfig. 56
AA AB
AA AB
Unlocking and locking 93
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Unlocking and locking
Central locking
Description
The central locking system enables you to lock and unlock all
the doors and the tailgate from one point.
Central locking can be activated using any of the following options:
• the key, by inserting it into the driver's door cylinder and rotating manu-
ally,
• the central locking button, (electronic control) in the passenger compart-
ment Ÿpage 97.
• the radio frequency remote control, using the buttons on the key
Ÿpage 100.
Various functions are available to improve the vehicle security:
- Locking system “Safe”
- Auto-locking to prevent involuntary unlocking
- Automatic speed dependent locking and unlocking system
- Emergency unlocking system
Note
For anti-theft security, only the driver's door is fitted with a lock cylinder.
Safety system “Safe”
This is an anti-theft device consisting of a double lock for the
door locks and a deactivation function for the boot in order to
make forced entry more difficult.
Activation
The “safe” system is activated when the vehicle is locked using the key or the
remote control.
To activate this system with the key, rotate the key once in the door lock
cylinder in the locking direction.
To activate the system using the remote control, press the lock button on the
remote once.
When this system is activated, it is not possible to open the doors normally,
from the outside or the inside. The boot/tailgate may not be opened. The
central locking button does not work.
Voluntary deactivation
The “Safe” system can be deactivated voluntarily by the user.
This is done by locking two times in quick succession (in under 2 seconds).
This double locking can be executed using the key or the remote control.
Using the key, rotate the lock cylinder twice in the locking direction.
To activate the system using the remote control, press the lock button on the
remote twice.
When the “Safe” system is deactivated, the alarm volumetric sensor is also
deactivated.
R
R
Unlocking and locking 94
When the “Safe” system is deactivated, the doors are locked using the simple
locking system, meaning that they may be opened from the interior but not
from the exterior.
Involuntary deactivation
The methods described for deactivation of the “Safe” system may be
executed involuntarily (for example, if we press the button because we
want to lock the vehicle, and it locks as a result, however, we are not sure that
it is locked and we press the button once more within 2 seconds, we will have
deactivated the “Safe” system).
Deactivation when opening
To deactivate the system on opening, see “Selective unlocking system*”
“Safe” status
On the front left-hand side door, there is a light indicator visible fromthe
outside of the vehicle that indicates the “Safe” system status.
We can see that the “Safe” system is activated, by the flashing of the light
indicator . The indicator will flash on in all vehicles, whether they are fitted with
an alarm or not, and until the vehicle is unlocked.
We can see that the “Safe” system is deactivated, when the light indicator
flashes about seven times and turns off. If the vehicle is not fitted with an
alarm then it remains off. If the vehicle is fitted with an alarm, once 28
seconds have passed since the indicator is switched off, it will start to flash
again and continue until the vehicle is unlocked once more.
Remember:
Safe activated with or without alarm: Continuous flashing of the indicator.
Safe deactivated without alarm: The indicator flashes about seven times and
turns off.
Safe deactivated with alarm: The indicator flashes seven times, turns off and
then continues to flash after 28 seconds.
WARNING
No one should remain in the vehicle if the “Safe” deadlock mechanism has
been activated. It is not possible to open the doors from the inside or the
outside and this would make any outside intervention difficult in case of
emergency. Danger of death. People could become trapped inside in an
emergency.
Selective unlocking system*
This system allows for unlocking only the driver's door, or all
the vehicle.
Driver's door unlock button
This is done by a simple unlocking (once). This can be done with the key or
the remote control.
With the key, rotate the key once in the lock cylinder in the unlock direction.
The driver's door will be released from the “Safe” system and unlocked and
may be opened. Once the door is opened, 15 seconds remain for turning on
the ignition, in which moment, the “Safe” system will be deactivated on the
remaining doors and the light indicator will be turned off. For vehicles fitted
with an alarm, this system is deactivated.
Using the remote control, press the unlock button on the remote once. The
“Safe” system is deactivated for all the vehicle, only the driver's door is
unlocked for opening, the alarm is turned off as is the light indicator.
Unlocking all doors and the boot
So that all the doors and the boot can be opened, the unlock button on
the remote must be pressed twice.
The button must be pressed twice in under 2 seconds and this will deactivate
the “Safe” system for all the vehicle, all doors will be unlocked and the boot
R
û
û
Unlocking and locking 95
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
will be activated. The indicator will be turned off as will be the alarm for those
vehicles fitted with one.
Unlocking the boot
See Ÿpage 100 and Ÿpage 104.
Locking system for involuntary unlocking
This is an anti-theft system and will avoid situations where
the vehicle is opened unintentionally.
The vehicle will be re-locked automatically, if it is unlocked and neither the
boot nor any of the doors are opened within 30 seconds. This function
prevents the vehicle from remaining unlocked if the unlocking button is
pressed by mistake.
Automatic speed dependent locking and unlocking system*
This is a safety system to prevent access to the vehicle from
the exterior when the vehicle is in transit (for example, when
stopped at a traffic light).
Locking
The doors and the boot are automatically locked when vehicle speed exceeds
15 km/h.
If the vehicle is stopped and one of the doors is opened, when the vehicle
moves off again and exceeds a speed of 15 km/h the unlocked door(s) will be
locked once more.
Unlocking
The driver's door automatically unlocks when the key is removed from the
ignition.
Each door may be unlocked and opened from the interior (for example when
a passenger gets out). For this, simply operate the lever on the inside of the
door.
WARNING
When the vehicle is in motion, the internal door release levers should not
be operated, this could cause a door to open.
Emergency unlocking system
The entire vehicle is unlocked if the airbags are triggered during an accident,
except for the boot. It is possible to lock the vehicle from inside using the
central locking, after turning the ignition off and back on again.
If the doors must be locked from the outside, see “Manually locking the
doors”.
Unlocking and locking 96
Emergency manual locking
This permits mechanical locking of the doors in case of
central locking system failure.
Locking the driver's door manually
Insert the key in the door lock cylinder and rotate in a clockwise direction for
the left-hand side door and anti-clockwise for the right-hand side door.
Once the door has been closed it can no longer be opened from the outside.
Manual (emergency) locking of the remaining doors
Open the door and remove the cap Ÿfig. 58 printed with a lock image.
This will expose a circular element with a groove in the centre. Insert the key
into the groove and rotate the element clockwise for the right-hand side doors
and anti-clockwise for the left-hand side doors.
Replace the cap and close the door. Once the door has been closed it can no
longer be opened from the outside.
Unlocking the manually (emergency) locked driver's door
Insert the key in the door lock cylinder and rotate anti-clockwise for the left-
hand side doors and clockwise for the right-hand side doors.
The door lock is released and the door may be opened using the exterior door
handle.
Unlocking the remaining manually (emergency) locked doors
First the driver's door must be unlocked to gain entry to the vehicle. Operate
the internal door handle for the required door. If the child safety lock is acti-
vated on the rear doors, when the interior door release lever is operated the
door is unlocked but does not open. The exterior door handle may now be
used to open the door.
Note
Once the vehicle is open, if you wish to lock it manually (emergency locking),
repeat the previous instructions.
Fig. 58 Locking the doors
manually
AA
Unlocking and locking 97
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Central locking button
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked from the inside using
the central locking button.
Locking the vehicle
– Press the button Ÿ .
Unlocking the doors
– Press the button .
The central locking button is still operative when the ignition is switched off.
Except, if the "safe" security system is activated.
Please note the following when you use the central locking button to lock your
vehicle:
• It will not be possible to open the doors or the tailgate from the outside
(this may offer extra safety, for instance when stopped at traffic lights).
• The driver and passenger doors cannot be locked if they are open. This
prevents you from locking yourself out of the vehicle.
• Repeated operation of the central locking will deactivate the central
locking button for 30 seconds. Once this time has passed, the button may be
used once more.
• There is a danger that the key may remain inside the vehicle, if the vehicle
is locked using the central locking button when the driver's door is closed
and, for example, the passenger door open. If this door is closed, then the
keys will remain inside the vehicle.
• All doors may be locked separately from inside the car. Do this by pulling
the door release lever once.
WARNING
• If the vehicle is locked, children and disabled people may be trapped
inside.
• The central locking button is not operative in the following cases.
• When the vehicle is locked from the outside (using the remote or the
key).
• While the ignition is not activated after unlocking the door lock cylinder
with the key.
Note
• Vehicle locked, button amber colour
• Vehicle unlocked, button red.
Fig. 59 Detail of rear left
door central locking
button
=
7
=
7
Unlocking and locking 98
Childproof locks
The childproof lock prevents the rear doors being opened
from the inside. This system prevents minors from opening a
door accidentally while the vehicle is moving.
This function is independent of the electronic opening and locking
systems of the vehicle. It only affects the rear doors. It is only
possible to activate it and deactivate it manually, as described
below:
Activating the childproof lock
– Unlock the car and open the door you wish to childproof.
– With the door open, rotate the groove in the door using the igni-
tion key, clockwise for the left-hand side doors, and anti-clock-
wise for the right-hand side doors Ÿfig. 60, Ÿfig. 61.
Deactivating the childproof lock
– Unlock the car and open the door for which you wish to deacti-
vate the childproof lock.
– With the door open, rotate the groove in the door using the igni-
tion key clockwise for the right-hand side doors and anti-clock-
wise for the left-hand side doors Ÿfig. 60, Ÿfig. 61.
When the childproof lock is activated, the door can be opened from the
outside only. The childproof lock can be activated and deactivated using the
key in the groove when the door is open, as described above.
Fig. 60 Child safety lock
on the left-hand side door
Fig. 61 Child safety lock
on the right-hand side
door
Unlocking and locking 99
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Keys
Key set
The set of keys includes a remote control, a key without a
remote control and a key tab with the number of the key.
The key set belonging to your vehicle consists of the following items:
• one remote control key Ÿfig. 62 with folding key bit,
• one key without remote control ,
• one key tab with the key number.
Plastic key tab
Spare keys cannot be issued without the key number on the key tab Ÿfig. 62
. Therefore:
• Always keep the key tab in a safe place.
• Never leave the key tab in the vehicle.
If you sell the vehicle, please give the plastic key tab to the new owner.
Duplicate keys
If you need a replacement key, take your key tab to an Authorised Service
Centre.
WARNING
• Incorrect use of the keys can result in critical injuries.
• Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle; in case of emer-
gency they may not be able to leave the vehicle or look after themselves.
• Unsupervised use of a key could mean that the engine is started or that
electrical equipment is used (e.g. electric windows). Risk of accident. The
doors can be locked using the remote control key. This could result in
people being trapped in the vehicle in an emergency.
• Never leave any of the vehicle keys in the vehicle. Unauthorised use of
your vehicle could result in injury, damage or theft. Always take the key
with you when you leave the vehicle.
• Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. Risk
of accident. The steering lock could engage suddenly, and you would not be
able to steer the vehicle.
Caution
There are electronic components in the key and remote control. Protect the
keys from moisture and excessive vibration.
Fig. 62 Set of keys
AA
AB
AC
AB
Unlocking and locking 100
Radio frequency remote control
Locking and unlocking the vehicle
The remote control key can be used to lock and unlock the
vehicle from a distance.
Using the button Ÿfig. 63 (arrow) on the control, the key shaft is released.
Unlocking the vehicle Ÿfig. 63 . The doors and the tailgate are
unlocked.
Locking the vehicle . Ÿfig. 63
Unlocking the tailgate. Press the button Ÿfig. 63 until all indicators
on the vehicle briefly flash. When the unlocking button is pressed, 2
minutes remain for opening the door. Once this time has passed, it will lock
once more.
Also, the battery indicator on the key Ÿfig. 63, will flash.
The remote control transmitter and the batteries are integrated in the key. The
receiver is in the interior of the vehicle. The maximum range of the remote
control depends on various conditions. The range is reduced when the
batteries start to lose power.
Selective unlocking*
When the button is pressed once the driver's door is unlocked, all
others remain locked.
Fig. 63 Assignment of
buttons on the remote
control key
Fig. 64 Range of the
remote control
û A1
R A2
< A3
< A3
û A1
Unlocking and locking 101
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Press the button twice to unlock all doors.
WARNING
• Incorrect use of the key can result in critical injuries.
• Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle; in case of emer-
gency they may not be able to leave the vehicle or look after themselves.
• Never leave any of the vehicle keys in the vehicle. This could result in
serious injuries, accidents or the theft of your vehicle. Always take the key
with you when you leave the vehicle.
• Unsupervised use of a key could mean that the engine is started or that
electrical equipment is used (e.g. electric windows). Risk of accident. The
vehicle can be locked using the remote control key. This could result in
people being trapped in the vehicle in an emergency.
Note
• The radio-frequency remote control can also be programmed so that only
the driver's door is unlocked the first time that the unlocking button on the
radio frequency remote control key is pressed. When the button is pressed
once more, all doors and the tailgate will be unlocked.
• The remote control functions only when you are in range Ÿpage 100,
fig. 64 (red area).
• If the vehicle is unlocked using the button, the vehicle will be
locked again automatically if any of the doors or the tailgate are not opened
within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle. This function prevents the vehicle
from remaining unlocked if the unlocking button is pressed by mistake.
• If the vehicle cannot be opened and closed using the remote control, the
remote control key will have to be re-synchronised Ÿpage 101.
Changing the battery
If the battery indicator does not flash when the buttons are pushed, the
battery must be replaced.
Caution
Use of inappropriate batteries may damage the radio frequency remote
control. For this reason, always replace the dead battery with another of the
same size and power.
For the sake of the environment
The flat batteries must be disposed of in accordance with regulations
governing the protection of the environment.
Synchronising the remote control key
Synchronising the remote control key
– Use both keys that have been delivered with the vehicle
Ÿpage 99, fig. 62, the key fitted with the remote control and
the normal key .
– Unlock the vehicle from the driver side door using the key
without the remote.
– Turn the ignition ON using the key without the remote control.
– Lock the vehicle using the driver side door lock with the remote
control key Ÿpage 100, fig. 63.
– In a time of maximum 30 seconds the following operations must
be carried out:
û A1
û A1
AA
AB
Unlocking and locking 102
– Operate the button once for locking on the remote control, the
indicators will flash.
– Operate the button once for unlocking on the remote control
for more than 2 seconds.
– The key will have been programmed and the vehicle will unlock,
confirming at the same time the synchronisation.
It is possible that the vehicle could no longer be opened and closed with the
remote control if the button is repeatedly pressed outside of the effective
range of the radio frequency remote control. The remote control key will have
to be resynchronised.
Spare remote control keys are available from Authorised Service Centres, they
must be matched to the locking system.
Up to eight remote control keys can be used.
Anti-theft alarm system*
Description of anti-theft alarm system*
The anti-theft alarm triggers an alarm if unauthorised move-
ments are detected around the vehicle.
The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to break into the vehicle or steal
it. Audible and visible alarms are triggered if the car is opened using the
mechanical key, or if unauthorised access is gained to the vehicle.
The anti-theft alarm system is automatically switched on when the vehicle is
locked. The system is then primed.
When does the system trigger an alarm?
The system triggers an alarm if the following unauthorised actions are carried
out when the car is locked:
• Mechanical opening of the vehicle with the vehicle key
• Opening a door
• Opening the bonnet
• Opening the tailgate
• Switching on the ignition
• Movements in the vehicle
• Undue manipulation of the alarm
• Battery handling
The horn sounds and the indicators flash for approx. 30 seconds. This may be
repeated up to 10 times depending on the country.
Opening the doors mechanically (emergency opening)
If the remote control function fails, you will have to use the key to unlock the
car. This is done as follows:
• Unfold the key by pressing the button shown by the (arrow).
• Use the lock on the driver door to unlock the vehicle. The anti-theft alarm
system remains active, but an alarm is not triggered immediately.
• Switch on the ignition within 15 seconds. When the ignition is switched
on, the electronic immobiliser recognises a valid vehicle key and deactivates
the anti-theft alarm system. If you do not switch on the ignition within 15
seconds, the alarm is triggered.
How is the alarm switched off?
When the vehicle is unlocked via the unlocking button of the remote control
or when the key is inserted in the ignition lock.
R
û
û
Unlocking and locking 103
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Note
• If, after the alarm goes off, access is gained to a second secured zone
(e.g. the tailgate is opened after a door has been opened), the warning signal
is triggered again.
• Vehicle monitoring remains active even if the battery is disconnected or
not working for any reason.
• The alarm is triggered immediately if one of the battery cables is discon-
nected while the alarm system is active.
Volumetric sensor*
Monitoring or control function incorporated in the anti-theft
alarm* that detects unauthorized vehicle entry using ultra-
sound.
The system consists of 3 sensors, 2 emitters and a receptor.
Activation
– It is automatically turned on with the anti-theft alarm, when the
vehicle is locked mechanically with the key and when the button
on the remote control is used.
Deactivation
– Press the button on the remote control twice. Only the volu-
metric sensor is deactivated. The alarm system remains acti-
vated.
WARNING
• The “safe” security system remains deactivated if the volumetric
sensor is deactivated.
• For those vehicles in which a separate sunblind is fitted in the
passenger compartment, the alarm will not function correctly due to inter-
ference with the sensor.
Note
• If the alarm has been triggered by the volumetric sensor, this will be indi-
cated by a flashing of the indicator on the driver's door. This flashing will be
different to that for an activated alarm.
R
R
Unlocking and locking 104
Tailgate
Opening and locking
The operation of the tailgate opening system is electric. It is
activated by using the handle on the tailgate
Opening the tailgate
– Pull on the release lever and lift the tailgate Ÿfig. 65. The tail-
gate will then open.
Closing the tailgate
– Grip the tailgate by one of the two handles on the interior lining
and close it, using a light movement.
The system may or may not operate depending on the situation of the vehicle.
If the tailgate is locked, then it cannot be opened, however if it is unlocked
then the opening system is operative and the boot may be opened.
To the locking / unlocking status, press the button or the button on
the remote control key.
A warning appears in the instrument panel if the tailgate is open or not prop-
erly closed.* An audible warning is also given if the tailgate is opened while
the vehicle is moving faster than 6 km/h.*
Fig. 65 Tailgate: Opening
from the outside
Fig. 66 Detail of the tail-
gate inner trim: recessed
handle for closing the tail-
gate
< A1
Unlocking and locking 105
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
WARNING
• Always close the tailgate properly. Risk of accident or injury.
• The tailgate must not be opened when the reverse or rear fog lights are
lit. This may damage the lighting units.
• Do not close the tailgate by pushing it down with your hand on the
window. The glass could shatter. Risk of injury!
• Ensure the tailgate is locked after closing. If not, it may open unexpect-
edly while driving.
• Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. A locked vehicle
can be subjected to extremely high and low temperatures, depending on
the time of year. This could cause serious injuries/illness. It could even
have fatal consequences. Close and lock both the tailgate and all the other
doors when you are not using the vehicle.
• Never close the tailgate without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do
otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others. Make sure that no
one is in the path of the tailgate.
• Never drive with the tailgate open or half-closed, exhaust gases may
penetrate into the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning!
• If only the boot is opened then do not leave the key inside. The vehicle
may not be opened if the key is left inside.
Emergency opening
This allows the vehicle to be opened if the central locking
does not operate (for example if the battery is flat)
There is a groove in the boot allowing access to the emergency
opening mechanism.
Opening the tailgate from inside the luggage compartment
– Insert the key bit in the groove and unlock the locking system,
turning the key from right to left, as shown by the arrow
Ÿfig. 67.
Fig. 67 Tailgate: emer-
gency opening
Unlocking and locking 106
Windows
Opening or closing the windows electrically
The front and rear electric windows can be operated using the
controls in the driver's door.
Opening and closing the windows
– Press the button to open a window.
– Pull button to close a window Ÿ .
Always close the windows fully if you park the vehicle or leave it unattended
Ÿ .
You can use the electric windows for approx. 10 minutes after switching off
the ignition if neither the driver door nor the front passenger door has been
opened and the key has not been removed from the ignition.
Buttons in the driver door
Button for window in front left door
Button for window in front right door
Buttons for rear windows*
Safety switch for deactivating the electric window buttons in the rear
doors
Button for window in rear left door
Button for window in rear right door
Safety switch @*
Safety switch in the driver door can be used to disable the electric window
buttons in the rear doors.
Safety switch not pushed in: the buttons in the rear doors are enabled.
Safety switch pushed in: the buttons in the rear doors are disabled.
WARNING
• Incorrect use of the electric windows can result in injury.
• Never close the tailgate without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do
otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others. Make sure that no
one is in the path of a window.
• Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.
• Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if
they have access to the keys. Unsupervised use of a key could mean that
the engine is started or that electrical equipment is used (e.g. electric
windows). Risk of accident. The doors can be locked using the remote
control key. This could result in people being trapped in the vehicle in an
emergency.
• The electric windows will work until the key has been removed from the
ignition and one of the front doors has been opened.
Fig. 68 Section of the
driver door: controls for
the front and rear
windows
©
©
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A3
Unlocking and locking 107
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
• If necessary, use the safety switch to disable the rear electric windows.
Make sure that they have been disabled.
Note
If the window is not able to close because it is stiff or because of an obstruc-
tion, the window will automatically open again Ÿpage 107. If this happens,
check why the window could not be closed before attempting to close it
again.
One-touch opening and closing
One-touch opening and closing means you do not have to
hold down the button.
One-touch closing
– Pull up the button for the window briefly to the second position.
The window closes fully.
One-touch opening
– Push down the button for the window briefly to the second posi-
tion. The window opens fully.
Reset the automatic closing function for the front side windows and
the automatic opening for all windows
– Close all windows.
– Use the key to lock the vehicle from outside and hold the key in
the lock position for at least one second. The one-touch function
is now ready for operation.
The buttons Ÿpage 106, fig. 68 and have two levels for opening the
window and two for closing it. This makes it easier to open or close windows
to the desired position.
One-touch closing does not work when the ignition has been switched off,
even if the key is in the ignition.
The automatic open and close function will not work if the battery has been
temporarily disconnected, or if the battery is flat. The function then has to be
reactivated.
The one-touch function and roll-back function will not work if there is a
malfunction in the electric windows. Contact an Authorised Service Centre.
Roll-back function
The windows have a roll-back function. This reduces the risk
of injuries when the windows are closing.
• If a window is obstructed when closing automatically, the window stops
at this point and lowers immediately Ÿ .
• If this happens, check immediately (within 10 seconds) why the window
could not be closed before attempting to close it again. After 10 seconds the
normal automatic function resumes.
• If the window is still obstructed, the window stops at this point.
• If there is no obvious reason why the window cannot be closed, try to
close it again within five seconds.
If you wait longer than 5 - 10 seconds, the window will open fully when you
operate one of the buttons. One-touch closing is reactivated.
WARNING (continued)
A1 A2
Unlocking and locking 108
The one-touch function and roll-back function will not work if there is a
malfunction in the electric windows. Contact an Authorised Service Centre.
WARNING
• Incorrect use of the electric windows can result in injury.
• Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only
intend to be gone for a short time. Please ensure that children are never left
unsupervised in the vehicle.
• The electric windows will work until the key has been removed from the
ignition and one of the front doors has been opened.
• Never close the tailgate without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do
otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others. Make sure that no
one is in the path of a window.
• Never allow people to remain in the vehicle when you close the vehicle
from the outside. The windows cannot be opened even in an emergency.
Note
The roll-back function is deactivated if the windows are closed from the
outside of the vehicle using the ignition key for convenience closing
Ÿpage 108.
Convenience opening and closing*
Using the door lock
– Hold the key in the door lock of the driver door in either the
locking or the unlocking position until all windows are either
opened or closed.
– Release the key to interrupt this function.
– When the windows are fully closed, the indicators flash once.
Using the remote control
– Push the lock button on the remote control for about 3 seconds.
All windows which function electrically will be either opened or
closed.
– Press the unlock button to interrupt the function.
– When the windows are fully closed, the indicators flash once.
Sliding/tilting roof*
Opening and closing the sliding/tilting roof
The sliding/tilting sunroof is opened and closed using the
rotary button when the ignition is switched on.
Fig. 69 Detail of the
sunroof: rotary button for
sliding/tilting sunroof
Unlocking and locking 109
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Closing the sliding/tilting sunroof
– Turn the rotary button to position Ÿpage 108, fig. 69 Ÿ .
Opening/tilting the sliding/tilting sunroof
– Turn the rotary button to position . The sunroof opens to the
convenience position where wind noise is reduced.
– To open the roof further, turn the switch to position and hold
the switch in this position until the roof opens to the desired
position.
Tilting the sliding/tilting sunroof
– Turn the rotary button to position .
Always close the sliding/tilting roof fully if you park the vehicle or leave it
unattended Ÿ .
The sliding/tilting sunroof can be operated for up to about ten minutes after
the ignition has been switched off, provided the driver door and the front
passenger door are not opened.
Sunroof blind
The sunroof blind is opened together with the sliding/tilting roof. If required,
it can be closed by hand when the sunroof is closed.
WARNING
• Incorrect use of the sliding/tilting sunroof can result in injury.
• Never close the sliding/tilting sunroof without observing and ensuring
it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others.
Make sure that no one is in the path of the sliding/tilting sunroof.
• Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.
• Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if
they have access to the keys. Unsupervised use of a key could mean that
the engine is started or that electrical equipment is used (e.g. electric
sliding/tilting sunroof). Risk of accident! The doors can be locked using the
remote control key. This could result in people being trapped in the vehicle
in an emergency.
• The sliding/tilting sunroof continues to function until one of the front
doors is opened and the key removed from the ignition.
Convenience closing*
Using the door lock
– Hold the key in the door lock of the driver's door in the locking
position until the sliding/tilting sunroof is closed.
– Release the key to interrupt this function.
Using the remote control
– Push the lock button on the remote control for about 3 seconds.
The sliding/tilting sunroof is closed.
– Press the unlock button to interrupt the function.
Note
The sliding/tilting sunroof rotary button remains in the last position selected
if the roof is closed using convenience closing from outside the vehicle and
will have to be re-positioned the next time you drive.
AA
AB
AC
AD
WARNING (continued)
Unlocking and locking 110
Roll-back function of the sliding/tilting roof*
The sliding/tilting roof has a roll-back function which prevents larger objects
getting trapped when the roof is closed. The roll-back function does not
prevent fingers getting pinched against the roof opening. The sliding/tilting
sunroof stops and opens again immediately if it is obstructed when closing.
If the sliding/tilting roof has been opened again by the roll-back function, it
can be closed only by pressing the rotary button at the front in position
Ÿfig. 70 until the sliding/tilting roof has closed fully. Please note that the
sunroof will now close without the roll-back function.
Operation in the event of a breakdown
In the event of a breakdown, the sunroof may be closed manually.
• Remove the plastic cover by inserting a screwdriver in the rear section.
• Remove the lever from the cover fastening, insert it in the opening as far
as possible (pushing against the spring) and close the sliding roof.
• Fit the lever back into position.
Fig. 70 Detail of the
sunroof: rotary button for
sliding/tilting sunroof
Fig. 71 Emergency
closing handle
AA
Lights and visibility 111
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Lights and visibility
Lights
Switching lights on and off ´
Switching on the side lights
– Turn the light switch Ÿfig. 72 to position ¬.
Switching on dipped headlights
– Turn the light switch to position ¤.
Switching off the lights
– Turn the light switch to position 0.
Switching on the fog lights*
– Pull the switch out of position ¬ or ¤ to the first stop. The
symbol ! in the light switch lights up.
Switching on the rear fog lights (vehicles with front fog lights)
– Pull the switch out of position ¬ or ¤ to the second stop
Ÿ . A warning lamp lights up in the control panel.
Switching on the rear fog lights (vehicles with no front fog lights)
– Pull the switch out of position ¤ to the last stop. A warning lamp
lights up in the instrument panel.
WARNING
Never drive with just the side lights on. Risk of accident. The side lights are
not bright enough to illuminate the road ahead and to ensure that other
road users are able to see you. Always use your dipped headlights if it is
dark or if visibility is poor.
Note
• The dipped beam headlights will only work with the ignition on. The side
lights come on automatically when the ignition is turned off.
• If the lights are left on after the key has been taken out of the ignition lock,
a buzzer sounds when the driver door is opened. This is a reminder to switch
off the lights.
Fig. 72 Detail of the dash
panel: Switch for lights,
fog lights and rear fog
light
Lights and visibility 112
• If the coming home* feature is activated, the acoustic signal for the
dipped beam headlights will not sound, it will sound if the position lights are
activated.
• The rear fog light is so bright that it can dazzle drivers behind you. You
should use the rear fog light only when visibility is very poor.
• If you are towing a trailer equipped with a rear fog light on a vehicle with
a factory-fitted towing bracket, the rear fog light on the car will automatically
be switched off.
• The use of the lighting described here is subject to the relevant statutory
requirements.
Automatic lighting
Activation
– Rotate the switch to the position “Auto”, this indication will light
up.
When the switch is in this position, as soon as visibility conditions are
reduced, the lights are automatically activated. The indication “Auto”,
changes to red.
Automatic lighting
If the automatic headlight control is switched on, dipped headlights are auto-
matically switched on by a light-sensitive sensor if you drive into a tunnel, for
example.
The rain function switches on the headlights if the continuous wipe function
is switched on for longer than 5 seconds. The dipped beam headlights are
switched off if the continuous wipe or the intermittent wipe functions are
switched off for longer than 255 seconds.
WARNING
• If automatic headlight control is switched on, the headlights will not be
switched on in fog or heavy rain. Therefore, the dipped beam must be
switched on.
Note
• For those vehicles with the automatic headlight system, when the key is
removed from the ignition, the acoustic signal will only sound if the light
control is in the position ¬ or ¤ if the vehicle is not fitted with the coming
home function.
• If the daylight driving automatic light function is switched on, the fog
lights or rear fog light cannot be switched on in addition.
• The use of the lighting described here is subject to the relevant statutory
requirements.
• Do not put stickers on the windscreen in front of the sensor. This may
cause disruptions or faults in the automatic lighting system.
Fig. 73 Automatic
lighting
Lights and visibility 113
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Coming home / leaving home function*
After dark the area around the car is lit up with the aid of the
coming home / leaving home function.
Coming home function*
To activate the function
– Put the light switch into the position ¯ or in the “Auto” position
for those vehicles fitted with the automatic lighting function.
– Remove key from ignition switch.
To deactivate the function
– Turn light switch to position 0
When the system is activated and it is dark, the coming home function will
illuminate the vehicle and its surroundings by switching on the dipped head-
lights, rear lights and number plate lights when the driver's door is opened.
While one of the doors or the tailgate are open, the dipped headlights, the
rear lights and the registration plate lighting remain on for about 90 seconds.
If, before this time is up, all of the doors and the tailgate are closed, another
40 seconds of lighting is given. However, if all of the doors and the tailgate
are closed after the 90 seconds have passed, the system will be deactivated
and the lights will not come on.
If you wish to reactivate the system, you must start from the beginning.
The lighting time is defined at the time of manufacture.
Leaving home function*
The function is activated when the vehicle is unlocked using the remote
control. In the dark, the leaving home function will light the dipped beam
lights, the rear lights and the registration plate lighting for about 40 seconds.
When the light switch is at position “0” the leaving home function is not acti-
vated.
Note
• If the vehicle is used often during the night for short trips using the
coming home function, this will place a heavy demand on the battery. To
avoid this, make longer journeys whenever possible.
• Observe all relevant statutory requirements when using the lighting
systems described here.
• For those vehicles fitted with the “Dot Matrix” display, the Coming Home
time (about 40 seconds) can be adjusted using the “Configuration, lights and
visibility” menu.
Instrument and switch lighting / Headlight range control
Fig. 74 Detail of the dash
panel: Regulation for
instrument and switch
illumination and head-
light range control
Lights and visibility 114
Instrument and switch lighting
When the headlights are switched on, the brightness of the instruments and
switch lighting can be regulated to suit your requirements by turning the
thumb wheel Ÿpage 113, fig. 74 .
Those vehicles fitted with xenon gas discharge headlights are fitted with an
automatic headlight range system.
Headlight range control
Using the electrical headlight range control, you can adjust the headlight
range to the load level that is being carried in the vehicle. In this way, it is
possible to avoid dazzling oncoming traffic more than necessary. At the same
time, the driver has the best possible lighting for the road ahead using the
correct headlight settings.
The headlights can only be adjusted when the dipped beam is switched on.
To lower the beam, turn the thumb wheel down from the basic setting 0.
Dynamic headlight range control
Vehicles with gas discharge lamps (“xenon lamps”) are equipped with
dynamic headlight range control. This means that the headlights will be
adjusted to suit the load level of the vehicle and “nodding movements” when
pulling off and braking are automatically compensated for.
Vehicles with gas discharge lamps are not fitted with headlight range
control.
Hazard warning lights <
The hazard warning lights are used to draw the attention of
other road users to your vehicle in emergencies.
If your vehicle breaks down:
1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance from moving traffic.
2. Press the button to switch on the hazard warning lights Ÿ .
3. Switch the engine off.
4. Apply the handbrake.
5. On a manual gearbox engage 1st gear, and for an automatic
move the selector lever to P.
6. Use the warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users
to your vehicle.
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
Fig. 75 Detail of the dash
panel: Hazard warning
light switch
Lights and visibility 115
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
7. Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.
You should switch on the hazard warning lights to warn other road users, for
instance when:
• reaching the tail end of a traffic jam
• there is an emergency
• your vehicle breaks down due to a technical defect
• you are towing another vehicle or your vehicle is being towed.
All turn signals flash simultaneously when the hazard warning lights are
switched on. That is that the two turn signal indicator lamps ´¯ and the
indicator lamp in the switch < will flash at the same time. The hazard
warning lights also work when the ignition is switched off.
Switching on hazard warning lamps
The hazard warning lights come on automatically in the event of sharp
braking at speeds of over 60 Km/h or if the ABS is activated for any length of
time, in order to warn vehicles following behind. If the vehicle accelerates or
continues to travel at over 40 Km/h, the hazard warning lights are automati-
cally switched off.
WARNING
• The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. Always
use the hazard warning lights and a warning triangle to draw the attention
of other road users to your stationary vehicle.
• Never park where the catalytic converter could come into contact with
inflammable materials under the vehicle, for example dry grass or spilt
petrol. This could start a fire!
Note
• The battery will run down if the hazard warning lights are left on for a long
time, even if the ignition is switched off.
• The use of the hazard warning lights described here is subject to the rele-
vant statutory requirements.
Indicator and main beam headlight lever
The turn signal and main beam lever also operates the
parking lights and the headlight flasher.
The turn signal and main beam headlight lever has the following
functions:
Switching on the turn signals
– Move the lever all the way up Ÿfig. 76 to indicate right, and
all the way down to indicate left.
Fig. 76 Turn signal and
main beam headlight
lever
A1
A2
Lights and visibility 116
Signalling a lane change
– Push the lever up or down to the point where you incur
resistance and then release the lever. The turn signal will flash
several times. The corresponding warning lamp will also flash.
Switching main beam on and off
– Turn the light switch to position ¤.
– Press the lever forward Ÿpage 115, fig. 76 to switch on the
main beams.
– Pull the lever back towards you to switch the main beam head-
lights off again.
Headlight flasher
– Pull the lever towards the steering wheel to operate the
flasher.
Switching on parking lights
– Switch off the ignition and remove the key from the lock.
– Move the lever up or down to turn on the right or left-hand
parking lights respectively.
WARNING
The main beam can dazzle other drivers. Risk of accident! Never use the
main beam headlights or the headlight flasher if they could dazzle other
drivers.
Note
• The turn signals only work when the ignition is switched on. The corre-
sponding warning lamp ´ or ¯ flashes in the combi-instrument. The
warning lamp ~ flashes when the turn signals are operated, provided a
trailer is correctly attached and connected to the vehicle. If a turn signal bulb
is defective, the warning lamp flashes at double speed. If the trailer turn
signal bulbs are damaged, warning lamp ~ does not light up. You should
have the bulb replaced.
• The main beam headlights can only be switched on if the dipped beam
headlights are already on. The warning lamp ¯ then comes on in the combi-
instrument.
• The headlight flasher comes on for as long as you pull the lever – even if
no other lights are switched on. The warning lamp ¯ then comes on in the
combi-instrument.
• When the parking lights are switched on, the headlight and the rear light
on the corresponding side of the vehicle light up. The parking lights will only
work if the key is removed from the ignition. If the lights are switched on, a
buzzer gives an audible warning while the driver door is open.
• If the turn signal lever is left on after the key has been taken out of the
ignition lock, an acoustic signal sounds when the driver door is opened. This
is a reminder to switch off the turn signal, unless of course you wish to leave
the parking light on.
A1 A2
A3
A4
Lights and visibility 117
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Interior lights
Front interior light
The switch Ÿfig. 77 is used to select the following positions:
Courtesy light position 7
Rocker switch in flat position (not activated). The interior lights are automat-
ically switched on when the vehicle is unlocked or the key removed from the
ignition lock and turn off about 20 seconds after the closure of the doors. The
interior lights are switched off when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition
is switched on.
Interior light switched on ¯
Push the switch to the position ¯.
Interior light switched off O
Push the switch to the position O Ÿfig. 77 .
Note
If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the interior lights will be switched off
after approx. 10 minutes, providing the key has been removed and the cour-
tesy light position selected. This prevents the battery discharging.
Front reading lights
Switching on the reading light ¯
Press the button to switch on the reading light.
Switching off the reading lights ¯
Press the button to switch off the reading light.
Fig. 77 Detail of the roof:
Front reading light
AA
Fig. 78 Interior roof
lining: Front lights
AB
AB
Lights and visibility 118
Rear interior and reading lights*
The switch Ÿfig. 79 is used to select the following positions:
Interior light switched off 0
In switch position Ÿfig. 79 , the interior and reading lights are switched
off.
Switching on the reading light ¯
Turn the switch to position (left reading light) or to position (right
reading light).
Courtesy light position 7
Turn the control to position . The interior lights are automatically switched
on when the vehicle is unlocked or the key removed from the ignition lock The
light turns off about 20 seconds after the closure of the doors. The interior
lights are switched off when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is
switched on.
Interior lights or both reading lights switched on ¯
Turn the control to position .
Note
If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the interior lights will be switched off
after approx. 10 minutes, providing the key has been removed and the cour-
tesy light position selected. This prevents the battery discharging.
Visibility
Sun visors
The sun visors for the driver and the front passenger can be pulled out of their
mountings in the centre of the vehicle and turned towards the doors Ÿfig. 80
.
Fig. 79 Detail of the roof:
Rear interior light and
reading lights
AC
A1
A2 A4
A3
A5
Fig. 80 Sun visor on the
driver side
A1
Lights and visibility 119
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
The make-up mirrors in the sun visors have covers. When you open the cover
a light* in the roof turns on.
The lamp* in the roof lining will go out when the vanity mirror cover is pushed
back or the sun visor is pushed back up.
Note
The roof lamp* will turn off about 10 minutes following the removal of the
ignition key. This prevents the battery discharging.
Windscreen wipers
Front windscreen wipers º
The windscreen wiper lever controls the windscreen wipers
and the automatic wash and wipe.
The windscreen wiper lever Ÿfig. 81 has the following positions:
Switching off the wipers
– Move the lever to position .
Intermittent wipe
– Move the lever up to position .
– Move the control to the left or right to set the length of the
intervals. Control to the left - longer wipe pause, control to the
right - shorter wipe pauses. Four wiper interval stages can be set
using switch .
Slow wipe
– Move the lever up to position .
Continuous wipe
– Move the lever up to position .
Brief wipe
– Move the lever down to position to give the windscreen a brief
wipe. The wiper will start to move faster if you keep the lever
pressed down for longer than 2 seconds.
Wash and wipe automatic system ÷
– Pull the lever towards the steering wheel - Position . The wash
function will start immediately and the wipers will start with a
slight delay. The wash and wiper systems will function at the
same time at speeds of over 120 km/h.
– Return the lever back to the rest position. The wipers will keep
running for approximately four seconds.
A2
Fig. 81 Windscreen wiper
and windscreen wash
lever
A0
A1
AA
AA
A2
A3
A4
A5
Lights and visibility 120
Optional heated windscreen in the wiper blade* area
In some countries and with some versions, there is the possibility of heating
the windscreen in the area of the windscreen wiper blades in order to aid de-
icing in the zone.
This function is activated by turning the exterior heated rearview mirror*
control forwards Ÿpage 124.
WARNING
• Worn and dirty wiper blades obstruct visibility and reduce safety levels.
• In cold conditions, you should not use the wash / wipe system unless
you have warmed the windscreen with the heating and ventilation system.
The washer fluid could otherwise freeze on the windscreen and obscure
your view of the road.
• Always note the corresponding warnings on Ÿpage 209.
Caution
In icy conditions, always check that the wiper blades are not frozen to the
glass before using the wipers for the first time. If you switch on the wipers
when the wiper blades are frozen to the windscreen, you could damage both
the wiper blades and the wiper motor.
Note
• The windscreen wipers will only work when the ignition is switched on.
• In vehicles fitted with alarms and in certain versions, the windscreen
wipers only operate when the ignition is on and the bonnet closed.
• When in use, the wipers do not go as far as the rest position. When the
lever is moved to the 0 position, they move to the rest position.
• The next speed down will automatically be selected if speed
Ÿpage 119, fig. 81 or is selected when the vehicle stops. The set speed
will be resumed when the vehicle starts again.
• The windscreen will be wiped again after approximately five seconds once
the “automatic wipe/wash system” has been operated while the vehicle is in
transit (automatic function). If the windscreen wiper function is activated
within three seconds of the automatic function, a new cleaning cycle begins
without performing the final wipe. To reactivate the “automatic” function the
ignition must be turned off and on again.
• When the “intermittent wipe function” is on, the intervals are directly
proportional to the speed. This way, the higher the vehicle speed the shorter
the intervals.
• The wiper will try to wipe away any obstacles that are on the windscreen.
The wiper will stop moving if the obstacle blocks its path. Remove the
obstacle and switch the wiper back on again.
• Before removing any objects that may be trapped in the side areas of the
windscreen, always move the wiper arms to the service position
(horizontal).
A2
A3
Lights and visibility 121
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Rain sensor*
The rain sensor controls the frequency of the windscreen
wiper intervals, depending on the amount of rain.
Switching on the rain sensor
– Move the windscreen wiper lever into position Ÿfig. 83.
– Move the control to the left or right to set the sensitivity of the
rain sensor. Switch to the right - high sensitivity. Switch to the
left - low sensitivity
The rain sensor is part of the interval wipe function. You will have to switch
the rain sensor back on if you switch off the ignition. This is done by switching
the wiper intermittent function off and back on.
Note
• Do not put stickers on the windscreen in front of the sensor. This may
cause sensor disruption or faults.
Fig. 82 Rain sensor*
Fig. 83 Windscreen wiper
lever
A1
AA
Lights and visibility 122
Rear window wiper ¯
The windscreen wiper lever operates the windscreen wiper
and the wash and wipe system for the rear window.
Switching on the interval wipe
– Press the lever forwards to position Ÿfig. 84. The wiper will
wipe the window approximately every 6 seconds.
Switching off the interval wipe function
– Pull the lever back from position towards the steering wheel.
The wiper will continue to function for a short period if you switch
off whilst the wipers are in motion.
Switching on the windscreen wiper and washer system
– Press the lever fully forwards to position Ÿfig. 84 . The wash
function will start immediately and the wiper will start with a
slight delay. The windscreen wash system will function as long as
you hold the lever in this position.
– Return the lever back to the rest position. The wiper then wipes
for approximately 4 seconds, and then in intervals again.
– Return the lever back to the rest position. The washer system
stops and the wipers function.
WARNING
• A worn or dirty wiper blade will obstruct visibility and reduce safety.
• Always note the corresponding warnings on Ÿpage 209, “Changing
the front windscreen wiper blades”.
Caution
In icy conditions, always check that the wiper blade is not frozen to the glass
before using the wiper for the first time. If you switch on the wiper when the
wiper blade is frozen to the glass, this could damage both the wiper blade
and the wiper motor.
Note
• The windscreen wiper will only function when the ignition is switched on
and the tailgate is closed.
• In reverse gear, with the windscreen wipers switched on, the rear wind-
screen wiper will make one wipe.
Fig. 84 Window wash and
wipe lever: Rear window
wiper
A6
A6
A7
Lights and visibility 123
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Headlight washer system*
The headlight washers clean the headlight lenses.
The headlight washers are activated automatically when the windscreen
washer is used and the windscreen wiper lever is pulled towards the steering
wheel for at least 1.5 seconds – provided the dipped headlights or main
beams are switched on. Clean off stubborn dirt (insects, etc.) from the head-
lights at regular intervals, for instance when filling the fuel tank.
Note
• To ensure that the headlight washers work properly in winter, keep the
nozzle holders in the bumper free of snow and remove any ice with a de-icer
spray.
• To remove water, the windscreen wipers will be activated from time to
time, the headlight wipers will be activated every three cycles.
Mirrors
Interior mirror
It is dangerous to drive if you cannot see clearly through the
rear window.
Manual anti-dazzle function for interior mirror
In the basic mirror position, the lever at the bottom edge of the mirror should
be at the front. Pull the lever to the back to select the anti-dazzle function.
Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror*
The automatic anti-dazzle function can be switched on and off
as desired.
Switching off anti-dazzle function
– Press button Ÿfig. 85. Warning lamp goes out:
Switching on anti-dazzle function
– Press button Ÿfig. 85. Warning lamp is lit.
Anti-dazzle function
The anti-dazzle function is activated every time the ignition is switched on.
The green indicator lamp lights up in the mirror housing.
When the anti-dazzle function is activated the interior mirror will darken auto-
matically according to the amount of light it receives (for example from the
headlights of a vehicle behind). The anti-dazzle function is cancelled if
reverse gear is engaged.
Fig. 85 Automatic anti-
dazzle interior mirror.
AA AB
AA
Lights and visibility 124
Note
• The automatic anti-dazzle function will only work properly if the sun
blind* for the rear window is retracted and there are no other objects
preventing light from reaching the interior mirror.
• If you have to stick any type of sticker on the windscreen, do not do so in
front of the sensors. Doing so could prevent the anti-dazzle function from
working well or even from working at all.
Exterior mirrors
The exterior mirrors can be adjusted using the rotary knob in
the centre console.
Basic setting of exterior mirrors
1. Turn knob Ÿfig. 86 to position L (left exterior mirror).
2. Turn the rotary knob to position the mirror so that you have a
good view to the rear of the vehicle.
3. Turn knob to position R (right exterior mirror).
4. Swivel the rotary knob to position the mirror so that you have a
good view to the rear of the car Ÿ .
Heating the exterior mirrors*
– Turn the knob forwards to the central position Ÿfig. 86 so
that the heated rear view mirrors warm up and the heated wind-
screen* in the wiper blade rest area is activated Ÿpage 120.
Folding in exterior mirrors*
– Turn the control Ÿfig. 86 to position ÷ to fold in the exterior
mirrors. You should always fold in the exterior mirrors if you are
driving through an automatic car wash. This will help prevent
damage.
Folding wing mirrors using convenience closing*
– The wing mirror folds automatically using the convenience
closing (operated by the control or the key).
– To unfold the mirror again, open the door and press the switch
Folding exterior mirrors back out to the extended position*
– Turn the knob to another position to fold the exterior mirrors back
out Ÿ .
Synchronised mirror adjustment
1. Turn the control to the position L (left exterior mirror).
Fig. 86 Exterior mirror
control
A1
Lights and visibility 125
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
2. Turn the rotary knob to position the mirror so that you have a
good view to the rear of the vehicle. The right exterior mirror will
be adjusted at the same time (synchronised).
WARNING
• The rear view convex or aspheric mirror increase the field of vision
however the objects appear smaller and further away in the mirrors. If you
use these mirrors to estimate the distance to vehicles behind you when
changing lane, you could make a mistake. Risk of accident.
• If possible, use the interior mirror to estimate distances to vehicles
behind you.
• Make sure that you do not get your finger trapped between the mirror
and the mirror base when folding back the mirrors. Risk of injury!
For the sake of the environment
The exterior mirror heating should be switched off when it is no longer
needed. Fuel is wasted otherwise.
Note
• If the electrical adjustment ever fails to operate, the mirrors can be
adjusted by hand by lightly pressing the edge of the mirror glass.
• The following guideline applies to vehicles with electric exterior mirrors:
If the mirror housing is moved as a result of exterior force (e.g. knocked when
parking the vehicle), the mirrors must be folded in electrically to the final
position. Do not readjust the mirror housing by hand, as this will interfere
with the mirror adjuster function.
• The rear view mirrors can be adjusted separately or simultaneously, as
described before.
Seats and stowage 126
Seats and stowage
The importance of correct seat adjustment
Proper seat adjustment optimises the level of protection
offered by seat belts and airbags.
Your vehicle has five passenger places, two individual front seats and three
places on the rear seat. Each seat is equipped with a three-point seat belt.
The driver seat and front passenger seat can be adjusted in many ways to suit
the physical requirements of the vehicle occupants. The correct seat position
is very important for:
• fast and easy operation of all controls on the instrument panel,
• relaxed posture that does not cause drowsiness,
• safe driving Ÿpage 7,
• and to ensure that the seat belts and airbag system provide maximum
protection Ÿpage 19.
WARNING
• If the driver and passengers assume improper sitting positions, they
may sustain critical injuries.
• Never transport more people than there are seats available in the
vehicle.
• Every occupant in the vehicle must properly fasten and wear the seat
belt belonging to his or her seat. Children must be protected with an appro-
priate child restraint system Ÿpage 46, “Child safety”.
• The front seats and all head restraints must always be adjusted to body
size and the seat belt must always be properly adjusted to provide you and
your passengers with optimum protection.
• Always keep your feet in the foot well when the vehicle is moving; never
rest them on the dash panel, out of the window or on the seat. This also
applies to passengers. An incorrect sitting position exposes you to an
increased risk of injury in the event of a braking manoeuvre or an accident.
If the airbag is triggered, you could sustain severe injuries due to an incor-
rect sitting position.
• It is important for the driver and front passenger to maintain a distance
of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dash panel. Failure to respect
the minimum distance means that the airbag will not protect you. Risk of
fatal injury. The distance between the driver and the steering wheel or
between the front passenger and the dash panel should always be as great
as possible.
• Adjust the driver or front passenger seat only when the vehicle is
stationary. Otherwise your seat could move unexpectedly while the vehicle
is moving. This could increase the risk of an accident and therefore injury.
In addition, while adjusting your seat, you will assume an incorrect sitting
position. Risk of fatal accidents.
• Special guidelines apply to installing a child seat on the front
passenger seat. When installing a child seat, observe the warning note in
the Ÿpage 46, “Child safety”.
WARNING (continued)
Seats and stowage 127
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Head restraints
Correct adjustment of head restraints
Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of
occupant protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in
most accident situations.
– Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same
level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same
level as the top of your head and, as a very minimum at eye level
Ÿfig. 87 and Ÿfig. 88.
Adjusting the head restraints Ÿpage 128.
WARNING
• Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted
increases the risk of severe injuries.
• Improperly adjusted head restraints could lead to death in the event of
a collision or accident.
• Incorrectly adjusted head restraints also increase the risk of injury
during sudden or unexpected driving or braking manoeuvres.
• The head restraints must always be adjusted according to the occu-
pant's size.
Fig. 87 Viewed from in
front: Properly adjusted
head restraints and
proper belt adjustment
Fig. 88 Viewed from side:
Properly adjusted head
restraints and proper belt
adjustment
Seats and stowage 128
Removing or adjusting head restraints
The head restraints can be adjusted by moving them up and
down.
Adjusting height (front seats)
– Press the button on the side and pull upwards to the desired
position.
– To lower the head restraint, press the button and push head
restraint downwards.
– Make sure that it engages securely into position.
Adjusting height (rear seats)
– Press the button on the side and pull upwards to the desired
position.
– To lower the head restraint, press the button and push head
restraint downwards.
– Make sure that the head restraint engages securely in one of its
positions Ÿpage 14.
Angle adjustment (front seats)
– Press the head restraint forward or back to the required position.
Removing the head restraint
– Push the head restraint up as far as it will go.
– Press the button Ÿfig. 89 (arrow).
– Pull head restraint out of fitting without releasing the button.
Fitting the head restraint
– Insert the head restraint into the guides on the rear backrest.
– Push head restraint down.
– Adjust the head restraint to suit body size Ÿpage 14 and
Ÿpage 13.
WARNING
• Never drive if the head restraints have been removed. Risk of injury.
• Never drive if the head restraints are in an unsuitable position, there is
a risk of serious injury.
• After refitting the head restraint, you must always adjust it properly for
height to achieve optimal protection.
• Please observe the safety warnings Ÿpage 127, “Correct adjustment
of head restraints”.
Fig. 89 Adjusting and
removing the head
restraints
Seats and stowage 129
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Front seats
Adjustment of the front seats
The control elements in Ÿfig. 90 are mirrored for the front right-
hand seat.
Adjusting the seat forwards and backwards
– Pull up the grip and move the seat forwards or backwards.
– Then release the grip and move the seat further until the
catch engages.
Adjusting the seat height*
– Pull the lever up or push down (several times if necessary) from
its home position. This adjusts the seat height in stages.
Adjusting the backrest angle
– Take your weight off the backrest and turn the hand wheel.
Adjusting the lumbar support*
– Take your weight off the backrest and turn the hand wheel to
adjust the lumbar support.
The backrest curvature of the cushioned area is determined by the settings
made in the lumbar region. This supports the natural curvature of the spine
very effectively.
WARNING
• Never adjust the driver or front passenger seat while the vehicle is in
motion. While adjusting your seat, you will assume an incorrect sitting
position. Risk of fatal accidents. Adjust the driver or front passenger seat
only when the vehicle is stationary.
• To reduce the risk of injury to the driver and front passenger during
sudden braking manoeuvres or an accident, never drive with the backrest
tilted far to the rear. The maximum protection of the seat belt can be
achieved only when the backrests are in an upright position and the driver
and front passenger have properly adjusted their seat belts. The further
the backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to
improper positioning of the belt web!
• Exercise caution when adjusting the seat height or forwards/back-
wards position. Injuries can be caused if the backrest is tilted without due
care and attention.
Fig. 90 Front left seat
controls
A1
A1
A2
A3
A4
Seats and stowage 130
Heated seats* æ
The front seat cushions and backrests can be heated electri-
cally.
– Turn the appropriate thumb wheel Ÿfig. 91 to switch on the seat
heating. The seat heating is switched off in the 0 position.
The seat heating only works when the ignition is switched on. The left thumb
wheel controls the left seat and the right thumb wheel the right seat.
Caution
To avoid damaging the heating elements, please do not kneel on the seat or
apply sharp pressure at a single point to the seat cushion and backrest.
Rear seat bench
Fold down the seat back
– Pull the release button on the backrest (sectioned backrest)
forwards in the direction of the arrow
– Fold down the backrest. The rear head restraints may have to be
removed before folding the seat forwards if the front seats have
been moved far back Ÿpage 128.
Fig. 91 Thumb wheel for
the front seat heating
Fig. 92 Folding the seat
backrests down
Seats and stowage 131
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Folding up the seat back
– Fold the backrest back and push the backrest firmly into the lock.
The red marking should no longer be visible Ÿfig. 93.
WARNING
• Please be careful when raising the backrest! Injuries can be caused if
the backrest is tilted without due care and attention.
Stowage compartments
Stowage compartment on the front passenger side
The compartment can be opened by pulling the lever Ÿfig. 94.
WARNING
Always keep the stowage compartment cover closed while the vehicle is in
motion to reduce the risk of injury during a sudden braking manoeuvre or
in the event of an accident.
The centre console with drinks holder
The centre console has a drinks holder.
Fig. 93 Folding up the
rear seat back
Fig. 94 Passenger side:
Stowage compartment
Seats and stowage 132
Stowage compartment under the left-hand side front seat*
There is a stowage locker with a cover under the front left-
hand side seat.
The locker* Ÿfig. 95 is opened by pulling on the cover.
There are two open positions of 15 and 60 degrees depending on the pres-
sure applied to the cover. In the 60 degree position, the cover will collapse if
too much pressure is applied.
To close the drawer, press the cover until it locks into position.
WARNING
• The drawers will hold a maximum weight of 1.5 kg.
• Do not drive with the drawer cover open. There is an injury risk for
passengers if the cargo is released in case of sudden braking or an
accident.
Folding table*
Folding tables are fitted to the rear of the front seat backrests.
– To open the table, open it up in the direction of the arrow
Ÿfig. 96.
WARNING
• The folding tables may not be folded down whilst the vehicle is in
motion and anyone is seated on the second row of seats. Risk of injury
during a sudden braking manoeuvre! The table must therefore be closed
and properly secured whilst the vehicle is in motion.
• Never place hot drinks in the drink holders. During normal or sudden
driving manoeuvres, sudden braking or an accident, the hot drink could be
spilled. Danger of scalding.
Fig. 95 Stowage area
under the front seats
AA
Fig. 96 Folding table on
left front seat
Seats and stowage 133
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Caution
When driving, do not leave open containers in the cup holders. The drink
might be spilt on braking, for example, and could damage the vehicle.
Stowage compartment with the CD charger*
The CD* loader is located under the front right hand seat
To access the loader
– Open the external cover by operating the button on this cover.
– Pull the sliding internal cover to the right.
– Press the “EJECT” button.
– To close the compartment, reverse the procedure.
WARNING
• Do not close the external cover with the loader cover open.
Other stowage areas
Other stowage areas can be found:
• in the centre console,
• in the side trims of the luggage compartment,
The hooks for hanging are found on the pillar between the front and rear side
windows.
WARNING
• Do not store loose objects on the dashboard. These objects could be
flung through the passenger compartment when the vehicle is moving (e.g.
while accelerating, braking or cornering) and distract the driver. Risk of
accident.
• Ensure that no objects can fall from the centre console or other stowage
areas into the driver foot well while the vehicle is moving. In the event of a
sudden braking manoeuvre, you will not be able to use the brake, clutch or
accelerator. Risk of accident.
• Clothing hung on the coat hooks must not restrict the driver's view.
Risk of accident. The coat hooks are intended only for use with light arti-
cles of clothing. Do not leave any hard, sharp or heavy objects in hanging
articles of clothing. During sudden braking manoeuvres or accidents, espe-
cially those involving airbag deployment, these objects could injure the
vehicle occupants.
Seats and stowage 134
Front drinks holders
On the centre console, in front of the gear lever, there are two drink holders
Ÿfig. 97.
WARNING
• Never place hot drinks in the bottle holder. During normal or sudden
driving manoeuvres, sudden braking or an accident, the hot drink could be
spilled. Danger of scalding.
• Never use rigid materials (for example, glass or ceramic), these could
cause injury in the case of an accident.
Ashtrays*, cigarette lighter* and electrical
sockets
Ashtray*
Opening and closing the ashtray
– To open the ashtray, lift the cover Ÿfig. 98.
– To close, lower the cover.
Emptying the ashtray
– Extract the ashtray and empty.
WARNING
Never put paper in the ashtray. Hot ash could ignite the paper in the
ashtray.
Fig. 97 Front drinks
holder
Fig. 98 Ashtray located
in the front drinks holder
Seats and stowage 135
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Cigarette lighter*
– Press on the cigarette lighter Ÿfig. 99 to activate it Ÿ .
– Wait for the lighter to pop out slightly.
– Pull out the cigarette lighter and light the cigarette on the
glowing coil.
WARNING
• Improper use of the cigarette lighter can lead to serious injuries or start
a fire.
• Take care when using the cigarette lighter. Carelessness or negligence
when using the cigarette lighter can cause burns, risk of injury.
• The cigarette lighter also works when the ignition is off and when the
ignition key is removed. To avoid the risk of fire, never leave children unsu-
pervised in the vehicle.
Electrical sockets
Electrical equipment can be connected to any of the 12 volt
sockets.
Electrical accessories may be connected to the 12 volt socket in the front
centre console Ÿfig. 100 or to that of the luggage compartment*. The appli-
ances connected to each socket must not exceed a power rating of 120 Watt.
WARNING
The electrical sockets and any appliances connected to them are also func-
tional with the ignition switched off and the key removed. Improper use of
the sockets or electrical accessories can lead to serious injuries or cause a
fire. To avoid the risk of injury, never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle.
Fig. 99 The cigarette
lighter is located in the
electric socket on the
front of the centre console
Fig. 100 Socket, centre
console, front
Seats and stowage 136
Note
• Using electrical appliances with the engine switched off will drain the
battery.
• Before using any electrical accessories, see the instructions on
Ÿpage 191.
Auxiliary audio connection (AUX-IN)
– Lift the AUX cover Ÿfig. 101.
– Insert the pin fully (see the radio manual).
Apple* iPod connector
®
The iPod connector
®
is located below the passenger seat.
For information concerning the use of this equipment, please see the Radio
handbook.
Fig. 101 Auxiliary audio
connection
Fig. 102 iPod connection
below passenger seat
Seats and stowage 137
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
USB* Connection
There is a USB port below the passenger seat.
For information concerning the use of this equipment, please see the Radio
handbook.
First-aid kit, warning triangle, fire
extinguisher
Warning triangle
The emergency warning triangle can be fitted in the side lining of the boot.
Note
• The warning triangle is not part of the vehicle's standard equipment.
First-aid kit and fire extinguisher
The first-aid kit* can be housed in a stowage box in the left side lining of the
luggage compartment.
Fig. 103 USB* connec-
tion below passenger seat
Fig. 104 Housing for the
emergency warning
triangle in the boot
Seats and stowage 138
The fire extinguisher* is attached to the luggage compartment carpet by
velcro.
Note
• The first-aid kit and the fire extinguisher are not part of the vehicle's
standard equipment.
• The first-aid kit must comply with legal requirements.
• Observe the expiry date of the contents of the first-aid kit. You should
purchase a new first-aid kit as soon as possible after the shelf-life date of the
first-aid kit has expired.
• The fire extinguisher must comply with legal requirements.
• Ensure that the fire extinguisher is fully functional. The fire extinguisher
should, therefore, be checked regularly. The sticker on the fire extinguisher
will inform you of the next date for checking.
• Before acquiring accessories and emergency equipment see the instruc-
tions on Ÿpage 191.
Luggage compartment
Stowing luggage
All luggage must be securely stowed.
Please observe the following points to ensure the vehicle handles
well at all times:
– Distribute the load as evenly as possible.
– Place heavy objects as far forward in the luggage compartment
as possible.
– Secure luggage in the luggage compartment with suitable straps
on the fastening rings.
WARNING
• Loose luggage and other loose items in the vehicle can cause serious
injuries.
• Loose objects in the luggage compartment can suddenly move and
change the way the vehicle handles.
• During sudden manoeuvres or accidents, loose objects in the
passenger compartment can be flung forward, injuring vehicle occupants.
• Always store objects in the luggage compartment and secure with suit-
able straps. This is especially important for heavy objects.
• When you transport heavy objects, always keep in mind that a change
in the centre of gravity can also cause changes in vehicle handling.
• Please observe information on safe driving Ÿpage 7, “Safe driving”.
Caution
Hard objects on the shelf could chafe against the wires of the heating
element in the rear window and cause damage.
Note
The ventilation slots in front of the rear side windows must not be covered as
this would prevent stale air being extracted from the vehicle.
Seats and stowage 139
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Luggage compartment cover
Removing the cover
– Disengage the loops Ÿfig. 105 from the retaining pins .
– Extract the cover from its slot, in its rest position and pull
outwards.
WARNING
Do not place heavy or hard objects on the luggage compartment cover, this
will endanger the vehicle occupants in case of sudden braking.
Note
• Ensure that, when placing items of clothing on the luggage compartment
cover, rear visibility is not reduced.
Roof carrier*
Please observe the following points if you intend to carry loads on the roof:
• For safety reasons, only luggage racks and accessories approved by SEAT
should be used.
• It is imperative to precisely follow the fitting instructions included for the
rack, taking special care when fitting the front bar in the holes designed for
this and the rear bar between the marks on the upper part of the rear door
frame while respecting the correct direction of travel indicated in the installa-
tion manual. Not following these instructions may lead to paintwork damage
or marks on the bodywork.
• Pay special attention to the tightening torque of the attachment bolts and
check them following a short journey. If necessary, retighten the bolts and
check them at regular intervals.
• Distribute the load evenly. A maximum load of 40 kg only is permitted for
each roof carrier system support bar, the load must be distributed evenly over
the entire length. However, the maximum load permitted for the entire roof
(including the support system) of 75 kg must not be exceeded nor should the
total weight of the vehicle be exceeded. See the chapter on “Technical Data”.
• When transporting heavy or large objects on the roof, any change in the
normal vehicle behaviour due to a change in the centre of gravity or an
increased wind resistance must be taken into account. For this reason, a suit-
able speed and driving style must be used.
• For those vehicles fitted with a sunroof*, ensure that it does not interfere
with the load on the roof carrier system when opened.
Fig. 105 Luggage
compartment cover
AB AA
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 140
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning
Heating and ventilation
Controls and equipment
– Using the controls Ÿfig. 106 and and the control you
can set the temperature, air distribution and the airflow.
– To switch a function on or off, press the appropriate button or
. When the function is activated, the display window in the
lower left of the button is lit.
Temperature
With the regulator the heating level is determined. The required tempera-
ture inside the vehicle cannot be lower than the ambient temperature.
Maximum heat output, which is needed to defrost the windows quickly, is
only available when the engine has reached its operating temperature.
Rear window heating T
This function will be switched off automatically approximately 20 minutes
after being switched on. It can also be switched off beforehand by pushing
the button
Air recirculation mode -
Air recirculation mode prevents strong odours in the outside air from
entering the vehicle interior, for example when passing through a tunnel or in
queuing traffic Ÿ .
Fig. 106 On the dash panel: Heater controls
A1 A4 A5
A2
A3
A1
A2
A3
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 141
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
With low outside temperatures, the air recirculation increases the effective-
ness of the heating system by warming the air inside the passenger compart-
ment rather than the air from outside.
Air distribution
Control for setting the flow of air in the required direction.
1 – Air distribution towards the windscreen. Air recirculation is, for safety
reasons, not possible in this position.
* – Air distribution to the upper body.
: – Air distribution to foot well
- – Air distribution to the windscreen and the foot well.
Blower
The airflow can be set at four speeds with the control . The airflow should
always be set at the lowest speed when driving slowly.
WARNING
• For road safety all windows must be clear of ice, snow, and condensa-
tion. This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise yourself
with the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system, including
the anti-fog/defrost functions for the windows.
• In air recirculation mode, no ambient air enters the vehicle interior. The
windows can quickly fog over if the heating is switched off. Therefore, you
should never leave the air recirculation mode switched on for longer
periods, as this increases the risk of an accident.
Note
Please observe the general notes Ÿpage 149.
A4
A5
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 142
Climatic*
Control switches
The climatic or semi-automatic air conditioning system only works
when the engine is running and the turbine is switched on.
– Using the controls Ÿfig. 107 and and the control you
can set the temperature, air distribution and the airflow.
– To switch a function on or off, press the appropriate button ,
or . When the function is activated, the display window in
the lower corner of the button is lit.
Temperature selector Ÿpage 143
Button – Heating, ventilation and air-conditioning system on/off
Ÿpage 143
Button – Rear window heating. The heating will be switched off auto-
matically approximately 20 minutes after switching on. It can also be
switched off beforehand by pushing the button.
Button – Air recirculation mode Ÿpage 144
Air distribution control Ÿpage 143
Blower switch. There are four speed settings for the airflow. The airflow
should always be set at the lowest speed when driving slowly.
WARNING
For road safety all windows must be clear of ice, snow, and condensation.
This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise yourself with
the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system, including the
anti-fog/defrost functions for the windows.
Fig. 107 On the dash panel: Climatic controls
A1 A5 A6
A2
A3 A4
A1
A2 AC
A3 T
A4 -
A5
A6
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 143
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Note
Please observe the general notes Ÿpage 149.
Heating and cooling the interior
Heating of the vehicle interior
– Turn the temperature selector Ÿfig. 108 clockwise to select
the required temperature.
– Turn the blower switch to one of the settings 1-4.
– Use the air distribution control to guide the flow of air in the
required direction: (to the windscreen), (to the upper
body), (to the foot well) and (to the windscreen and to the
foot well).
Cooling the passenger compartment
– Switch on the air conditioner using the button Ÿpage 142,
fig. 107 .
– Turn the temperature selector anti-clockwise until the desired
cooling output is reached.
– Turn the blower switch to one of the settings 1-4.
Fig. 108 On the dash panel: Climatic controls
A1
1 *
: -
AC
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 144
– Use the air distribution control to guide the flow of air in the
required direction: (to the windscreen), (to the upper
body), (to the foot well) and (to the windscreen and to the
foot well).
Heating system
Maximum heat output, which is needed to defrost the windows quickly, is
only available when the engine has reached its operating temperature.
Air conditioner
When the air conditioning system is switched on, not only the temperature,
but also the air humidity in the vehicle interior is reduced. This improves
comfort for the vehicle occupants and prevents misting of the windows when
the ambient air humidity is high.
If the air conditioning systemcannot be switched on, this may be caused by
the following reasons:
• The engine may not be running.
• The blower is switched off.
• The ambient air temperature is lower than +3°C.
• The air conditioning system compressor has been temporarily switched
off because the engine coolant temperature is too high.
• The air conditioner fuse is faulty.
• Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air conditioner checked by a quali-
fied workshop.
Air recirculation mode
Air recirculation mode prevents fumes or unpleasant smells from entering the vehicle.
1 *
: -
-
Fig. 109 On the dash panel: Climatic controls
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 145
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Air recirculation mode Ÿpage 144, fig. 109 prevents strong odours in
the outside air from entering the vehicle interior, for example when passing
through a tunnel or in queuing traffic.
With low outside temperatures, the air recirculation increases the effective-
ness of the heating system by warming the air inside the passenger compart-
ment rather than the air from outside.
With high ambient temperatures, the air recirculation increases the effective-
ness of the air conditioning system by cooling the air inside the passenger
compartment rather than the air from outside.
For reasons of safety, air recirculation is not possible when the control for air
distribution is set to the windscreen setting 1.
WARNING
In air recirculation mode, no ambient air enters the vehicle interior. If the
air conditioning system is switched off, the windows can quickly mist over.
Therefore, you should never leave the air recirculation mode switched on
for longer periods, as this increases the risk of an accident.
2C-Climatronic*
Control switches
The controls allow separate adjustment of air conditioning settings for the left and right.
-
Fig. 110 On the dash panel: 2C Climatronic controls
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 146
The air conditioning system only works when the engine is running
and the blower is switched on.
– Press the temperature control buttons Ÿpage 145, fig. 110
or in order to adjust the temperature on the left-hand side or
the right-hand side respectively.
– The functions will be switched on when the buttons are pressed.
When these functions are activated, they are indicated in the
display. Also, the de-icing and rear heated window functions will
turn on along with their corresponding yellow symbol. Press the
button again to switch off the function.
The temperature can be adjusted separately for the left and right sides of the
vehicle interior.
Display of the selected interior temperature for the left side.
Button – Manual air recirculation mode
Button – Central air distribution
Button – Downward air distribution
Button – Upward air distribution
Display of the selected interior temperature for the right side.
Button – defrost function for the windscreen. The air drawn in from
outside the vehicle is directed at the windscreen. The air recirculation
mode, if switched on, will be switched off as soon as the defrost function
is switched on. At temperatures over 3°C, the air conditioning system will
be switched on automatically and the blower speed will be increased by
one level in order to dry the air. The button lights up yellow and the
symbol appears in the display.
Button – Rear window heating. The heating will be switched off auto-
matically approximately 20 minutes after switching on. However, it may
be turned off by pushing the button. The button lights up yellow and the
symbol appears in the display.
Temperature selector for the left side Ÿpage 146
Blower control Ÿpage 147
Button – Switches the 2C-Climatronic on and off Ÿpage 147
Button – Automatic temperature, ventilation and air distribution
control Ÿpage 146
Button – Switches heating, ventilation and air-conditioning
system off
Temperature selector for the right side Ÿpage 146
WARNING
For road safety all windows must be clear of ice, snow, and condensation.
This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise yourself with
the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system, including the
anti-fog/defrost functions for the windows.
Note
Please observe the general notes Ÿpage 149.
Automatic mode
In automatic mode air temperature, airflow and distribution
are automatically regulated so that a specified temperature is
attained as quickly as possible and then maintained.
The temperature can be adjusted separately for the left and right
sides of the vehicle interior.
Switching on automatic mode
– Press the button Ÿpage 145, fig. 110. “AUTO” is shown
on the display.
A9
A14
A1
A2 -
A3 *
A4 :
A5 *
A6
A7 1
A8 T
A9
A10
A11 OFF
A12 AUTO
A13 ECON
A14
AUTO
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 147
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
– Press the temperature selectors to set the desired temperatures
for the left and right sides of the interior. We recommend 22°C
(72°F).
A comfortable interior climate is quickly reached when a temperature of
+22°C (72°F) is set in automatic mode. It can be changed as necessary to suit
individual preferences or particular circumstances. It is possible to select
interior temperatures from +16°C (61°F) to +29.5°C (86°F). These are approx-
imate temperatures and the actual temperature may be slightly higher or
lower depending on the ambient conditions.
Climatronic automatically maintains a constant temperature. The tempera-
ture of the air supplied to the interior, the blower speed and the air distribu-
tion are regulated automatically. The system also allows for the effect of
strong sunlight, so there is no need for manual adjustment. Therefore, auto-
matic mode provides the best comfort for the vehicle occupants in virtually all
conditions throughout the year.
Automatic mode is switched off whenever an adjustment is made using the
buttons for the air distribution, airflow or . The temperature will
continue to be regulated within the parameters manually selected by the
user.
Manual mode
In manual mode you can adjust the air temperature, airflow and distribution as required.
Switching on manual mode
– To enter manual mode, press one of the buttons Ÿfig. 111 to
, or press the airflow control . The symbol will
disappear from the display.
ECON
Fig. 111 On the dash panel: 2C Climatronic controls
A3
A5 ECON A10 AUTO
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 148
Temperature
There are separate temperature selectors for the left and right sides of the
vehicle interior. The selected temperature is displayed above the selector. It
is possible to select interior temperatures from +16°C (61°F) to +29.5°C
(86°F). These are approximate temperatures and the actual temperature may
be slightly higher or lower depending on the ambient conditions.
If a temperature below 16°C (61°F) is selected, the display switches to LO. In
this setting the system runs at maximum cooling output and the temperature
is not regulated.
If a temperature above 29.5°C (86°F) is selected the display switches to HI. In
this setting the system runs at maximum heating output and the temperature
is not regulated.
Blower
The airflow may be adjusted freely using the control . Always have the
blower running at a low setting to ensure a constant flow of fresh air into the
vehicle. Pushing the button N to the minimum -1, turns the Climatronic off.
Air distribution
The air distribution is adjusted using the buttons , and . It is also
possible to open and close some of the air vents separately.
Switching the air conditioning system on and off
Pressing the button switches off the air conditioning system to save
fuel. The temperature continues to be regulated. The set temperature can
then only be reached if it is higher than the ambient temperature.
Air recirculation mode
Air recirculation mode prevents fumes or unpleasant smells
from entering the vehicle.
– Press the button Ÿpage 147, fig. 111 to switch air recir-
culation mode on or off. It is switched on if the following symbol
appears in the display -.
Air recirculation mode prevents strong odours in the ambient air from
entering the vehicle interior, for example when passing through a tunnel or in
queuing traffic.
With low outside temperatures, the air recirculation increases the effective-
ness of the heating system by warming the air inside the passenger compart-
ment rather than the air from outside.
With high ambient temperatures, the air recirculation increases the effective-
ness of the air conditioning system by cooling the air inside the passenger
compartment rather than the air from outside.
For reasons of safety, air recirculation is not possible when the control for air
distribution is set to the windscreen setting 1.
WARNING
In air recirculation mode, no ambient air enters the vehicle interior. If the
air conditioning system is switched off, the windows can quickly mist over.
Therefore, you should never leave the air recirculation mode switched on
for longer periods, as this increases the risk of an accident.
A10
* * ·
ECON
- A2
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 149
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
General notes
The pollen filter
The pollution filter (a combined particulate filter and activated carbon filter)
serves as a barrier against impurities in the outside air, including dust and
pollen.
For the air conditioning system to work with maximum efficiency, the pollen
filter must be replaced at the intervals specified in the Service Schedule.
If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due to use in areas with very high
levels of air pollution, the pollen filter must be changed more frequently than
stated in the Service Schedule.
Caution
• If you suspect that the air conditioner is damaged, switch off the air condi-
tioner with button to prevent further damage and have it checked by a
qualified workshop.
• Repairs to the air conditioning system require specialist knowledge and
special tools. Therefore, we recommend that you take the vehicle to a quali-
fied workshop should problems occur.
Note
• If the humidity and temperature outside the vehicle are high, condensa-
tion can drip off the evaporator in the cooling system and form a pool under-
neath the vehicle, this is completely normal and there is no need to suspect
a leak.
• Keep the air intake slots in front of the windscreen free of snow, ice and
leaves to ensure heating and cooling is not impaired, and to prevent the
windows misting over.
• The air from the vents flows through the passenger compartment and is
extracted by slots designed for this purpose. Do not cover these slots with
articles of clothing or other objects.
• The air conditioning system operates most effectively with the windows
and the sliding/tilting roof* closed. However, if the sun has heated up the
vehicle, the air inside can be cooled more quickly by opening the windows for
a short period.
• Do not smoke while air recirculation mode is on, as smoke drawn into the
air conditioning system leaves a residue on the evaporator, producing a
permanent unpleasant odour.
• The air conditioning should be turned on at least once a month, to lubri-
cate the system gaskets and prevent leaks. If a decrease in the cooling
capacity is detected, an Authorised Service Centre should be consulted to
check the system.
ECON
Driving 150
Driving
Steering
Adjusting the steering wheel position
The height and reach of the steering wheel can be freely
adjusted to suit the driver.
– Adjust the driver seat to the correct position.
– Push the lever under the steering column Ÿfig. 112 down
Ÿ .
– Adjust the steering wheel in this way until the correct position is
set Ÿfig. 113.
– Then push the lever up again firmly Ÿ .
WARNING
• Incorrect use of the steering column adjustment function and an incor-
rect seating position can result in serious injury.
• To avoid accidents, the steering column should be adjusted only when
the vehicle is stationary. Risk of accident.
Fig. 112 Adjusting the
steering wheel position
Fig. 113 Proper sitting
position for driver
Driving 151
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
• Adjust the driver seat or steering wheel so that there is a distance of at
least 25 cm between the steering wheel and your chest Ÿpage 150,
fig. 113. If you fail to observe the minimum distance, the airbag will not
protect you. Risk of fatal injury.
• If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the
minimum distance of 25 cm, contact an Authorised Service Centre. The
Authorised Service Centre will help you decide if special specific modifica-
tions are necessary.
• If you adjust the steering wheel so that it points towards your face, the
driver airbag will not protect you properly in the event of an accident. Make
sure that the steering wheel points towards your chest.
• When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the
outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. Never hold the
steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g. in
the centre of the steering wheel, or on the inside of the rim). In such cases,
you could receive severe injuries to the arms, hands and head.
Safety
Electronic stabilisation programme (ESP)*
ESP helps make driving safer in certain situations.
The Electronic Stabilisation Program (ESP) contains the electronic differential
lock (EDL) and the traction control system (TCS). The ESP function works in
conjunction with the ABS. Both warning lamps will light up if the ESP or ABS
systems are faulty.
The ESP is started automatically when the engine is started.
In specific circumstances where you require less traction, you can switch off
the ESP by pressing button Ÿfig. 114 .
For example:
• when driving with snow chains,
• when driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces,
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 114 Detail of the
centre console: ESP
button
î!"
Driving 152
• when rocking the vehicle backwards and forwards to free it from mud, for
example.
You should press the button to switch the ESP back on when you no longer
need wheel spin.
The TCS and EDL are also switched off if the ESP is switched off. That is to say,
these systems are not available while ESP is not activated.
When does the button light up or flash?
• It lights up when the ignition is switched on and should go out again after
about 2 seconds.
• It will start flashing to indicate that ESP is counteracting an unstable
driving condition.
• It will light up continuously if there is a malfunction in the ESP.
• It will light up continuously if the ESP is switched off.
WARNING
• The electronic stabilisation program (ESP) cannot defy the laws of
physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet
roads and when towing a trailer.
• Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and
the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by ESP tempt you
into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.
• Please refer to the corresponding warning notes on ESP in Ÿpage 169,
“Intelligent technology”.
Ignition lock
Position of the ignition key
Ignition switched off, steering lock
In the position Ÿfig. 115 the ignition and the engine are OFF and the
steering may be locked.
For the Steering lock to operate without the ignition key, turn the steering
wheel until it locks with an audible sound. You should always lock the
steering wheel when you leave your vehicle. This will help prevent theft of the
vehicle Ÿ .
Switching on the ignition or glow plug system
Turn the ignition key to this position and let go of the key. If the key cannot be
turned or is difficult to turn from position to position , move the
steering wheel (to take the load off the steering lock mechanism) until the key
turns freely.
î!"
Fig. 115 Ignition key
positions
A0
A1
A0 A12
Driving 153
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Starting
The engine is started when the key is in this position. Electrical components
with a high power consumption are switched off temporarily.
Each time that the vehicle must be started, the ignition key must be turned to
the position . The repetitive start prevention lock of the ignition prevents
possible damage to the starter motor if the engine is already running.
WARNING
• Wait for the vehicle to come to a standstill before removing the ignition
key from the lock. The steering lock could be activated immediately - Risk
of accident!
• Always remove the key from the ignition lock when leaving the vehicle,
even if you only intend to be gone for a short period. This is especially
important if you must leave children or disabled people in the vehicle.
• They could accidentally start the engine or work electrical equipment
such as the windows possibly resulting in an accident.
• Unsupervised use of the keys could result in the engine being started
or electrical systems, such as the electric windows, being used. This can
result in serious injury.
Caution
The starter motor will only work when the engine is stopped (ignition key
position ).
Electronic immobiliser
The immobiliser prevents unauthorised persons from driving
the vehicle.
Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates the electronic immobiliser auto-
matically when the key is inserted into the ignition.
The immobiliser will be activated again automatically as soon as you pull the
key out of the ignition lock.
The engine can only be started using a genuine SEAT key with the correct
code.
Note
The vehicle cannot be operated properly if you do not have a genuine SEAT
key.
Starting and stopping the engine
Starting petrol engines
The engine can only be started using a genuine SEAT key with
the correct code.
– Move the gear lever to the neutral position and depress the
clutch pedal fully and hold it in this position, the starter will then
only have to turn the engine.
– Turn the ignition key to the starting position Ÿpage 152.
A2
A0
A2
Driving 154
– Let go of the ignition key as soon as the engine starts; the starter
motor must not be allowed to run on with the engine.
After starting a very hot engine, you may need to press the accelerator briefly.
When starting from cold, the engine may be a little noisy for the first few
seconds until oil pressure has built up in the hydraulic valve compensators.
This is quite normal, and no cause for concern.
If the engine does not start immediately, switch off the starter after about
10 seconds and try again after about half a minute. If the engine still does not
start, the fuel pump fuse should be checked Ÿpage 232, “Fuses”.
WARNING
• Never start or run the engine in unventilated or closed rooms. The
exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless
poisonous gas. Risk of fatal accidents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of
consciousness. It can also cause death.
• Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running.
• Never use “cold start sprays”, they could explode or cause the engine
to run at high revs. Risk of injury.
Caution
• When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving at
full throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage.
• The vehicle should not be pushed or towed for more than approximately
50 metres to start the engine. Fuel could enter the catalytic converter and
damage it.
• Before attempting to push-start or tow a vehicle to start it, you should first
try to start it using the battery of another vehicle. Note and follow the instruc-
tions Ÿpage 248, “Jump-starting”.
For the sake of the environment
Do not warmup the engine by running the engine with the vehicle stationary.
You should drive off as soon as you start the engine. This helps the engine
reach operating temperature faster and reduces emissions.
Starting diesel engines
The engine can only be started using a genuine SEAT key with
the correct code.
– Move the gear lever to the neutral position and depress the
clutch pedal fully and hold it in this position, the starter will then
only have to turn the engine.
– Turn the ignition key to the starting position.
– Turn the ignition key to position Ÿpage 152, fig. 115 . The
indication lamp ¯ will light for engine pre-heating.
– When the warning lamp goes out, turn the key to position to
start the engine. Do not press the accelerator.
– Let go of the ignition key as soon as the engine starts, the starter
motor must not be allowed to run on with the engine.
When starting from cold, the engine may be a little noisy for the first few
seconds until oil pressure has built up in the hydraulic valve compensators.
This is quite normal, and no cause for concern.
If there are problems starting the engine, see Ÿpage 248.
A1
A2
Driving 155
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Glow plug system for the diesel engine
To avoid unnecessary load on the battery, do not use any other major elec-
trical equipment while the glow plugs are pre-heating.
Start the engine as soon as the glow plug warning lamp Ÿpage 81 goes out.
Starting the engine after the fuel tank has been completely run dry
If the fuel tank has been completely run dry, it may take longer than normal
(up to one minute) to start the engine after refuelling with diesel fuel. This is
because the system must eliminate air first.
WARNING
• Never start or run the engine in unventilated or closed rooms. The
exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless
poisonous gas. Risk of fatal accidents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of
consciousness. It can also cause death.
• Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running.
• Never use “cold start sprays”, they could explode or cause the engine
to run at high revs. Risk of injury.
Caution
• When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving at
full throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage.
• The vehicle should not be pushed or towed for more than approximately
50 metres to start the engine. Fuel could enter the catalytic converter and
damage it.
• Before attempting to push-start or tow a vehicle to start it, you should first
try to start it using the battery of another vehicle. Note and follow the instruc-
tions Ÿpage 248, “Jump-starting”.
For the sake of the environment
Do not warmup the engine by running the engine with the vehicle stationary.
You should drive off as soon as you start the engine. This helps the engine
reach operating temperature faster and reduces emissions.
Switching off the engine
– Stopping the engine.
– Turn the ignition key to position Ÿpage 152, fig. 115 .
After the engine is switched off the radiator fan may run on for up to 10
minutes, even if the ignition is switched off. It is also possible that it will turn
itself on once more if the temperature of the coolant increases due to the
elimination of built-up heat in the engine compartment or if this is heated due
to prolonged exposure to the heat of the sun.
WARNING
• Never switch off the engine until the vehicle is stationary.
• The brake servo works only when the engine is running. You will need
more strength to brake the vehicle when the engine is switched off. As you
cannot brake in the normal manner, there is a greater risk of accidents and
serious injury.
• The steering lock can engage immediately when the key is removed
from the ignition lock. The vehicle cannot be steered. Risk of accident.
A0
Driving 156
Caution
If the engine has been driven hard for a long period, the engine could over-
heat when it is switched off. Risk of engine damage. For this reason, you
should idle the engine for approx. 2 minutes before you switch it off.
Manual gearbox
Driving a car with a manual gearbox
Selecting the reverse gear
– The vehicle should be stationary with the engine idling. Press the
clutch right down.
– Place the gear lever into neutral gate and push the lever all the
way down.
– Slide the gearlever to the left, and then into the reverse position
shown on the gear lever.
The reverse gear can only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary. When
the engine is running, before engaging this gear wait about 6 seconds with
the clutch pressed in fully in order to protect the gearbox.
The reversing lights come on when the reverse gear is selected and the igni-
tion is on.
Fig. 116 Detail of the
centre console: Shift
diagram of a 5-speed
manual gearbox
Fig. 117 Detail of the
centre console: Shift
diagram of a 6-speed
manual gearbox
Driving 157
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
WARNING
• When the engine is running, the vehicle will start to move as soon as a
gear is engaged and the clutch released.
• Never select the reverse gear when the vehicle is in motion. Risk of acci-
dent.
Note
• Do not rest your hand on the gear lever when driving. The pressure of your
hand could cause premature wear on the selector forks in the gearbox.
• When changing gear, you should always depress the clutch fully to avoid
unnecessary wear and damage.
• Do not hold the car “on the clutch” on hills. This causes premature wear
and damage to the clutch.
Automatic gearbox* / DSG automatic
gearbox*
Selector lever positions
Selector lever positions indicated on the cover
P Parking position (lever locked).
R Reverse position.
N Neutral position (lever locked). This position is similar to the neutral
position for manual gearboxes).
D Drive position (economic driving program).
S Sports driving position.
+/- Tiptronic driving position (this program is similar to the operation of a
manual gearbox).
Fig. 118 Section of
centre console: selector
lever on cars with an auto-
matic gearbox / direct
shift gearbox
Driving 158
Driving programmes
The automatic gearbox / direct shift gearbox (DSG) has three
programmes.
Selecting the economic programme
– This programme selects a higher gear earlier rather than remain
in a lower gear.
– Put the selector lever into position D to drive forwards
– Put the selector lever into position R to reverse. This position is
shared by all programmes for reversing.
Selecting the sport programme
– Move the lever to position S.
If you select the sport programme, S, the programme is designed for a sports
mode, that is, a programme which changes up at higher engine speeds to use
the full power of the engine. This programme is not recommended for use on
the motorway or in the city.
Selecting manual programme (tiptronic)
This programme allows the vehicle to be driven as if with a manual gearbox.
This programme may be accessed using the selector lever or from the
steering wheel controls when this option it is fitted Ÿpage 161.
Selector lever locking
The selector lever lock prevents gears from being engaged
inadvertently, which would cause the vehicle to move.
Releasing the selector lever lock
– Start the vehicle.
Fig. 119 programme
selection
Fig. 120 Deactivating the
lock
Driving 159
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
– Press and hold the brake pedal, at the same time press the
button on the selector lever.
The lock is only activated when the vehicle is stopped or at a speed of less
than 5 km/h. At higher speeds, the lock is automatically released in position
N.
For rapid changes of position (e.g. from R to D) the lever will not lock. If the
lever remains in the position N more than one second then it is locked. With
the automatic lock, the lever is prevented frompassing fromP and N to any
other gear without first pressing the brake pedal.
The selector lever must be put in the position P in order to remove the key.
Driving with an automatic gearbox* / DSG automatic
gearbox*
The drive and reverse gears are automatically engaged.
Driving
– Press and hold the foot brake.
– Press on the button on the selector lever knob (on the left,
Ÿfig. 121.
– Select a gear for driving (R, D or S).
– Release the button and wait a few seconds for the gear to
engage, a light jerk will be felt.
– Release the brake and accelerate.
Short stop
– Hold the vehicle stationary with the brake pressed down (for
example at traffic lights). The selector lever does not need to be
put into the positions P or N for this.
– Do not press the accelerator.
Parking the vehicle
– Press the foot brake and hold to bring the vehicle to a stop.
– Apply the handbrake firmly.
– Press in the button on the selector lever knob, move the lever to
the position P and release the button.
Driving slowly
– Move the selector lever to the position D and press to the right to
put the lever into Tiptronic mode.
– Press the gear lever towards (-) to select a lower gear.
Fig. 121 Driving
Driving 160
Hill stop
– Hold the vehicle, in all cases, using the foot brake to prevent
rolling back.
– Do not try to slow the vehicle using another forward gear (engine
braking).
Descending gradients
– With the gear engaged, release the brake and accelerate.
The steeper the gradient the lower the gear must be for effective engine
braking. For example, if 3rd gear is used on a very steep gradient, the engine
braking is insufficient and vehicle accelerates. So that the engine speed does
not become excessive, the gearbox changes to the next highest gear. Depress
the brake pedal and move the selector lever to the Tiptronic gate to return to
3rd gear.
WARNING
• The driver should never leave the vehicle while the engine is running or
with any gear selected. If for any reason you must leave the vehicle with the
engine running, apply the handbrake and move the selector lever to posi-
tion P.
• When the engine is running and the positions D, S or R are selected, it
is necessary to hold the vehicle with the foot brake because the vehicle will
creep at a low speed.
• Never accelerate while changing the position of the selector lever (risk
of an accident).
• The selector lever must never be moved into the positions R or P while
moving (risk of an accident).
• Before descending a steep gradient, reduce speed and use the Tiptronic
programme to select a lower gear.
• If you must stop on a hill, always hold the vehicle using the footbrake
to avoid rolling back.
• The footbrake must not be held for a long period of time, not even
lightly; continuous braking will cause overheating of the brakes and a
reduction or even a loss of braking power and a significant increase in
braking distances.
• Never allow the vehicle to coast down a gradient with the selector lever
in positions N or D, even when the engine is not running. For descents, the
use of the Tiptronic programme is recommended to keep the speed
reduced.
Caution
• Never use the automatic gearbox to hold the vehicle stationary on a hill,
even for short periods, as this may overheat the gearbox and cause damage.
Apply the handbrake or depress the foot brake to hold the vehicle in position.
• If the vehicle is allowed to roll with the engine stopped but the selector in
position N then the gearbox may be damaged because it will not be
lubricated.
WARNING (continued)
Driving 161
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Using the Tiptronic gear system
The Tiptronic system allows the driver to manually select
gears
General points about the Tiptronic gear system
Changing gear with the selector lever
– Put the lever in the position D and press towards the right to
enter the Tiptronic gate Ÿfig. 122.
– Press the gear lever forwards (+) to select a higher gear.
– Press the gear lever back (-) to select a lower gear.
Changing gear using the steering wheel levers
– Press the right lever (+) towards the steering wheel to change up
Ÿfig. 123.
– Press the left lever (-) towards the steering wheel to change down
Ÿfig. 123.
The manual programme can be selected with the levers on the steering wheel
irrespective of the driving mode which has been preselected.
General points about the Tiptronic gear system
When accelerating, the automatic/DSG gearbox automatically shifts up to the
next gear shortly before the maximum permitted engine speed is reached.
If a lower gear is selected, the automatic gearbox / direct shift gearbox does
not change down until the point is reached where the engine could no longer
overrev.
If the “tiptronic” is selected whilst the vehicle is in motion and the automatic
gearbox / direct shift gearbox is in the 3rd gear in selector lever position D,
the “tiptronic” will then also be in the 3rd gear.
Fig. 122 Changing gear
with Tiptronic
Fig. 123 Steering wheel
with levers for the auto-
matic gearbox
Driving 162
Note
• The steering wheel controls may be used in all selector lever positions
while driving.
Handbrake
Using the handbrake
The handbrake should be applied firmly to prevent the
vehicle from accidentally rolling away.
Always apply the handbrake when you leave your vehicle and when
you park.
Applying the handbrake
– Pull the handbrake lever up firmly Ÿfig. 124.
Releasing the handbrake
– Pull the lever up slightly and press the locking knob in the direc-
tion of the arrow Ÿfig. 124 and guide the handbrake lever down
fully Ÿ .
Always apply the handbrake firmly; this prevents you driving with the hand-
brake applied Ÿ .
The handbrake warning lamp C lights up when the handbrake is applied
and the ignition switched on. The warning lamp goes out when the hand-
brake is released.
If you drive faster than 6 km/h with the handbrake on, the following
message* will appear in the instrument display: HANDBRAKE ON. Also, an
audible warning is given.
WARNING
• Never use the handbrake to slow down the vehicle when it is in motion.
The braking distance is considerably longer, as braking is only applied to
the rear wheels. Risk of accident!
• If it is only partially released this will cause overheating of the rear
brakes, which can impair the function of the brake system and could lead
to an accident. This also causes premature wear on the rear brake
pads/linings.
Caution
Always apply the handbrake before you leave the vehicle. The first gear
should also be selected.
Fig. 124 Handbrake
between the front seats
Driving 163
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Parking
The handbrake should always be firmly applied when the
vehicle is parked.
Always note the following points when parking the vehicle:
– Use the foot brake to stop the vehicle.
– Apply the handbrake.
– The first gear should also be selected.
– Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition lock.
Turn the steering wheel slightly to engage the steering lock.
– Always take you car keys with you when you leave the vehicle
Ÿ .
Additional notes on parking the vehicle on gradients:
Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle would roll against the kerb if it did
start to roll.
• If the vehicle is facing downhill, turn the front wheels so that they point
towards the kerb.
• If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn the front wheels so that they point away
from the kerb.
• Secure the vehicle as normal by applying the handbrake firmly and
selecting first gear.
WARNING
• Take measures to reduce the risk of injury when you leave your vehicle
unattended.
• Never park where the hot exhaust system could ignite inflammable
materials, such as dry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel etc.
• Never allow vehicle occupants to remain in the vehicle when it is
locked. They would be unable to open the vehicle from the inside, and
could become trapped in the vehicle in an emergency. In the event of an
emergency, locked doors will delay assistance to occupants.
• Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could set the
vehicle in motion, for example, by releasing the handbrake or the gear
lever / selector lever.
• Depending on weather conditions, it may become extremely hot or cold
inside the vehicle. This can be fatal.
Acoustic parking aid system*
Rear parking aid
The parking aid system will use an acoustic signal to warn of
the approach of any object towards the rear of the vehicle.
Description
The acoustic parking aid system will measure the distance between the rear
of the vehicle and any possible obstacle using four ultrasonic sensors located
on the rear bumper. The measuring range of the sensors starts at approxi-
mately and depending on the nature of the obstacle at a distance of:
• side of the rear bumper: 0.8 m
• centre of the rear bumper: 1.3 m
WARNING (continued)
Driving 164
Activation
The system is activated by engagement of the reverse gear. A brief acoustic
signal confirms the activation and correct function of the system.
Reversing
The distance warning will begin as soon as an obstacle is detected by the
system. The frequency of the bleeps emitted by the system will increase
rapidly as the vehicle approaches the obstacle.
Within a short distance of about 25 cm, a continuous signal sounds (stop
signal). The driver should not reverse any further.
Trailer towing
For vehicles fitted with a tow bar by the manufacturer, the parking aid system
will not be activated by the engagement of the reverse gear when pulling a
trailer, as the trailer's electric connecter will be plugged into the vehicle.
To avoid system malfunctions, when not driving with a trailer, remove the
trailer hitch.
Possible faults
If a continuous bleep sounds for some seconds when the reverse gear is
engaged, this indicates that there is a fault in the parking aid system.
If the fault continues until the ignition is turned off, the acoustic signal
warning of the fault will not be emitted every time the system is reactivated
(by engaging the reverse gear). Thus, the system ready indication will not
sound either. Have the fault repaired by an Authorised Service Centre as soon
as possible.
If there is no ready signal or no acoustic warning signal then the parking aid
loudspeaker is faulty and may not warn of obstacles.
To ensure that the system works properly, the sensors must be kept clean and
free of ice and snow.
WARNING
• The sensors have blind spots in which obstacles may not be detected.
• Always look out for small children and animals because the system will
not always detect them. Always pay attention when reversing to avoid acci-
dents.
• The parking aid is not a replacement for driver awareness. The driver
must take full responsibility for parking and other manoeuvres.
Caution
• Please note that low obstacles detected by the system may no longer be
registered by the sensors as the car moves closer, so the system will not give
any further warning. Certain kinds of obstacles (such as wire fences, chains,
thin posts or trailer draw bars, high kerbs or painted railings etc) may not
always be detected by the system, so there is a risk of damaging the vehicle
in such cases.
• Obstacles with uniform edges and bumps may not be detected immedi-
ately by the system due to their geometry. Take special care around this type
of obstacle such as corners, rectangular objects, etc.., these can cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Be especially careful when manoeuvring into a corner between two
perpendicular walls. Survey the approach of the wall to the side of the vehicle
(using the mirrors)
• The parking aid system does not replace use of the mirrors for manoeu-
vres.
• Distant ultra-sonic sources (hammers, tyres, construction machinery,
other vehicles with PDC) may interfere with the operation of the system.
• Periodic cleaning of the sensors, take care not to damage or scratch them.
When cleaning with high pressure washers or steam cleaners, the sensors
should be sprayed for only a very short period and from a distance of more
than 10 cm.
Driving 165
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Cruise control system (CCS)*
Description
The cruise control system is able to maintain the set speed in
the range from approx. 30 km/h to 180 km/h.
Once the speed setting has been saved, you may take your foot off the accel-
erator.
WARNING
It could be dangerous to use the cruise control system if it is not possible
to drive at constant speed.
• For safety reasons the cruise control system should not be used in
dense traffic, in sections with bends or where roads conditions are poor
(e.g. aquaplaning, loose chippings, slippery surfaces, snow). Risk of acci-
dent.
• Always switch off the CCS when you have finished using it. This will
prevent you using it by mistake.
• It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the current road,
traffic or weather conditions. Risk of accident.
Note
The cruise control cannot maintain a constant speed when descending gradi-
ents. The vehicle will accelerate under its own weight. Use the foot brake to
slow the vehicle.
Switching the cruise control system on and off
Switching on the system
– Push the switch Ÿfig. 125 to the left to ON.
Switching off the system
– Either push the switch to the right to OFF or turn the ignition
off when the vehicle is stationary.
When the speed regulation is on and a speed is programmed, the indicator
% on the instrument panel is lit.
18)
When the speed regulator (CCS) is turned off the indicator % is turned off, the
speed regulator is completely deactivated if the 1st gear is engaged.*
18)
Depending on model version.
Fig. 125 Turn signal and
main beam lever: Switch
and rocker switch for CCS
AB
AB
Driving 166
Setting speed*
– Press the lower part SET of the rocker switch Ÿfig. 126 once
briefly, when you have reached the speed you wish to set.
When you release the rocker switch, the current speed is set and held
constant.
Adjusting set speed*
The speed can be altered without touching the accelerator or
the brake.
Setting a higher speed
– Press the upper part RES+ of the rocker switch Ÿfig. 127 to
increase the speed. The vehicle will continue to accelerate for as
long as you keep the rocker switch pressed. When you release
the switch, the new speed is stored.
Setting a lower speed
– Press the lower part SET– of the rocker switch to reduce the
speed. The vehicle will automatically reduce its speed for as long
as you keep the switch pressed. When you release the switch, the
new speed is stored.
Fig. 126 Turn signal and
main beam lever: switch
and rocker switch for CCS
AA
Fig. 127 Turn signal and
main beam lever: switch
and rocker switch for CCS
AA
AA
Driving 167
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
When you increase speed with the accelerator and then release the pedal, the
system will automatically restore the set speed. This will not be the case,
however, if the vehicle speed is more than 10 km/h higher than the stored
speed for longer than 5 minutes. The speed will have to be stored again.
Control of the set speed is switched off if you reduce speed by depressing the
brake pedal. You can reactivate the control by pressing once on the upper part
of the rocker switch RES+ Ÿpage 166, fig. 127 .
WARNING
It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the current road,
traffic or weather conditions. Risk of accident.
Switching off the system temporarily*
The cruise control system will be switched off in the following situations:
• if the brake pedal is depressed,
• if the clutch pedal is depressed,
• if the vehicle is accelerated to over 180 km/h,
• when the lever is moved in the direction of OFF without fully being
inserted.
To resume the cruise control, release the brake or clutch pedal or reduce the
vehicle speed to less than 180 km/h and press once on the upper part of the
rocker switch RES Ÿfig. 128 .
WARNING
It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the current road,
traffic or weather conditions. Risk of accident.
Turning off the cruise control system*
AA
Fig. 128 Turn signal and
main beam lever: switch
and rocker switch for CCS
AB
AA
Fig. 129 Turn signal and
main beam lever: switch
and rocker switch for CCS
Driving 168
Vehicles with a manual gearbox
The system is completely turned off by moving the control all the way to
the right hand side (OFF engaged), or when the vehicle is stationary, ignition
off.
Vehicles with automatic gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox
To completely turn off the cruise control system, engage the gear selection
lever into one of the following positions: P, N, R or 1 or stop the vehicle and
turn the ignition off.
AA
Intelligent technology 169
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Tips and Maintenance
Intelligent technology
Brakes
Brake servo
The brake servo amplifies the pressure you apply to the brake pedal. It works
only when the engine is running.
If the brake servo is not functioning due to a malfunction, or if the vehicle has
to be towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder to
make up for the lack of servo assistance.
WARNING
The braking distance can also be affected by external factors.
• Never let the vehicle coast with the engine switched off. Failure to do so
could result in an accident. The braking distance is increased considerably
as the brake servo does not function.
• If the brake servo is not functioning, for example if the vehicle is being
towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder than
normal.
Brake assist system (BAS)*
In an emergency, most drivers brake in time, but not with maximum force.
This results in unnecessarily long braking distances.
The brake assist system intervenes here, if you press the brake pedal very
quickly, the brake assist system registers an emergency situation. It then very
quickly builds up the full brake pressure so that the ABS can be activated
more quickly and efficiently, thus reducing the braking distance.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal. The brake assist system
switches off automatically as soon as you release the brake.
WARNING
• The risk of accident is higher if you drive too fast, if you do not keep
your distance fromthe vehicle in front, and when the road surface is slippery
or wet. The increased accident risk cannot be reduced by the brake assist
system.
• The brake assist system cannot defy the laws of physics. Slippery and
wet roads are dangerous even with the brake assist system! Therefore, it is
essential that you adjust your speed to suit the road and traffic conditions.
Do not let the extra safety features tempt you into taking any risks when
driving.
Intelligent technology 170
Anti-lock brake system and traction control
M-ABS (ABS and TCS)
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system prevents the wheels locking
during braking.
The anti-lock brake system (ABS) is an important part of the vehicle's active
safety system.
How the ABS works
If one of the wheels turns too slowly in relation to the road speed, and is close
to locking, the system will reduce the braking pressure for this wheel. The
driver is made aware of this control process by a pulsating of the brake pedal
and audible noise. This is a deliberate warning to the driver that one or more
of the wheels is tending to lock and the ABS control function has intervened.
In this situation it is important to keep the brake pedal fully depressed so the
ABS can regulate the brake application. Do not “pump”.
If you brake hard on a slippery road surface, the best possible control is
retained as the wheels do not lock.
However, ABS will not necessarily guarantee shorter braking distances in all
conditions. The braking distance could even be longer if you brake on gravel
or on fresh snow covering a slippery surface.
WARNING
• The anti-lock brake system cannot defy the laws of physics. Slippery
and wet roads are dangerous even with ABS! If you notice that the ABS is
working (to counteract locked wheels under braking), you should reduce
speed immediately to suit the road and traffic conditions. Do not let the
extra safety features tempt you into taking any risks when driving.
• The effectiveness of ABS is also determined by the tyres fitted
Ÿpage 214.
• If the running gear or brakes are modified, the effectiveness of the ABS
could be severely limited.
Traction control system (TCS)
The traction control system prevents the drive wheels from
spinning when the car is accelerating.
Description and operation of the traction control system during acceleration
(TCS)
TCS reduces engine power to help prevent the drive wheels of front-wheel
drive vehicles losing traction during acceleration. The system works in the
entire speed range in conjunction with ABS. If a malfunction should occur in
the ABS, the TCS will also be out of action.
TCS helps the vehicle to start moving, accelerate and climb a gradient in slip-
pery conditions where this may otherwise be difficult or even impossible.
The TCS is switched on automatically when the engine is started. If necessary,
it may be turned on or off pushing the button on the centre console.
When the TCS is off, the warning lamp is lit. The TCS should normally be left
switched on at all times. Only in exceptional circumstances, when slipping of
the wheels is required, should it be disconnected for example
• With compact temporary spare wheel.
• When using the snow chains.
• When driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces
• When the vehicle is bogged-down, to free it by “rocking.”
WARNING (continued)
Intelligent technology 171
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
The TCS should be switched on again afterwards as soon as possible.
WARNING
• It must be remembered that TCS cannot defy the laws of physics. This
should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when
towing a trailer.
• Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and
the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by TCS tempt you
into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.
Caution
• In order to ensure that TCS function correctly, all four wheels must be
fitted with the same tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can
cause the system to reduce engine power when this is not desired.
• Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running
gear or any components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi-
ciency of the ABS and TCS.
Electronic stabilisation program (ESP)*
General notes
The electronic stabilisation program increases the vehicle's
stability on the road.
The electronic stabilisation program helps to reduce the danger of skidding.
The electronic stabilisation programme (ESP) consists of ABS, EDL and TCS.
Electronic Stabilising Program (ESP)*
ESP reduces the danger of skidding by braking the wheels individually.
The system uses the steering wheel angle and road speed to calculate the
changes of direction desired by the driver, and constantly compares them
with the actual behaviour of the vehicle. If the desired course is not being
maintained (for instance, if the car is starting to skid), then the ESP compen-
sates automatically by braking the appropriate wheel.
The forces acting on the braked wheel bring the vehicle back to a stable
condition. If the vehicle tends to oversteer, the system will act on the front
wheel on the outside of the turn.
WARNING
• It must be remembered that ESP cannot defy the laws of physics. This
should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when
towing a trailer.
• Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and
the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by ESP tempt you
into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.
Caution
• In order to ensure that ESP functions correctly, all four wheels must be
fitted with the same tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can
cause the system to reduce engine power when this is not desired.
• Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running
gear or any components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi-
ciency of the ABS, EDL, ESP and TCS.
Note
To disconnect using the ESP button Ÿpage 151.
Intelligent technology 172
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system prevents the wheels locking during braking
Ÿpage 170.
Electronic differential lock (EDL)*
The electronic differential lock helps prevent the loss of trac-
tion caused if one of the driven wheels starts spinning.
EDL helps the vehicle to start moving, accelerate and climb a gradient in slip-
pery conditions where this may otherwise be difficult or even impossible.
The system will control the revolutions of the drive wheels using the ABS
sensors (in case of an EDL fault the warning lamp for ABS lights up)
Ÿpage 78.
At speeds of up to approximately 80 km/h, it is able to balance out differ-
ences in the speed of the driven wheels of approximately 100 rpm caused by
a slippery road surface on one side of the vehicle. It does this by braking the
wheel which has lost traction and distributing more driving force to the other
driven wheel via the differential.
To prevent the disc brake of the braked wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts
out automatically if subjected to excessive loads. The vehicle will continue to
function normally without EDL. For this reason, the driver is not informed that
the EDL has been switched off.
The EDL will switch on again automatically when the brake has cooled down.
WARNING
• When accelerating on a slippery surface, for example on ice and snow,
press the accelerator carefully. Despite EDL, the driven wheels may start to
spin. This could impair the vehicle's stability.
• Always adapt your driving style to suit road conditions and the traffic
situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by EDL tempt you into taking
any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.
Caution
Modifications to the vehicle (e. g. to the engine, the brake system, running
gear or any components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the oper-
ation of the EDL Ÿpage 191.
The traction control system (TCS)
The traction control system prevents the drive wheels from spinning when the
car is accelerating Ÿpage 170.
WARNING (continued)
Driving and the environment 173
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Driving and the environment
Running-in
Running-in a new engine
The engine needs to be run-in over the first 1,500 km.
Up to 1,000 kilometres
– Do not drive faster than three quarters of top speed.
– Do not accelerate hard.
– Avoid high engine revolutions.
– Do not tow a trailer.
From 1000 to 1500 km
– Speeds can be gradually increased to the maximum road speed
or maximum permissible engine speed (rpm).
During its first few hours of running, the internal friction in the engine is
greater than later on when all the moving parts have bedded in.
For the sake of the environment
If the engine is run-in gently, the life of the engine will be increased and its oil
consumption reduced.
Running-in tyres and brake pads
New tyres should be run-in carefully for the first 500 km. New
brake pads should be run-in carefully for the first 200 km.
During the first 200 km, you can compensate for the reduced braking effect
by applying more pressure to the brake pedal. If you need to make an emer-
gency stop, the braking distance will be longer with new brake pads than with
brake pads that have been run-in.
WARNING
• New tyres do not give maximum grip to start with, and require running-
in. This may cause an accident. Drive particularly carefully in the first 500
km.
• New brake pads must be “run-in” and do not have the correct friction
properties during the first 200 km. However, the reduced braking capacity
may be compensated by pressing on the brake pedal a little harder.
Braking effect and braking distance
The braking effect and braking distance are influenced by
driving situations and road conditions.
The efficiency of the brakes depends directly on the brake pad wear. The rate
of wear of the brake pads depends to a great extent on the conditions under
which the vehicle is operated and the way the vehicle is driven. If you often
drive in town traffic, drive short distances or have a sporty driving style, we
recommend that you have the thickness of your brake pads checked by an
Driving and the environment 174
Authorised Service Centre more frequently than recommended in the Service
Schedule.
If you drive with wet brakes, for example after driving through water, after
heavy rainfall or after washing the car, the braking effect will be reduced as
the brake discs will be wet, or possibly frozen (in winter): the brakes must be
“dried” through careful braking.
The brake fluid must be changed every two years at the latest. Heavy use of
the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake fluid is left in the system for
too long. This prevents the brakes developing their full braking effect.
WARNING
Longer braking distances and faults in the brake system increase the risk
of accidents.
• New brake pads must be run-in and do not have the correct friction
during the first 200 km. However, the reduced braking capacity may be
compensated by pressing on the brake pedal a little harder. This also
applies when new brake pads are fitted.
• If brakes are wet or frozen, or if you are driving on roads which have
been gritted with salt, braking power may set in later than normal.
• On steep descents if the brakes are excessively used they will over-
heat. Before driving down a long steep gradient, it is advisable to reduce
speed and change to a lower gear (or move the selector lever to a lower gear
if your vehicle has automatic transmission). This makes use of engine
braking and relieves the brakes.
• Never let the brakes “rub” by applying light pressure. Continuous
braking will cause the brakes to overheat and will increase the braking
distance. Apply and then release the brakes alternately.
• Never let the vehicle coast with the engine switched off. The braking
distance is increased considerably as the brake servo does not function.
• Very heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake fluid
is left in the system for too long. This impairs the braking effect.
• Non-standard or damaged front spoilers could restrict the airflow to the
brakes and cause them to overheat. Observe the relevant instructions
before purchasing accessories Ÿpage 191, “Modifications”.
• If a brake circuit fails, the braking distance will be increased consider-
ably. Contact a qualified workshop immediately and avoid unnecessary
journeys.
Exhaust gases purification system
Catalytic converter*
To conserve the useful life of the catalytic converter
– Always use unleaded petrol.
– Do not run the fuel tank dry.
– For engine oil changes, do not replenish with too much engine oil
Ÿpage 204, “Topping up engine oil ±”.
– Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump leads if necessary
Ÿpage 248.
If you notice misfiring, uneven running or loss of power when the vehicle is
moving, reduce speed immediately and have the vehicle inspected at the
nearest qualified workshop. In general, the exhaust warning lamp will light
up when any of the described symptoms occur Ÿpage 72. If this happens,
unburnt fuel can enter the exhaust system and escape into the environment.
The catalytic converter can also be damaged by overheating.
WARNING (continued)
Driving and the environment 175
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
WARNING
The catalytic converter reaches very high temperatures! Fire hazard!
• Never park where the catalytic converter could come into contact with
dry grass or inflammable materials under the vehicle.
• Do not apply additional underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the
exhaust pipes, catalytic converter or the heat shields on the exhaust
system. These materials could catch fire when the vehicle is driven.
Caution
Never fully drain the fuel tank, in this case, the irregularity of the fuel supply
may cause ignition problems. This allows unburnt fuel to enter the exhaust
system, which could cause overheating and damage the catalytic converter.
For the sake of the environment
Even when the emission control system is working perfectly, there may be a
smell of sulphur from the exhaust under some conditions. This depends on
the sulphur content of the fuel used. Quite often the problem can be reme-
died by changing to another brand of fuel.
Diesel engine particulate filter*
The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates soot produced
by burning diesel.
The diesel engine dust filter eliminates most of the soot from the exhaust gas
system. The soot particulates accumulate in the filter where they are regularly
burned. In order to facilitate this process, occasional journeys at speeds of
more than 60 kmh should be made. If the vehicle is only used for short trips
then the soot will build up in the particulate filter.
WARNING
• The diesel engine particulate filter may reach extremely high tempera-
tures; it should not enter into contact with flammable materials under-
neath the vehicle. Failure to comply could result in fire.
Caution
Vehicles equipped with a diesel engine particulate filter must not be refuelled
using biodiesel (RME), given that the fuel system may be damaged.
Driving abroad
Notes
For driving abroad, the following must be taken into consideration:
• For vehicles fitted with a catalytic converter ensure that unleaded petrol is
available for the journey. See the chapter “Refuelling”. Automobile organisa-
tions will have information about service station networks selling unleaded
fuel.
• In some countries it is possible that a vehicle model is sold under condi-
tions where some spare parts are not available or that the Authorised Service
Centres may only carry out limited repairs.
SEAT importers and distributors will gladly provide information about the
technical preparation of your vehicle in addition to necessary maintenance
and repair possibilities.
Driving and the environment 176
Adhesive strips for headlights
If you have to drive a right-hand drive vehicle in a left-hand drive country, or
vice versa, the asymmetric dipped beam headlights will dazzle oncoming
traffic.
To prevent dazzling, you must apply stickers to certain parts of the headlight
lenses. Further information is available from your Authorised Service Centre.
The rotary system should first be disconnected in vehicles fitted with self-
adjusting headlights. Contact a specialist workshop.
Covering simple headlights for driving on the left
On the right-hand side headlight, if you are changing fromdriving on the
right-hand side to the left-hand side Ÿfig. 130.
On the left-hand side headlight, if you are changing fromdriving on the right-
hand side to the left-hand side Ÿfig. 131.
Fig. 130 Right headlight
Fig. 131 Left headlight
Driving and the environment 177
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Covering simple headlights for driving on the right
On the right headlight, if you are changing from driving on the left-hand side
to the right-hand side.
On the left headlight, if you are changing from driving on the left-hand side to
the right-hand side.
Covering bi-xenon headlights for driving on the left
Fig. 132 Right headlight
Fig. 133 Left headlight
Fig. 134 Right headlight
Fig. 135 Left headlight
Driving and the environment 178
On the right-hand side headlight, if you are changing fromdriving on the
right-hand side to the left-hand side Ÿpage 177, fig. 134.
On the left-hand side headlight, if you are changing from driving on the right-
hand side to the left-hand side Ÿpage 177, fig. 135.
Covering bi-xenon headlights for driving on the right
On the right headlight, if you are changing from driving on the left-hand side
to the right-hand side.
On the left headlight, if you are changing from driving on the left-hand side to
the right-hand side.
Trailer towing
What do you need to bear in mind when towing a trailer?
Your vehicle may be used to tow a trailer when fitted with the correct equip-
ment.
If the car is supplied with a factory-fitted towing bracket it will already have
the necessary technical modifications and meet the statutory requirements
for towing a trailer. For the after-market fitting of a trailer towing bracket see
Ÿpage 193.
Fig. 136 Right headlight
Fig. 137 Left headlight
Driving and the environment 179
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Connectors
Your vehicle is fitted with a 12-pin connector for the electrical connection
between the trailer and the vehicle.
If the trailer has a 7-pin plug you will need to use an adapter cable. This is
available from any SEAT dealer.
Trailer weight / draw bar loading
Never exceed the authorised towing limit. If you do not load the trailer up to
the maximum permitted trailer weight, you can then climb correspondingly
steeper gradients.
The maximum trailer weights listed are only applicable for altitudes up to
1,000 m above sea level. With increasing altitude the engine power and
therefore the vehicle's climbing ability are impaired because of the reduced
air density. The maximum trailer weight has to be reduced accordingly. The
weight of the vehicle and trailer combination must be reduced by 10% for
every further 1,000 m (or part thereof). The gross combination weight is the
actual weight of the laden vehicle plus the actual weight of the laden trailer.
Where possible, operate the trailer with the maximum permitted draw bar
weight on the ball joint of the towing bracket, but do not exceed the specified
limit.
The figures for trailer weights and draw bar weights that are given on the
data plate of the towing bracket are for certification purposes only. The
correct figures for your specific model, which may be lower than these figures
for the towing bracket, are given in the registration documentsŸSection
“Technical data”.
Distributing the load
Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy objects are as near to the axle as
possible. Loads carried in the trailer must be secured to prevent them
moving.
Tyre pressure
Set tyre pressure to the maximum permissible pressure shown on the sticker
on the inside of the fuel tank flap. Set the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in
accordance with the trailer manufacturer's recommendations.
Exterior mirrors
Check whether you can see enough of the road behind the trailer with the
standard mirrors. If this is not the case you should have additional mirrors
fitted. Both exterior mirrors should be mounted on hinged extension
brackets. Adjust the mirrors to give sufficient vision to the rear.
WARNING
Never transport people in a trailer. This could result in fatal accidents.
Note
• Towing a trailer places additional demands on the vehicle. We recom-
mend additional services between the normal inspection intervals if the
vehicle is used frequently for towing a trailer.
• Find out whether special regulations apply to towing a trailer in your
country.
Ball coupling of towing bracket*
Depending on the model version, the ball coupling for the towing bracket may
be found in the tool box.
The ball coupling is provided with instructions on fitting and removing the
ball coupling of the towing bracket.
Driving and the environment 180
WARNING
The towing bracket ball coupling must be stored securely in the luggage
compartment to prevent them being flung through the vehicle and causing
injury.
Note
• By law, the ball coupling must be removed if a trailer is not being towed
and it obscures the number plate.
Driving tips
Driving with a trailer always requires extra care.
Weight distribution
The weight distribution of a loaded trailer with an unladen vehicle is very
unfavourable. However, if this cannot be avoided, drive extra slowly to allow
for the unbalanced weight distribution.
Speed
The stability of the vehicle and trailer is reduced with increasing speed. For
this reason it is advisable not to drive at the maximum permissible speed in
unfavourable road, weather or wind conditions. This applies especially when
driving downhill.
You should always reduce speed immediately if the trailer shows the slightest
sign of snaking. Never try to stop the “snaking” by increasing speed.
Always brake in good time. If the trailer has an overrun brake, apply the
brakes gently at first and then firmly. This will prevent the jerking that can be
caused by the trailer wheels locking. Select a low gear in good time before
going down a steep descent. This enables you to use the engine braking to
slow down the vehicle.
Heating
At very high temperatures and during prolonged ascents, driving in a low gear
and high engine speed, always monitor the temperature indicator for the
coolant Ÿpage 55.
Electronic Stabilisation Program*
Do not switch off the ESP* when towing a trailer. The ESP* makes it easier to
stabilise if the trailer starts to snake.
Driving economically and with respect for the
environment
General notes
Fuel consumption depends largely on your personal driving
style.
Fuel economy, environmental impact and wear on the engine, brakes and
tyres depend largely on three factors:
• Personal driving style
• Conditions of use (weather, road surface)
• Technical requirements
By adopting an economical driving style and anticipating the traffic situation
ahead, you can easily reduce fuel consumption by 10-15%. This section
suggests methods of lessening the impact on the environment and reducing
your operating costs at the same time.
Driving and the environment 181
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Think ahead when driving
A vehicle uses most fuel when accelerating. If you think ahead when driving,
you will need to brake less and thus accelerate less. Wherever possible, let
the vehicle roll slowly to a stop, for instance when you can see that the next
traffic lights are red.
Regular servicing
By taking your car to an Authorised Service Centre for regular servicing you
can establish a basis for good fuel economy before you start driving. A well-
serviced engine gives you the benefit of improved fuel efficiency as well as
maximum reliability and an enhanced resale value.
A badly serviced engine can consume up to 10% more fuel than necessary.
Check the oil level every time you fill the tank Ÿpage 203. Oil consumption
depends to a great extent on the engine load and engine speed. Depending
on your personal driving style, oil consumption can be up to 1 litre per 1,000
km.
Avoid short journeys
The engine and catalytic converter need to reach their proper working
temperature in order to minimise fuel consumption and emissions.
Directly after a cold start, the engine uses about 50-70 litres of fuel per
100 km. This figure then drops to 20-30 litres per 100 km after about one
kilometre. The engine only reaches its working temperature after about four
kilometres, when fuel consumption will return to a normal level. You should
therefore avoid short journeys.
The ambient temperature has a decisive influence.
The illustration shows the different rates of fuel consumption for the same
distance at both +20°C and -10°C. Your vehicle will use more fuel in winter
than in summer.
Fig. 138 Fuel consump-
tion in litres per 100 km at
two different ambient
temperatures
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 182
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle
General notes
Regular washing and care help maintain the value of your
vehicle.
Regular care
Regular and expert care helps to maintain the value of the vehicle. This may
also be one of the requirements for acknowledging warranty claims in the
event of corrosion or paint defects.
The best way to protect the car against environmental contaminants is to
wash and wax it frequently. The longer substances such as insects, bird drop-
pings, resinous tree sap, road dirt, industrial deposits, tar, soot or road salt
and other aggressive materials remain on the vehicle, the more damage they
do to the paintwork. High temperatures (for instance in strong sunlight)
further intensify the corrosive effect.
After the period when salt is put on the roads it is important to have the
underside of the vehicle washed thoroughly.
Car care products
Car care products are available from your Authorised Service Centre. Keep the
product instructions until you have used up the product.
WARNING
• Car care products can be toxic. For this, they must always be kept
closed in their original container. Keep out of children's reach. Failure to
comply could result in poisoning.
• Always read and observe the instructions and warnings on the package
before using car care products. Improper use could damage your health or
your vehicle. The use of certain products may produce noxious vapours;
these should be used in well ventilated areas.
• Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, nail varnish remover or other
volatile fluids. These are toxic and highly flammable. There is a fire / explo-
sion risk.
• Before you wash your vehicle, or carry out any maintenance, switch off
the engine, apply the handbrake firmly and remove the key from the igni-
tion.
Caution
Never attempt to remove dirt, mud or dust if the surface of the vehicle is dry.
Never use a dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes. This could damage the
paintwork or glass on your vehicle. Soak dirt, mud or dust with plenty of
water.
For the sake of the environment
• When purchasing car care products, try to select ones which are not
harmful to the environment.
• Left over car care products should not be disposed of with ordinary house-
hold waste. Observe the disposal information on the package.
WARNING (continued)
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 183
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Care of the vehicle exterior
Automatic car washes
The paint is so durable that the car can normally be washed without problems
in an automatic car wash. However, the effect on the paint depends to a large
extent on the design of the car wash, the brushes used, the filtering of the
wash water and the type of detergents and wax solutions used, etc.
After the car has been washed, the brakes could respond later than normal as
the brake discs and brake pads will be wet, or even frozen in winter. You must
“dry” the brakes by applying the brakes carefully several times Ÿpage 173,
“Braking effect and braking distance”.
WARNING
Moisture, ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk of
accident.
Washing by hand
Washing the vehicle
– First soften the dirt with plenty of water and rinse off.
– Clean the vehicle with a soft sponge, a glove or a brush. Start on
the roof and work your way down. Use only light pressure.
– Rinse the sponge or glove as much as possible.
– Special car shampoo should only be used for very stubborn dirt.
– Clean the wheels, sill panels etc. last using a different sponge or
glove.
– Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with water.
– Dry the surface of the vehicle gently using a chamois leather.
– If it is cold, dry the rubber seals and the surfaces they touch with
a cloth to prevent them freezing. Apply silicone spray to the
rubber seals.
After cleaning the vehicle
– If possible, avoid sudden braking directly after washing the
vehicle. You must “dry” the brakes by applying the brakes care-
fully several times Ÿpage 173, “Braking effect and braking
distance”.
WARNING
• The ignition must always be switched off before the vehicle is washed.
• Protect your hands and arms from cuts on sharp metal edges when
cleaning the underbody, the inside of the wheel housings etc. Risk of
injury.
• Moisture, ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk
of accident.
Caution
• Never attempt to remove dirt, mud or dust if the surface of the vehicle is
dry. Never use a dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes. This could scratch
the paintwork or glass on your vehicle.
• Washing the vehicle in cold weather: if the vehicle is rinsed with a hose,
do not direct the water into the lock cylinders or the gaps around the doors,
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 184
luggage compartment, or bonnet. This could cause them to freeze. Otherwise
there is a risk of malfunction.
For the sake of the environment
In the interests of environmental protection, the car should be washed only
in specially provided wash bays. This prevents toxic, oil-laden waste water
entering the sewerage system. In some districts, washing vehicles anywhere
else may be prohibited.
Note
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
Washing the car with a high pressure cleaner
Be particularly careful when using a high pressure cleaner!
– Always observe the instructions for the high-pressure cleaner,
particularly those concerning the pressure and the spraying
distance.
– Increase the spraying distance for soft materials and painted
bumpers.
– Do not use a high pressure cleaner to remove ice or snow from
windows Ÿpage 185.
– Never use concentrated jet nozzles or so-called “dirt blasters”
Ÿ .
– If possible, avoid sudden braking directly after washing the
vehicle. You must “dry” the brakes by applying the brakes care-
fully several times Ÿpage 173.
WARNING
• Never wash tyres with a concentrated jet or cylindrical jet (“rotating
nozzle”). Even at large spraying distances and short cleaning times, visible
and invisible damage can occur to the tyres. This may cause an accident.
• Moisture, ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk
of accident.
Caution
• Do not use water hotter than 60°C. This could damage the car.
• To avoid damage to the vehicle, maintain a sufficient distance from sensi-
tive materials for example: flexible hoses, plastic, sound proofing, etc. This is
especially important for bumpers painted in the same colour as the vehicle.
The closer the nozzle is to the surface, the greater the wear on the material.
Waxing the car
Regular waxing protects the paintwork.
You need to apply wax to your car if water does not form small drops and run
off the paintwork when it is clean.
Good quality hard wax is available from your Authorised Service Centre.
A good coat of wax helps to protects the paintwork from environmental
contaminants Ÿpage 182. It is also effective in protecting against minor
scratches.
Even if a wax solution is used regularly in the car wash, it is advisable to
protect the paint with a coat of hard wax at least twice a year.
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 185
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Polishing the paintwork
Polishing brings back gloss to the paintwork.
Polishing is only necessary if the paint has lost its shine, and the gloss cannot
be brought back by applying wax. Polish can be obtained from your Author-
ised Service Centre.
The car must be waxed after polishing if the polish used does not contain wax
compounds to seal the paint Ÿpage 184, “Waxing the car”.
Caution
To prevent damage to the paintwork:
• Do not use polishes and hard wax on painted parts with a matt finish or
on plastic parts.
• Do not polish your vehicle in a sandy or dusty environment.
Caring for plastic parts
Solvents will damage plastic parts.
If normal washing fails to clean plastic parts, clean them with special solvent-
free plastic cleaning and care products.
Caution
• The use of liquid air conditioners directly over the air vents of the vehicle
may damage the plastic parts if the liquid is accidentally spilled.
• Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.
Cleaning windows and exterior mirrors
Cleaning the windows
– Moisten the windows with commercially available, alcohol based
glass cleaner.
– Dry the windows with a clean chamois leather or a lint-free cloth.
Removing snow
– Use a small brush to remove snow from the windows and mirrors.
Removing ice
– Use a de-icer spray.
Use a clean cloth or chamois leather to dry the windows. Chamois leathers
that have been used on painted surfaces are not suitable for use on windows.
They will be soiled with wax deposits that would smear the windows.
If possible use a de-icing spray to remove ice. If you use an ice scraper, push
it in one direction only. Do not move it to and fro.
Use window cleaner or a silicone remover to clean off rubber, oil, grease and
silicone deposits.
Wax deposits have to be removed with a special cleaner that is available from
your Authorised Service Centre. Wax deposits on the windscreen could cause
the wiper blades to judder. A window cleaner specifically for removing wax
will stop the blades juddering if added to the windscreen washer fluid.
Grease removing cleaners will not remove wax deposits.
Caution
• Never use warm or hot water to remove snow and ice from windows and
mirrors. This could cause the glass to crack!
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 186
• The heating element for the rear window is located on the inner side of the
window. To prevent damage, do not put stickers over the heating elements on
the inside of the window.
Cleaning windscreen wiper blades
Clean wiper blades are essential for clear vision.
1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the windscreen
wiper blades.
2. Use window cleaner to clean the windscreen wiper blades. Use a
sponge or a cloth to remove stubborn stains.
Care of rubber seals
If rubber seals are well looked after, they will not freeze so
quickly.
1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the rubber seals.
2. Apply a specialist care product to the rubber seals.
The weather strips on the doors, windows, bonnet and rear lid will remain
pliable and last longer if they are treated with a suitable care product (for
example silicone spray).
Caring for rubber seals will also prevent premature ageing and leaks. The
doors will be easier to open. If rubber seals are well looked after, they will not
freeze so quickly in winter.
Door lock cylinders
The door lock cylinders can freeze up in winter.
To de-ice the lock cylinders you should only use spray with lubricating and
anti-corrosive properties.
Cleaning chrome parts
1. Clean chrome parts with a damp cloth.
2. Polish chrome parts with a soft, dry cloth.
If this does not provide satisfying results, use a specialist chrome cleaning
product. Chrome cleaning products will remove stains and coatings from the
surface.
Caution
To prevent scratching chrome surfaces:
• Never use an abrasive care product on chrome.
• Do not clean or polish chrome parts in a sandy or dusty environment.
Steel wheels
– Clean steel wheels regularly using a separate sponge.
Use an industrial cleaner to remove brake dust. Any damage to the paint on
steel wheels should be repaired before the metal starts to rust.
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 187
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
WARNING
• Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distances
and short cleaning times, visible and invisible damage can occur to the
tyres. This may cause an accident.
• Moisture, ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk
of accident. If possible, avoid sudden braking immediately after washing
the vehicle. You must “dry” the brakes by applying the brakes carefully
several times Ÿpage 173, “Braking effect and braking distance”.
Cleaning alloy wheels
Every two weeks
– Wash salt and brake dust from alloy wheels.
– Use an acid free detergent to clean the wheels.
Every three months
– Apply a hard wax compound to the wheels.
Alloy wheels require regular attention to preserve their appearance. It is
important to remove road salt and brake dust by washing the wheels at
regular intervals, otherwise the finish will be impaired.
Always use an acid-free detergent for alloy wheels.
Car polish or other abrasive agents should not be used. If the protective
coating is damaged, e.g. by stone impact, the damaged area should be
repaired immediately.
WARNING
• Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distances
and short cleaning times, visible and invisible damage can occur to the
tyres. This may cause an accident.
• Moisture, ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk
of accident. If possible, avoid sudden braking immediately after washing
the vehicle. You must “dry” the brakes by applying the brakes carefully
several times Ÿpage 173, “Braking effect and braking distance”.
Underbody sealant
The underside of the vehicle is coated to protect it from corro-
sion and damage.
The protective coating could be damaged when driving. We recommend that
the protective coating under the body and on the running gear should be
checked, and reinstated if necessary, before and after the winter season.
We recommend that repair work and additional anti-corrosion work is carried
out by your Authorised Service Centre.
WARNING
Do not apply underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes,
catalytic converter or the heat shields on the exhaust system. The heat of
the exhaust system or the engine could cause them to ignite! This is a fire
hazard.
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 188
Cleaning the engine compartment
Take special care when cleaning the engine compartment.
Anti-corrosion treatment
The engine compartment and the surface of the power unit are given anti-
corrosion treatment at the factory.
Good corrosion protection is particularly important in winter when the car is
frequently driven on salted roads. To prevent the salt corroding the vehicle,
the entire engine compartment should be thoroughly cleaned before and
after the salting period.
Your Authorised Service Centre is able to provide the correct cleaning and
preserving products and has the necessary equipment. For this reason, we
recommend having this work performed by them.
The anti-corrosion protection is usually removed if the engine compartment
is cleaned with grease removing solutions, or if you have the engine cleaned.
If this job is carried out, you should ensure that all surfaces, seams, joints and
components in the engine compartment are given anti-corrosion treatment
afterwards.
WARNING
• When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety
warnings Ÿpage 198.
• Switch off the engine, apply the parking brake firmly and always
remove the key from the ignition before you open the bonnet.
• Allow the engine to cool before you clean the engine compartment.
• Do not clean the underside of vehicle wheel arches without protecting
your hands and arms. You may cut yourself on sharp-edged metal parts.
Failure to comply could result in injury.
• Moisture, ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk
of accident. If possible, avoid sudden braking immediately after washing
the vehicle.
• Never touch the radiator fan. It is temperature-controlled and could
start automatically, even when the key is removed from the ignition!
For the sake of the environment
Fuel, grease and oil deposits could be removed when the engine is washed.
The polluted water must be cleaned in an oil separator. For this reason,
engine washing should be carried out only by a qualified workshop or a suit-
able filling station.
Care of the vehicle interior
Cleaning plastic parts and the dash panel
– Use a clean, damp cloth to clean plastic parts and the dash
panel.
– If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a special
solvent-free plastic cleaning product.
WARNING
Never clean the dash panel and surface of the airbag module with cleaners
containing solvents. Solvents cause the surface to become porous. If the
airbag inflates, disintegrating plastic parts can cause substantial injuries.
WARNING (continued)
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 189
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Caution
Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.
Cleaning wooden trim*
– Clean the wooden trim with a clean cloth moistened with water.
– If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a gentle soap
solution.
Caution
Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.
Cleaning cloth seat covers and fabric trim
Cloth seat covers and fabric trim on the doors, headlining etc. can be cleaned
with a special interior cleanser or with dry foam and a soft brush.
Cleaning leather*
Normal cleaning
– Moisten a cotton or woollen cloth with water and wipe over the
leather surfaces.
Cleaning stubborn stains
– More stubborn dirt can be removed using a mild soap solution
(pure liquid soap; two tablespoons diluted in one litre of water)
and a cloth.
– Do not let the water soak through the leather or soak into the
seams.
– Then wipe off with a soft, dry cloth.
Leather care
– The leather should be treated regularly (about twice a year) with
a special leather-care product, which is available from your
Authorised Service Centre.
– Apply these products very sparingly.
– Then wipe off with a soft, dry cloth.
SEAT does everything possible to preserve the special qualities of leather, as
a natural product. Because of the natural properties of the specially selected
hides employed, the finished leather has a certain sensitivity to grease and
dirt, etc. so a degree of care is required in everyday use and when looking
after the leather.
Dust and grit in the pores and seams can scratch and damage the surface. If
the vehicle is left standing in the sun for long periods, the leather should be
protected against direct sunlight to prevent it from fading. However, slight
colour variations in high-quality natural leather are normal.
Caution
• Do not use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, spot removers or similar
products on leather.
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 190
• To avoid damage, stubborn stains should be removed by a qualified
workshop.
Cleaning seat belts
A dirty belt may stop the seat belt working properly.
Keep the seat belts clean and check all seat belts regularly.
Cleaning seat belts
– Carefully pull the dirty seat belt right out and leave it out.
– Clean the dirty seat belts with a gentle soap solution.
– Allow the seat belt fabric to dry.
– Do not roll up the seat belt until it is dry.
If large stains form on the belts the belt will not retract correctly into the auto-
matic belt retractor.
WARNING
• Do not use chemical cleaning agents on the seat belts, as this can
impair the strength of the webbing. Ensure that the belts do not come into
contact with corrosive fluids.
• Check the condition of all seat belts at regular intervals. If you notice
that the belt webbing, fittings, retractor mechanism or buckle of any of the
belts is damaged, the belt must be replaced by a specialist workshop.
• Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts
must not be removed or modified in any way.
Caution
After cleaning, allow seat belts to dry completely before rolling them up.
Otherwise the belt retractors could become damaged.
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications 191
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications
Accessories and parts
Always consult an Authorised Service Centre before
purchasing accessories and parts.
Your vehicle is designed to offer a high standard of active and passive safety.
Before purchasing accessories and parts, and before making technical
changes to your car, we recommend that you consult your Authorised Service
Centre.
SEAT dealerships will be happy to provide you with the latest information
about the use, legal requirements and recommendations from the manufac-
turer regarding accessories and parts.
We recommend you use only SEAT Approved Accessories
®
and SEAT
Approved Spare Parts
®
. This way, SEAT can guarantee that the product in
question is suitable, reliable and safe. Authorised Service Centres have the
necessary experience and facilities to ensure that parts are installed correctly
and professionally.
Despite continuous observation of the market, SEAT is not able to assess the
reliability, safety and suitability of parts not approved by SEAT. For this reason
SEAT cannot assume responsibility for any non-genuine parts used, even if
these parts have been approved by an official testing agency or are covered
by an official approval certificate.
Any equipment subsequently installed which has a direct effect on the
vehicle and/or the way it is driven (e.g. cruise control system or electronically-
controlled suspension) must be approved by SEAT for use in your vehicle and
bear the e mark (the European Union's authorisation symbol).
If any additional electrical components are fitted which do not serve to
control the vehicle itself (for instance a refrigerator box, laptop or ventilator
fan, etc.), these must bear the CE mark (European Union manufacturer
conformity declaration).
WARNING
Accessories, for example telephone holders or drink holders, should never
be fitted on the covers of, or within the working range of, the airbags. If
they are, there is a danger of resulting injury if the airbag is triggered in an
accident.
Modifications
Modifications must always be carried out according to our
specifications.
Unauthorised modifications to the electronic components or software in the
vehicle may cause malfunctions. Due to the way the electronic components
are linked together in networks, other systems may be affected by the faults.
This can seriously impair safety, lead to excessive wear of components, and
also invalidate your vehicle registration documents.
SEAT Authorised Service Centres cannot be held liable for any damage
caused by modifications and/or work performed incorrectly.
For this reason, we recommend that all work should be performed by an
Authorised Service Centre using genuine and SEAT
®
approved parts and
accessories.
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications 192
WARNING
Incorrectly performed modifications or other work on your vehicle can lead
to malfunctions and cause accidents.
Roof aerial*
The vehicle may be fitted with a collapsible roof aerial* with anti-theft
system*, which can be folded backwards, when, for example, going through
an automatic carwash.
To fold
Unscrew the aerial rod, tilting it backwards into a horizontal position and then
screw in again.
To return to working position
Continue in the reverse order to that given in the previous instruction.
Mobile telephones and two-way radios
You will require an external aerial for mobile phones and two-
way radios.
SEAT has approved your vehicle for use with mobile telephones and two-way
radios providing the following conditions are observed:
• The correct installation of an external aerial,
• transmitting power of maximum 10 watts.
An external aerial is needed to give the equipment its optimal range.
First consult your Authorised Service Centre if you wish to use a mobile tele-
phone or a two-way radio with a transmitting power in excess of 10 watts.
Here you will receive information concerning the technical possibilities for
retrofitting this equipment.
Mobile telephones and two-way radios should be fitted only by a qualified
workshop, for example an Authorised Service Centre.
WARNING
• Always concentrate primarily on driving. If you are distracted while
driving you could have an accident.
• Never attach the telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the
airbag units or within the range of the airbags, danger of injury if the airbag
is triggered.
• If you use mobile telephones or two-way radios in the vehicle without
an external aerial, electromagnetic radiation in the vehicle could exceed
authorised limits. This also applies to external aerials that have not been
correctly installed.
Caution
Failure to observe the above conditions could cause the electronics to
malfunction. The most common causes of faults are:
• no external aerial,
• external aerial incorrectly installed,
• transmitting power in excess of 10 watts.
Note
Please observe the operating instructions of your mobile telephone / two-way
radio.
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications 193
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Fitting a towing bracket*
It is possible to fit a towing bracket to the rear of the vehicle.
Fig. 139 Attachment
points for towing bracket
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications 194
If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the vehicle is purchased, this must be
completed according to the instructions of the towing bracket manufacturer.
The attachment points for the towing bracket are underneath the vehicle.
The distance between the centre of the ball coupling and the ground should
never be lower than the measurement indicated when the vehicle is fully
loaded including the maximum resting weight.
Measurement for securing the towing bracket:
65 mm (minimum)
350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle)
357 mm
569 mm
875 mm
1,040 mm
Fitting a towing bracket
• Driving with a trailer implies additional work for the vehicle. Therefore,
before fitting a towing bracket, please contact an Authorised Service Centre
to check whether your cooling system needs modification.
• Observe the legal requirements in your country (e.g. the fitting of a sepa-
rate warning lamp).
• Certain vehicle components, e.g. the rear bumper must be removed and
reinstalled. The towing bracket securing bolts must be tightened using a
torque wrench, and an electrical socket must be used to connect to the
vehicle's electrical system. This requires specialist knowledge and tools.
• The figures in the illustration show the dimensions and attachment points
that must be observed if you are retrofitting a towing bracket.
WARNING
Towing brackets should be fitted by specialists.
• If the towing bracket is incorrectly installed, there is serious danger of
an accident.
• For your own safety, please observe the instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the towing bracket.
Caution
• If the electrical socket is incorrectly installed, this could cause damage to
the vehicle's electrical system.
Note
For the sports model (FR, Cupra...), fitting of a trailer bracket is not recom-
mended due to the design of the bumpers.
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
AG
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels 195
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Checking and refilling levels
Refuelling
The fuel cap cover opens automatically with the central
locking system. The tank holds approximately 55 litres.
Unscrewing the tank cap
– Lift the lid.
– Unscrew the cap, turning it anti-clockwise.
Closing the tank cap
– Screw the tank cap to the right, until the point of feeling a “click”.
– Close the drawer. Make sure you hear it click into place. The tank
cap is secured with an anti-loss attachment
The tank flap is at the rear of the vehicle on the right.
If the automatic filler nozzle is operated correctly, it will switch itself off as
soon as the tank is “full”. Never attempt to fill beyond this point, as this will
fill the expansion chamber. Fuel may leak out if ambient conditions are warm.
The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is given on a sticker on the inside of the
fuel tank flap, where further notes on fuel can be found.
Releasing the fuel tank flap by hand
If the central locking system fails, the fuel tank flap can be opened manually
as follows:
• Open the tailgate
• Remove the cover from the right side trim in the luggage compartment.
• Insert a hand and pull the locking device back
• Open the cap and take out the plug.
WARNING
• Fuel is highly inflammable and can cause serious burns and other inju-
ries.
− Never smoke or use any naked flame when filling the fuel tank of the
vehicle, or a spare fuel canister, with fuel. This is an explosion hazard.
− Follow legal requirements for the use of spare fuel canisters.
− For safety reasons we do not recommend carrying a spare fuel
canister in the vehicle. The canister could be damaged in an accident
and leak.
• If, in exceptional circumstances, you have to carry a spare fuel canister,
please observe the following points:
Fig. 140 Tank flap open
Checking and refilling levels 196
− Never fill the spare fuel canister inside the vehicle or on it. An elec-
trostatic charge could build up during filling, causing the fuel fumes to
ignite. This may be fatally explosive. Always place the canister on the
ground to fill it.
− Insert the fuel nozzle into the mouth of the canister as far as
possible.
− If the spare fuel canister is made of metal, the filling nozzle must be
in contact with the canister during filling. This helps prevent an electro-
static charge building up.
− Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the luggage compartment. Fuel
vapours are explosive. Danger of death.
Caution
• Fuel spills should be removed from the paintwork immediately.
• Never run the tank completely dry. An irregular fuel supply could cause
misfiring. As a result, unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and
cause damage.
For the sake of the environment
Do not try to put in more fuel after the automatic filler nozzle has switched off;
this may cause the fuel to overflow if it becomes warm.
Petrol
Petrol types
The correct petrol types are listed on a sticker inside the fuel
tank flap.
Only unleaded petrol, corresponding to the standard DIN EN 228, may be
used for vehicles with catalytic converters (EN = “European Norm”).
Petrol types are categorised according to their octane number, e. g. 91, 95,
98 RON (RON = “research octane number”). You may use petrol with a higher
octane number than the one recommended for your engine. However, this
has no advantage in terms of fuel consumption and engine power.
Caution
• Even one full tank of leaded fuel would permanently impair the efficiency
of the catalytic converter.
• High engine speed and full throttle can damage the engine when using
petrol with an octane rating lower than the correct grade for the engine.
For the sake of the environment
Just one full tank of leaded fuel would seriously impair the efficiency of the
catalytic converter.
Petrol additives
Petrol additives improve the quality of the petrol.
The quality of the petrol influences running behaviour, performance and
service life of the engine. For this reason you should use good quality petrol
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels 197
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
containing additives. These additives will help to prevent corrosion, keep the
fuel system clean and prevent deposits from building up in the engine.
If good quality petrol with additives is not available or engine problems occur,
the required additives must be added during refuelling.
Diesel
Diesel*
Diesel fuel must correspond to DIN EN 590 (EN = “European standard”). It
must have a cetane number (CN) of at least 51. The cetane number indicates
the ignition quality of the diesel fuel.
Notes on filling with fuel Ÿpage 195.
RME fuel*
Only those vehicles fitted with special equipment (number PR
2G0 for biodiesel use) may use biodiesel corresponding to
the standard DIN EN 14214.
The biodiesel fuel must comply with the DIN EN 14.214 (FAME) Standard.
• Biodiesel is a methylester obtained from rapeseed oil.
• DIN is a German abbreviation for “Deutsches Institut für Normung e.V.”,
the German standards institute.
• EN means European Norm.
• FAME is the English abbreviation “Fatty Acid Methyl Ester”
If the date sticker of the vehicle includes the number PR 2G0 optional equip-
ment) this means that that vehicle has been prepared for biodiesel use.
Your Authorised Service Centre or automobile association will be able to
advise on where you can obtain RME biodiesel fuel.
Your Authorised Service Centre can also be consulted to know if the vehicle
has been prepared for biodiesel use.
Things to note about RME fuel (biodiesel)
• The performance of a vehicle using biodiesel maybe somewhat reduced.
• Fuel consumption of a vehicle using biodiesel may be slightly higher.
• RME fuel can be used in winter at temperatures down to approx. -10°C.
• At outside temperatures below -10°C, we recommend using winter diesel
fuel.
Caution
• RME fuel can damage the fuel system in vehicles that are not suitably
adjusted.
• If you decide to use biodiesel in your vehicle, please use only RME fuel
which is DIN E 14,214 compliant.
• If you use biodiesel that does not meet the required standard, the fuel
filter could become clogged.
Note
• In case of low exterior temperatures and a biodiesel fuel percentage of
higher than 50%, an increase in gas emission may occur during operation of
the independent heating.
• The fuel filter may become clogged when fuel is changed to biodiesel. For
this reason, we recommend that, about every 300 or 400 km, following a fuel
change, also change the fuel filter. Also. note the instructions in the inspec-
tion and maintenance plan.
Checking and refilling levels 198
• If the vehicle is to remain parked for more than about two weeks, we
recommend filling the fuel tank with biodiesel and driving about 50 km in
order to avoid damage to the injection system.
Winter driving
Diesel can thicken in winter.
Winter-grade diesel
When using “summer-grade diesel fuel”, difficulties may be experienced at
sub-zero temperatures because the fuel thickens due to wax separation. For
this reason, “winter-grade diesel fuel” is available in some countries during
the cold months. It can be used at temperatures as low as -22°C.
In countries with different climatic conditions the diesel fuel sold generally
has different temperature characteristics. Check with an Authorised Service
Centre or filling stations in the country concerned regarding the type of diesel
fuels available.
Filter pre-heater
Your vehicle is fitted with a fuel filter pre-heater, making it well equipped for
operation in winter. This ensures that the fuel system remains operational to
approx. -24°C, provided you use winter-grade diesel which is safe to -15°C.
However, if the fuel has waxed to such an extent that the engine will not start
at temperatures of under -24°C, simply place the vehicle in a warm place for
a while.
Caution
Do not mix fuel additives (“thinners”, or similar additives) with diesel fuel.
Working in the engine compartment
Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the
engine must be carried out cautiously.
Before starting any work on the engine or in the engine compart-
ment:
1. Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition.
2. Apply the handbrake.
3. Move the gear stick to neutral or the selector lever to position P.
4. Wait for the engine to cool down.
5. Keep children away from the vehicle.
6. Raise the bonnet Ÿpage 200.
You should not do any work in the engine compartment unless you know
exactly how to carry out the jobs and have the correct tools! Have the work
carried out by a qualified workshop if you are uncertain.
All service fluids and consumables, e.g. coolant, engine oil, spark plugs and
batteries, are being constantly developed. SEAT provides a constant flow of
information to the Authorised Service Centres concerning modifications. For
this reason we recommend that you have service fluids and consumables
replaced by an Authorised Service Centre. Please observe the relevant
instructions Ÿpage 191. The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a
hazardous area Ÿ .
Checking and refilling levels 199
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
WARNING
All work on the engine or in the engine compartment, e.g. checking and
refilling fluids, involves the danger of injury and scalding as well as the risk
of accident or fire.
• Never open the bonnet if you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping
from the engine compartment. Otherwise, there is a risk of sustaining
burns. Wait until no more steam or coolant is emitted, then allow the
engine to cool before carefully opening the bonnet.
• Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition.
• Apply the handbrake and move the gear stick to neutral or selector
lever to position P.
• Keep children away from the vehicle.
• Never touch hot engine parts. There is a risk of burns.
• Never spill liquids on a hot engine or on a hot exhaust gas system. This
is a fire hazard.
• Avoid causing short-circuits in the electrical system, particularly at the
points where the jump leads are attached Ÿpage 249. The battery could
explode.
• Never touch the radiator fan. It is temperature controlled and could
start automatically, even when the engine has been switched off and the
key removed from the ignition!
• Do not unscrew the cap on the expansion tank when the engine is hot.
If the coolant is hot, the cooling system will be pressurised!
• Protect face, hands and arms by covering the cap with a large, thick
cloth to protect against escaping coolant and steam.
• Always make sure you have not left any objects, such as cleaning cloths
and tools, in the engine compartment.
• If you have to work underneath the vehicle, you must use suitable
stands additionally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of accident!. A
hydraulic jack is insufficient for securing the vehicle and there is a risk of
injury.
• If any work has to be performed when the engine is started or with the
engine running, there is an additional, potentially fatal, safety risk from the
rotating parts, such as the drive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., and
from the high-voltage ignition system. You should also observe the
following points:
− Never touch the electrical wiring of the ignition system.
− Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing and long hair do not get
trapped in rotating engine parts. Danger of death. Before starting any
work remove jewellery, tie back and cover hair, and wear tight-fitting
clothes.
− Always think carefully about pressing the accelerator if a gear is
engaged in either an automatic or manual gearbox. The vehicle could
move, even if the handbrake is applied. Danger of death.
• If work has to be carried out on the fuel system or on electrical compo-
nents, you must observe the following safety notes in addition to the above
warnings:
− Always disconnect the battery. The vehicle must be unlocked when
this is done, otherwise the alarm will be triggered.
− Do not smoke.
− Never work near naked flames.
− Always have a fire extinguisher on hand.
Caution
When changing or topping up service fluids, make absolutely certain that you
fill the fluids into the correct reservoirs. Failure to observe this point will result
in serious malfunctions and engine damage!
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels 200
For the sake of the environment
Service fluids leaks are harmful to the environment. For this reason you
should make regular checks on the ground underneath your vehicle. If you
find spots of oil or other fluids, have your vehicle inspected in a qualified
workshop.
Opening the bonnet
The bonnet is released from inside the vehicle.
Before opening the bonnet ensure that the windscreen wipers are in
rest position.
– To release the bonnet, pull the lever under the dashboard
Ÿfig. 141 in the direction indicated (arrow). The bonnet will be
released by a spring action Ÿ .
– Lift the bonnet using the release lever (arrow) and open the
bonnet.
– Release the bonnet stay and secure it in fixture designed for this
in the bonnet.
WARNING
Hot coolant can scald!
• Never open the bonnet if you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping
from the engine compartment.
Fig. 141 Detail of the foot
well: The release lever for
the bonnet is located in
the driver side foot well
Fig. 142 Arrester hook
for bonnet.
Checking and refilling levels 201
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
• Wait until no more steam, smoke or coolant is emitted from the bonnet,
then carefully open the bonnet.
• When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety
warnings Ÿpage 198.
Closing the bonnet
– Raise the bonnet slightly.
– Release the bonnet stay and replace it in its support.
– At a height of about 30 cm let it fall so it is locked.
If the bonnet does not close, do not press downwards. Open it once more and
let it fall as before.
WARNING
If the bonnet is not closed properly, it could open while you are driving and
completely obscure your view of the road. Risk of accident.
• After closing the bonnet, always check that it is properly secured. The
bonnet must be flush with the surrounding body panels.
• If you notice that the bonnet latch is not secured when the vehicle is
moving, stop the vehicle immediately and close the bonnet properly. Risk
of accident.
Engine oil
Engine oil specifications
The engine oil used must conform with exact specifications.
Specifications
The engine comes with a special, high quality, multi grade oil that can be
used in all seasons of the year except for those regions affected by extreme
cold.
As the use of high quality oil is essential for the correct operation of the
engine and its long useful life, when topping up or replacement is necessary,
use only those oils that conform to the requirements of the VW standards.
If it is not possible to find oil conforming to the VW standards then oil
conforming to the ACEA or API standards with an appropriate viscosity at
atmospheric temperature should be used instead. The use of this type of oil
may have some repercussions on the performance of the engine for example,
long starting time, increased consumption and a higher emission level.
If a top up is required then different oils may be mixed as long as they all
conform to the VW standards.
The specifications (VW standards) set out in the following page should
appear on the container of the service oil; the container will display together
the different standards for petrol and diesel engines, the oil can be used for
both types of engines.
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels 202
Oil properties
Viscosity
The viscosity class of the oil is selected according to the diagram.
When the ambient temperature falls outside the limits of the scale for a short
period, an oil change is not required.
Mono-grade oil
Single grade oils are generally not suitable for all year round use, due to
ranges of viscosity
19)
.
These oils are only useful in a climate that is constantly very cold or very
warm.
Engine oil additives
No type of additive should be mixed with the engine oil. The deterioration
caused by these additives is not covered by the warranty.
Fig. 143 Types of oil
according to temperature
Engine type Specification
Petrol VW 501 01/ VW 502 00/ VW 504 00
Diesel VW 505 00/ VW 505 01/ VW 507 00/ VW 506 01
Diesel Injector Pump
a)
a)
Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage the engine.
VW 505 01/ VW 507 00/ VW 506 01
Diesel Injector Pump Motor 118 kW
a)
VW 506 01/ VW 507 00
Diesel Engines with Particulate filter (DPF)
a)
VW 507 00
19)
Viscosity: Ability to flow.
Checking and refilling levels 203
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Note
Before a long trip, we recommend finding an engine oil that conforms to the
corresponding VW specifications and keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the
correct engine oil will always be available for a top-up if needed.
Checking the engine oil level
The engine oil dipstick indicates the level of the oil.
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings Ÿ in
“Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment” on
page 198.
– Park the vehicle on an even surface.
– After stopping the engine, wait a few minutes for the oil to drain
back into the sump.
– Raise the bonnet Ÿpage 200.
– Pull out the dipstick.
– Wipe the dipstick with a cloth and insert it again, pushing it in as
far as it will go.
– Pull the dipstick out again and check the oil level Ÿfig. 144.
– Replace the dipstick, pushing it in as far as it will go.
The position of the dipstick is shown in the corresponding engine compart-
ment diagram Ÿpage 260.
If the oil level is in area Ÿfig. 144 , do not top up with oil.
If the oil level is in area , you may top up with oil (approx. 0.5 l).
If the oil level is in area , you must top up with oil (approx. 1.0 l).
It is normal for the engine to consume a certain amount of oil. Consumption
can be up to 1.0 litres per 1,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level must
be checked at regular intervals, preferably when filling the tank and before a
journey.
When the engine is working hard, for instance during sustained high-speed
motorway cruising in summer, when towing a trailer or climbing on mountain
passes, the oil level should preferably be kept within area and not above
this.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be
carried out cautiously.
• When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety
warnings Ÿpage 198.
Fig. 144 Engine oil
dipstick.
AA
AB
AC
AA
Checking and refilling levels 204
Caution
If the oil level is above the area do not start the engine. This could result
in damage to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact an Authorised
Service Centre.
Topping up engine oil ±
Top up gradually with small quantities of oil.
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings Ÿ in
“Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment” on
page 198.
– Unscrew cap from oil filler opening Ÿfig. 145.
– Top-up oil in small amounts, using the correct oil.
– To avoid over-filling with engine oil, you should top-up using
small quantities, wait a while and check the oil level before
adding any more oil.
– As soon as the oil level is in area , carefully close the cap.
The position of the oil filler opening is shown in the corresponding engine
compartment diagram Ÿpage 260.
Engine oil specification Ÿpage 201.
WARNING
Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil comes into contact with hot
engine components when topping up.
Caution
If the oil level is above the area do not start the engine. This could result
in damage to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact a qualified work-
shop.
For the sake of the environment
The oil level must never be above area . Otherwise oil can be drawn in
through the crankcase breather and escape into the atmosphere via the
exhaust system.
AA
Fig. 145 In the engine
compartment: Engine oil
filler cap
AB
AA
AA
Checking and refilling levels 205
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Changing engine oil
The engine oil must be changed at the intervals given in the
service schedule.
We recommend that you have the engine oil changed by an Authorised
Service Centre.
The two different oil change intervals are shown in the ŸBooklet “Service
schedule”.
WARNING
Only change the oil yourself if you have the specialist knowledge required!
• Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings
Ÿpage 198, “Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment”.
• Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil may cause burn injuries.
• Wear eye protection to avoid injuries caused by splashes of oil.
• When removing the oil drain plug with your fingers, keep your arm hori-
zontal to help prevent oil from running down your arm.
• Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into contact with engine oil.
• Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must be stored in a safe place out of
the reach of children until it is disposed of.
Caution
No additives should be used with engine oil. This could result in engine
damage. Any damage caused by the use of such additives would not be
covered by the factory warranty.
For the sake of the environment
• Because of the disposal problems, the necessary special tools and
specialist knowledge required, we recommend that you have the engine oil
and filter changed by an Authorised Service Centre.
• Never pour oil down drains or into the ground.
• Use a suitable container when draining the used oil. It has to be large
enough to hold all the engine oil
Coolant
Coolant specifications
Coolant is a mixture of water and at least 40% coolant addi-
tive.
The cooling system must be filled with a mixture of water and at least 40 % of
our coolant additive G 12+ or an additive with the specification TT-VW 774 F
(it is dyed purple). This mixture gives the necessary frost protection down to
-25°C and protects the alloy parts of the cooling system against corrosion. It
also prevents scaling and raises the boiling point of the coolant.
The concentration of coolant must always be at least 40% - even if frost
protection is not required.
If greater frost protection is required in very cold climates, the proportion of
the antifreeze additive G 12+ can be increased. However, the percentage of
coolant additives should not exceed 60%, as this would reduce the frost
protection. It would also reduce the cooling effect. A mixture with 60%
coolant additive will give frost protection to approx. -40°C.
Checking and refilling levels 206
WARNING
• The coolant additive is toxic. There is a toxic risk. Always keep the
coolant additive in the original container which should be stored out of the
reach of children. The same applies to coolant that you have drained off.
• The coolant additive G 12+ must be added in sufficient quantities to
provide anti-freeze protection at the coldest ambient temperatures that
can be expected. At extremely cold ambient temperatures, the coolant
could freeze, causing the vehicle to breakdown. As the heater would also
not work in this situation, there is a risk of suffering exposure!
Caution
• Other additives may give considerably inferior corrosion protection. The
resulting corrosion in the cooling system can lead to a loss of coolant,
causing serious damage to the engine.
• The coolant additive G 12+ (purple) can be mixed with the additive G 12
(red) or G 11. Never mix G12 (red colour) with G 11.
Checking the coolant level and topping up ±
The correct coolant level is important for fault-free func-
tioning of the engine cooling system.
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings Ÿ in
“Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment” on
page 198.
Opening the coolant expansion tank
– Switch off the engine and allow it to cool.
– To prevent scalding, cover the cap on the expansion tank with a
thick cloth and carefully unscrew the cap Ÿ .
Checking coolant level
– Look into the open coolant expansion tank and read the coolant
level.
Fig. 146 In the engine
compartment: Coolant
expansion tank cap
Checking and refilling levels 207
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
– If the level is underneath the “MIN” mark, top up with coolant.
Topping up coolant
– Only use new coolant.
– Do not fill above the “MAX” mark.
Closing the coolant expansion tank
– Screw the cap on again tightly.
The position of the coolant expansion reservoir is shown in the corresponding
engine compartment diagram Ÿpage 260.
Make sure that the coolant meets the required specifications Ÿpage 205.
Do not use a different type of additive if coolant additive G 12+ is not avail-
able. In this case use only water and bring the coolant concentration back up
to the correct level as soon as possible by putting in the specified additive
Ÿpage 205.
Always top up with new coolant.
Do not fill above the “MAX” mark. Otherwise the excess coolant will be forced
out of the cooling system when the engine is hot.
The coolant additive G 12+ (dyed purple) may be mixed with G 12 (dyed red)
and also with G 11.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be
carried out cautiously.
• When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety
warnings Ÿpage 198.
• When the engine is warm or hot, the cooling system is pressurised! Do
not unscrew the cap on the expansion tank when the engine is hot. This is
a burn injury risk.
Caution
• When mixed with other additives the colour of G 12 will change to brown.
If this occurs you should have the coolant changed immediately. Failure to do
so will result in engine damage!
• If a lot of coolant has been lost, wait for the engine to cool down before
putting in cold coolant. This avoids damaging the engine. Large coolant
losses are an indication of leaks in the cooling system. See a specialised
workshop immediately and have the cooling system checked. Otherwise,
there is a risk of engine damage.
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels 208
Washer fluid and windscreen wiper blades
Topping up washer fluid <
The water for cleaning the windscreen should always be
mixed with washer fluid.
The windscreen washer and the headlight washing system are supplied with
fluid from the windscreen washer fluid container in the engine compartment.
The reservoir is located on the right-hand side of the engine compartment.
Plain water is not enough to clean the windscreen and headlights. We recom-
mend that you always add a product to the windscreen washer fluid.
Approved windscreen cleaning products exist on the market with high deter-
gent and anti-freeze properties, these may be added all-year-round. Please
follow the dilution instructions on the packaging.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be
carried out cautiously.
• When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety
warnings Ÿpage 198.
Caution
• Never put radiator anti-freeze or other additives into the windscreen
washer fluid.
• Always use approved windscreen cleansing products diluted as per
instructions. If you use other washer fluids or soap solutions, the tiny holes
in the fan-shaped nozzles could become blocked.
Fig. 147 In the engine
compartment: Cap of
windscreen washer fluid
reservoir.
Checking and refilling levels 209
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Changing the front windscreen wiper blades
If the windscreen wiper blades are in perfect condition, you
will benefit from an improved visibility. Damaged wiper
blades should be replaced immediately.
Changing wiper blades can be done in both the rest and horizontal
positions. Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen.
Changing the windscreen wiper blades
– Lift the wiper arm away from the windscreen.
– Press on the side tabs and release the blade moving it in the
direction of the arrow Ÿfig. 148.
Fitting the wiper blade
– Insert the tab into the slot of the blade Ÿfig. 148.
– Move the blade towards the arm in the opposite direction of the
arrow ,until it clicks into position Ÿfig. 148.
– Push the wiper arms back against the windscreen.
If the windscreen wipers smear, they should be replaced if they are damaged,
or cleaned if they are soiled.
If this does not produce the desired results, the setting angle of the wind-
screen wiper arms might be incorrect. They should be checked by a qualified
workshop and corrected if necessary.
WARNING
Do not drive unless you have good visibility through all windows!
• Clean the windscreen wiper blades and all windows regularly.
• The wiper blades should be changed once or twice a year.
Caution
• Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers could scratch the windscreen.
• Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to
clean the windows. This could damage the windscreen wiper blades.
• Never move the windscreen wiper or windscreen wiper arm manually. This
could cause damage.
• Do not pull the windscreen wipers forward unless they are in the service
position. Otherwise the bonnet could be damaged.
Note
• The wiper arms can be moved to the service position only when the
bonnet is properly closed.
Fig. 148 Changing the
front wiper blades
AA
A1
A2 A3
A1
Checking and refilling levels 210
Changing the rear wiper blade
A good rear wiper blade is essential for clear rear vision.
Damaged wiper blades should be replaced immediately.
Removing the wiper blade
– Lift the wiper arm away from the glass Ÿfig. 149.
– Unclip the wiper blade and pull Ÿfig. 149.
Fitting the wiper blade
– With one hand, hold the top end of the wiper arm.
– With the other hand, press the wiper blade into the retainer.
Check the condition of the wiper blade regularly. Change as required.
If the windscreen wiper scrapes, it should be replaced if damaged, or cleaned
if soiled.
If this is not sufficient, refer to a qualified workshop.
WARNING
Do not drive unless you have good visibility through all windows!
• Clean the windscreen wiper blades and all windows regularly.
• The wiper blades should be changed once or twice a year.
Caution
• A damaged or dirty window wiper could scratch the rear window.
• Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to
clean the window.
• Never move the windscreen wiper by hand. This could cause damage.
Fig. 149 Changing the
rear window wiper blade
A1 A2
Checking and refilling levels 211
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Brake fluid
Checking the brake fluid level
The brake fluid is checked at the intervals given in the service
schedule.
– Read the fluid level at the transparent brake fluid reservoir. It
should always be between the “MIN” and “MAX” marks.
The position of the brake fluid reservoir is shown in the corresponding engine
compartment diagram Ÿpage 260. The brake fluid reservoir has a black and
yellow cap.
The brake fluid level drops slightly when the vehicle is being used as the
brake pads are automatically adjusted as they wear.
However, if the level goes down noticeably in a short time, or drops below the
“MIN” mark, there may be a leak in the brake system. A display on the instru-
ment panel will warn you if the brake fluid level is too low Ÿpage 72.
WARNING
Before opening the bonnet to check the brake fluid level, read and observe
the warnings Ÿpage 198.
Changing the brake fluid
The brake fluid must be renewed every two years.
We recommend that you have the brake fluid changed by an Authorised
Service Centre.
Before opening the bonnet, please read and follow the warnings Ÿ in
“Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment” on page 198 in
“Working in the engine compartment”.
Brake fluid absorbs moisture. In the course of time, it will absorb water from
the ambient air. If the water content in the brake fluid is too high, the brake
system could corrode. This also considerably reduces the boiling point of the
brake fluid. Heavy use of the brakes may then cause a vapour lock which
could impair the braking effect.
For this reason the brake fluid must be renewed every two years.
It is important that you use only use brake fluid compliant with the US
standard FMVSS 116 DOT 4. We recommend the use of Genuine SEAT brake
fluid.
WARNING
Brake fluid is poisonous. Old brake fluid impairs the braking effect.
Fig. 150 In the engine
compartment: Brake fluid
reservoir cover
Checking and refilling levels 212
• Before opening the bonnet to check the brake fluid level, read and
observe the warnings Ÿpage 198.
• Brake fluid should be stored in the closed original container in a safe
place out of reach of children. There is a toxic risk.
• Have the brake fluid changed every two years at the latest. Heavy use
of the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake fluid is left in the system
for too long. This would seriously affect the efficiency of the brakes and the
safety of the vehicle. This may cause an accident.
Caution
Brake fluid could damage the paintwork. Wipe off any brake fluid from the
paintwork immediately.
For the sake of the environment
Brake fluid must be drained and disposed of in the proper manner observing
environmental regulations.
Battery
Warnings on handling the battery
WARNING
Always be aware of the danger of injury and chemical burns as well as the
risk of accident or fire when working on the battery and the electrical
system:
• Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes, skin and clothing from acid and
particles containing lead.
• Battery acid is very corrosive and caustic. Wear protective gloves and
eye protection. Do not tilt the batteries. This could spill acid through the
vents. Rinse battery acid from eyes immediately for several minutes with
clear water. Then seek medical care immediately. Neutralize any acid
splashes on the skin or clothing with a soapy solution, and rinse off with
plenty of water. If acid is swallowed by mistake, consult a doctor immedi-
ately.
• Fires, sparks, naked lights and smoking are prohibited. When handling
cables and electrical equipment, avoid causing sparks and electrostatic
WARNING (continued)
´
Wear eye protection
/
Battery acid is very corrosive and caustic. Wear protec-
tive gloves and eye protection!
®
Fires, sparks, naked lights and smoking are prohibited!
;
A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the
battery is under charge.
®
Keep children away from acid and batteries!
Checking and refilling levels 213
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
charge. Never short the battery terminals. High-energy sparks can cause
injury.
• A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the battery is
under charge. The batteries should be charged in a well-ventilated room
only.
• Keep children away from acid and batteries.
• Before working on the electrical system, you must switch off the
engine, the ignition and all consumers. The negative cable on the battery
must be disconnected. When a light bulb is changed, you need only switch
off the light.
• Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by unlocking the vehicle before you
disconnect the battery! The alarm will otherwise be triggered.
• When disconnecting the battery from the vehicle electrical system,
disconnect first the negative cable and then the positive cable.
• Switch off all electrical consumers before reconnecting the battery.
Reconnect first the positive cable and then the negative cable. Never
reverse the polarity of the connections. This could cause an electrical fire.
• Never charge a frozen battery, or one which has thawed. This could
result in explosions and chemical burns. Always replace a battery that has
frozen. A flat battery can freeze at temperatures around 0°C.
• Ensure that the vent hose is always connected to the battery.
• Never use a defective battery. This may be fatally explosive. Replace a
damaged battery immediately.
Caution
• Never disconnect the battery if the ignition is switched on or if the engine
is running. This could damage the electrical system or electronic compo-
nents.
• Do not expose the battery to direct sunlight over a long period of time, as
the intense ultraviolet radiation can damage the battery housing.
• If the vehicle is left standing in cold conditions for a long period, protect
the battery from frost. If it “freezes” it will be damaged.
Checking the electrolyte level
The electrolyte level should be checked regularly in high-
mileage vehicles, in hot countries and in older batteries.
– Open the bonnet and open the battery cover at the front Ÿ in
“Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment” on
page 198 Ÿ in “Warnings on handling the battery” on
page 212.
– Check the colour display in the "magic eye" on the top of the
battery.
– If there are air bubbles in the window, tap the window gently until
they disperse.
The position of the battery is shown in the corresponding engine compart-
ment diagram Ÿpage 260.
The round window (“magic eye”) on the top of the battery changes colour,
depending on the charge level and electrolyte level of the battery.
If the colour in the window is colourless or bright yellow, the electrolyte level
of the battery is too low. Have the battery checked by a qualified workshop.
The colours green and black are used by the workshops for diagnostic
purposes.
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels 214
Charging and changing the vehicle battery
The battery is maintenance-free and is checked during the
inspection service. All work on the vehicle battery requires
specialist knowledge.
If you often drive short distances or if the vehicle is not driven for long
periods, the battery should be checked by a qualified workshop between the
scheduled services.
If the battery has discharged and you have problems starting the vehicle, the
battery might be damaged. If this happens, we recommend you have the
vehicle battery checked by an Authorised Service Centre where it will be re-
charged or replaced.
Charging the battery
The vehicle battery should be charged by a qualified workshop only, as
batteries using special technology have been installed and they must be
charged in a controlled environment.
Replacing a vehicle battery
The battery has been developed to suit the conditions of its location and has
special safety features.
Genuine SEAT batteries fulfil the maintenance, performance and safety spec-
ifications of your vehicle.
WARNING
• We recommend you use only maintenance-free or cycle free leak-proof
batteries that comply with the standards T 825 06 and VW7 50 73. This
standard applies as of 2001.
• Before starting any work on the batteries, you must read and observe
the warnings Ÿ in “Warnings on handling the battery” on page 212.
For the sake of the environment
Batteries contain toxic substances such as sulphuric acid and lead. They
must be disposed of appropriately and must not be disposed of with ordinary
household waste.
Wheels
General notes
Avoiding damage
– If you have to drive over a kerb or similar obstacle, drive very
slowly and as near as possible at a right angle to the kerb.
– Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.
– Inspect the tyres regularly for damage (cuts, cracks or blisters,
etc.). Remove any foreign objects embedded in the treads.
Storing tyres
– Mark tyres when you remove them to indicate the direction of
rotation. This ensures you will be able to install them correctly
when you replace them.
– When removed, the wheels and/or tyres should be stored in a
cool, dry and preferably dark location.
– Store tyres in a vertical position if they are not fitted on wheel
rims.
Checking and refilling levels 215
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
New tyres
New tyres have to be run-in Ÿpage 173.
The tread depth of new tyres may vary, according to the type and make of tyre
and the tread pattern.
Concealed damage
Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily visible. If you notice unusual
vibrations or the car pulling to one side, this may indicate that one of the tyres
is damaged. The tyres should be checked immediately by an Authorised
Service Centre.
Tyres with directional tread pattern
An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the direction of rotation on tyres with
directional tread. Always observe the direction of rotation indicated when
fitting the wheel. This guarantees optimum grip and helps to avoid aqua-
planing, excessive noise and wear.
WARNING
• New tyres do not have maximum grip in the first 500 km. Drive particu-
larly carefully to avoid risk of accident.
• Never drive with damaged tyres. This may cause an accident.
• If you notice unusual vibration or if the vehicle pulls to one side when
driving, stop the vehicle immediately and check the tyres for damage.
Checking tyre pressure
The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the
inside of the tank flap.
1. Read the required tyre inflation pressure from the sticker. The
values refer to Summer tyres. For Winter tyres, you must add 0.2
bar to the values given on the sticker.
2. The tyre pressures should only be checked when the tyres are
cold. The slightly raised pressures of warm tyres must not be
reduced.
3. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load you are carrying.
Tyre pressure
The correct tyre pressure is especially important at high speeds. The pressure
should therefore be checked at least once a month and before starting a
journey.
WARNING
A tyre can easily burst if the pressure is too low, causing an accident!
• At continuously high speeds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes
more. In this way it becomes too hot, and this can cause tread separation
and tyre blow-out. Always observe the recommended tyre pressures.
• If the tyre pressure is too low or too high, the tyres will wear prema-
turely and the vehicle will not handle well. Risk of accident!
For the sake of the environment
Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel consumption.
Checking and refilling levels 216
Tyre service life
The service life of tyres is dependent on tyre pressure, driving
style and fitting.
Wear indicators
The original tyres on your vehicle have 1.6 mm high “tread wear indicators”
Ÿfig. 151 running across the tread. Depending on the make, there will be six
to eight of them evenly spaced around the tyre. Markings on the tyre sidewall
(for instance the letters “TWI” or other symbols) indicate the positions of the
tread wear indicators. The minimum tread depth required by law is 1.6 mm
(measured in the tread grooves next to the tread wear indicators). Worn tyres
must be replaced. Different figures may apply in export countries Ÿ .
Tyre pressure
Incorrect tyre pressure causes premature wear and could cause tyre blow-out.
For this reason, the tyre pressure should be checked at least once per month
Ÿpage 215.
Driving style
Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard braking all increase tyre wear.
Changing wheels around
If the front tyres are worn considerably more than the rear ones it is advisable
to change them around as shown Ÿfig. 152. All the tyres will then last for
about the same time.
Wheel balance
The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. However, various factors encoun-
tered in normal driving can cause them to become unbalanced, which results
in steering vibration.
Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, as they otherwise cause excessive
wear on steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must also be rebalanced
when a new tyre is fitted.
Incorrect wheel alignment
Incorrect wheel alignment causes excessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of
the vehicle. If tyres show excessive wear, you should have the wheel align-
ment checked by an Authorised Service Centre.
Fig. 151 Tyre tread wear
indicators
Fig. 152 Changing
wheels
Checking and refilling levels 217
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
WARNING
There is a serious danger of accidents if a tyre bursts during driving!
• The tyres must be replaced at the latest when the tread is worn down to
the tread wear indicators. Failure to do so could result in an accident. Worn
tyres do not grip well at high speeds on wet roads. There is also a greater
risk of “aquaplaning”.
• At continuously high speeds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes
more. This causes it to overheat. This can cause tread separation and tyre
blow-out. Risk of accident. Always observe the recommended tyre pres-
sures.
• If tyres show excessive wear, you should have the running gear checked
by an Authorised Service Centre.
• Keep chemicals such as oil, fuel and brake fluid away from tyres.
• Damaged wheels and tyres must be replaced immediately!
For the sake of the environment
Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel consumption.
Puncture-proof tyres*
Puncture-proof tyres will usually allow the vehicle to continue
even when one of the tyres has a puncture.
Vehicles that are factory-fitted with puncture-proof tyres
20)
indicate
on the instrument panel when there is a loss of tyre pressure.
Driving on puncture-proof tyres (emergency use)
– Leave the ESP/TCS (electronic stabilisation programme)
switched on, or switch on.
– Drive carefully and at moderate speed (80 km/h maximum).
– Avoid sharp turns and rapid manouevres.
– Avoid driving over obstacles (for example, kerbs) or potholes.
– If the ESP/TCS is frequently activated, check whether there is
smoke coming from the tyres or a smell of rubber, or if the vehicle
vibrates or rattles. If this is the case, stop the vehicle.
Puncture-proof tyres are marked on the tyre wall as follows: “DSST”,
“Eufonia”, “RFT”, “ROF”, “RSC”, “SSR” or “ZP”.
The tyre walls of this type of tyre are reinforced. When the tyres lose air, the
tyre walls keep the tyre up (emergency use).
Loss of air pressure in the tyre is shown on the instrument panel. The vehicle
may still be driven for at least 80 km and, under ideal conditions (for example,
no load) further.
The faulty tyre should be replaced as soon as possible. The tyre rim should be
checked for damage at a specialised workshop and replaced as necessary.
We recommend you contact your Authorised Service Centre. If more than one
tyre is being used under emergency conditions, this reduces the distance
which can be travelled.
Starting driving in emergency conditions
When the loss in tyre pressure is displayed on the instrument panel, this
implies that at least one tyre is being driven in emergency conditions Ÿ .
End of emergency operation
Do not drive on if:
20)
Depending upon version and country.
Checking and refilling levels 218
• smoke is coming from one of the tyres,
• there is a smell of rubber,
• the vehicle vibrates,
• there is a rattling noise.
WARNING
When driving in emergency conditions, the driving quality of the vehicle is
considerably impaired.
• Drive carefully and at moderate speed (80 km/h maximum).
• Avoid sharp turns and rapid manoeuvres, and brake earlier than usual.
• Avoid driving over obstacles (for example, kerbs) or potholes.
• If one or more tyres is being driven in emergency conditions, the driving
quality of the vehicle is impaired and there is a risk of accident.
Note
• Puncture-proof tyres do not “deflate” on losing pressure as they are
supported by the tyre walls. Therefore defects in the tyre can not be deteced
with a visual inspection.
• Snow chains must not be used on front tyres used in emergency
conditions.
New tyres and wheels
New tyres and wheels have to be run-in.
The tyres and wheel rims are an essential part of the vehicle's design. The
tyres and rims approved by SEAT are specially matched to the characteristics
of the vehicle and make a major contribution to good road holding and safe
handling Ÿ .
Tyres should be replaced at least in pairs and not individually (i.e. both front
tyres or both rear tyres together). A knowledge of tyre designations makes it
easier to choose the correct tyres. Radial tyres have the tyre designations
marked on the sidewall, for example:
195/65 R15 91T
This contains the following information:
195 Tyre width in mm
65 Height/width ratio in %
R Tyre construction: Radial
15 Rim diameter in inches
91 Load rating code
T Speed rating
The tyres could also have the following information:
• A direction of rotation symbol
• “Reinforced” denotes heavy-duty tyres.
The manufacturing date is also indicated on the tyre sidewall (possibly only
on the inner side of the wheel).
“DOT ... 1103 ...” means, for example, that the tyre was produced in the 11th
week of 2003.
We recommend that work on tyres and wheels is carried out by an Authorised
Service Centre. They are familiar with the procedure and have the necessary
special tools and spare parts, as well as the proper facilities for disposing of
the old tyres.
Any Authorised Service Centre has full information on the technical require-
ments when installing or changing tyres, wheels or wheel trims.
Checking and refilling levels 219
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
WARNING
• We recommend that you use only wheels and tyres that have been
approved by SEAT for your model. Failure to do so could impair vehicle
handling. Risk of accident.
• Avoid running the vehicle on tyres that are more than six years old. If
you have no alternative, you should drive slowly and with extra care at all
times.
• Never use old tyres or those with an unknown “history of use”.
• If wheel trims are retrofitted, you must ensure that the flow of air to the
brakes is not restricted. This could cause them to overheat.
• All four wheels must be fitted with radial tyres of the same type, size
(rolling circumference) and the same tread pattern.
For the sake of the environment
Old tyres must be disposed of according to the laws in the country concerned.
Note
• For technical reasons, it is not generally possible to use the wheels from
other vehicles. This can also apply to wheels of the same model. The use of
wheels or tyres which have not been approved by SEAT for use with your
model may invalidate the vehicle's type approval for use on public roads.
• If the spare tyre is not the same as the tyres that are mounted on the
vehicle - for example with winter tyres - you should only use the spare tyre for
a short period of time and drive with extra care. Refit the normal road wheel
as soon as possible.
Wheel bolts
Wheel bolts must be tightened to the correct torque.
The design of wheel bolts is matched to the rims. If different wheel rims are
fitted, the correct wheel bolts with the right length and correctly shaped bolt
heads must be used. This ensures that wheels are fitted securely and that the
brake system functions correctly.
In certain circumstances, you may not use wheel bolts from a different car -
even if it is the same model Ÿpage 191.
WARNING
If the wheel bolts are not tightened correctly, the wheel could become
loose while driving. Risk of accident.
• The wheel bolts must be clean and turn easily. Never apply grease or oil
to them.
• Use only wheel bolts which belong to the wheel.
• If the prescribed torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loosen
whilst the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening torque is
too high, the wheel bolts and threads could be damaged.
Caution
The prescribed torque for wheel bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.
Checking and refilling levels 220
Winter tyres
Winter tyres will improve the vehicles handling on snow and
ice.
In winter conditions winter tyres will considerably improve the vehicles
handling. The design of summer tyres (width, rubber compound, tread
pattern) gives less grip on ice and snow.
Winter tyres must be inflated to a pressure 0.2 bar higher than the pressures
specified for summer tyres (see sticker on tank flap).
Winter tyres must be fitted on all four wheels.
Information on permitted winter tyre sizes can be found in the vehicle's regis-
tration documents. Use only radial winter tyres. All tyre sizes listed in the
vehicle documentation also apply to winter tyres.
Winter tyres lose their effectiveness when the tread is worn down to a depth
of 4 mm.
The speed rating code Ÿpage 218, “New tyres and wheels” determines the
following speed limits Ÿ :
Q max. 160 km/h
S max. 180 km/h
T max. 190 km/h
H max. 210 km/h
In some countries, vehicles which can exceed the speed rating of the fitted
tyre must have an appropriate sticker in the driver's field of view. These
stickers are available from your Authorised Service Centre. The legal require-
ments of each country must be followed.
Do not have winter tyres fitted for unnecessarily long periods. Vehicles with
summer tyres handle better when the roads are free of snow and ice.
If you have a flat tyre, please refer to the notes on the spare wheel
Ÿpage 218, “New tyres and wheels”.
WARNING
The maximum speed for the winter tyres must not be exceeded. Otherwise,
this could lead to tyre damage and thus, an accident risk.
For the sake of the environment
Fit your summer tyres in good time. They are quieter, do not wear so quickly
and reduce fuel consumption.
Snow chains
Snow chains may be fitted only to the front wheels, and only to certain tyre
sizes Ÿpage 258.
Snow chains must have fine-pitch links which do not protrude more that 9
mm, including tension device.
Remove wheel hub covers and trim rings before fitting snow chains. For safety
reasons cover caps, available in any Authorised Service Centre, must then be
fitted over the wheel bolts.
WARNING
Observe the fitting instructions provided by the snow chain manufacturer.
Caution
You must remove the snow chains to drive on roads which are free of snow.
Otherwise they will impair handling, damage the tyres and wear out very
quickly.
Checking and refilling levels 221
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Note
In some countries, the speed limit for using snow chains is 50 km/h. The legal
requirements of the country should be followed.
If and when 222
If and when
Tools, tyre repair kit and spare wheel
Vehicle Tools
The vehicle onboard tools are located under the floor panel in
the luggage compartment .
– Lift the cover of the luggage compartment, by pulling it up with a
finger in the fitting.
– Take the onboard tools out of the vehicle.
The tool kit includes:
• Jack*
• Hook for removing wheel covers* or hub caps*
• Box spanner for wheel bolts*
• Reversible screwdriver with handle (including hexagonal interior) for the
wheel bolts. The screwdriver is a combination tool.
• Towing eye
• Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*
Some of the items listed are only provided on certain models / model years,
or are optional extras.
WARNING
• Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to tighten
the wheel bolts. It is impossible to tighten the bolts with the torque
required, risk of accident.
• The jack* supplied by the factory is only designed for changing wheels
on this model. On no account attempt to use it for lifting heavier vehicles
or other loads, risk of injury.
• Use the jack* only on firm, level ground.
• Never start the engine when the vehicle is on the jack, risk of accident.
• If work is to be carried out underneath the vehicle, this must be secured
by suitable stands. Otherwise, there is a risk of injury.
WARNING (continued)
If and when 223
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Compact temporary spare wheel*
The compact temporary spare wheel (spare wheel for vehicles
with no puncture repair kit) should only be used when really
necessary.
The temporary spare wheel is stored under the floor panel in the luggage
compartment and is attached by a thumbnut.
How to use the compact temporary spare wheel
Should you ever have a punctured tyre, the compact temporary spare wheel
is only intended for temporary use until you can reach a workshop. The
standard-size road wheel should be replaced as soon as possible.
Please note the following restrictions when using the compact temporary
spare wheel. This spare wheel has been specially designed for your vehicle,
thus, it cannot be changed with the spare wheel from another vehicle.
No other type of tyre (normal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on the
compact temporary spare wheel rim.
Snow chains
For technical reasons, snow chains must not be used on the compact tempo-
rary spare wheel.
If you should have a puncture on one of the front wheels when using snow
chains, fit the compact temporary spare in place of one of the rear wheels.
You can then attach the snow chains to the wheel taken from the rear and use
this wheel to replace the punctured front wheel.
WARNING
• The tyre pressures must be checked and corrected as soon as possible.
The tyre pressure for the spare wheel is 4.2 bar. Failure to do so could result
in an accident.
• Do not drive faster than 80 km/h. Higher speeds can cause an accident.
• Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering, risk of acci-
dent.
• Never use two or more compact spare tyres at the same time, risk of
accident.
• No other type of tyre (normal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on
the compact temporary spare wheel rim.
Note
• Emergency wheels must never be used on vehicles fitted with Brembo
brakes. These vehicles are supplied with a tyre repair kit.
Tyre repair kit*
The tyre repair kit (for vehicles not including a spare wheel) is
stored under the floor panel in the luggage compartment.
Your vehicle is equipped with the Tyre Mobility System “Tyre repair kit”.
Fig. 153 Luggage
compartment. Access to
the spare wheel
If and when 224
The tyre repair kit consists of a container with sealing compound to repair the
puncture and a compressor to generate the required tyre pressure. The kit will
reliably seal punctures up to a size of about 4 mm caused by the penetration
of a foreign body into the tyre.
Note
• Seek professional assistance if the repair of a tyre puncture is not
possible with the sealing compound.
Wheel change
Preparation work
What you must do before changing a wheel.
– If you have a flat tyre or puncture, park the vehicle as far away
from the flow of traffic as possible. Choose a location that is as
level as possible.
– All passengers should leave the vehicle. They should wait in a
safe area (for instance behind the roadside crash barrier).
– Switch off the engine. Switch on the hazard warning lights.
– Apply the handbrake firmly.
– Engage the first gear, or put the selector lever to position P for
those vehicles with an automatic gearbox.
– If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from your vehicle.
– Take the vehicle tools and the spare wheel out of the luggage
compartment.
WARNING
Put the hazard warning lights on and place the warning triangle in position.
This is for your own safety and also warns other road users.
Caution
If you have to change the wheel on a gradient, block the wheel opposite the
wheel being changed by placing a stone or similar object under it to prevent
the vehicle from rolling away.
Note
Please observe legal requirements when doing so.
Changing a wheel
Change the wheel as described below
– Pull off the hub cap. See Ÿpage 225, fig. 154.
– Slacken the wheel bolts
– Raise the car with the jack in the corresponding zone
– Take off the wheel and then put on the spare wheel
– Lower the vehicle.
If and when 225
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
– Tighten the wheel bolts firmly in diagonal sequence with the box
spanner
– Replace the hub cap.
After changing a wheel
After changing the wheel there are still tasks to complete.
– Put the tools and jack back in the luggage compartment.
– Place the wheel with the defective tyre in the luggage compart-
ment and secure it.
– Check the tyre pressure of the newly fitted tyre as soon as
possible.
– Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon as
possible with a torque wrench. The prescribed torque is 120 Nm.
Note
• If you notice that the wheel bolts are corroded and difficult to turn when
changing a wheel, they must be replaced before having the wheel bolt torque
checked.
• In the interest of safety, drive at moderate speeds until the wheel bolt
torque has been checked.
Wheel trims
The wheel trims must be removed to gain access to the wheel
bolts.
Removing
– Insert the extraction hook from the tools into the designated
ring, located in one of the bolt hole covers of the wheel cover
Ÿfig. 154.
– Pull off the hub cap.
Fig. 154 Changing a
wheel: Removing the
wheel trim
If and when 226
Wheel covers*
The wheel covers must be removed for access to the wheel
bolts
Removing
– Remove the wheel cover using the wire hook.
– Hook this into one of the cut-outs of the wheel cover.
Fitting
– Fit the wheel cover onto the wheel rim by pressing it firmly. Put
pressure initially on the point of the cut out for the valve. Then
press the wheel cover onto the steel rim so that it engages all
round.
Loosening the wheel bolts
The wheel bolts must be loosened before raising the vehicle.
Loosening
– Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the wheel bolt.
– Grasp the box spanner by the end and turn it about one full turn to
the left Ÿfig. 155.
Tightening
– Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the wheel bolt.
– Grasp the box spanner close to the end and turn the bolt to the
right until it is secured.
– An adapter is required to unscrew or tighten the anti-theft wheel
bolts.
Fig. 155 Changing the
wheel: Loosening the
wheel bolts
If and when 227
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
WARNING
Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn before raising the vehicle with
the jack, loosening the wheel bolts more than one turn can result in an acci-
dent.
Note
• Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to loosen or
tighten the wheel bolts.
• If the wheel bolt is very tight, you may be able to loosen it by pushing
down the end of the spanner carefully with your foot. Hold on to the vehicle
for support and take care not to slip.
If and when 228
Raising the vehicle
The vehicle must be raised with a jack to remove the wheel.
– Locate the jacking point under the door sill closest to the wheel
being changed Ÿfig. 156.
– Wind up the jack under the jacking point until the arm of the jack
is directly below the vertical rib under the door sill.
– Align the jack so that the arm of the jack fits around the rib under
the door sill and the movable base plate of the jack is flat on the
ground Ÿfig. 157.
– Raise the vehicle until the defective wheel is just clear of the
ground.
Recesses at the front and rear of the door sills mark the jacking points
Ÿfig. 156. A position has been made for each wheel. Do not fit the jack
anywhere else.
An unstable surface under the jack may cause the vehicle to slip off the jack.
Therefore, the jack must be fitted on solid ground offering good support. Use
a large and stable base, if necessary. On a hard, slippery surface (such as
tiles) use a rubber mat or similar to prevent the jack from slipping.
WARNING
• Take all precautions so that the base of the jack does not slip. Failure to
do so could result in an accident.
• The vehicle can be damaged if the jack is not applied at the correct
jacking points. There is also a risk of injury since the jack can slip off
suddenly if it is not properly engaged.
Fig. 156 The jacking
points
Fig. 157 Fitting the jack
If and when 229
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Removing and fitting the wheel
For removing and fitting the wheel, the following tasks must
be completed.
Change the wheel as described below after loosening the wheel
bolts and raising the vehicle with the jack.
Removing a wheel
– Unscrew the bolts using the hexagonal tool in the handle of the
screwdriver (vehicle tool) and place them on a clean surface
Ÿfig. 158.
Fitting a wheel
– Screw in the wheel bolts and tighten them lightly using the
hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle.
The wheel bolts should be clean and turn easily. Before fitting the spare
wheel, inspect the condition of the wheel and hub mounting surfaces. These
surfaces must be clean before fitting the wheel.
The hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle makes it easier to turn the
wheel bolts when they are loose. The reversible screwdriver blade should be
removed when the tool is used for this purpose.
If tyres with a specific direction of rotation are fitted, note the direction of
rotation.
Note
Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to loosen or
tighten the wheel bolts.
Anti-theft wheel bolts
A special adapter is required to turn the anti-theft wheel
bolts.
Fig. 158 Wheel change:
Hexagon socket in screw-
driver handle to turn the
wheel bolts after they
have been loosened
Fig. 159 Anti-theft wheel
bolt
If and when 230
– Insert the adapter onto the wheel bolt and push it on as far as it
will go Ÿpage 229, fig. 159.
– Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the adapter.
– Loosen or tighten the wheel bolt as appropriate.
Code number
The code number of the anti-theft wheel bolt is stamped on the front of the
adapter.
The code number should be noted and kept in a safe place, as it is only by
using the code number that a duplicate adapter can be obtained from an
Authorised Service Centre.
Tyres with directional tread pattern
Tyres with directional tread pattern must be fitted so that they
rotate in the correct direction.
A directional tread pattern can be identified by arrows on the sidewall that
point in the direction of rotation. Always note the direction of rotation indi-
cated when fitting the wheel. This is important so that these tyres can give
maximum grip and avoid excessive noise, tread wear and aquaplaning.
If, in an emergency, you have to mount the spare wheel so it rotates in the
wrong direction, you must drive extremely carefully. The tyre will not give
optimum performance. This is particularly important when driving on wet
roads.
To benefit from the advantages of tyres with this type of tread pattern, the
defective tyre should be replaced as soon as possible so that all tyres again
rotate in the correct direction.
Tyre repair kit (Tyre-Mobility-System)*
General Observations and safety advice
Your vehicle is equipped with the tyre repair kit called the Tyre mobility
system.
Beneath the floor of the stowage compartment there is a sealant and a
compressor which should be used in case of puncture.
The Tyre Mobility System will allow you to safely repair damage to a tyre by
penetration of a foreign object to 4mm diameter.
The foreign object can be left inside the tyre.
The sealant comes with instructions for use.
There is also a guide to using the compressor.
WARNING
• The sealant should not be used if the tyre has been damaged as a result
of going flat.
• Follow the instructions for your safety and use on the compressor and
the sealant packaging.
• Do not drive at more than 80 km/h, avoid accelerating or braking hard
or taking curves at high speed.
• A tyre that has been repaired with sealant should only be used provi-
sionally, and for a short time. Therefore, your car should be taken carefully
to the nearest specialised workshop.
For the sake of the environment
If you want to dispose of the sealant bottle, go to a company that treats waste
products.
If and when 231
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Note
Seek professional assistance if the repair of a tyre puncture is not possible
with the sealing compound.
Preparation work
What you must do before changing a wheel.
– If you have a flat tyre or puncture, park the vehicle as far away
from the flow of traffic as possible.
– Apply the handbrake firmly.
– Engage the first gear, or put the selector lever to position P for
those vehicles with an automatic gearbox.
– All passengers must leave the vehicle. They should wait in a safe
area (for instance behind the roadside crash barrier).
– Check whether the puncture can be mended using the Tyre
Mobility System “General observations and safety advice.”
– Unscrew cap from the valve of the affected wheel.
– Take the tyre repair kit from the luggage compartment.
WARNING
Put the hazard warning lights on and place the warning triangle in position.
This is for your own safety and also warns other road users.
Caution
Take the utmost caution when repairing a flat tyre on a gradient.
Note
Please observe legal requirements when doing so.
Repairing the puncture
To repair the puncture, once the preliminary tasks are done,
follow these steps.
Apply the sealant
– The instructions for using the sealant correctly are on the pack-
aging
Inflate the tyres.
– Remove the compressor and hose.
– Tighten the fastening nut onto the tyre valve.
– Connect the compressor power supply to the 12 Volt socket.
– Connect the compressor and check the tyre pressure with the
pressure gauge.
Finish the repair
– Remove the compressor hose from the valve.
– Check the cap on the tyre valve.
– Disconnect the compressor from the vehicle mains.
If and when 232
– Put the tools back in the luggage compartment.
Note
The compressor should not operate more than 6 minutes
Fuses
Changing a fuse
If a fuse has blown it must be replaced
Fuse cover underneath the steering wheel
– Switch off the ignition and the component concerned.
– Identify the fuse for the failed component Ÿpage 234.
– Take the plastic clip from inside the fuse cover, fit it onto the
blown fuse and pull the fuse out.
– Replace the blown fuse (which will have a melted metal strip)
with a new fuse of the same ampere rating.
Fuse cover in engine compartment
– Switch off the ignition and the component concerned.
– Prise off the fuse cover in the engine compartment by pressing
the tabs towards the centre of the cover Ÿfig. 161.
– Identify the fuse for the failed component Ÿpage 234.
Fig. 160 Left side of dash
panel: Fuse box cover
Fig. 161 Fuse box cover
in engine compartment
If and when 233
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
– Take the plastic clip from inside the fuse cover (at left-hand end
of the dash panel), fit it onto the blown fuse and pull the fuse out.
– Replace the blown fuse (which will have a melted metal strip)
with a new fuse of the same ampere rating.
– Carefully fit the fuse cover back on to ensure no water can enter
the fuse box.
The individual electrical circuits are protected by fuses. The fuses are located
behind a cover at the left-hand end of the dash panel and on the left-hand
side of the engine compartment.
The electric windows are protected by circuit breakers. These reset automat-
ically after a few seconds when the overload (caused for example by frozen
windows) has been corrected.
Colour coding of fuses
WARNING
Never “repair” damaged fuses and never replace them with fuses with a
higher rating. Failure to comply could result in fire. This could also cause
damage to other parts of the electrical system.
Note
• If a newly replaced fuse blows again after a short time, the electrical
system must be checked by a qualified workshop as soon as possible.
• If you replace a fuse with a stronger fuse, you could cause damage to
another location in the electrical system.
• Always keep some spare fuses in the vehicle. These are available from
SEAT dealers.
Colour Amperes
light brown 5
red 10
blue 15
yellow 20
natural (white) 25
green 30
orange 40
red 50
white 80
blue 100
grey 150
violet 200
Colour Amperes
If and when 234
Fuses on left side of dash panel
Fuses
Number Electrical equipment Amperes
1
Diagnosis/instrument lighting control unit/ Headlamp range control/ Flow gauge/ heated windscreen
control unit
10
2
Engine control unit/ ABS-ESP control unit/ Automatic Gearbox/ Instrument panel/ Trailer /Light switch /
Brake sensor / servosteering/ right and left headlamp control unit
5
3 Airbag 5
4 Heating/ Reverse switch/ ASR-ESP switch/ Telephone/ Fillers/ electrochrome mirror 5
5 Right xenon headlamp 5
6 Left xenon headlamp 5
7 Vacant
8 Trailer pre-installation kit (guided solution) 5
9 Vacant
10 Vacant
11 Vacant
12 Central locking 10
13 Diagnosis/ Light switch/ Rain sensor 10
14 Automatic gearbox/ Heating/ ESP control unit/ Automatic gearbox lever 5
15 Cable control unit 7,5
16 Vacant
17 Alarm 5
18 Vacant
19 Fog lamp Kit (guided solution)
20 Vacant
If and when 235
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
21 D2L Engine (2.0l 147 kW 4 speed TFSI)) 10
22 Fan switch 40
23 Electric windows (front) 30
24 Vacant
25 Rear window heater 25
26 Rear electric windows 30
27 Engine (fuel pump relay/ flowmeter) 15
28 Convenience controls 25
29 Vacant
30 Automatic gearbox 20
31 Vacuum pump 20
32 Vacant
33 Sunroof 30
34 Convenience controls 25
35 Vacant
36 Headlight washer system 20
37 Heated seats 30
38 D2L Engine (2.0 l 147 kW 4 speed TFSI)) 10
39 Vacant
40 Fan switch 40
41 Rear wiper motor/ Wiring control unit 15
42 12 V socket/ Lighter 15
43 Tow bar pre-installation 15
44 Tow bar pre-installation 20
Number Electrical equipment Amperes
If and when 236
Some of the electrical items listed in the table are only fitted on certain
models or are optional extras.
Please note that the above list, while correct at the time of printing, is subject
to alterations. If discrepancies should occur, please refer to the sticker on the
inside of the fuse cover for the correct information for your model.
Fuses layout, engine compartment, left part
Fuses
45 Tow bar pre-installation 15
46 Vacant
47 D2L Engine (2.0 l 147 kW 4 speed TFSI) 10
48 D2L Engine (2.0 l 147 kW 4 speed TFSI) 10
49 Vacant
Number Electrical equipment Amperes
Number Electrical equipment Amperes
1 Clean 30
2 Steering column 5
3 Cable control unit 5
4 ABS 30
5 AQ gearbox 15
6 Instrument panel 5
7 Vacant
8 Radio 15
9 Telephone 5
If and when 237
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
10
Main relay in the FSI / diesel engine compartment / injection module supply 5
Main relay in the engine compartment D2L (2.0 FSI 147 kW) 10
11 Vacant
12 Gateway 5
13
Petrol injection module supply 25
Diesel injection module supply 30
14 Coil 20
15
Engine T71 / 20 FSI 5
Pump relay 10
16 ADS pump 30
17 Horn 15
18 Vacant
19 Clean 30
20 Vacant
21 Lambda probe 15
22 Brake pedal, speed sensor 5
23
Engine 1.6, main relay (relay n° 100) 5
T 71 diesel EGR 10
2.0 D2L High-pressure fuel pump 15
24 ARF, change valve 10
25 Right lighting 40
26 Left lighting 40
1.6 SLP engine 40
1.9 TDI Glow plug relay 50
Number Electrical equipment Amperes
If and when 238
Position in engine compartment: side box
Fuses
Some of the electrical items listed in the table are only fitted on certain
models or are optional extras.
Please note that the above list, while correct at the time of printing, is subject
to alterations.
28 KL15 40
29
Electric windows (front and back) 50
Electric windows (front) 30
30 X - relief relay 40
Number Electrical equipment Amperes
B1
Alternator < 140 W 150
Alternator > 140 W 200
C1 Power steering 80
D1 Multi-terminal voltage supply “30”. Internal fuse box 100
E1 Ventilator < 500 W / Ventilator > 500 W 50 / 80
F1 PTCs (Supplementary electrical heating using air) 100
G1 Trailer fuse voltage supply in internal fuse box 50
H1 Central locking control unit (4F8 with autolock)
Number Electrical equipment Amperes
If and when 239
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Bulb change
General notes
Before changing any bulb first turn off the equipment concerned.
Do not touch the bulb glass. Fingerprints vaporise in the heat, causing a
reduction in the bulb life and condensation on the mirror surface, thus
reducing efficiency.
A bulb should only be replaced by one of the same type. The type is inscribed
on the bulb, either on the glass part or on the base.
It is highly recommended to keep a box of spare bulbs in the vehicle. At the
very least, the bulbs that most affect road safety should have spares in the
vehicle.
Main headlights
Dipped beam- H7
Main beam- H1
Position - W5W
Turn signals - PY21W
Xenon headlights
21)
/ self-adjusting*
Dipped and main - D1S
22)
Flash and additional main - H1
Position W5W
Turn signals PY21W
Fog lights
Fog lights - H3
Fixed rear light
Stop/Position - P21W
23)
Turn signals - P21W
Rear tailgate light unit
Fog lamp (driver's side) - P21W
Reverse gear (passenger side) - P21W
Position - W5W
Indicator
Indicator - W5W
Registration plate light
Registration plate light - C5W
Note
• Due to the difficulty in accessing the lamps, any replacement work should
be done by a SEAT dealer. However, the following is a description of how to
change the bulbs except for the fog lights and interior bulbs.
21)
On this type of headlight, the bulb changes must be made by the SEAT dealer, given
that complex elements must be removed from the vehicle and a reset must be made
on the automatic control system incorporated.
22)
The Xenon bulbs discharge 2.5 times the light flux and have an average lifespan of 5
times more than that of halogen bulbs, this means that, except due to unusual circum-
stances, there is no need to change the bulbs for the whole life of the vehicle.
23)
Electronically controlled single filament bulb for Stop/side bulbs. If the bulb blows it
will not work in either position or Stop position.
If and when 240
Main headlight lamps
Turn signals
Dipped headlights
Main beam headlights
Side lights
Turn signal lamps
– Raise the bonnet.
– Rotate the lamp holder Ÿfig. 163 to the left and pull.
– Remove the bulb by pressing on the lamp holder and rotating at
the same time to the left.
– Installation is done in the reverse order.
Fig. 162 Main headlight
lamps
AA
AB
AC
AD
Fig. 163 Turn signal
lamps
AA
If and when 241
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Dipped beam lights
– Raise the bonnet
– Remove the loops Ÿfig. 164 in the direction of the arrow and
remove the cover.
– Remove the connector Ÿfig. 165 from the bulb.
– Disengage the retainer spring Ÿfig. 165 pressing inwards
and to the right.
– Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so that the rim of the
attachment plate is on the reflector cut-out.
Fig. 164 Dipped head-
lights
Fig. 165 Dipped head-
lights
A1
A2
A3
If and when 242
Main beam lights
– Raise the bonnet
– Remove the cover Ÿfig. 166 by pulling on this.
– Remove the connector Ÿfig. 167 from the bulb.
– Press the spring Ÿfig. 167 inwards and to the right.
– Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so that it sits correctly
into the cut-out on the reflector.
– Installation is done in the reverse order.
Fig. 166 Main beam
headlights
Fig. 167 Main beam
headlights
AC
A1
A2
If and when 243
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Side lights
– Raise the bonnet.
– Remove the cover Ÿfig. 168 by pulling on this.
– Extract the lamp holder Ÿfig. 169 outwards.
– Replace the bulb by pulling this out and inserting the replace-
ment.
– Installation is done in the reverse order.
Rear lights
• On the body
- Indicator, side and brake light
• On the tailgate
- Left-hand side: side and foglight.
- Right-hand side: side and reverse light.
Fig. 168 Side lights
Fig. 169 Side lights
AD
A1
If and when 244
Indicator, side and brake lights on the bodywork
– Press on the side pin outwards and take out the lamp holder.
– Extract the failed bulb and change it for a new one.
– To refit follow the steps in reverse order, taking special care when
fitting the lamp holder.
Position light, fog light and reverse light on the tailgate
– Open the tailgate.
– Pull the cover off. See the arrow Ÿfig. 171.
Fig. 170 Indicator, side
and brake lights on the
bodywork
Fig. 171 Lights on the
tailgate
Fig. 172 Removing the
lampholder
If and when 245
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
– Take the lampholder out pressing on the securing pins and
extract it outwards Ÿpage 244, fig. 172.
– Replace the faulty lamp, rotating it to the left and outwards.
– Installation is done in the reverse order.
Side indicators
– Press the indicator on one of its sides to take it out.
– Remove the lamp holder from the indicator.
– Remove the failed glass bulb and replace with a new bulb.
– Insert the lamp holder in the indicator guide until it clicks into
place.
– First place the indicator in the opening in the bodywork, fixing
the tabs Ÿfig. 173, arrow .
– Insert the lamp as shown by the arrow Ÿfig. 173.
Fig. 173 Indicator
A1
A2
If and when 246
Luggage compartment lights
– Extract the tulip shaped fitting by pressing on the inside edge of
this -arrow- using the flat side of a screwdriver Ÿfig. 174.
– Press the lamp sideways and remove it from its housing
Ÿfig. 175.
– Installation is done in the reverse order.
Fig. 174 Luggage
compartment light
Fig. 175 Luggage
compartment light
If and when 247
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Registration light
– To remove the bulb holder, unscrew the bolts Ÿfig. 176.
– Remove the lamp, moving it in the direction of the arrow and
outwards Ÿfig. 177.
– Installation is done in the reverse order.
Fig. 176 Registration
plate light
Fig. 177 Registration
plate light
If and when 248
Sunroof light
– Carefully remove the lamp, using the flat side of the screwdriver,
as shown in the figure Ÿfig. 179.
– Remove the lamp, moving it in the direction of the arrow and
outwards Ÿfig. 179.
– Installation is done in the reverse order.
Jump-starting
Jump leads
The jump lead must have a sufficient wire cross section.
If the engine fails to start because of a discharged battery, the battery can be
connected to the battery of another vehicle to start the engine.
Jump leads
Jump leads must comply with the standard DIN 72553 (see manufacturer's
documentation). The wire cross section must be at least 25 mm
2
for petrol
engines and at least 35 mm
2
for diesel engines.
Note
• The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as
soon as the positive terminals are connected.
• The discharged battery must be properly connected to the vehicles elec-
trical system.
Fig. 178 Removing
sunroof light
Fig. 179 Removing
sunroof light
If and when 249
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
How to jump start
In Ÿfig. 180, the flat battery is and the charged battery .
Jump lead terminal connections
– Switch off the ignition on both vehicles Ÿ .
1. Connect one end of the red jump lead to the positive Ÿfig. 180
terminal of the vehicle with the flat battery Ÿ .
2. Connect the other end of the red jump lead to the positive
terminal in the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Connect one end of the black jump lead to the negative terminal
on the battery of the vehicle providing assistance.
4. Connect the other end of the black jump lead to a solid metal
component which is bolted on to the engine block, or onto the
engine block itself of the vehicle with the flat battery. Do not
connect it to a point near the battery Ÿ .
5. Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into
contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment.
Starting
6. Start the engine of the vehicle with the boosting battery and let
it run at idling speed.
7. Start the engine of the car with the flat battery and wait one or
two minutes until the engine is “running”.
Removing the jump leads
8. Before you remove the jump leads, switch off the headlights (if
they are switched on).
9. Turn on the heater blower and rear window heater in the vehicle
with the flat battery. This helps minimise voltage peaks that are
generated when the leads are disconnected.
10. When the engine is running, disconnect the leads in reverse
order to the details given above.
Connect the battery clamps so they have good metal-to-metal contact with
the battery terminals.
If the engine fails to start, switch off the starter after about 10 seconds and
try again after about half a minute.
Fig. 180 How to connect
the jump leads
AA AB
A+
A+
A-
AX
If and when 250
WARNING
• Please note the safety warnings referring to working in the engine
compartment Ÿpage 198, “Working in the engine compartment”.
• The battery providing assistance must have the same voltage as the flat
battery (12V) and approximately the same capacity (see imprint on
battery). Failure to comply could result in an explosion.
• Never use jump leads when one of the batteries is frozen. Danger of
explosion! Even after the battery has thawed, battery acid could leak and
cause chemical burns. If a battery freezes, it should be replaced.
• Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes away from batteries, danger
of explosion. Failure to comply could result in an explosion.
• Observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the jump
leads.
• Do not connect the negative cable from the other vehicle directly to the
negative terminal of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the battery could
be ignited by sparks. Danger of explosion.
• Do not attach the negative cable from the other vehicle to parts of the
fuel system or to the brake line.
• The non-insulated parts of the battery clamps must not be allowed to
touch. The jump lead attached to the positive battery terminal must not
touch metal parts of the vehicle, this can cause a short circuit.
• Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact
with any moving parts in the engine compartment.
• Do not bend over the batteries. This could result in chemical burns.
Note
The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as
soon as the positive terminals are connected.
If and when 251
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Towing and tow-starting
Tow-starting
The use of jump leads is preferable to tow-starting.
We recommend that you do not tow-start your vehicle. Jump-starting
is preferable Ÿpage 248.
However, if your vehicle has to be tow-started:
– Engage the 2nd or the 3rd gear.
– Keep the clutch pressed down.
– Switch on the ignition.
– Once both vehicles are moving, release the clutch.
– As soon as the engine starts, press the clutch and move the gear
lever into neutral. This helps to prevent driving into the towing
vehicle.
WARNING
The risk of accidents is high when tow-starting. The vehicle being towed
can easily collide with the towing vehicle.
Caution
When tow-starting, fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.
Towing eyes
Please observe the following points if you use a tow-rope:
Fig. 181 The front right
section of the vehicle:
Fitting the front towing
eye
Fig. 182 Fitting the
towing eye to the rear of
the vehicle
If and when 252
Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle
– Drive slowly at first until the tow-rope is taut. Then accelerate
gradually.
– Begin and change gears cautiously. If you are driving an auto-
matic vehicle, accelerate gently.
– Remember that the brake servo and power steering are not
working in the vehicle you are towing. Brake earlier than you
would normally, but with a more gentle pressure on the brake.
Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle
– Ensure that the tow-rope remains taut at all times when towing.
Fitting the towing eye
– Take the towing ring from the onboard tools.
– Pull the lower front cover down and leave the cover hanging on
the vehicle.
– Remove the cover of the screw hole, insert a screwdriver into the
lower slot and lever gently.
– Screw the towing eye as shown by arrow anti-clockwise to the
limit position in the front Ÿpage 251, fig. 181 or rear
Ÿpage 251, fig. 182 threaded hole.
Tow-rope or tow-bar
It is easier and safer to tow a vehicle with a tow-bar. You should only use a
tow-rope if you do not have a tow-bar.
A tow-rope should be slightly elastic to reduce the loading on both vehicles.
It is advisable to use a tow-rope made of synthetic fibre or similarly elastic
material.
Attach the tow-rope or the tow-bar only to the towing eyes provided or a
towing bracket.
Driving style
Towing requires some experience, especially when using a tow-rope. Both
drivers should be familiar with the technique required for towing. Inexperi-
enced drivers should not attempt to tow-start or tow away another vehicle.
Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle and take care to avoid jerking the
tow-rope. When towing on an unpaved road, there is always a risk of over-
loading and damaging the anchorage points.
The ignition of the vehicle being towed must be switched on to prevent the
steering wheel from locking and also to allow the use of the turn signals,
horn, windscreen wipers and washers.
As the brake servo does not work if the engine is not running, you must apply
considerably more pressure to the brake pedal than you normally would.
As the power assisted steering does not work if the engine is not running, you
will need more strength to steer than you normally would.
Towing vehicles with an automatic gearbox
• Put the selector lever into position “N”.
• Do not drive faster than 50 km/h when towing a vehicle.
• Do not tow further than 50 km.
• If a breakdown vehicle is used, the vehicle must be towed with the front
wheels raised.
Note
• Observe legal requirements when towing or tow-starting.
• Switch on the hazard warning lights of both vehicles. However, observe
any regulations to the contrary.
• For technical reasons, vehicles with an automatic gearbox must not be
tow-started.
If and when 253
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
• If damage to your vehicle means that there is no lubricant in the gearbox,
you must raise the drive wheels while the vehicle is being towed.
• If the vehicle has to be towed more than 50 km, the front wheels must be
raised during towing, and towing should be carried out by a qualified person.
• The steering wheel is locked when the vehicle has no electrical power. The
vehicle must then be towed with the front wheels raised. Towing should be
carried out by a qualified person.
• The towing eye should always be kept in the vehicle. Please refer to the
notes on Ÿpage 251.
General notes on the technical data 255
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Technical Data
General notes on the technical data
What you should be aware of
General notes
All data in the official vehicle documents take precedence over this data.
All data in these documents are valid for the basic model as offered in Spain.
The vehicle data card included in the inspection and maintenance schedule
in the vehicle registration documents shows which engine is fitted in the
vehicle.
The figures may be different if additional equipment is fitted, for different
models, for special vehicles and for other countries.
Abbreviations used in this paragraph of the Technical Data
Abbreviation Meaning
kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.
bhp Brake horse power, formerly used to denote engine power
at rpm Revolutions per minute - engine speed.
Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.
l/100 km Fuel consumption in litres per 100 kilometres
g/km Carbon dioxide emissions in grams per kilometre.
CO
2
Carbon dioxide
CN Cetane number, indication of the ignition quality of the diesel.
RON Research octane number, indication of the knock resistance of petrol.
General notes on the technical data 256
Vehicle identification data
The most important data are given on the type plate and the
vehicle data sticker.
Vehicles for certain export countries do not have a model plate.
Type plate
The type plate is located on the left rib inside the engine compartment.
Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (chassis number) can be read from outside
the vehicle through a viewer in the windscreen. This is located on the left-
hand side of the vehicle in the lower area of the windscreen. It is also located
on the right-hand side of the engine compartment.
Vehicle data
The data sticker is placed on the inside of the spare wheel recess in the
luggage compartment.
The following information can be found in the vehicle information Ÿfig. 183:
This vehicle data is also contained in the Service Schedule.
Production control number
Vehicle identification number (chassis number)
Model code number
Model designation / engine power output
Engine and gearbox code letters
Paint number / interior trim code
Optional equipment codes
Consumption
CO
2
emissions
The information given in numbers 2 to 9 are also shown in the Service
Schedule.
CO emissions and consumption
2
Consumption (l/100 km) / CO
2
Emissions (g/km) urban
Consumption (l/100 km) / CO
2
Emissions (g/km) motorway
Consumption (l/100 km) / CO
2
Emissions (g/km) mixed
Fig. 183 Vehicle data
sticker – luggage
compartment
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
AA
AB
AC
General notes on the technical data 257
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
How are the figures measured?
Fuel consumption
The consumption and emission details shown on the vehicle data sticker differ from one vehicle to another.
The figures for fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions of the vehicle are also
found on the vehicle data sticker.
The fuel consumption and emissions figures given are based on the weight
category of the car, which is determined according to the engine/gearbox
combination and the equipment fitted.
The consumption and emission figures are calculated in accordance with the
EC test requirements 1999/100/EC. These test requirements specify a real-
istic test method based on normal everyday driving.
The following test conditions are applied:
Note
• Actual consumption may vary from quoted test values, depending on
personal driving style, road and traffic conditions, the weather and the condi-
tion of the vehicle.
Urban cycle The urban cycle starts with an engine cold start. City driving is then simulated.
Extra urban cycle
In the extra urban cycle the vehicle undergoes frequent acceleration and braking in all gears, as in normal everyday driving. The
road speed ranges from 0 to 120 km/h.
Combined
The average overall consumption is calculated with a weighting of around 37% for the urban cycle and 63% for the extra urban
cycle.
CO
2
emissions
The exhaust gases are collected during both driving cycles to calculate carbon dioxide emissions. The gas composition is then
analysed to evaluate the CO
2
content and other emissions.
General notes on the technical data 258
Weights
Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a fuel tank filled to 90% capacity
and without optional extras. The figure quoted includes 75 kg to allow for the
weight of the driver.
For special versions and optional equipment fittings or for the addition of
accessories, the weight of the vehicle will increase Ÿ .
WARNING
• Please note that the centre of gravity may shift when transporting
heavy objects; this may affect the vehicle's handling and lead to an acci-
dent. Always adjust your speed and driving style to suit road conditions
and requirements.
• Never exceed the gross axle weight rating or the gross vehicle weight
rating. If the allowed axle load or the allowed total weight is exceeded, the
driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents,
injuries and damage to the vehicle.
Towing a trailer
Trailer weights
Trailer weights
The trailer weights and drawbar loads approved are selected in intensive
trials according to precisely defined criteria. The approved trailer weights are
valid for vehicles in EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (in certain circum-
stances up to 100 km/h). The figures may be different in other countries. All
data in the official vehicle documents take precedence over these data Ÿ .
Drawbar load
The maximum permitted weight exerted by the trailer drawbar on the ball joint
of the towing bracket must not exceed 75 kg.
In the interest of road safety, we recommend that you always tow
approaching the maximum drawbar load. The response of the trailer on the
road will be poor if the drawbar load is too small.
If the maximum permissible drawbar load cannot be met (e.g. with small,
empty and light-weight single axle trailers or tandem axle trailers with an axle
base of less than 1 metre), at least 4% of the actual trailer weight is a legal
stipulation for a drawbar load.
WARNING
• For safety reasons, you should not drive at speeds above 80 km/h when
towing a trailer. This also applies to countries where higher speeds are
permitted.
• Never exceed the maximum trailer weights or the draw bar loading. If
the permissible axle load or the permissible total weight is exceeded, the
driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents,
injuries and damage to the vehicle.
Wheels
Tyre pressure, snow chains, wheel bolts
Tyre pressures
The sticker with the tyre pressure values can be found on the inside of the
tank flap. The tyre pressure values given there are for cold tyres. The slightly
raised pressures of warm tyres must not be reduced Ÿ .
General notes on the technical data 259
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Snow chains
Snow chains may be fitted only to the front wheels.
Consult the chapter “wheels” of this manual.
Wheel bolts
After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts
should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench Ÿ . The tight-
ening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.
WARNING
• Check the tyre pressure at least once per month. Correct tyre pressure
is very important. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, there is an
increased danger of accidents, particularly at high speeds.
• If the torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loosen whilst the
vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening torque is too high,
the wheel bolts and threads could be damaged.
Note
We recommend that you ask your Authorised Service Centre for information
about appropriate wheel, tyre and snow chain size.
Technical Data 260
Technical Data
Checking fluid levels
From time to time, the levels of the different fluids in the
vehicle must be checked. Never fill with incorrect fluids, to do
so may cause serious damage to the engine.
Radiator expansion tank
Windscreen washer fluid reservoir
Engine oil filler cap
Engine oil dipstick
Brake fluid reservoir
Vehicle battery (underneath the cover)
The checking and replenishment of the service fluids are carried out on the
components mentioned above. These operations are described in the
Ÿpage 198.
Overview
Further explanations, instructions and restrictions on the technical data are
contained as of Ÿpage 255
Fig. 184 Diagram for the
location of the various
elements
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
Technical Data 261
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Petrol engine 1.4 litre 63 kW (86 bhp)
General engine data
Performance figures
Weights
Trailer weights
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 63 (86)/ 5000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 132/ 3800
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1390
Compression 10,5 ± 0,3
Fuel 95 Octane petrol
Maximum speed in km/h 172
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 9,1
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 13,7
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1746
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1351
Gross axle weight, front in kg 890
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 895
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 620
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1000
Technical Data 262
Engine oil filling capacity
Petrol engine 1.6 litre 75 kW (102 bhp)
General engine data
Performance figures
Weights
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 3.2 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 75 (102)/ 5600
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 148/ 3800
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1595
Compression 10,5 ± 0,5
Fuel Premium unleaded, 95 RON
Maximum speed in km/h 184
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 7,8
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 11,7
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1783
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1280
Gross axle weight, front in kg 936
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 890
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Technical Data 263
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Trailer weights
Engine oil filling capacity
Petrol engine 2.0 110 kW (150 bhp). Manual
General engine data
Performance figures
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 640
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1200
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.8 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 110 (150)/ 6000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 200/ 3500
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1984
Compression 11,5-0,5
Fuel
98 octane or 95 octane
a)
a)
Slight power loss
Maximum speed in km/h 210
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6,0
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 8,8
Technical Data 264
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil filling capacity
Petrol engine 2.0 110 kW (150 bhp). Automatic
General engine data
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1830
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1335
Gross axle weight, front in kg 989
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 883
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 660
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Engine oil capacity with oil filter change. 5.3 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 110 (150)/ 6000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 200/ 3500
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1984
Compression 11,5-0,5
Fuel
98 octane or 95 octane
a)
a)
With a slight power loss
Technical Data 265
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Performance figures
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil filling capacity
Maximum speed in km/h 208
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6,4
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 9,4
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1870
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1375
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1024
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 888
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 680
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 5.3 litres
Technical Data 266
Petrol engine 2.0l 136 kW (185 bhp)
General engine data
Performance figures
Weights
Trailer weights
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 136 (185)/ 5100-6000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 270/ 1800-5000
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1984
Compression 10,3 ± 0,5
Fuel
98 octane or 95 octane
a)
a)
With a slight power loss
Maximum speed in km/h 221
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 5,5
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 7,8
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1904
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1409
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1050
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 896
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 700
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Technical Data 267
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Engine oil filling capacity
Petrol engine 2.0l 147 kW (200 bhp). Manual
General engine data
Performance figures
Weights
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 5.3 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 147 (200)/ 5100-6000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 280/ 1800-5000
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1984
Compression 10,3 ± 0,5
Fuel
98 octane or 95 octane
a)
a)
With a slight power loss
Maximum speed in km/h 229
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 5,2
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 7,3
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1904
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1409
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1046
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 897
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Technical Data 268
Trailer weights
Engine oil filling capacity
Petrol engine 2.0l 147 kW (200 bhp). Automatic
General engine data
Performance figures
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 700
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 5.3 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 147 (200)/ 5100-6000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 280/ 1800-5000
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1984
Compression 10,3 ± 0,5
Fuel
98 octane or 95 octane
a)
a)
With a slight power loss
Maximum speed in km/h 229
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 5,2
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 7,2
Technical Data 269
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil filling capacity
Petrol engine 2.0l 177 kW (240 bhp)
General engine data
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1939
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1444
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1076
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 902
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 620
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1200
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 5.3 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 177 (240)/ 5700-6300
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 300/ 2200-5000
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1984
Compression 10,3 ± 0,5
Fuel
98 octane or 95 octane
a)
a)
With a slight power loss
Technical Data 270
Performance figures
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil filling capacity
Maximum speed in km/h 244
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 4,9
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 6,8
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1945
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1450
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1047
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 926
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 720
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 5.3 litres
Technical Data 271
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Diesel engine 1.9l TDI 77 kW (105 bhp)
General engine data
Performance figures
Weights
Trailer weights
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 77 (105) 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 250/1900
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/1896
Compression 19 ± 0,5
Fuel Min 51 CZ
Maximum speed in km/h 185
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 7,6
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 11,3
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1868
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1365
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1015
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 896
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 680
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Technical Data 272
Engine oil filling capacity
Diesel engine 2.0l 103 kW (140 bhp). Manual
General engine data
Performance figures
Weights
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4,3
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 103 (140)/ 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 320/ 1750 - 2500
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1968
Compression 18,5 ± 0,5
Fuel Min 51 CZ
Maximum speed in km/h 205
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6,3
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 9,3
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1885
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1390
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1042
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 885
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Technical Data 273
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Trailer weights
Engine oil filling capacity
Diesel engine 2.0 103 kW (140 bhp). Automatic
General engine data
Performance figures
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 690
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 103 (140)/ 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 320/ 1750 - 2500
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1968
Compression 18,5 ± 0,5
Fuel Min 51 CZ
Maximum speed in km/h 205
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6,3
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 9,3
Technical Data 274
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil filling capacity
Diesel engine 2.0l 100 kW (136 bhp). Manual
General engine data
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1925
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1430
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1077
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 890
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 710
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
Power kW (CV) rpm 100 (136)/ 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 320/ 1750 - 2500
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1968
Compression 18,5 ± 0,5
Fuel Min 51 CZ
Technical Data 275
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Performance figures
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil filling capacity
Maximum speed in km/h 203
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6,4
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 9,4
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1885
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1390
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1042
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 885
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 690
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
Technical Data 276
Diesel engine 2.0 100 kW (136 bhp). Automatic
General engine data
Performance figures
Weights
Trailer weights
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 100 (136)/ 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 320/ 1750 - 2500
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1968
Compression 18,5 ± 0,5
Fuel Min 51 CZ
Maximum speed in km/h 203
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6,4
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 9,4
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1925
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1430
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1077
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 890
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 710
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Technical Data 277
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Engine oil filling capacity
Diesel engine 2.0l 125 kW (170 bhp)
General engine data
Performance figures
Weights
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 125 (170)/ 4200
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 350/ 1750 - 2500
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1968
Compression 18,5 ± 0,5
Fuel Min 51 CZ
Maximum speed in km/h 214
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 5,9
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 8,2
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1901
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1406
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1048
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 894
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Technical Data 278
Trailer weights
Engine oil filling capacity
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 700
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
Technical Data 279
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Dimensions and capacities
Dimensions
Capacities
Tyre pressure
Length, width 4,315 mm/ 1,768 mm
Height at kerb weight 1,459 mm
Front and rear projection 949 mm/ 788mm
Wheelbase 2,578 mm
Turning circle 10.7 m
Track width
a)
a)
This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.
Front Rear
1,525 mm 1,509 mm
1,533 mm 1,517 mm
Fuel tank 55 l. Reserve 7 l.
Windscreen washer fluid container with headlight washer 3 l/ 5.5 l
Summer-grade tyres:
The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the inside of the tank flap.
Winter tyres:
The pressure of these tyres is the same as the summer tyre pressure plus 0.2 bar.
Technical Data 280
Index 281
Index
A
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Acoustic signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Acoustic warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Adjusting the seat belt height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Air conditioner*
2C-Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Air conditioning system
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Air conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Air recirculation mode
2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Manual air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Airbags
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Alarm system
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Alterations to the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Alternator
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Ambient temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Anti-theft wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Apple iPod connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Aquaplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Ashtray* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Aspects to take into account before starting the
vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror*
Activating the anti-dazzle function . . . . . . 123
Deactivating anti-dazzle function . . . . . . . . 123
Automatic car washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Automatic gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox . 157
Automatic lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Automatic mode
2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Automatic wiper/wash function for the rear window
122
Auxiliary audio connection: AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . 136
B
Ball coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
BAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Battery
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Winter conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Before starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Belt tension device
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Belt tension devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Brake assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Brake pad wear indicator*
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169, 173
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Braking distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Index 282
Bulb changes
general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Bulb defect
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116, 152
C
Car care
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Car care products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Car phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Car washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
CD loader* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Automatic speed dependent locking and un-
locking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Emergency unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Locking system for involuntary unlocking . . 95
Selective unlocking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Unlocking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Central locking button
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Centre console with drinks holder . . . . . . . . . . 131
Cetane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Changing gear
See Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Changing the lamps
Main headlight lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Changing the main headlight lamps
dipped beam lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
main beam lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
turn signal lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Changing the rear light lamps
Position light, fog light and rear light on the
tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Changing the rear lights
Indicator, side and brake lights on the
bodywork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
luggage compartment lights . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Checking battery electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . 213
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Categorisation in groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Group 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Group 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Group 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Groups 0 and 0+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Child seats
ISOFIX and Toptether system . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
on the front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Cigarette lighter* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Cleaning alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle . . . . . . . . 182
Cleaning chrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Cleaning cloth seat covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Cleaning dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Cleaning engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Cleaning fabric trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Cleaning leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Cleaning plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Cleaning seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Cleaning steel wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Cleaning windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Cleaning wooden trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Climatic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Climatronic
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Clothes hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Control
Light switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Control lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Controls
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Convenience closing
Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Index 283
Convenience opening
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205, 206
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Coolant level
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Coolant Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Coolant temperature
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Covering bi-xenon headlights
driving on the left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
driving on the right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Covering simple headlights
driving on the left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
driving on the right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Cruise control*
Turning off the cruise control system . . . . . 167
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
D
Danger of fitting a child seat on the front passenger
seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Diesel engine
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Diesel engine particulate filter* . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Differential lock fault (EDL)
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Dipped headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Disabling front passenger airbag
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Disabling the airbag
Disabling front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . 44
Display (without warning or information texts) . 59
Displays in the Multi-function display
Memory displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Door lock cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Doors
Childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Drive wheels traction control system . . . . . . . . 170
Driving
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
With a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178, 180
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Driving economically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Driving programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Driving safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Driving with an automatic gearbox / DSG automatic
gearbox* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Driving with respect for the environment . . . . 180
Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Dust filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . 113
E
EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
EDS
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Electric steering system
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Electrical sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 153
warning message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Electronic stabilisation program . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Electronic stabilisation programme . . . . . . . . . . 81
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Electronic stabilisation programme (ESP)
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
emergency manual locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Emergency opening
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Emission control system
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Index 284
Engine
Running-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Engine compartment
Working in the engine compartment . . . . . 198
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Engine fault
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Engine management
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Engine oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Engine oil pressure
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 78
Environmental tip
Avoiding pollution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 171
Example of menu use
Open the configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Program a speed limit warning . . . . . . . . . . 67
To activate and deactivate the speed limit
warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Examples of menu use
Open the main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Open the winter tyres menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
To close the winter tyres menu . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Exhaust gases purification system . . . . . . . . . 174
Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
External aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
F
Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
First-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Folding table* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Foot brake
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Front drinks holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Front interior light
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Front passenger airbag deactivation . . . . . . . . . 44
Front reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Front seat adjustment
Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Fuel
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Fuel level
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Fuel Tank
Opening the fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Fuel tank
See Fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
G
G 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Gear shift pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
General overview of the engine compartment 260
Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Glow plug system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
H
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 162
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
head restraints
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127, 128
adjustment of the head restraint angle . . . 128
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
head restraints, correct adjustment . . . . . . . . . 13
In-use and non-use positions . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Headlight flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Index 285
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Headlight washer system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Heated front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Heated window
2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Heating and ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
High pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
I
Identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Indicator lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Indicator lights
indication lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Information texts in the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Instrument and switch lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Instrument panel menu
Configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Example of menu use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Lights and visibility menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Instrument panel menus
Principal menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Vehicle status menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Intermittent wipe, windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
ISOFIX and Toptether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
J
Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
K
Key tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
L
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Load compartment
See Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Locker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 138
See also Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . 16
Luggage compartment cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
M
Main beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Main beam headlights
Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Main headlight lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Manual mode
2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
MFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Mileage display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors, electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Make-up mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
N
Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
O
Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Octane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
One-touch opening and closing
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Opening and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Overview
Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Index 286
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
P
Paintwork
Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 55
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Trips to foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Petrol additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Petrol engines, starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Physical principles of a frontal collision . . . . . . 21
Plastic key tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Puncture-proof tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
R
Radio frequency remote control
Changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Radio navigation Steering wheel controls
audio + telephone version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
audio version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Radio wave remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Rain sensor* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Rear fog light
Indication lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Rear interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Rear reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Rear seat bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Rear window heating
Heating element wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Rear-view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Registration light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Remote control key
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Synchronising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Removing and fitting the wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Repairs
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Replacement keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Reverse gear
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
RME fuel (biodiesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Roll-back function
Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Roof aerial* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Roof carrier* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Rubber seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Running-in
Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Running-in tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
S
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Safety instructions
Coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Safety notes
Belt tension devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Disabling front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . 45
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Safety system- safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 129
Seat belt position
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Seat belt release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Seat belt warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Index 287
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Incorrectly fastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Not worn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Seat belts protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Selective opening* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Selector lever locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Shoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Sitting position
Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Incorrect sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Sitting position, occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220, 259
Soot accumulation in the diesel engine particulate
filter *
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Spare wheel* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Starting Petrol engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 154
After the fuel tank has been run dry . . . . . . 155
Steam cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Steering wheel audio controls
audio + telephone version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
audio version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Steering wheel controls
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Steering wheel height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 150
Stowage area
Other stowage areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Stowage compartment
Front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Stowage compartments
Front left hand side seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Sunroof blind
Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Switch
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Switches
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Electrical exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Switching on hazard warning lamps . . . . . . . . 115
T
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Emergency opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Tank
fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
reserve indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
TCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
TCS (Traction control system)
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
The danger of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . 22
Tightening torque of wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . 259
To fold down the seat back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178, 258
Towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Towing bracket, fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Towing eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Traction control system
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Trailer turn signals
Indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 116
Index 288
Two-way radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Type plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Tyre Mobility-System (Tyre repair kit) . . . . . . . 223
Tyre monitor indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223, 230
Tyre-Mobility-System (Tyre repair kit) . . . . . . . 230
Tyres and wheels
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Tyres service life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Tyres tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Tyres with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . 215
U
Underbody sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
USB* connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Using the Tiptronic gear system . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
V
Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Vehicle data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Vehicle identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Vehicle identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Vehicle paint
Car care products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Vehicle tools
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Vehicle wallet storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Ventilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Volumetric sensor*
Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
W
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Warning reports
Red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Yellow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Warning texts in the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Washing by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Washing with high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . 184
Water
warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Water in the windscreen washer tank . . . . . . . 208
Wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226, 259
Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Wheel change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Wheel trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214, 258
Why assume the correct sitting position? . . . . . 30
Why should head restraints be correctly adjusted?
13
Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 21
Why wear seatbelts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Windscreen washer fluid
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Windscreen wiper blades
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Changing the front blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Changing the rear blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Winter driving
Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Wiper/wash automatic function . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . 198
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand,
that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no
right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error
or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the "Copyright" Act.
All rights on changes are reserved.

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.09.06
I
n
g
l
é
s
1
P
0
0
1
2
0
0
3
A
E
(
0
7
.
0
6
)


(
G
T
9
)
auto emoción

Foreword
This owner's manual and the corresponding supplements should be read carefully to familiarise yourself with your vehicle. Also, the regular care, maintenance and correct handling of the vehicle will contribute to preserve its value. For safety reasons, note the information concerning accessories, modifications and parts exchange. If selling the vehicle, give all of the onboard documentation to the new owner as this should be kept with the vehicle.

Contents

3

Contents
The structure of this manual Content
..... 5

Operating instructions

............

55 55 55 56 59 65 72 84 84 84 88 92 93 93 99 100 102 104 106 108 111 111 117 118 119 123 126 126 127 129 130 131

Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
................................ 6 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital display in the instrument panel . . . . . . . Instrument panel menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ashtrays*, cigarette lighter* and electrical sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . First-aid kit, warning triangle, fire extinguisher Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

134 137 138 140 140 142 145 149 150 150 151 152 153 156 157 162 163 165

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning . .
Heating and ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Climatic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Safety First

...........................

7 7 7 10 16 16 19 19 21 24 28 30 30 34 37 41 44 46 46 48 50

Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Proper sitting position for occupants . . . . . . . . . Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stowing luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using these instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steering wheel lighting controls . . . . . . . . . . . .

Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic gearbox* / DSG automatic gearbox* Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acoustic parking aid system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise control system (CCS)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Belt tension devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio frequency remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sliding/tilting roof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deactivating airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tips and Maintenance

.............

169 169 169 170 171 173 173 174 175

Intelligent technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti-lock brake system and traction control M-ABS (ABS and TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic stabilisation program (ESP)* . . . . . . .

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Securing child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seats and stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The importance of correct seat adjustment . . . . Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear seat bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stowage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Driving and the environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exhaust gasses purification system . . . . . . . . . . Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . .0l 125 kW (170 bhp) . . Automatic Diesel engine 2.. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . Tyre repair kit (Tyre-Mobility-System)* . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . Battery . . . . . . . . Petrol engine 1. . . .4 litre 63 kW (86 bhp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . Washer fluid and windscreen wiper blades . . . Petrol engine 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0l 177 kW (240 bhp) . . General notes . . . . . Care of the vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 178 180 182 182 183 188 191 191 191 192 192 193 195 195 196 197 198 201 205 208 211 212 214 222 222 224 230 232 239 248 251 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diesel engine 2. . . Accessories and parts . . . . . . . . . . . Fitting a towing bracket* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .0l 103 kW (140 bhp). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mobile telephones and two-way radios . . Jump-starting .0l 100 kW (136 bhp). . . . . . . Diesel . . Driving economically and with respect for the environment . .. Towing and tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Roof aerial* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coolant .. . . . .. . .. . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . Petrol . .. . . . Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . parts replacement and modifications . . . Fuses . . . . .. .0 100 kW (136 bhp). . . . . . . . . Petrol engine 2. . Wheels . . .9l TDI 77 kW (105 bhp) . . . . .. . . . . . . Refuelling . . 255 255 255 257 258 258 260 260 261 262 263 264 266 267 268 269 271 272 273 274 276 277 279 General notes on the technical data . . Bulb change . . . . Diesel engine 2. . .. . . . . . . Checking fluid levels . . .. . . . . . . . . . Engine oil .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 110 kW (150 bhp). .. .. . . . . . Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . Wheel change . . . . . . . .. Care of the vehicle interior . . . . . . . . Petrol engine 2. . . . . . . . . . Wheels . . . . . How are the figures measured? . . . . . . . . . Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifications .. .. . . . . . . . . . . Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Petrol engine 2. . . . . .0l 147 kW (200 bhp). . . . . . . . . Automatic Petrol engine 2. . Accessories. . Diesel engine 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . Diesel engine 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 litre 75 kW (102 bhp) .. . . .0 103 kW (140 bhp). . . . . Petrol engine 2. . . . .. . .. . . . tyre repair kit and spare wheel . Manual . . . .. .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . ... Automatic Diesel engine 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . Working in the engine compartment . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . .. Petrol engine 2. What you should be aware of . . . . . Tools. . Cleaning and caring for your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . .0 110 kW (150 bhp). . . . . . Technical Data . . . . . .0l 136 kW (185 bhp) . . . . . . Index . . . . . . . . . . If and when . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0l 147 kW (200 bhp). . . . . . . . .4 Contents Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual . . . . . .

For example. Even if the copyright symbol does not appear this does not mean that the mark is not copyrighted. are supplied as optional only for some versions or model year. some of the equipment and functions that are described in this manual are not included in all types or variants of the model or model year. They warn you of serious dangers. Some of the equipment described here will not be available until a later date. this can not be interpreted as dishonest advertising. Indicates the end of a section. The section is continued on the following page. WARNING Texts with this symbol contain safety information.The structure of this manual 5 The structure of this manual Before reading this manual it must be understood This manual describes the vehicle equipment at the time of publication. miles and gallons may be used instead of kilometres and litres. Caution Texts with this symbol draw your attention to a possible risk of damage to your vehicle. Note Texts with this symbol contain additional information of a more general nature. rear) appearing in this manual refer to the normal forward working direction of the vehicle except when otherwise indicated. they may vary or be modified in accordance with technical or market requirements or model year. ® All registered marks are indicated with ®. Because this is a general manual for the LEON. The direction indications (left. In certain countries there may be different units of measurement than the ones used in this manual. right. Illustrations are intended as a general guide. or is available only in certain markets. or are only offered in different countries. and may vary from the equipment fitted in your vehicle in some details. possibly involving accident or injury. front. For the sake of the environment Texts with this symbol refer to points relevant to the protection of the environment. The equipment marked with an asterisk* is fitted as standard only in determined model versions. .

g. Tips and Maintenance Advice relating to driving. 5. Technical Data Figures. etc. The entire manual is divided into five large chapters: 1. how to create a suitable climate in the passenger compartment.6 Content Content This manual is structured to give you the information you need as quickly and clearly as possible. . 2. this will help you to rapidly find the information you require. 3. Alphabetic index At the end of this manual there is a detailed alphabetical index. care and maintenance of your vehicle and certain problems which you may solve yourself. dimensions and measurements (for example fuel consumption) of your vehicle. etc. Safety First Information on the vehicle equipment relating to passive safety such as seat belts. Controls and equipment Information about the distribution of controls in the driver position of the vehicle. seats. 4. about the seat adjustment possibilities. The contents of this Manual are grouped into relatively short sections making up chapters (e. data. airbags. “Air conditioning”).

Never “gamble” with your safety and the safety of your passengers. the safety equipment could reduce the risk of injury. The other booklets in the vehicle wallet also contain further information that you should be aware of for your own safety and for the safety of your passengers. side airbags in the front seat backrests. • • “ISOFIX” anchor points for “ISOFIX” child seats on the outer seats in the second row. In the event of an accident. curtain airbags. belt tension limiter for the front and rear seats. belt height adjustment for the front seats.Safe driving 7 Safety First Safe driving Brief introduction Dear SEAT Driver Safety first! This chapter contains important information. Safety equipment The safety equipment is a part of the occupant protection system and can reduce the risk of injury during an accident. side airbags in the rear seat backrests*. suggestions and warnings that should be read and followed in the interest of your own safety and the safety of your passengers. • • • • • • • • • • • • • optimised three-point seat belts. belt tension devices for the front seats. But this safety equipment cannot help you or your passengers if you or your Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . front airbags. crash-active front head restraints*. The safety equipment mentioned above works together to provide you and your passengers with the best possible protection in accident situations. height-adjustable head restraints. advice. head restraints with in-use position and non-use position adjustable steering column. The following list includes most of the safety equipment in your SEAT: WARNING This manual contains important information concerning vehicle handling both by passengers and the driver. Ensure that the complete vehicle wallet is always in the vehicle. This is especially important when you lend or sell the vehicle to others.

information is provided about why this equipment is so important. This manual includes important warnings that you and your passengers should observe in order to reduce the risk of injury. – Protect children with appropriate child seats and properly applied seat belts page 46. . by passengers or telephone conversations. head restraint and mirrors properly for your size.g. what you have to observe when using it and how you and your passengers can achieve the greatest possible benefit from the safety equipment fitted. – Assume the correct sitting position. Safety is everyone's business! – Ensure that the passengers in the rear seats always have the head restraints in the in-use position page 14. – Check tyre pressure. alcohol. – Securely restrain all parcels page 16. Therefore. Instruct your passengers also to assume a proper sitting position page 10. – Always fasten your seat belt correctly before driving off. always note the following points before every trip: – Ensure that the vehicle's lights and turn signals operate flawlessly. What affects driving safety? Driving safety is largely determined by your driving style and the personal behaviour of all occupants. you are responsible for yourself and your passengers. When your concentration or driving safety is affected. – Instruct passengers to adjust the head restraints according to their height. For your own safety and the safety of your passengers. for this reason: – Do not allow yourself to be distracted from the traffic around you. As driver. – Make sure that no objects can interfere with the pedals. you endanger yourself as well as others on the road .8 Safe driving passengers assume an incorrect sitting position or do not properly adjust or use this equipment. Instruct your passengers also to fasten their seat belts properly page 19. – Ensure that all windows provide a clear and good view of the surroundings. drugs). – Adjust front seat. Before starting every trip The driver bears the responsibility for his passengers and the operational worthiness of the vehicle. by medication.g. how it protects you. – Never drive when your driving ability is impaired (e. – Observe traffic laws and speed limits. e.

– If possible.Safe driving 9 – Always reduce your speed as appropriate for road.at least every two hours. traffic and weather conditions. the risk of injury and accidents increases. avoid driving when tired or anxious. – When travelling long distances. WARNING When driving safety is impaired during a trip. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . take breaks regularly .

or as close as possible to the same level as the top of your head fig.10 Safe driving Proper sitting position for occupants Proper sitting position for driver The proper sitting position for the driver is important for safe and relaxed driving. 1. – Move the driver's seat forwards or backwards so that you are able to press the accelerator. Fig. . 1 The proper distance between driver and steering wheel – Adjust the steering wheel so that there is a distance of at least 25 cm between the steering wheel and the centre of your chest fig. – Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same level as the top of your head. brake and clutch pedals to the floor with your knees still slightly angled . 2 Proper head restraint position for driver For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident. we recommend the following adjustments for the driver: Fig. – Ensure that you can reach the highest point of the steering wheel. – Move the backrest to an upright position so that your back rests completely against it. 2.

you may sustain injuries to the arms. see page 129. we recommend the following adjustments for the front passenger: – Move the front passenger seat back as far as possible . For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident. • • • Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position. This reduces the risk of injury when the driver airbag is triggered. To reduce the risk of injury to the driver during sudden braking manoeuvres or an accident. contact a qualified workshop. in the centre of the steering wheel). hands and head. It is possible to deactivate the passenger airbag in exceptional circumstances page 25. or in any other manner (e. Adjustment of the driver's seat page 126. WARNING Adjust the driver's seat so that there is at least 25 cm distance between the centre of the chest and the hub of the steering wheel page 10. the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web or the incorrect sitting position! • WARNING • Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve optimal protection. • An incorrect sitting position of the front passenger can lead to severe injuries. – Keep both feet in the foot well in front of the front passenger seat. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . fig.Safe driving 11 – Always fasten your seat belt correctly before driving off page 19. When driving.g. • • An incorrect sitting position of the driver can lead to severe injuries. The workshop will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary. – Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same level as the top of your head. If you are sitting nearer than 25 cm. the airbag system cannot protect you properly. always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. – Always fasten your seat belt correctly before driving off page 19. – Move the backrest to an upright position so that your back rests completely against it. If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm. In such cases. – Keep both feet in the foot well so that you have the vehicle under control at all times. The further the backrests are tilted to the rear. or as close as possible to the same level as the top of your head page 13. Proper sitting position for front passenger The front passenger must sit at least 25 cm away from the dash panel so that the airbag can provide the greatest possible protection in the event that it is triggered. For detailed information on how to adjust the front passenger's seat. never drive with the backrest tilted far back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the backrest is in an upright position and the driver is wearing his or her seat belt properly. 1.

An incorrect sitting position exposes you to an increased risk of injury in the event of a braking manoeuvre or an accident. never travel with the backrest tilted far back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the backrest is in an upright position and the front passenger is wearing his or her seat belt properly. the airbag system cannot protect you properly. they could sustain severe injuries. passengers on the rear bench seat must observe the following: – Adjust the headrest to the correct position page 14. To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or an accident. Adjust the front passenger seat so that there is at least 25 cm between your breastbone and the dash panel. • Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve maximum protection. The further the backrests are tilted to the rear. To reduce the risk of injury to the front passenger during sudden braking manoeuvres or an accident. – Always fasten your seat belt correctly before driving off page 19. If the airbag is triggered. – Use an appropriate child restraint system when you take children in the vehicle page 46. The workshop will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.12 Safe driving WARNING (continued) – Keep both feet in the foot well in front of the rear seat. contact a qualified workshop. out the window or on the seat. If passengers on the rear seat are not sitting in an upright position. If you are sitting nearer than 25 cm. Seat belts can only provide optimal protection when backrests are in an upright position and the passengers are wearing their seat belts properly. • • • Always keep your feet in the foot well when the vehicle is moving. Correct sitting position for passengers in the rear seats Passengers in the rear seats must sit up straight. you could sustain severe injuries due to an incorrect sitting position. If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm. the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web increases. . • • • • Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve maximum protection. never rest them on the instrument panel. keep their feet in the foot wells and wear their seat belts properly. the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web or the incorrect sitting position! WARNING If the passengers on the rear seat are not sitting properly.

3 Properly adjusted head restraint viewed from the front Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted increases the risk of severe injuries. 4 Properly adjusted head restraint viewed from the side Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . Incorrectly adjusted head restraints also increase the risk of injury during sudden or unexpected driving or braking manoeuvres. The head restraints must always be adjusted according to the occupant's size. 4. at eye level fig. The resulting body pressure on the backrest activates the crash-active head restraint* on the front seat. 3 and fig. thus reducing the risk of head injuries such as brain trauma. This movement reduces the distance between the occupant's head and the head rest. at the very least. or as close as possible to the same level as the top of your head and. • Headrests in use* Vehicle occupants are pressed into their seats during a rear end collision. Incorrectly adjusted head restraints could result in death in the event of a collision or accident. Adjusting the head restraints page 126.Safe driving 13 Correct adjustment of front seat head restraints Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of occupant protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in most accident situations. – Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same level as the top of your head. which moves rapidly forwards and upwards at the same time. Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve maximum protection. Fig. WARNING • • • Fig.

– To fit the head restraints in position for use. . 5 Head restraints in correct position Rear outer seat head restraints – The rear outer seat head restraints have 4 positions. protecting passengers along with the rear seat belts.g. by “falling” back into the seat when entering the vehicle) or if pressure is applied to a front seat head restraint from the rear. • Note The crash-active head restraints* could also be triggered if a vehicle occupant applies a high level of pressure on the backrest (e. Fig. – Three positions for use fig. not dangerous as the crash-active head restraints will return to the original position immediately and are thus once again ready. 5.14 Safe driving WARNING Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted increases the risk of severe injuries. the head restraints are used normally. however. In these positions. This accidental activation is. Correct adjustment of rear seat head restraints Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of the occupant protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in most accident situations • Incorrectly adjusted head restraints could result in death in the event of a collision or accident. – And one position for non-use. • Incorrectly adjusted head restraints also increase the risk of injury during sudden or unexpected driving or braking manoeuvres. pull on the edges with both hands in the direction of the arrow. The head restraints must always be adjusted according to the occupant's size.

Before every trip. never sit sideways. Do not swap the centre rear head restraint with either of the outer seat rear head restraints. never travel in a foot well. in-use (head restraint up) and non-use (head restraint down). • • Injury risk in case of an accident! Caution Note the instructions on the adjustment of the head restraints page 127. instruct your passengers to assume the proper sitting position and to maintain it during the trip page 10. never put your feet on the dash panel. assume the proper sitting position and maintain it throughout the trip. – Never permit anyone to assume an incorrect sitting position in the vehicle while travelling . never lean against the dash panel.Safe driving 15 Centre rear head restraint – The centre head restraint only has two positions. “Proper sitting position for occupants”. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . WARNING • • • Every incorrect sitting position increases the risk of severe injuries. never tilt your backrest far to the rear. The following list contains examples of sitting positions that could be dangerous for all occupants. Examples of incorrect sitting positions An incorrect sitting position can lead to severe injuries to occupants. but we would like to make you aware of this issue. never stand on the seats. never put your feet on the surface of a seat. never travel on a seat without wearing the seat belt. whenever the vehicle is in motion: never stand in the vehicle. The list is not complete. Incorrect sitting positions substantially reduce the protective function of seat belts and increase the risk of injury due to incorrect belt web position. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Therefore. never lie on the rear bench. never lean out of a window. Seat belts can provide optimal protection only when the belt webs are properly positioned. never carry any person in the luggage compartment. never sit on the front edge of a seat. especially children. striking an occupant who has assumed an incorrect sitting position. never kneel on the seats. WARNING • Under no circumstances should the rear passengers travel while the head restraints are in the non-use position. you are responsible for all vehicle occupants. Sitting in an incorrect position exposes the occupants to severe injuries if airbags deploy. Before the vehicle moves. never put your feet out of a window. As the driver.

– Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened during the trip and do not obstruct the pedals . Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor coverings over the original floor mats. you could cause an accident. Risk of serious injuries. – Ensure that the pedals can return unimpaired to their initial positions. • • Restricting pedal operation can lead to critical situations while driving. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area free and can be securely fastened in the foot well. clutch or accelerator pedal. . • • • Ensure that the floor mats are always securely attached.16 Safe driving Pedal area Pedals The operation and freedom of movement of all pedals must never be impaired by objects or floor mats. Only use floor mats which leave the pedals clear and which are secured to prevent them from slipping. the brake pedal must be free to move further than normal in order to bring the vehicle to a stop. You can obtain suitable floor mats from a qualified dealership. brake and clutch pedals unimpaired to the floor. An object could move into the pedal area and impair pedal operation. If a brake circuit fails. you will not be able to operate the brake. WARNING Never place objects in the driver foot well. Risk of accident. Unsecured objects which shift back and forth could impair the driving safety or driving characteristics of the vehicle by shifting the centre of gravity. Risk of accident! Stowing luggage Loading the luggage compartment All luggage and other loose objects must be safely secured in the luggage compartment. WARNING If the pedals are obstructed. Floor mats on the driver side Only floor mats may be used which can be securely fastened in the foot well and do not impair operation of the pedals. In the event of a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre. – Ensure that you can always press the accelerator. Wear suitable shoes Always wear shoes which support your feet properly and give you a good feel for the pedals. This would reduce the pedal area and could obstruct the pedals.

• • Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . it is essential to adjust your speed and driving style accordingly. objects can be transformed into “missiles”. – Lay and stow heavy luggage as far forward as possible in the luggage compartment. This increased risk of injury will be further increased if a loose object is struck by an inflating airbag. Fastening rings There are four fastening rings in the luggage compartment which can be used to secure luggage and other objects. – Pull up the fastening rings to attach the straps. Never transport passengers in the luggage compartment. During a collision or an accident. Ensure that the ventilation slits are never covered. leading to accidents. – Always use suitable and undamaged straps to secure luggage and other objects to the fastening rings in “Loading the luggage compartment” on page 16. Used air escapes through ventilation slits in the side trim of the luggage compartment. Straps for securing the load to the fastening rings are commercially available. • • • Note Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce fogging of the windows. Never leave your vehicle unattended. make sure that there are no adults or children in the vehicle. injuring vehicle occupants. – Secure heavy objects to the fitted fastening rings page 17. If the allowed axle load or the allowed total weight is exceeded. If this happens. the driving characteristics of the vehicle may change. • Always stow objects in the luggage compartment and secure them on the fastening rings. they will remain trapped without help and there is a mortal risk. WARNING (continued) • Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. loose objects can be thrown forward. Children could climb into the luggage compartment closing the door behind them. The amount of “kinetic energy” depends on the speed of the vehicle and the weight of the object. Before you lock the vehicle. however.Safe driving 17 – Distribute the load evenly in the luggage compartment. Close and lock both the tailgate and all the doors when you leave the vehicle. The most significant factor. During sudden manoeuvres or accidents. • • Use suitable specialist straps to secure heavy objects. Never exceed the allowed axle loads or allowed maximum weight. injuries and damage to the vehicle. – Stow heavy luggage as low as possible in the luggage compartment. • Please note that the centre of gravity may shift when transporting heavy objects. especially when the tailgate is open. Risk of fatal injury. is the speed of the vehicle. to avoid accidents. Every passenger must be properly belted in page 19. this may affect the vehicle's handling and lead to an accident. • WARNING Loose luggage and other objects in the luggage compartment can cause serious injuries. even small and light objects can build up so much energy that they can cause very severe injuries. Therefore.

• To prevent pieces of luggage or other objects from flying forward. . During a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h. This increased risk of injury will be further increased if a loose object is struck by an inflating airbag. this object generates a force corresponding to 20 times its weight. WARNING • If pieces of baggage or other objects are secured to the fastening rings with inappropriate or damaged retaining cords. always use appropriate retaining cords which are secured to the fastening rings. • Never secure a child seat on the fastening rings. That means that the effective weight of the object increases to about 90 kg. injuries could result in the event of braking manoeuvres or accidents.18 Safe driving For example: an object weighing 4.5 kg is lying unsecured in the vehicle. You can imagine the severity of the injuries which might be sustained if this “projectile” strikes an occupant as it flies through the passenger compartment.

Therefore. two individual front seats and three places on the rear seat. how they work and how to properly fasten. you and your passengers should always wear the seat belts properly as long as the vehicle is in motion. • • Properly worn seat belts can reduce severe injuries in the event of sudden braking manoeuvres or accidents. Before you drive: – Always fasten your seat belt correctly before driving off. Pregnant women or persons with physical disabilities must also use seat belts. Every occupant in the vehicle must properly fasten and wear the seat belt belonging to his or her seat. – Instruct your passengers to fasten their seat belts properly before driving off. WARNING • • Never transport more people than there are seats available in the vehicle. Children must be protected with an appropriate child restraint system. these persons can also sustain severe injuries if they are not wearing their seat belts properly. Like all other occupants. – Read and observe all the information as well as the warnings in this chapter.Seat belts 19 Seat belts Introduction Always fasten seat belts before driving! Properly worn seat belts can save lives! In this chapter you will learn why seat belts are so important. Number of seats Your vehicle has five passenger places. • Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . the risk of severe injuries increases. adjust and wear them. Each seat is equipped with a three-point seat belt. – Protect your children with child restraint systems appropriate for the size and age of the children. WARNING If the seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all. Seat belt warning lamp* The warning lamp acts as a reminder to the driver to fasten the seat belt.

20 Seat belts The warning lamp in the combi-instrument lights up1) if the driver seat belt is not fastened when the ignition is switched on. In addition. an acoustic signal is given for a few seconds and a text is displayed on the combi-instrument asking you to1) fasten your seat belt. The warning lamp* does not go out until the driver seat belt is fastened while the ignition is switched on. 1) Depending on the model version .

The action of the laws of physics in the case of a frontal collision may be explained in the following way: As the vehicle moves fig. 6 the vehicle and the passengers alike accumulate a stored energy called “kinetic energy”. Fig. 7 The vehicle with unbelted occupants strikes the wall. 6 Passengers of a vehicle heading for a brick wall. At greater speed these forces are even higher. Fig. The higher the speed and the greater the weight. a large amount of kinetic energy is generated. The amount of “kinetic energy” depends on the speed of the vehicle and the weight of the vehicle and passengers. the kinetic energy increases by a factor of four. 7.000 kg). however. In a frontal collision they will continue to move forward at the speed their vehicle Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . The most significant factor. They are not wearing seat belts. for example. Passengers not wearing seat belts are not “attached” to the vehicle. Because the passengers in our example are not restrained by seat belts. the forces acting on bodies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne (1. the more energy there is to be “released” in an accident.Seat belts 21 Why wear seat belts? Frontal collisions and the laws of physics In the event of a frontal collision. the entire amount of kinetic energy has to be absorbed at the point of impact fig. is the speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles from 25 km/h to 50 km/h. Even at speeds of 30 km/h to 50 km/h.

Even at low speeds the forces acting on the body in a collision are so great that it is not possible to brace oneself with one's hands. Fig. dashboard. Note that airbags can be triggered only once. windscreen or whatever else is in the way fig. airbags provide only additional protection. Rear passengers who do not use seat belts endanger not only themselves but also the front occupants fig. 8 A driver not wearing a seat belt is thrown forward violently. hitting the driver wearing a seat belt. 9. It is also important for the rear passengers to wear seat belts properly. the seat belt must always be worn properly so that you will be protected in accidents in which no airbag is deployed. . All occupants (including the driver) must be wearing seat belts properly during the trip. but also to all accidents and collisions. This will reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of an accident – regardless of whether an airbag is fitted for the seat. 8. This example applies not only to frontal accidents. To achieve the best possible protection. Fig. unbelted passengers are thrown forward and will make violent contact with the steering wheel. as they could otherwise be thrown forward violently in an accident. When deployed. In a frontal collision. The danger of not using the seat belt Many people believe that the occupants can protect themselves with their hands in a minor collision. 9 The unbelted rear passenger is thrown forward violently. this is false. The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.22 Seat belts was travelling just before the impact.

why it is so important to fasten seat belts before every trip. For this reason. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . – Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened at all times and are not damaged. for example. Although your vehicle is equipped with airbags. Furthermore. Accident statistics have shown properly worn seat belts to be an effective means of substantially reducing the risk of injury and improving the chances of survival in a serious accident. they can reduce the risk of injury in an accident. all these features reduce the forces acting on the occupants and consequently the risk of injury. Passengers wearing their seat belts correctly benefit greatly from the ability of the belts to absorb kinetic energy. the seat belts must be fastened and worn. rear collisions. Taken together. In addition. rolls or accidents in which the airbag trigger threshold in the control unit is not exceeded. are only triggered in some frontal accidents. Fig. the risk of severe injuries increases. minor side collisions. you should always wear your seat belt and ensure that your passengers have fastened their seat belts properly before you drive off! Safety notes on using seat belts Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle occupants in the correct sitting positions and substantially reduce the kinetic energy in the event of an accident. The front airbags will not be triggered during minor frontal collisions. Seat belts also help to prevent uncontrolled movements that could lead to severe injuries. properly worn seat belts reduce the danger of being thrown from the car. properly worn seat belts reduce substantially the risk of injury in all other types of accidents. Ensure that your passengers wear their seat belts as well. Of course. Our examples describe frontal collisions. even when "just driving around the corner". properly worn seat belts improve the protection provided by airbags in the event of an accident. 10 Driver protected by the properly worn seat belt during a sudden braking manoeuvre.Seat belts 23 Seat belts protect Passengers not wearing seat belts risk severe injuries in the event of an accident. The optimal protection from seat belts can be achieved only if you use them properly. wearing a seat belt is required by law in most countries. – Always wear the seat belt as described in this booklet. The front airbags. Therefore. WARNING • If the seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all. This is If seat belts are used correctly. The front crumple zones and other passive safety features (such as the airbag system) are also designed to absorb the kinetic energy generated in a collision.

• The belts must be kept clean.24 Seat belts WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued) • Fasten your seat belt before every trip . The seat belts must not be removed or modified in any way. • • The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be blocked with paper or other objects. Risk of fatal injury. Keep both feet in the foot well in front of your seat as long as the vehicle is in motion. Seat belts Seat belt adjustment The seat belts for the front and rear occupants are locked into position by a latch. Seat belts that have been worn in an accident and stretched must be replaced by a qualified workshop. The belt webbing must never be twisted while it is being worn.even when driving in town.) because this can cause injuries. • • • • • • Never allow two passengers (even children) to share the same seat belt. Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or jammed. or to rub on any sharp edges. you must check the condition of all seat belts at regular intervals. 11 Belt buckle and latch plate of seat belt • The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the belt web is not positioned correctly. retaining rings or similar instruments to alter the position of the belt webbing. Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. • Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat belt yourself. Therefore. • Never use seat belt clips. Renewal may be necessary even if there is no apparent damage. The belt anchorage should also be checked. • Fig. as this can prevent the latch plate from engaging securely. bulky clothing (such as an overcoat over a jacket) impairs the proper fit and function of the belts. Loose. Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the connections. etc. . belt retractors or parts of the buckle could cause severe injuries in the event of an accident. • Never wear the seat belt under the arm or in any other incorrect position. reducing their capacity to protect. That applies also to your front and rear passengers – danger of injury! • The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the belt web is not positioned correctly. otherwise the retractors may not work properly page 190. The belt webbing should never lie on hard or fragile objects (such as glasses or pens.

fig. Always engage the retractor lock when you are securing a child seat in group 0. Seat belt position Seat belts offer their maximum protection only when they are properly positioned. viewed from front WARNING • An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident. 13 Correct belt web and head restraint positions. – Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the appropriate seat and push it down until it is securely locked with an audible click page 24. The seat belts are equipped with an automatic retractor on the shoulder strap. The automatic belt retractors on the front seats are fitted with belt tension devices page 28. the belt cannot protect him or her properly. take hold of the latch plate and pull it slowly across your chest and lap. If you do this. The seat belts offer best protection only when the backrests are in an upright position and the seat belts have been fastened properly. during sudden braking. 11.Seat belts 25 – Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly. – Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in the buckle. If an occupant is incorrectly belted in. the seat belt will not protect you properly and the risk of injury is increased. • • Fig. • • Never put the latch plate in the buckle of another seat. An incorrectly positioned belt web can cause extremely severe injuries. However. viewed from side Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . – To fasten the belt. the automatic retractor on the shoulder belt is locked. 0+ or 1 page 46. Fig. Full freedom of movement is permitted when the shoulder belt is pulled slowly. 12 Correct belt web and head restraint positions. during travel in mountains or bends and during acceleration.

26 Seat belts The following features are available to adjust the seat belt in the shoulder region: Pregnant women must also fasten their seat belts properly The best protection for the unborn child is for the mother to wear the seat belt properly at all times during the pregnancy. fig. Pull the belt tight. 13. front seat height adjustment*. WARNING An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident. if necessary to take up any slack. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the torso page 25. 14 Positioning seat belts during pregnancy The seat belt provides maximum protection only when the belt web is properly positioned page 25. • The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis. – Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in the buckle. 14. never across the stomach. 12. – Holding the latch plate. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the pelvis page 25. • • belt height adjustment for the front seats. – Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the corresponding seat and push it down until it is securely locked with an audible click . • Read and observe the warnings page 23. • • The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoulder. pull the belt evenly across your chest and as low as possible over the pelvis fig. – Adjust the front seat and head restraint correctly page 10. Fig. fig. never across the neck. .

the lap part of the seat belt must lie as low as possible over the pelvis. 15. For pregnant women. fig. never across the stomach. If you do. Seat belt height adjusters can be used to adjust the position of the seat belt at the shoulder. Read and observe the warnings page 23. you increase the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries. The latch plate The seat belt adjuster for the front seats can be used to adjust the proper belt position at the shoulder.Seat belts 27 WARNING An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident. and always lie flat so that no pressure is exerted on the abdomen. 16 Location of the belt height adjuster – Press the red button on the belt buckle is released and springs out . Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . 15 Removing latch plate from buckle Fig. Fig. Adjusting the seat belt height Seat belt release The seat belt must not be unfastened until the vehicle has come to a standstill. • • • – Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls up easily and the trim is not damaged WARNING Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.

you are responsible for all vehicle occupants. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is especially increased when a deploying airbag strikes an occupant who has assumed an incorrect sitting position. the seat belts on the front seats are retracted automatically. If the belt tension devices are triggered. the seat An incorrectly worn seat belt increases the risk of severe injuries. The belt tension device can be triggered only once. • Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of seat belts page 23. Belt tension devices Function of the belt tension device During a frontal collision. The seat belts must be fastened exactly in the order described in this chapter. if the vehicle overturns. WARNING Before every trip. especially children. and only if the seat belt is actually being worn. – After adjusting. instruct your passengers to adjust their seat belts properly and to wear them during the trip. Incorrectly fastened seat belts Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe injuries.28 Seat belts – Press the upper part of the shoulder belt guide and hold it in this position page 27. . A qualified workshop is familiar with these regulations and will be pleased to pass on the information to you. or in situations where no large forces act on the front. 16. This is normal and is no indication that there was a fire in the vehicle. fig. side or rear of the vehicle. – Move the shoulder belt guide up or down until you have adjusted the seat belt page 25. Therefore: – Never permit anyone to assume an incorrect sitting position in the vehicle while travelling . • Note • The relevant safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or components of the system are scrapped. Sensors will only trigger the belt tension devices during severe head-on. As driver. lateral and rear collisions. a fine dust is produced. An incorrect sitting position impairs substantially the protection a seat belt offers and can lead to severe or fatal injuries. If you work on the belt tension devices or remove and install parts of the system when performing other repair work. side or rear collision. • • Service and disposal of belt tension devices The belt tension devices are components of the seat belts that are installed in the seats of your vehicle. The belt tension devices will not be triggered in the event of a light frontal. pull the shoulder belt sharply to check that the catch on the shoulder belt guide is engaged securely. Seat belts can provide optimal protection only if the belt web is properly worn. reducing the forward motion of the occupants. This retracts and tightens the seat belts. The seat belts for the front occupants are equipped with belt tension devices.

must be observed. in the event of an accident. remove or install parts of the belt tension devices or seat belts. or if the belt tension devices are used incorrectly.Seat belts 29 belt may be damaged. • Never attempt to repair. • The belt tension device and seat belt including its automatic retractor cannot be repaired. So that the effectiveness of the belt tension device is not reduced and that removed parts do not cause any injuries or environmental pollution. adjust. regulations. must be performed by a qualified workshop only. • • Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . The consequence may be that. Any work on the belt tension devices and seat belts. which are known to the qualified workshops. including the removal and refitting of system parts in conjunction with other repair work. WARNING • If repairs are not carried out by a professional. The belt tension devices will only provide protection for one accident and must be changed it they have been activated. the risk of severe or fatal injuries increases. the belt tension devices function incorrectly or not at all. The belt tension devices may fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong circumstances.

for whatever reason. • All occupants. Always maintain the greatest possible distance between yourself and the front airbag. the inflating airbag may inflict critical or fatal injuries upon the occupant. the angle of impact and the vehicle speed. including children. This applies particularly to children. Therefore. providing their maximum protection. The airbag deploys in fractions of a second and with a high velocity. side and/or curtain airbag will not be triggered. If the vehicle deceleration occurring during the collision and measured by the control unit remains below the specified reference values. If you have assumed an incorrect seating position at that moment. Take into account that the visible damage in a vehicle following an accident. the risk of injury is increased substantially. the seat belt must always be worn properly and the correct sitting position must be assumed. The most important factors for triggering the airbag are the type of accident. Never transport children in the vehicle if they are not restrained or the restraint system is not appropriate for their age. WARNING Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or assuming an incorrect sitting position can lead to critical or fatal injuries. This increased risk of injury will be further increased if you are struck by an inflating airbag. For your own safety and the safety of the passengers. the front. are not an indication as to why the airbags were triggered. always wear the seat belt properly page 19. page 13. You should always transport all children up to 12 years of age on the rear seat. it is essential that all occupants maintain a correct sitting position while travelling. who are not properly belted can sustain critical or fatal injuries if the airbag is triggered. please ensure the following before you drive: – Always wear the seat belt properly page 19. you could sustain critical injuries.30 Airbag system Airbag system Brief introduction Why wear a seat belt and assume the correct sitting position? For the inflating airbags to achieve the best protection. . – Adjust the driver seat and the steering wheel correctly page 10. Whether the airbags are triggered depends primarily on the vehicle deceleration rate resulting from the collision and detected by the control unit. Braking heavily the moment before an accident may cause an occupant not wearing a seat belt to be thrown forward into the area of the deploying airbag. • – Use the correct child restraint system to protect children in your vehicle page 46. • To reduce the risk of injury from an inflating airbag. • If you are not wearing a seat belt or if you lean forward or to the side or assume an incorrect sitting position. In this case. This way. size or weight. the front airbags can completely deploy when triggered. – Adjust the front passenger seat correctly – Adjust the head restraint seat correctly page 11.

• • This warning lamp monitors the airbag and belt tension device system. That is the safest place in the vehicle for children. it is absolutely essential that you observe the following safety measures: − Disable the front passenger airbag airbags*”. You should always transport all children up to 12 years of age on the rear seat. When transporting children. The danger of fitting a child seat on the front passenger seat Rear-facing child seats must never be used on the front passenger seat when the front passenger airbag is enabled. “Deactivating • − The child seat must be approved by the child seat manufacturer for use on a front passenger seat with front or side airbag. − Follow the installation instructions of the child seat manufacturer and absolutely observe the warnings page 46. the front passenger airbag can be disabled with a key-operated switch page 44. The front passenger seat is life threatening to a child if you transport the child in a rear-facing child seat. the roof or the backrest. page 44. use a child seat appropriate to the age and size of each child page 46. If. The child can suffer critical or fatal injuries when the front passenger airbag is triggered.Airbag system 31 WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued) • Always properly adjust the front seats. For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the airbag off. “Child safety”. If a rear-facing child seat is secured to the front passenger seat. • • An inflating front passenger airbag can strike the rear-facing child seat and hurl it with great force against the door. − Before properly installing the child seat. including control units and wiring connections. Warning lamp for airbag and belt tension device system WARNING If a child seat is secured to the front passenger seat. For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the airbag off. An enabled front airbag on the front passenger side is potentially a major danger to a child. an inflating airbag can strike it with such great force that critical or fatal injuries may result. push the front passenger seat all the way to the rear so that the greatest possible distance to the front passenger airbag is ensured. an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted. Never secure a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat if the front passenger airbag is enabled. the risk to the child of sustaining critical or fatal injuries in the event of an accident increases. it should be necessary to transport a child in a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat. Alternatively. − The backrest of the front passenger seat must be in an upright position. under special circumstances. an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted. − Ensure that no objects prevent the front passenger seat from being pushed completely back. Therefore we urgently recommend that you transport children on the rear seats. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . The warning lamp monitors all airbags and belt tension devices in the vehicle.

The consequence may be that. WARNING • If there is a malfunction. a fault message appears in the display of the combi-instrument for approx. Any work on the airbag system or removal and installation of the airbag components for other repairs (such as repairs to the steering wheel) should be performed only by a qualified workshop. repair information and qualified personnel. or if the airbags are used incorrectly. or could inflate in the wrong circumstances. you should have a qualified workshop check the system immediately. in the event of an accident. In the event of a malfunction. depending on the malfunction. In this event. or if it comes on or flickers while the car is moving. The airbags may fail to inflate. in the event of an accident. In addition. adjust. you may use only a dry cloth or one moistened with water. The relevant safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or components of the airbag are scrapped. the airbag inflates incorrectly or does not inflate at all. Each time the ignition is switched on. • • • • The system must be checked when the warning lamp does not come on when the ignition is switched on. • . WARNING • If repairs are not carried out by a professional. • It is important not to attach any objects such as cup holders or telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units. Qualified workshops have the necessary tools. the risk of severe or fatal injuries is increased. the warning lamp remains on continuously. 10 seconds and a short acoustic signal is given. The specialist workshops and the Vehicle disposal centres are familiar with these requirements. Never clean the dash panel and surface of the airbag module with cleansers containing solvents. goes out and then comes on again after the ignition is switched on. Otherwise there is a risk that. and do not obstruct or modify them in any way. parts of the airbag system may be damaged. Repair. : does not go out about 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on. If a malfunction should occur. care and disposal of the airbags The parts of the airbag system are installed in various places in your vehicle. If you work on the airbag system or remove and install parts of the system when performing other repair work. • • • Never attempt to repair. disintegrating plastic parts can cause substantial injuries.32 Airbag system Monitoring of airbag and belt tension device system The functionality of the airbag and belt tension device system is constantly monitored electronically. the airbag system and belt tension devices may not be triggered. or may not be triggered correctly. the warning lights for several seconds and the display in the instrument panel* lamp shows AIRBAG / TENSIONER. Solvents cause the surface to become porous. the airbag and belt tension device system cannot properly perform its protective function. remove or install parts of the airbag system. have the system checked immediately by a qualified workshop. To clean the steering wheel or dash panel. If any of the airbags are deactivated by the Authorised Service Centre. • Do not cover or stick anything on the steering wheel hub or the soft plastic surface of the airbag unit on the passenger side of the dashboard. If the airbag inflates. the indicator lights for several seconds more after the verification and will turn off if there is no fault.

Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . if they have been deployed they must be replaced. • • Never attempt to alter the front bumper or the body. The airbags provide protection for one accident only.Airbag system 33 WARNING (continued) • We urgently recommend that you go to a qualified workshop for all work on the airbag system.

• • • an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit). Fig. 17 and fig. The functionality of the airbag system is monitored electronically. . In conjunction with the seat belts. The airbag warning lamp will light up for a few seconds every time the ignition is switched on (self-diagnosis). a warning lamp in the dash panel insert page 31.34 Airbag system Front airbags Description of front airbags The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts. 18. it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times . “Safety notes on front airbag system”. Fig. Please bear in mind that the airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their seat belts correctly and have adjusted the head restraints properly. the front airbag system gives the front occupants additional protection for the head and chest in the event of a severe frontal collision page 37. or if it comes on or flickers while the car is moving. In addition to their normal function of restraining the occupants. fig. For this reason. “Introduction”. but is an integral part of the vehicle's overall passive safety system.not only because this is required by law in most countries. The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts. 17 Driver airbag located in steering wheel The main parts of the front airbag system are: the two front airbags (airbag with gas generator) for the driver and front passenger. 18 Front passenger airbag located in dash panel • • • • There is a fault in the system if the warning lamp does not come on when the ignition is switched on page 31. goes out and then comes on again after the ignition is switched on. the seat belts also hold the driver and front passenger in a position where the airbags can provide maximum protection in a frontal collision. but also for your safety page 19. does not go out about 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on. The front airbag for the driver is located in the steering wheel the airbag for the front passenger is located in the dash panel Airbags are identified by the text “AIRBAG”.

the airbag deflates sufficiently for the front occupants to see forward. during a minor side collision. The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propellant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. if the ignition is switched off. • If a fault should occur in the airbag system. The fully deployed airbags cushion the forward movement of the front occupants and help to reduce the risk of injury to the head and the upper part of the body.Airbag system 35 The front airbag system will not be triggered if: • • • • • Function of front airbags Inflated airbags reduce the risk of head or chest injury. the airbags fill with a propellant gas and deploy in front of the driver and front passenger fig. Fig. When the system is triggered. the head and chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag. In certain types of accident the front. 19 Inflated front airbags The airbag system is designed so that the airbags for the driver and front passenger are triggered in a severe frontal collision. or not trigger correctly. have the system checked immediately by a qualified workshop. during a rear-end collision. or if the vehicle rolls. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . “Proper sitting position for occupants”. Thus. Once the impact has been absorbed. curtain and side airbags may be triggered together. 19. during a minor frontal collision. WARNING • The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if the occupants are seated correctly page 10. Otherwise there is a danger that during a frontal collision. the system may fail to trigger.

. The function of the airbag covers if the airbags are triggered Fig. the airbags have to deploy extremely rapidly (within fractions of a second). 20 Airbag covers reacting when the airbags are triggered The airbag covers fold out of the steering wheel or dash panel when the driver and front passenger airbags deploy fig. The airbag covers remain connected to the steering wheel or the dash panel. This is normal and is no indication that there was a fire in the vehicle.36 Airbag system In order to provide the desired extra protection in an accident. A fine dust may develop when the airbag deploys. 20.

the side airbag system gives the front seat occupants additional protection for the upper body in the event of a severe side collision page 40. Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way. In addition to their normal function of protecting the occupants in a collision. This increased risk of injury will be further increased if you are struck by an inflating airbag. they can considerably reduce the risk of injury in many kinds of accident. 21 Side airbag in driver seat • • The side airbags are located in the backrest cushions of the driver seat fig. • Never let a child travel on the front seat without an appropriate restraint system.Airbag system 37 Safety notes on front airbag system If you use airbags correctly. risk of fatal injuries! In addition. children can sustain serious or fatal injuries from the airbag as it inflates page 46. or allow children or other passengers to travel in this position. If the minimum distance is not observed then the airbags do not correctly protect the vehicle occupants. The locations are identified by the text “AIRBAG” in the upper region of the backrests. the seat belts also • It is also important not to attach any objects such as cup holders or telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units. the side airbags reduce the risk of injury to passengers on the front seats to the areas of the body facing the impact. the front seats and head restraints must always be positioned correctly for the height of the occupant. If the airbag is triggered in an accident. “Child safety”. WARNING Side airbags* Description of side airbags The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts. Occupants sitting in the front of the vehicle must never carry any objects or pets in the deployment space between them and the airbags. • If you are not wearing a seat belt or if you lean forward or to the side or assume an incorrect sitting position. • Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . In a side collision. The airbags provide protection for one accident only. In conjunction with the seat belts. 21 and the front passenger seat as well as in the outer rear seats. the risk of injury is increased substantially. • It is important for the driver and front passenger to maintain a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dash panel. “Safety notes on the operation of the side airbag system”. if they have been deployed they must be replaced. Fig.

For this reason. during a minor side collision. The functionality of the airbag system is monitored electronically. but also for your safety page 19. during a minor frontal collision. or if the vehicle rolls. • • • • • • • • • if the ignition is switched off. “Introduction”.38 Airbag system hold the passengers on the front seats and the outer rear seats in a position where the side airbags can provide maximum protection. • Never drive the vehicle if the interior panels have been removed. • If a fault should occur in the airbag system. but is an integral part of the vehicle's overall passive safety system. . have the system checked immediately by a qualified workshop. • The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if the occupants are seated correctly page 10. it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times . The main parts of the airbag system are an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit). a warning lamp in the dash panel insert page 31. Always check that the openings are closed or covered if loudspeakers or other equipment are fitted in the interior door panels. Please bear in mind that the airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their seat belts. The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts. The airbag warning lamp will light up for approx. if the sensors do not correctly measure the pressure increase on the interior of the doors. The side airbag system will not be triggered WARNING (continued) • Never drive if the interior door panels have been removed or if the panels have not been correctly fitted.not only because this is required by law in most countries. during a minor rear-end collision. “Proper sitting position for occupants”. 4 seconds every time the ignition is switched on (self-diagnosis). or not trigger correctly. WARNING • In a side-on collision. unless the holes left by the loudspeakers have been correctly closed. due to air escaping through the areas with holes or openings in the door panel. the system may fail to trigger. Otherwise there is a danger that during a side collision. the side airbags in the sides of the backrests of the front and rear seats. • Any work carried out to the doors should be made in a qualified authorised workshop. the side airbags will not work. • Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeakers in the door panels have been removed.

the head and chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag. 22 Illustration of principle: inflated side airbags on left side of vehicle In some side collisions the side airbag is triggered on the impact side of the vehicle fig. In order to provide the desired extra protection in an accident.Airbag system 39 Function of side airbags Inflated airbags can reduce the risk of head or chest injury in many side impact collisions. The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propellant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. A fine dust may develop when the airbag deploys. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . the airbag is filled with propellant gas. Fig. This is normal and is no indication that there was a fire in the vehicle. the airbags have to deploy extremely rapidly (within fractions of a second). Thus. The fully deployed airbags cushion the movement of the occupants of the front seats and the outer rear seats and help to reduce the risk of injury to the upper body. When the system is triggered. the front curtain and side airbags may be triggered together. 22. In certain types of accident.

• • Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way. if you lean forward. All work carried out on the front door must be made in a qualified workshop. they expose themselves to an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident. fitting loudspeakers). • Any damage to the original seat upholstery or around the seams of the side airbag units must be repaired immediately by a qualified workshop. • If you do not wear a seat belt. To ensure the correct functioning of the side and head airbags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modified in any way (e. This would impair the protection offered by the side airbags. a fault may be introduced into the operation of the airbag system. they can considerably reduce the risk of injury in side impact collisions. “Child safety”. • Under no circumstances should protective covers be fitted over the driver seat or front passenger seat unless the covers have been expressly approved for use in your vehicle. such as hard blows or kicks. • Any work on the side airbag system or removal and installation of the airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of the front seat) should only be performed by a qualified workshop. should the side airbag system be triggered in an accident. It is also important not to attach any accessories (such as cup holders) to the doors. WARNING WARNING (continued) • When children assume an incorrect sitting position. “Accessories. The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. this could have critical consequences including serious injury or death page 46. • In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection. Otherwise. If the front door is damaged in any way. In this case the side airbags would not be triggered. must not be exerted upon the backrest bolster because the system may be damaged. or allow children or other passengers to travel in this position. this may affect the correct working of the system. The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in the interior of the front doors. • . The airbags provide protection for one accident only. • • Great forces.40 Airbag system Safety notes on the operation of the side airbag system If airbags are used correctly. or are not seated correctly while the vehicle is in motion. the prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts fastened while travelling. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. This is particularly the case if the child is travelling on the front passenger seat and the airbag system is triggered in an accident. the use of non-approved seat covers would obstruct the side airbag seriously reducing the airbag's effectiveness page 191. parts replacement and modifications”.g. you are at greater risk of injury. • Occupants of the outer seats must never carry any objects or pets in the deployment space between them and the airbags. Because the airbag deploys from the side of the backrest. if they have been deployed they must be replaced.

Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . 23 Location of left curtain airbag The curtain airbags are located on both sides in the interior above the doors fig. The functionality of the airbag system is monitored electronically. a warning lamp in the dash panel insert page 31. but is an integral part of the vehicle's overall passive safety system. the curtain airbags (airbags with gas generator) for the driver. “Introduction”.not only because this is required by law in most countries. Fig. In conjunction with the seat belts.Airbag system 41 Curtain airbags Description of curtain airbags The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts. For this reason. front passenger and passengers on the rear seats. “Safety notes on the operation of the curtain airbag system”. The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts. it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times . 23 and are identified with the text “AIRBAG”. but also for your safety page 19. Please bear in mind that the airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their seat belts correctly and have adjusted the head restraints properly. The curtain airbag system will not be triggered • if the ignition is switched off. • • • The main parts of the curtain airbag system are: an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit). the curtain airbag system gives the occupants additional protection for the head and upper body in the event of a severe side collision page 42.

42 Airbag system • • • • during a frontal collision. A fine dust may develop when the airbag deploys. or not trigger correctly. Fig. When the system is triggered. This is normal and is no indication that there was a fire in the vehicle. the airbag is filled with propellant gas. The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propellant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. during a rear-end collision. or during a minor frontal collision. Function of curtain airbags Fully inflated airbags reduce the risk of head or chest injury in a side collision. During some side collisions the curtain airbag is triggered on the impact side of the vehicle fig. the system may fail to trigger. WARNING • In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection. the curtain bag covers the side windows and door pillars. See an Authorised Service Centre to make this adjustment. the head air bag must be disconnected in those vehicles fitted with a passenger compartment separation screen. . have the system checked immediately by a qualified workshop. the prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts fastened while travelling. Thus. 24. 24 Deployed curtain airbags • For safety reasons. they can considerably reduce the risk of injury in many kinds of accident. the head and chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag. if the vehicle rolls. Safety notes on the operation of the curtain airbag system If you use airbags correctly. Otherwise there is a danger that during a collision. In certain types of accident the front. In the process. WARNING If a fault should occur in the airbag system. The fully deployed airbags cushion the movement of the front occupants and help to reduce the risk of injury to the upper body. the airbags have to deploy extremely rapidly (within fractions of a second). In order to provide the desired extra protection in an accident. side and curtain airbags may be triggered together.

The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in the interior of the front doors. If the front door is damaged in any way. All work carried out on the front door must be made in a qualified workshop. if they have been deployed they must be replaced. Therefore. do not hang the clothes on coat hangers. parts replacement and modifications”.g.Airbag system 43 WARNING (continued) • There must be no other persons. sun blinds which have not been expressly approved for use in your vehicle may not be attached to the side windows page 191. animals or objects between the occupants of the outer seats and the deployment space of the curtain airbags so that the curtain airbag can deploy without restriction and provide the greatest possible protection. • • Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way. a fault may be introduced into the operation of the airbag system. this may affect the correct working of the system. Otherwise. • • • Any work on the curtain airbag system or removal and installation of the airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of the roof lining) should only be performed by a qualified workshop. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. To ensure the correct functioning of the side and head airbags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modified in any way (e. “Accessories. fitting loudspeakers). The airbags provide protection for one accident only. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . When using the coat hooks.

.44 Airbag system Deactivating airbags* Disabling front passenger airbag If you fit a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat. this means that only the frontal airbag is deactivated. 26 Warning lamp for deactivated passenger airbag in centre console Fig. the front passenger airbag must be deactivated. – Check that the warning lamp “AIRBAG OFF” in the dash panel fig. Fig. 25 In the glove box there is key switch for disabling and enabling the airbags on the front passenger side When the passenger airbag is deactivated. All the other airbags in the vehicle remain functional. Enabling front passenger airbag – Switch off ignition. Disabling front passenger airbag – Switch off ignition. 25. 25. – Turn the ignition switch in the key-operated switch in the glove box to the position ON fig. 26 remains lit when the ignition is switched on. – Turn the ignition switch in the key operated switch in the glove box to the position OFF fig.

Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . . only the passenger front airbag will be activated / deactivated. this will create a danger that in case of an accident. if the warning lamp is not continuously lit up when the front passenger airbag is disabled. The side airbag and head airbag on the passenger side will remain active. the airbag does not deploy properly or does not deploy at all. as a result. • When using the ignition key to activate / deactivate the passenger front airbag. an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted. there may be a fault in the airbag system: − Have the airbag system inspected immediately by a qualified workshop. 26 not light up when the ignition is switched on page 44. if it is necessary in exceptional circumstances to transport a child in a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat. enable the front passenger airbag again. page 46. Only deactivate the passenger airbag when the ignition is off.Airbag system 45 – Check that the warning lamp in the dash panel does fig. • You should deactivate the front passenger airbag only if you have to use a rear-facing child seat in exceptional cases. For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the airbag off. “Child safety”. WARNING (continued) − It is not certain whether the front passenger airbag will deploy during an accident! Inform your passengers of this. • As soon as the child seat is no longer needed on the front passenger seat. • • Never install a child seat facing backwards (or rear-facing) on the front passenger seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. you must always disable the front passenger airbag. otherwise a fault may occur in the airbag system. a child could sustain serious or fatal injuries. WARNING • The driver is responsible for the proper position of the key-operated switch. − Do not use a child seat on the front passenger seat! The front passenger airbag could be triggered despite the fact that there is a fault in the system and. • • When the passenger airbag is deactivated. This represents a risk of fatal injuries to the child! However.

We recommend that you include the manufacturer's directions for child seat use in the vehicle wallet and always keep them in the vehicle. We recommend that children under 12 years of age be transported on the rear seats. regulation. height and weight. the child restraint system should be installed in the centre of the rear seat or behind the front passenger's seat. Always read and observe page 47. Children travelling on the rear seat must use a child restraint system or the seat belts provided. For safety reasons. The physical principles involved and the forces acting in a collision apply to children just as much as adults page 21. We recommend the use of child safety products from the SEAT Genuine Accessories Program including systems for all ages made by “Peke”2) . Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory requirements when installing and using child seats. children must always use special child restraint systems when travelling in the vehicle. depending on their age. 2) Not for all countries. To reduce this risk. complying with the ECE-R44.46 Child safety Child safety Brief introduction Introduction Statistics show that children are generally safer on the rear seat than on the front passenger seat. “Why wear seat belts?”. These systems have been especially designed and approved. But unlike adults. . children do not have fully developed muscle and bone structures. This means that children are subject to a greater risk of injury.

this can result in potentially fatal injuries to the child! Never allow a child to be transported in a vehicle without being properly secured. • • • • The seat belt provides maximum protection only when the belt web is properly positioned page 24. you are responsible for any children you transport in your vehicle.5 metres tall must not wear a normal seat belt without a child restraint system. Only one child may occupy a child seat page 48. do not allow children to distract you from traffic.Child safety 47 Safety notes on using child seats Proper use of child seats substantially reduces the risk of injury in an accident! As the driver. if it is necessary. This can be fatal. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . must assume the proper sitting position and be properly belted in while travelling. or to stand up or kneel on a seat while travelling. This represents a risk of fatal injuries to the child! However. “Seat belts”. • • • • • Depending on weather conditions. Take a break at least every two hours. especially children. A suitable child seat can protect your child! Never leave a child unsupervised in a child seat or alone in the vehicle. or to rub on any sharp edges. Do not allow the belt webbing to become twisted or jammed. WARNING • Never install a child seat facing backwards (or rear-facing) on the front passenger seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the airbag off. in exceptional cases. In an accident. an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted. “Deactivating airbags*”. If the passenger seat has a height adjustment option. causing possibly fatal injuries to themselves and other occupants. this could have consequences including serious injury or death. as this could cause injuries to the abdominal and neck areas during a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an accident. to transport a child in the front passenger seat. move it to the highest position. – Always ensure that the belt webbing is properly positioned according to the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child seat. “Child seats”. Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause injuries even in a minor collision or sudden braking manoeuvres. • • All passengers. WARNING (continued) • • Never hold children or babies on your lap. – When travelling. the child could be flung through the vehicle. the front passenger airbag must always be disabled page 44. This is particularly the case if the child is travelling on the front passenger seat and the airbag system is triggered in an accident. Children who are less than 1. – Take breaks regularly during long trips. If children assume an improper sitting position when the car is moving. – Protect your children by properly using appropriate child seats page 48. it may become extremely hot or cold inside the vehicle. they expose themselves to greater risk of injury during a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an accident.

WARNING Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats page 47. 27 A group 0 rearfacing child seat fitted on the rear seat. Child seats are covered by the European standard ECE R 44 (issued by the Economic Commission of Europe). Group 0+: For babies from about 18 months old and 13 kg in weight the most suitable seats are those appearing in the illustration. Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory requirements when installing and using child seats. The child seats are grouped into 5 categories: Group 0: to 10 kg Group 0+: to 13 kg Group 1: 9 to18 kg Group 2: 15 to 25 kg Group 3: 22 to 36 kg Child seats that have been tested and approved under the ECE R 44 standard bear the test mark on the seat (the letter E in a circle with the test number below it). .48 Child safety Child seats Categorisation of child seats into groups Use only child seats that are officially approved and suitable for the child. Fig. Group 0: For babies from about 9 months old and 10 kg in weight the most suitable seats are those appearing in the illustration fig. We recommend that you include the manufacturer's directions for child seat use in the vehicle wallet and always keep them in the vehicle. Group 0 and 0+ child seats A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can help to protect your child. 27 .

Fig.5 metres tall are best protected by seat cushions with head restraints in conjunction with properly worn seat belts fig. Fig. 28 A category 1 forward-facing child seat fitted on the rear seat. Group 2 child seats Children under 7 years of age weighing between 15 and 25 kg are best protected by group 2 child seats in conjunction with properly adjusted seat belts.Child safety 49 Group 1 child seats A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can help to protect your child. We recommend that you include the manufacturer's directions for child seat use in the vehicle wallet and always keep them in the vehicle. We recommend that you include the manufacturer's directions for child seat use in the vehicle wallet and always keep them in the vehicle. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . Group 3 child seats Children over 7 years of age weighing between 22 and 36 kg but less than 1. Child seats using the “ISOFIX” and “Toptether” system (or even the antirotation system) or seats in which the child faces the rear of the car are most appropriate for babies and small children weighing between 9 and 18 kg. 29. WARNING Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats page 47. Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory requirements when installing and using child seats. Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory requirements when installing and using child seats. 29 Forward-facing child seat installed on rear seat. Group 2 and 3 child seats A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can help to protect your child.

0+ and 1 using the “ISOFIX” and “Toptether” systems or the antirotation system may be secured without using the adult seatbelt and using the “ISOFIX” and “Toptether” anchors or the antirotation mechanism/brackets page 51. and always fit closely. Securing child seats Ways to secure a child seat A child seat can be secured differently on the rear seat and on the front passenger seat. The lap belt part must lie across the pelvis. . Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack page 24. not across WARNING (continued) • the stomach. Weight class Group 0 Group 0+ Group 1 Group 2 / 3 Weight <10 kg <13 kg 9-18 kg 15-36 kg U: Suitable for universal approved restraining systems for use in this age category (universal retention systems are those fitted using the adult seat belt. Suitable for retention systems using the “ISOFIX” and “Toptether” anchors or antirotation mechanism/bracket. never across the neck or the arm. Seat locations Front passenger U* U* U* U* L: Rear outer U/L U/L U/L U Rear centre U U U U • • Child seats in groups 0 to 3 can be secured with a seat belt. You can secure a child seat to the rear seat or front passenger seat in the following ways: Child seats from the groups 0.50 Child safety WARNING The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie approximately on the centre of the shoulder. • Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats page 47. as high as possible and always deactivate the airbag. “Seat belts”. *: Move the passenger seat as far to rear as possible. The seat belt must lie close to the torso.

– Move the seat as far to rear as it will go. weight and size. The child seat with “ISOFIX” system can be secured quickly. This represents a risk of fatal injuries to the child! However. If the child seat is fitted with any other antirotation system. • Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats page 47. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . – Press the child seat onto the “ISOFIX” retaining rings until the child seat can be heard to engage securely. – Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure that it is secure. “Deactivating airbags*” and the seat put into the highest position where possible. If the child seat is fitted with “Toptether” anchoring. under exceptional circumstances. if a child must. 30 ISOFIX securing rings When removing or fitting the child seat. follow the manufacturer instructions carefully. travel in the front passenger seat. • Securing the child seat using the “ISOFIX” and “Toptether” system or the antirotation mechanism/system. Fig. connect it to the corresponding ring.Child safety 51 WARNING When travelling. please be sure to follow the manufacturer's instructions. the passenger airbag must be deactivated page 44. easily and safely on the rear outer seats using the system • Never install a child seat facing backwards (or rear-facing) on the front passenger seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. children must be secured in the vehicle with a restraint system suitable for age.

the rings are secured to the seat frame and in others they are secured to the rear floor. WARNING The retaining rings are designed only for use with “ISOFIX” and “Toptether” systems.52 Child safety Two “ISOFIX” retaining rings are fitted on each rear seat. Child seats with “ISOFIX” and “Toptether” mountings are available from the Authorised Service Centres. The “ISOFIX” rings can be accessed between the seat back and the seat cushion. In some vehicles. They are often located on the rear of the seat backs. . retaining belts or objects to the fastening rings – this can result in potentially fatal injuries to the child! • Ensure that the child seat is secured correctly using the “ISOFIX” and “Toptether” anchors. • • Never secure child seats that do not have the “ISOFIX” or “Toptether” system. The “Toptether” rings are located in the rear space in the back.

53 Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data .

54 Fig. 31 Instrument panel .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Turn signal and main beam lever and cruise control system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gear selector lever Cup holder compartment Rotary control for adjustment of the exterior rear view mirrors Switches for − Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . .Cockpit 55 Operating instructions Cockpit Overview Overview of the instrument panel This overview will help you to familiarise yourself with the controls and displays. . . . Safety switch* for the rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handbrake Indication lamp for deactivated front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controls* for opening and closing the rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glove compartment lever . . . . . . . . . . . . Controls for 140 − Heating* and ventilation . . . . . . . 113 Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle for releasing the bonnet . . . . . . . . − Display . . . Front passenger airbag . . 145 130 30 131 124 93 151 80 44 152 198 106 106 106 8 A 9 A 10 A 11 A 20 A 21 A 22 A 23 A 24 A 25 A 26 A 27 A Note Some of the items of equipment listed here are fitted only on certain models/model years or are optional extras. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windscreen wiper and windscreen wash lever and operation of the multi-function display* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horn (works only when the ignition is on)/ and driver front 30 airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . − Tyre pressure . 59 72 − Indication lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio Thumb wheel for right seat heating . . . . 119. . . . . . . 1 A 2 A 3 A 4 A 5 A 6 A 7 A 12 A 13 A 14 A 15 A 16 A 17 A 18 A 19 A Door release lever 111 Light switch . . . . . . . . Instrument panel: 56 − Instruments . Air vent 113 Lighting control for instrument and control lighting . . . Pedals Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . 142 − Air conditioner* . . . . . . Button for opening and closing the front windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . − Air conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . − Electronic Stabilisation Program (ESP)* . . . . . . . . . . 61 130 Thumb wheel for left seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

32 Detail of the dash panel: Instruments Detail of the dash panel: Instruments 1 A 2 A 3 A 4 A 5 A 6 A Fuel gauge page 57 Multi-function display Engine coolant temperature gauge page 57 Rev counter page 58 Time adjustment button / trip recorder reset button Speedometer page 58 . Fig.56 Cockpit Instruments Instrument overview The instruments display the vehicle operating status.

C Needle in warning zone A 2 The warning lamp* page 72. 34 Details of the instrument panel: Engine coolant temperature gauge A Needle in cold zone A Details of the instrument panel: Fuel gauge The fuel tank has a capacity of approx. At this point there are still about 7 litres of fuel in the tank. the warning lamp will light and an acoustic signal will sound reminding the driver to refuel. The following warning appears in the instrument panel 3) Depending on the model version Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . 33 (arrow). Fig. The temperature may also rise when the engine is working hard. The following text appears in the instrument panel display3) PLEASE REFUEL* Avoid high engine speeds and heavy engine loads B Needle in normal zone A fig. This is no cause for concern as long as the warning lamp does not light up and no warning* text appears in the combi-instrument display. 34. the needle should be in the middle section of the scale. 33 Details of the instrument panel: Fuel gauge Fig. fig. especially at high outside temperatures.Cockpit 57 Fuel gauge and reserve indicator Engine coolant temperature display This gauge shows the engine coolant temperature. When the needle reaches the reserve zone fig. 55 litres. 46 A will light up if the needle is in the warning zone. In normal driving conditions.

fig. counter displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute. Caution The rev counter needle must never enter the red zone on the scale. You should obtain technical assistance. fig. Setting the digital clock* The digital clock is located in the instrument panel display. 5 – Turn the setting knob page 56. – Turn the setting knob clockwise to the limit stop to set the minutes. If the knob is turned briefly clockwise the clock will advance one minute further. Even if the coolant level is correct do not continue driving. it is advisable to change up a gear or move the selector lever to D (or lift your foot off the accelerator) before the needle reaches the red zone. there is a risk of the engine overheating. Check the coolant level page 205 . Stop the car and switch off the engine. 4 The start of the red zone on the dial page 56. WARNING When working in the engine compartment. 4) Depending on the model version .58 Cockpit display4) . If the knob is turned briefly anti-clockwise the clock will advance one hour further. At high outside temperatures and high engine loads. 32 A anti-clockwise to the stop to set the hour. Caution Accessories in front of the air inlet reduce the cooling effect of the coolant. Rev counter The rev. 32 A indicates the maximum engine speed which may be used briefly when the engine is warm and after it has been run in properly. Risk of engine damage. However. always bear in mind the safety warnings page 198. For the sake of the environment Changing up a gear early will help you to save fuel and minimise engine noise.

36 A Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . The selected gear appears in the display field with a light background 5 fig. Fig. 35 Detail of the instrument panel: Screen with various displays Digital clock display page 58 Distance display or service interval display page 60 Selector lever position display for the automatic gearbox*. amongst other things. 36 Detail of instrument panel: Display with Tiptronic gear selection 1 A 2 A 3 A 4 A Fig. Display for the gears in Tiptronic mode (automatic gearbox)*. the mileage and trip recorder as well as the selector lever position.Cockpit 59 Digital display in the instrument panel Display (without warning or information texts) The display in the instrument panel shows.

The message displayed in the instrument panel display is5) : SERV. Multi-function display (MFD) and ambient temperature display Automatic indications: information or warning messages: “Information or warning messages on the screen” Menus with diverse information are shown on the screen allowing many adjustments to be made: “Instrument panel menus” - 5) Depending on the model version . The actual position of the selector lever or the gear which is engaged (for Tiptronic) are highlighted. The last digit indicates steps of 100 metres. The service message will disappear approximately 20 seconds after the ignition is switched on or the engine is running. A “spanner” symbol appears and the display “km” with the distance that can be driven until the next service appointment is due. There are optional and automatic displays in this field. Fig. 38 A. 32 A. The normal display can be resumed by pressing the reset button on the trip counter or by pressing the B rocker switch of the MFI page 61. 37 Digital display in the instrument panel 1 A Control and warning lamps: “Control and warning lamps” 1 A Clock: “Setting the time”.g. Selectable displays: e.. KM OR .. 3 A Mileage display or Service Interval Display “Mileage display or Service 4 A Interval Display” Selector lever position display for the automatic gearbox. In some vehicles the ambient temperature is 2 A Service interval display A Service pre-warning will appear in the mileage display if a service is due soon. displayed to the right of the clock. DAYS. IN . you can call up the current service message by pressing the trip counter reset knob for 2 seconds.. The trip recorder counter may be reset by the reset 5 button page 56. fig. A “clock symbol” appears and the number of days until the service appointment should be carried out.60 Cockpit Displayed categories The display in the instrument panel shows the mileage and trip recorder as well as the selector lever position.. fig. Mileage display or Service Interval Display Distance display The left-hand counter in the display registers the total amount of distance covered by the vehicle. With the ignition switched on. The right-hand counter registers the short journeys. The display will change after approximately 10 seconds.

Display with multi-function display (MFD)* The multi-function display (MFD) shows you diverse journey and consumption data. Fig. 38 A A on the windscreen wiper lever to move between the two memories.Total journey memory. Resetting the memory – Select the memory that you would like to reset. the new values will be added to Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . Selecting memory Fig. 39 Digital screen on the instrument panel: Average fuel consumption display The multi-function display is equipped with two automatic memories: 1 . 38 Windscreen wiper and washer lever: Button A and rocker switch B – With the ignition switched on. The selected memory will be shown in the upper right-hand corner of the display. If the journey is continued within two hours of switching off the ignition.Trip memory and 2 . briefly press the button fig. The trip memory 1 collects the travel and consumption data from the moment the ignition is switched on until it is switched off. A – Press and hold button A on the windscreen wiper lever for at least 2 seconds.Cockpit 61 An overdue service is indicated by a minus sign in front of the mileage or day information.

Journey duration The display shows the amount of time that has elapsed since the ignition was switched on. The maximum display value in both memories is 99 hours and 59 minutes. The memory will automatically be deleted once this value has been reached. The total journey memory 2 collects the journey data for any number of individual journeys (even if the ignition is switched off for longer than two hours) up to a total of 99 hours and 59 minutes travel time. 41 Digital screen on the instrument panel: Average fuel consumption display You can switch between the following displays in the multi-function display B (MFD) by operating the rocker switch fig.62 Cockpit the existing trip recorder memory. The memory will automatically be deleted if one of the named values is reached. Fig. The memory will automatically be deleted if the journey is interrupted for more than two hours. 9999 miles distance travelled and 999 litres of fuel consumed. Displays in the multi-function display (MFD)* Fig. 40 Windscreen wiper and washer lever: Button A and rocker switch B • • • • • • • Memory displays Journey duration Speed warning Average speed Distance Distance to empty (the distance you can travel with the remaining fuel) Average fuel consumption Current fuel consumption min . 40 A on the windscreen wiper lever. .

litres/100km or litres/hr .Average fuel consumption The average fuel consumption will be shown page 62.Risk of accident! Note When the vehicle is stationary or travelling at very low speeds. an “ice crystal symbol” is displayed and a “warning” sounds if the vehicle is moving at more than 20 km/h (ice warning). The maximum display value in both memories is 9999 miles.Cockpit 63 Set speed indicator When driving at the required speed. If the indicated speed is exceeded. The memory will automatically be deleted once this value has been reached. Miles . The amount of fuel used will not be shown. Warning or information text in the display Faults are shown in the display with warning lamps and warning/information reports. The display will be updated every 5 seconds whilst the vehicle is in motion. It shows how far the vehicle can travel using the same conditions as a reference.Fuel range The fuel range is calculated using the figures for tank content and current fuel consumption. This symbol will flash for about 10 seconds and remains lit until the exterior temperature rises above +4°C or 6°C if it was already lit. Ø mph . Functional faults are indiTips and Maintenance Technical Data Safety First Operating instructions . Dashes will appear in the display until that time. not rely exclusively on this display . for this reason. B The speed may be altered using the rocker switch A in steps of 5 km/h within 5 seconds of the initial memory value. the display remembers the indicated speed. A This may be deactivated by pressing the button A (Reset). WARNING There could be black ice on the road surface even if the “snowflake symbol” is not shown. Ø litre/100km . 6) Depending on the model version. fig. The system runs a check on certain components and functions when the ignition is switched on and while the vehicle is moving.Distance travelled The display shows the distance travelled since the ignition was switched on. the temperature displayed may be slightly higher than the actual ambient temperature as a result of the heat radiated from the engine. a warning text is displayed on the screen6) and a warning signal sounds. Using this display you can see how your driving style affects fuel consumption page 180. The display will be updated every 5 seconds whilst the vehicle is in motion. Dashes will appear in the display until that time.Average speed The average speed will be shown after a distance of approximately 100 metres has been travelled. Miles . You should. enter the speed indicator mode and A press the button A (Reset). At temperatures lower than +4°C. 41 after a distance of approximately 100 metres has been travelled.Current fuel consumption The display will show the current fuel consumption in litre/km whilst the vehicle is in motion or in litre/hour when the vehicle is in a stationary position with the engine running. the message on the screen may vary and may be represented by flashing of the speed indication or by a speed message. Ambient temperature display The measurement margin extends from -45°C to +58°C.

faults are indicated exclusively by the warning lamps. Priority 1 (red) If one of these faults occurs. If several priority 1 faults are detected at the same time. you will receive information in the display on procedures or will be asked to carry out certain tasks. No menus will be shown in the display for the duration of a priority 1 warning report. Priority 2 (yellow) Note In the case of screens without warning or information texts. An audible warning is given in certain cases. and is accompanied by one audible warning. Warning symbols There are red warning symbols (priority 1) and yellow warning symbols (priority 2) Information text In addition to warning messages given on a fault. Obtain professional assistance if necessary. for this reason the vehicle may not start 7) Depending on the model version . the information text will disappear and the symbol will be shown as a reminder at the side of the display. Priority 2 warning reports will not be shown until all Priority 1 warning reports have been dealt with! Examples of priority 2 warning reports (yellow): Windscreen washer fluid symbol with the information text REFILL WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID. the symbols are displayed one after the other for about 2 seconds at a time. the warning lamp lights up. If one of these faults occurs. A valid key was not used. After a set time. If several priority 2 warning reports are detected at the same time.64 Cockpit cated by symbols with warnings and information texts in the display. • • Fuel symbol with the information text PLEASE REFUEL • Electronic immobiliser symbol with the information text SAFE. Check the fault and correct it. the warning lamp will flash or light up and will be accompanied by three audible warnings. the symbols will be displayed one after the other for about 2 seconds at a time and will continue until the fault is corrected. This is a danger warning. The function should be checked as soon as possible. • Brake system symbol with warning text STOP BRAKE FLUID INSTRUCTION MANUAL or STOP BRAKE FAULT INSTRUCTION MANUAL • • Coolant symbol with the warning text STOP CHECK COOLANT INSTRUCTION MANUAL Examples of priority 1 warning reports (red) 7) Engine oil pressure symbol with the warning text STOP ENGINE OIL PRESSURE LOW! SERVICE MANUAL Warning reports. Stop the car and switch off the engine. Refill the windscreen washer tank page 208 Warning reports.

42 Windscreen wiper lever: button A to confirm the menu point and rocker switch B to change the menu A – Press button A to select the entry. 43 Digital display on the instrument panel: Main menu Open main menu – Switch on the ignition. Fig. The selected option is displayed between two horizontal lines. It may be necessary to repeat this operation until the main menu is displayed. press the upper or lower end of the rocker switch.Cockpit 65 Instrument panel menus Main menu The menu enables access to the different display functions. Example of menu use: “Example of menu use” Select a menu from the main menu – To choose an option from the menu. Fig. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . B – Press and hold the eject button A for at least 2 seconds.

66

Cockpit

Main menu Multi-function display Audio Navigation

Function Change to multi-function display (MFD): “Multi-function display (MFD)” The current station will be shown when the radio is switched on. This menu is only available if the vehicle is fitted with a navigation system. The navigation system must be switched on. When the destination guide is activated, the turning arrows and proximity bars are displayed. The display is similar to that of the Navigation system. If the destination guide is not activated, the direction of travel (compass) and the name of the street along which you are driving are shown. This menu is only available if the vehicle is fitted with a telephone mounted by the manufacturer: “Fixed telephone installation” This menu displays the actual warning or information texts: “Menu Vehicle condition” This option flashes when any of these texts are displayed. This option allows the time, the speed warning when using winter tyres, units, language, independent heating, the Light and visibility menu and the Convenience menu to be reset. The display is switched off. It comes on again on entering the main menu or when a warning, breakdown or service message appears. The main menu will be shown in the display for approximately 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on. The display will then switch off again.

Telephone Vehicle condition Configuration Display off

Note
For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be displayed.

Cockpit

67

Example of menu use All the menus on the instrument panel may be used according to the following procedure.

Fig. 44 Windscreen wiper lever: button A to confirm the menu point and rocker switch B to change the menu

Fig. 45 Digital screen on the instrument panel: winter tyre display

The setting of a speed warning will be used as an example of how to use the menus. This is a good idea if you are, for example, using winter tyres which are not suited for the top speed of the vehicle. 1. Open the main menu – Switch on the ignition. – Hold down button A for two seconds to return to main menu from other menu. It may be necessary to repeat this operation until the main menu is displayed.
B

– Select menu Configuration.
A – Press button A on the windscreen wiper lever. The Configuration menu is opened.

3. Open the main menu “Winter tyres” – Select option Winter tyres using the rocker switch.
A – Press button A. The menu Winter tyres is opened.

4. Program a speed limit warning – Use the rocker switch to select the menu entry +10 km/h or -10 km/h and press the button to either increase or decrease the set speed.

2. Open the main menu “Configuration” – To choose an option from the menu, press the upper or lower end of the rocker switch. The selected option is displayed between two lines and there will also be a triangle on the right.
Safety First Operating instructions

Tips and Maintenance

Technical Data

68

Cockpit

5. To activate and deactivate the speed limit warning – Use the rocker switch to select the menu point On/Off and press the button to switch the speed warning either on or off. If the speed warning is deactivated, three dashes will be displayed --Example menu “Winter tyres” On the display Winter tyres X km/h or --On / Off +10 km/h -10 km/h Back

6. To close the menu “Winter tyres” – In the menu select Back.
The function “Winter tyres” sends an optical and an acoustic signal when the vehicle reaches the set speed.

Function Name of menu displayed The current set speed is displayed or dashes will be shown if the function is deactivated. If the function is activated or deactivated The set value increases by 10 km/h The set value decreases by 10 km/h The menu “Winter tyres” is closed and the last displayed menu is shown.

Note
For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be displayed.

Cockpit

69

Vehicle status menu This menu shows warning or information texts
Open Vehicle Condition menu – Choose option Vehicle condition from main menu: “Main menu” and press the button on the windscreen wiper lever.

Priority 2 warning messages and information texts: “Warning and information texts on the screen” automatically disappear after a certain time and are saved in the menu “Vehicle condition”. The warning and information texts may be viewed in this menu. If there are no messages, ok appears on the display. If there are several messages, each one is shown for four seconds.

Configuration menu This menu is used to make the settings for the vehicle functions.
Open Configuration menu – Choose the Configuration option from main menu “Main menu” and press the button on the windscreen wiper lever.
Configuration Time Function The hours and minutes of the clock and the navigation system can be changed. Both 12- and 24-hour formats are available and the time may be changed to summer time (an S appears in the upper part of the screen) The menu allows the setting of a speed at which an optical and acoustic warning will be given by the system. You can use this function, for example, if you have fitted winter tyres which are not suited for the top speed of your vehicle . See chapter “Wheels” in owner's manual The display texts and the navigation system texts can be seen in seven different languages This option allows you to select the units for displaying temperature, fuel consumption values and distances. From this menu it is possible to alter the Comfort function settings. Example of use of menus: “Example of use of menus”.

Winter tyres

Settings: Language Units Comfort and Convenience

Safety First

Operating instructions

Tips and Maintenance

Technical Data

70

Cockpit

Lights & visibility Display off Back

From this menu it is possible to alter the vehicle lighting settings: “Lights and visibility menu” Only emergency messages appear This returns to the main menu

Note
For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be displayed.

Comfort menu From this menu it is possible to alter the different Comfort function settings.
To open the Comfort and Convenience menu – Choose the option Configuration from main menu and press the A button A on the windscreen wiper lever.
Convenience Door opening Selective opening/ Total opening Auto-lock Auto-unlock Activate/deactivate(acoustic signal for central locking) Deactivate All 1 door Synchronised/individual This returns to the Configuration menu

– Choose the option Comfort from main menu and press the button A A on the windscreen wiper lever.
Example of menu use: “Example of menu use” Function

Audible warning function Comfort opening

Synchronised control of wing mirrors Back

Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . Lights & visibility Coming Home/ Leaving Home Indicator conf. Example of menu use: “Example of menu use” Function The lighting duration may be modified. Manufacturer's settings Back – Select the option Lights & visibility from the menu and press A button A on the windscreen wiper lever. With the convenience mode activated. Lights and visibility menu From this menu it is possible to alter the vehicle lighting settings. This returns to the Configuration menu Note For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be displayed.Cockpit 71 Note For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be displayed. in steps of 10 seconds. from a minimum of 10 seconds to a maximum of 90 seconds The function may also be deactivated. The manufacturer's predefined values for the functions of this menu are restored. Open Lights and visibility Menu – Choose the option Configuration from main menu: “Main menu” A and press the button A on the windscreen wiper lever. the indicator will blink at least three times when turned on.

Fig.72 Cockpit Warning lamps Overview of the warning lamps The warning lamps indicate a number of different functions and possible faults. . Some of the items of equipment listed here are fitted only on certain models/model years or are optional extras. 46 Instrument panel with warning lamps.

Cockpit 73 Item 1 A 2 A 3 A 4 A 5 A 6 A 7 A 8 A 9 A Symbol Meaning of warning and control lamps Fuel level / reserve Coolant level / coolant temperature Rear fog light switched on Turn signals in operation Trailer turn signals in operation Main beam switched on Bulb defective Cruise control system switched on Washer fluid level Parking brake applied or low brake fluid level or fault in brake system Engine oil pressure ABS system fault Pollen accumulation in the diesel engine particulate filter Alternator fault Further information page 75 page 75 page 76 page 76 page 76 page 76 page 76 page 77 page 77 10 A page 77 11 A 12 A 13 A 14 A page 78 page 78 page 79 page 79 Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data .

Lit up: ESP fault or switched off Selector lever lock (automatic gearbox) Electromechanical steering Brake pad wear indicator Door open indicator Further information page 19 page 80 page 81 A 17 18 A 19 A page 81 page 28 page 81 20 A page 81 21 A 22 A 23 A 24 A page 82 page 82 page 82 page 82 page 83 SAFE Electronic immobiliser WARNING (continued) WARNING • Failure to observe warning lamps and warning messages can result in serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle. Airbag or belt tension device system fault or airbag disabled Fault in the emission control system Flashing: electronic stabilisation programme (ESP) in operation. . Use a warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users to your stationary vehicle so that it does not represent a danger. • The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down.74 Cockpit Item 15 A 16 A 17 A Symbol Meaning of warning and control lamps Fasten seat belts! Tyre pressure Engine fault (petrol engine) Glow plug system (diesel engine) Lit up: Glow plug system switched on Flashing: engine fault.

Check the coolant level. • Note • In vehicles with warning or information texts in the display. Also. Fuel level / reserve This symbol lights up to indicate that the fuel tank is down to the reserve level. Stop the vehicle. stop the vehicle and switch off the engine. This lights when only 7 litres of fuel remain in the tank. Depending on the model version. the overheating may be caused by a malfunction of the radiator fan. The appropriate warning lamp for a fault will light up in vehicles without warning or information texts in the display. 9) 8) Depending on the model version. This serves as a reminder to fill up with fuel at the earliest opportunity page 195. switch off the engine and wait for it to cool down. This means that either the coolant level is too low or the coolant temperature is too high. If the warning lamp lights up again after driving on for a short distance. 10) Depending on the model version. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . Contact an Authorised Service Centre or a qualified workshop. The coolant temperature is too high if the needle is over the warning area on the dial. Read and observe the relevant warnings page 198. If the coolant level is correct. There is a fault if: The warning lamp lights up or flashes while the vehicle is moving. • • • The warning symbol does not go out again after a few seconds. Coolant level too low The following text is displayed in the instrument panel display10) : CHECK COOLANT! INSTRUCTION MANUAL page 205. The message displayed in the instrument panel display is8) : PLEASE REFUEL. The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a dangerous area! Before you open the bonnet to work on the engine or in the engine compartment. Coolant temperature too high The following text is displayed in the instrument panel display9) : CHECK COOLANT! INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL. you must switch off the engine and allow it to cool to reduce the risk of scalding or other injuries. the appropriate warning lamp for a fault will light up and a warning or information text will also appear in the display. an audible warning is given.Cockpit 75 WARNING (continued) Coolant Level* / temperature The warning lamp lights up if the coolant temperature is too high or if the coolant level is too low. First look at the coolant temperature gauge. while three acoustic warning signals are emitted. Check the radiator fan fuse and have it replaced if necessary page 232.

Always note the corresponding warnings page 198. • If your vehicle is immobilised for any technical reasons. switch off the engine and allow it to cool down. the warning lamp will start flashing twice as fast. Further The warning lamp lights up when the main beams are on or when the headlight flasher is operated. The warning lamp flashes when the turn signals are operated. WARNING Trailer turn signals This warning lamp also flashes when the turn signals are operated while towing a caravan or trailer. . Turn signals The warning lamp flashes when the turn signals are in operation. Bulb defect The warning lamp lights up when a bulb in the vehicle's exterior lighting is defective. Depending on which turn signal is operated. • Never open the bonnet if you can see or hear steam or coolant escaping from the engine compartment. The warning lamp will not flash if one of the turn signals on the trailer fails. Further information page 115. Rear fog light This warning lamp lights up when the rear fog light is switched on information page 111. Risk of scalding.76 Cockpit First look at the coolant temperature gauge. Turn off the engine. • Main beam headlights This warning lamp lights up when the main beams are on. move it to a safe distance from traffic. left-hand main beam) is defective. The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a dangerous area! Before carrying out any work in the engine compartment. provided a trailer is correctly attached and connected to the vehicle. Wait until you can no longer see or hear escaping steam or coolant. If the needle is in the normal range. top up with coolant at the earliest opportunity . Further information on the turn signals page 115. Both warning lamps will flash at the same time when the hazard warning lights are switched on. The warning lamp lights up when a bulb in the vehicle's exterior lighting (e. The following text is displayed in the instrument panel display11) : MAIN BEAM LEFT DEFECT. . If one turn signal fails.g. either the left or right indicator lamp flashes. turn on the hazard lights and place the warning triangle.

Cockpit 77 Cruise control system* The warning lamp comes on when the cruise control system is switched on. if the brake fluid level falls too low or if there is a fault in the brake system. the following message will appear in the combi-instrument display13) : HANDBRAKE ON. • lights up if If the handbrake is on 11) 12) Depending on the model version Depending on the model version. This serves as a reminder to fill up the reservoir at the earliest opportunity page 208. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . This warning lamp can light up together with the anti-lock brake system warning lamp. the brake fluid level page 211. The following text is displayed in the instrument panel display13) : STOP BRAKE FLUID INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL. • If the brake warning lamp lights up together with the ABS warning lamp . the control function of the ABS could be out of action. This could cause the rear to break away. Risk of skidding. The warning lamp lights up when the cruise control system is switched on. This could cause the rear wheels to lock quickly when you brake. WARNING • • Before opening the bonnet. If you drive faster than 6 km/h with the handbrake on. The information text displayed in the instrument panel display is12) : REFILL WASHER FLUID The following text is displayed in the instrument panel display13) : BRAKE FAULT INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL. Obtain technical assistance. This warning lamp If the brake warning lamp does not go out. an audible warning is given. “Working in the engine compartment”. Further notes on the cruise control system page 165. read and observe the warnings on page 198. Brake system* / handbrake The warning lamp lights up if the handbrake is applied. 13) Depending on the model version. If there is a fault in the brake system Washer fluid This warning lamp lights up to indicate that the windscreen washer level is too low. • • If the brake fluid level is too low page 211. Drive carefully to the nearest qualified workshop and have the fault corrected. Also. “Brake fluid” in the reservoir is too low. Risk of accident. or if it lights up when driving. Stop the vehicle and do not drive on.

78

Cockpit

Engine oil pressure This warning lamp indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low.
If this warning symbol starts to flash, and is accompanied by three audible warnings, switch off the engine and check the oil level. If the oil level is too low, add more engine oil page 201. The following text is displayed in the instrument panel display ENGINE OIL PRESSURE INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL.
14) : STOP

Brake system fault If the ABS warning lamp lights up together with the brake warning lamp , this indicates not only a fault in the ABS function, but also a possible fault in the brake system .

WARNING

Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings on page 198.

If the symbol flashes although the oil level is correct, do not drive on. The engine must not even run at idle speed. Obtain technical assistance.

• If the brake warning lamp should light up together with the ABS warning lamp , stop the vehicle immediately and check the brake fluid level in the reservoir page 211, “Brake fluid”. If the fluid level has dropped below the “MIN” mark you must not drive on. Risk of accident. Obtain technical assistance. • If the brake fluid level is correct, the fault in the brake system may have been caused by a failure of the ABS system. This could cause the rear wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This could cause the rear to break away. Risk of skidding. Drive carefully to the nearest qualified workshop and have the fault corrected.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) A warning lamp system monitors the ABS.
The warning lamp should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on. It goes out again after the system has run through an automatic test sequence. There is a fault in the ABS if:

Differential lock fault (EDL)* EDL operates along with the ABS in vehicles equipped with an Electronic Stabilisation Program (ESP)*
A malfunction in the EDL is indicated by the ABS warning lamp . Please take the vehicle to a qualified workshop as soon as possible. For further information on the EDL page 172.

• • •

The warning lamp

does not light up when the ignition is switched on.

The warning lamp does not go out again after a few seconds. The warning lamp lights up when the vehicle is moving.

The vehicle can still be braked in the normal way (except that the ABS control function will not function). Please take the vehicle to a qualified workshop as soon as possible. For further information on the ABS see the page 169. If a fault occurs in the ABS, the ESP* warning lamp will also light up.
14)

Depending on the model version.

Cockpit

79

Traction control system (TCS)* The traction control system prevents the driven wheels from spinning when the vehicle is accelerating
The warning lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on and should turn off after about 2 seconds. When the TCS is operating while driving, the warning lamp flashes. If the system is deactivated or if there is any fault in the same, the warning lamp will remain lit. It will also come on if a fault should occur in the ABS because the TCS operates in conjunction with the ABS. For further information see page 169.

Caution
Vehicles equipped with a diesel engine particulate filter must not be refuelled using biodiesel (RME), given that the fuel system may be damaged.

Alternator This warning lamp signals a fault in the alternator.
The warning lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on. It should go out when the engine has started running. lights up while driving, the alternator is no longer If the warning lamp charging the battery. You should immediately drive to the nearest qualified workshop. You should avoid using electrical equipment that is not absolutely necessary because this will drain the battery. If the indicator flashes, the voltage is insufficient for normal vehicle operation.

Soot accumulation in the diesel engine particulate filter*
if the symbol lights, soot has built up in the diesel engine particulate filter due to continuous short trips. In this case, drive the vehicle at a constant speed of at least 60 km/h (with an engine speed of about 1400 rpm) for about 10 minutes. The increase in temperature generated may burn the accumulated soot in the filter. is not deactivated, bring the vehicle to a specialized workIf the symbol shop to repair the fault. For more information on the diesel particulate filter page 175.

WARNING

• The diesel engine particulate filter may reach extremely high temperatures; it should not enter into contact with flammable materials underneath the vehicle. Failure to comply could result in fire.

Safety First

Operating instructions

Tips and Maintenance

Technical Data

80

Cockpit

Tyre pressure*

Tyre pressure adjustment Following the modification to tyre pressure or changing one or more wheels, the button fig. 47 must be kept pressed while the ignition is on, until an acoustic signal is heard. If the wheels are under excessive load (for example, driving with a trailer or heavy load), the tyre pressure must be increased to the recommended value for a full load (see the sticker on the inside of the fuel flap). If the tyre monitor system button is pressed the new tyre pressures are confirmed. The tyre pressure monitor indicator lights

If the tyre pressure of one wheel is much lower than the value set by the driver then the indicator lights .
Fig. 47 Centre console: tyre monitor system button

The tyre pressure monitor indicator

flashes

If the tyre pressure indicator flashes, this indicates a fault. Go to the nearest specialist workshop.

The tyre monitor indicator compares wheel revolutions and uses this information to compare the diameter of each wheel using the ABS sensors. If the diameter of a wheel changes, the tyre monitor indicator lights . The wheel diameter changes when:

WARNING

• • • • • • •

Tyre pressure is insufficient. The tyre structure is damaged. The vehicle is unbalanced because of a load.

• When the tyre pressure indicator lights, reduce speed immediately and avoid any sudden manoeuvre or braking. Stop when possible, and check the tyre pressure and status. • The driver is responsible for correct tyre pressure. For this reason, tyre pressure must be regularly checked. • Under certain circumstances (for example, in a sports situation, in winter conditions or on a dirt track) the tyre monitor indicator may light or function incorrectly.
Note
If the battery is disconnected, the yellow indicator ignition on. This should turn off after a brief trip. lights after turning the

The wheels of one axle are under more pressure (for example, driving with a trailer or on extreme slopes). The vehicle is fitted with snow chains. The emergency wheel is fitted. The wheel on one axle is changed.

Cockpit

81

Engine management This warning lamp monitors the engine management system for petrol engines.
The warning lamp (Electronic Power Control) lights up when the ignition is switched on to show that the lamp is working properly. It should go out when the engine has started running. If a fault develops in the electronic engine management system while you are driving, this warning lamp will light up. Take the vehicle to an Authorised Service Centre as soon as possible and have the engine checked.

Emission control system* This warning lamp monitors the exhaust system.
Warning lamp flashes: when there is misfiring that can damage the catalytic converter. Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest qualified workshop to have the engine checked. The following text is displayed in the instrument panel display15) : EXHAUST FUMES GO TO WORKSHOP! Warning lamp is lit:

Glow plug system / Engine fault The warning lamp lights up to show that the glow plugs are preheating. It flashes if there is an engine fault.
Warning lamp is lit lights up while the glow plugs are preheating. When the The warning lamp warning lamp goes off, the engine should be started straight away. Warning lamp flashes

if a fault has developed during driving which has reduced the quality of the exhaust gas (e. g. lambda probe fault). Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest qualified workshop to have the engine checked. The following text is displayed in the instrument panel display: EXHAUST FUMES GO TO WORKSHOP!.

Electronic stabilisation programme (ESP)* This warning lamp monitors the electronic stabilisation program.
This program includes the ABS, EDL and TCS. The warning lamp has the following functions:

If a fault develops in the engine management system while you are driving, . Take the vehicle to an Authorised Service the glow plug lamp will flash Centre as soon as possible and have the engine checked.

• It will light for about 2 seconds when the ignition is switched on while a test of the function is carried out. • •
15)

It flashes when the ESP is activated when driving. It will light up continuously if there is a malfunction in the ESP.
Depending on the model version.

Safety First

Operating instructions

Tips and Maintenance

Technical Data

82

Cockpit

• •

It will light up continuously if the ESP is switched off.

It will also come on if a fault should occur in the ABS because the ESP operates in conjunction with the ABS. If the ESP warning lamp lights up and stays on after the engine is started, this may mean that the control system has temporarily switched off the ESP. In this case the ESP can be reactivated by switching the ignition off and then on again. If the warning lamp goes out, this means the system is fully functional.

engine is off (for example, for towing). You should take into account that you will need considerably more power than normal to steer the vehicle if the steering assistance is reduced or has failed completely.

Brake pad wear indicator*
As the brake pad wear indicator only monitors the front brake pads, it is advisable to have the rear brake pads inspected at the same time. The information text displayed in the instrument panel display is16) : CHECK BRAKE PADS.

Operating the foot brake
The footbrake must be depressed when this warning lamp lights up. This is necessary when the automatic gearbox* selector lever is moved out of the positions P or N.

WARNING
Have the brake pads inspected immediately by a qualified dealership if the lights up. warning display

Power steering system* Indicator for open doors or tailgate
For vehicles with power steering, the level of steering assistance depends on the vehicle's speed and on the steering angle. The warning lamp should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on. It should go out when the engine has started running. If the battery is disconnected, the indicator remains lit, even with the engine running. The warning light only goes off after a distance of approx. 50 m. There is a fault in the electromechanical steering system if the lamp does not go out or light up, whilst the vehicle is in motion. The indicator may appear in two different colours to indicate faults. If it lights yellow, this indicates a minor fault. If it lights red, seek workshop assistance immediately, if no assistance is available stop driving. Stop the vehicle and seek technical assistance. The power steering does not work if the battery is flat or if the

This indicator lights if one of the doors or the tailgate is open.
The warning light should go off when all the doors are closed correctly.

The system also works when the ignition is switched off. It should go off about 15 seconds after the vehicle is locked.

16)

Depending on the model version.

The vehicle cannot be used in that case page 153. Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates the electronic immobiliser automatically when the key is inserted into the ignition. however. Note The vehicle cannot be operated properly if you do not have a genuine SEAT key. 17) Depending on the model version. The engine can.Cockpit 83 Electronic immobiliser* “Safe” This warning lamp flashes if an unauthorised key is used. The message displayed in the instrument panel display is17) : SAFE. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . be started if the appropriate coded SEAT genuine key is used. The immobiliser will be activated again automatically as soon as you pull the key out of the ignition lock.

CD Changer) and the radio / navigation System. Both versions may be used to control the Audio system (Radio. There are three versions of the multifunction module: Audio version. • • Audio + Telephone version. Audio system Steering wheel audio version controls Fig. 48 Controls on the steering wheel Fig.84 Steering wheel controls Steering wheel controls Using these instructions The vehicle includes a multifunction module from where it is possible to control the audio. to control the available audio functions from the steering wheel. CD Audio. telephone and radio / navigation functions and the automatic gearbox* without needing to distract the driver. • Automatic gearbox version* page 161. CD mp3. 49 Controls on the steering wheel . in which case they also control the Navigation system. to control the available audio functions and the telephone system from the steering wheel.

FM. Station search. Rewind E A F A G A H A a) No specified function No specified function Change CD (forward) Change CD (Back) No specified function No specified function Silence Next preset Previous preset No function No function Pause Change folder (forward) Change folder (back) Only for mp3 compatible radio. Higher frequency.CD .AM .* Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data .CDC ... Higher frequency. Lower frequency Following track Station search. Lower frequency Continue volume up Continue volume down Fast forward D A Previous track Cyclic source control FM .Steering wheel controls 85 Short press Button Radio A A B A C A Long press CD Audio CD mp3a) CDC Radio CD Audio CD mp3a) CDC Volume up Volume down Station search. Station search.

Higher frequency. 50 Controls on the steering wheel Fig. Station search. Lower frequency Following track Station search. Higher frequency. 51 Controls on the steering wheel Short press Button Radio A A B A Long press CD Audio CD mp3a) CDC Radio CD Audio CD mp3a) CDC Volume up Volume down Station search.86 Steering wheel controls Steering wheel Audio + Telephone version controls Fig. Lower frequency Continue volume up Continue volume down Fast forward Change folder (forward) Change folder (Back) Fast forward A C D A Previous track Rewind Rewind . Station search.

CDC . Voice recognition activation Press to speak Make a call or Direct access to the phone book or Accept a call Terminate call or Refuse call or Quit telephone menu No specified function No specified function G A No specified function H A No specified function a) Only for mp3 compatible radio.CD .Steering wheel controls 87 E A F A Cyclic source control FM ..* Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data ..AM .FM.

88 Steering wheel controls Radio navigation system Steering wheel audio version controls Fig. Fast forward . 53 Controls on the steering wheel Short press Button Radio A A B A C A Long press CD CD mp3a) CDC Radio CD CD mp3a) CDC Increase the source volume and the navigation message Decrease the source volume and the navigation message Station search. Following track Increase the source volume and the navigation message continuously Decrease the source volume and the navigation message continuously Station search. Higher frequency. 52 Controls on the steering wheel Fig. Higher frequency.

Lower frequency Rewind E Ab) Cyclic change of source Radio .CD / CDC . No specified function No specified function No specified function F A G A H A a) b) Only for those Radio-Navigation Systems compatible with the MP3 format. short press: Depending on the equipment. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . Silence Next preset Previous preset No function No function Pause Change folder (forward) Change folder (back) Change CD (forward) Change CD (Back) Repeat the last Navigation instruction Only if the Navigation function is activated..Steering wheel controls 89 D A Station search. Button E. Lower frequency Previous track Station search.. When in Navigation mode the system leaves the navigation screen.. the radio frequency band may be selected.Radio .

Lower frequency Following track Increase the source volume and the navigation message continuously Decrease the source volume and the navigation message continuously Station search.90 Steering wheel controls Steering wheel Audio + Telephone controls Fig. Station search. Higher frequency. Higher frequency. 55 Steering wheel Audio + Telephone controls Short press Button Radio A A B A Long press CD CD mp3a) CDC Radio CD CD mp3a) CDC Increase the source volume and the navigation message Decrease the source volume and the navigation message Station search. 54 Controls on the steering wheel Fig. Station search. Lower frequency Fast forward Change folder (forward) Change folder (Back) Fast forward A C D A Previous track Rewind Rewind .

Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data .CD / CDC .Radio . short press: Depending on the equipment.Steering wheel controls 91 E Ab) Cyclic change of source Radio .. the radio frequency band may be selected. When in Navigation mode the system leaves the navigation screen... Button E. Voice recognition activation Press to speak Make a call or Direct access to the phone book or Accept a call Terminate call or Refuse call or Quit telephone menu Repeat the last Navigation instruction Only if the Navigation function is activated. No specified function F A G A No specified function H A No specified function a) b) Only for those Radio-Navigation Systems compatible with the MP3 format.

56 A A B A Fig. 56 Steering wheel Audio + Telephone version controls Fig.. A A B A Audio + Telephone fig.. 57 Steering wheel audio version controls The lighting is turned on using the simultaneous pressing of the following keys: . 57 Push simultaneously.92 Steering wheel controls Steering wheel lighting controls Audio fig.

Voluntary deactivation The “Safe” system can be deactivated voluntarily by the user. Activation The “safe” system is activated when the vehicle is locked using the key or the remote control. To activate the system using the remote control. press the lock button on the remote once. using the buttons on the key page 100. Various functions are available to improve the vehicle security: Locking system “Safe” Auto-locking to prevent involuntary unlocking Automatic speed dependent locking and unlocking system Emergency unlocking system Note For anti-theft security. the alarm volumetric sensor is also deactivated. • the key. Using the key. When the “Safe” system is deactivated. The boot/tailgate may not be opened.Unlocking and locking 93 Unlocking and locking Central locking Description The central locking system enables you to lock and unlock all the doors and the tailgate from one point. To activate the system using the remote control. rotate the lock cylinder twice in the locking direction. (electronic control) in the passenger compartment page 97. This is done by locking two times in quick succession (in under 2 seconds). by inserting it into the driver's door cylinder and rotating manually. To activate this system with the key. rotate the key once in the door lock cylinder in the locking direction. only the driver's door is fitted with a lock cylinder. the central locking button. When this system is activated. This double locking can be executed using the key or the remote control. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . from the outside or the inside. The central locking button does not work. Central locking can be activated using any of the following options: Safety system “Safe” This is an anti-theft device consisting of a double lock for the door locks and a deactivation function for the boot in order to make forced entry more difficult. it is not possible to open the doors normally. press the lock button on the remote twice. • • the radio frequency remote control.

If the vehicle is not fitted with an alarm then it remains off. With the key.94 Unlocking and locking When the “Safe” system is deactivated. all doors will be unlocked and the boot . turns off and then continues to flash after 28 seconds. Using the remote control. It is not possible to open the doors from the inside or the outside and this would make any outside intervention difficult in case of emergency. and until the vehicle is unlocked. however. the alarm is turned off as is the light indicator. rotate the key once in the lock cylinder in the unlock direction. the “Safe” system will be deactivated on the remaining doors and the light indicator will be turned off. whether they are fitted with an alarm or not. People could become trapped inside in an emergency. only the driver's door is unlocked for opening. Involuntary deactivation The methods described for deactivation of the “Safe” system may be executed involuntarily (for example. Driver's door unlock button This is done by a simple unlocking (once). this system is deactivated. Remember: Safe activated with or without alarm: Continuous flashing of the indicator. the unlock button the remote must be pressed twice. press the unlock button on the remote once. or all the vehicle. there is a light indicator visible from the outside of the vehicle that indicates the “Safe” system status. meaning that they may be opened from the interior but not from the exterior. we will have deactivated the “Safe” system). by the flashing of the light indicator . Once the door is opened. Safe deactivated without alarm: The indicator flashes about seven times and turns off. We can see that the “Safe” system is activated. We can see that the “Safe” system is deactivated. WARNING No one should remain in the vehicle if the “Safe” deadlock mechanism has been activated. once 28 seconds have passed since the indicator is switched off. on The button must be pressed twice in under 2 seconds and this will deactivate the “Safe” system for all the vehicle. if we press the button because we want to lock the vehicle. see “Selective unlocking system*” “Safe” status On the front left-hand side door. Deactivation when opening To deactivate the system on opening. If the vehicle is fitted with an alarm. it will start to flash again and continue until the vehicle is unlocked once more. Danger of death. and it locks as a result. For vehicles fitted with an alarm. The “Safe” system is deactivated for all the vehicle. This can be done with the key or the remote control. 15 seconds remain for turning on the ignition. Safe deactivated with alarm: The indicator flashes seven times. The driver's door will be released from the “Safe” system and unlocked and may be opened. the doors are locked using the simple locking system. in which moment. The indicator will flash on in all vehicles. we are not sure that it is locked and we press the button once more within 2 seconds. Unlocking all doors and the boot So that all the doors and the boot can be opened. when the light indicator flashes about seven times and turns off. Selective unlocking system* This system allows for unlocking only the driver's door.

this could cause a door to open. Locking system for involuntary unlocking This is an anti-theft system and will avoid situations where the vehicle is opened unintentionally. Unlocking the boot See page 100 and page 104. after turning the ignition off and back on again. the internal door release levers should not be operated. If the vehicle is stopped and one of the doors is opened. This function prevents the vehicle from remaining unlocked if the unlocking button is pressed by mistake. except for the boot. when stopped at a traffic light). The vehicle will be re-locked automatically. Locking The doors and the boot are automatically locked when vehicle speed exceeds 15 km/h. WARNING When the vehicle is in motion. Emergency unlocking system The entire vehicle is unlocked if the airbags are triggered during an accident. For this. Each door may be unlocked and opened from the interior (for example when a passenger gets out). see “Manually locking the doors”. The indicator will be turned off as will be the alarm for those vehicles fitted with one. Unlocking The driver's door automatically unlocks when the key is removed from the ignition.Unlocking and locking 95 will be activated. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . if it is unlocked and neither the boot nor any of the doors are opened within 30 seconds. Automatic speed dependent locking and unlocking system* This is a safety system to prevent access to the vehicle from the exterior when the vehicle is in transit (for example. when the vehicle moves off again and exceeds a speed of 15 km/h the unlocked door(s) will be locked once more. It is possible to lock the vehicle from inside using the central locking. simply operate the lever on the inside of the door. If the doors must be locked from the outside.

Manual (emergency) locking of the remaining doors A Open the door and remove the cap A fig.96 Unlocking and locking Emergency manual locking This permits mechanical locking of the doors in case of central locking system failure. Locking the driver's door manually Insert the key in the door lock cylinder and rotate in a clockwise direction for the left-hand side door and anti-clockwise for the right-hand side door. Insert the key into the groove and rotate the element clockwise for the right-hand side doors and anti-clockwise for the left-hand side doors. repeat the previous instructions. Operate the internal door handle for the required door. Once the door has been closed it can no longer be opened from the outside. if you wish to lock it manually (emergency locking). Replace the cap and close the door. . The exterior door handle may now be used to open the door. If the child safety lock is activated on the rear doors. when the interior door release lever is operated the door is unlocked but does not open. Once the door has been closed it can no longer be opened from the outside. Note Fig. This will expose a circular element with a groove in the centre. 58 printed with a lock image. 58 Locking the doors manually Once the vehicle is open. The door lock is released and the door may be opened using the exterior door handle. Unlocking the remaining manually (emergency) locked doors First the driver's door must be unlocked to gain entry to the vehicle. Unlocking the manually (emergency) locked driver's door Insert the key in the door lock cylinder and rotate anti-clockwise for the lefthand side doors and clockwise for the right-hand side doors.

Except. Do this by pulling the door release lever once. button Vehicle unlocked. . The central locking button is not operative in the following cases.Unlocking and locking 97 Central locking button The vehicle can be locked and unlocked from the inside using the central locking button. then the keys will remain inside the vehicle. While the ignition is not activated after unlocking the door lock cylinder with the key. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . the passenger door open. for example. When the vehicle is locked from the outside (using the remote or the key). 59 Detail of rear left door central locking button If the vehicle is locked. if the vehicle is locked using the central locking button when the driver's door is closed and. WARNING • Fig. button amber colour red. • It will not be possible to open the doors or the tailgate from the outside (this may offer extra safety. • • • Locking the vehicle – Press the button Unlocking the doors – Press the button . • • Repeated operation of the central locking will deactivate the central locking button for 30 seconds. If this door is closed. for instance when stopped at traffic lights). if the "safe" security system is activated. Once this time has passed. children and disabled people may be trapped inside. the button may be used once more. • There is a danger that the key may remain inside the vehicle. The driver and passenger doors cannot be locked if they are open. The central locking button is still operative when the ignition is switched off. This prevents you from locking yourself out of the vehicle. Please note the following when you use the central locking button to lock your vehicle: • • Note Vehicle locked. • All doors may be locked separately from inside the car.

Deactivating the childproof lock – Unlock the car and open the door for which you wish to deactivate the childproof lock. 61 Child safety lock on the right-hand side door . This system prevents minors from opening a door accidentally while the vehicle is moving. The childproof lock can be activated and deactivated using the key in the groove when the door is open. fig. 61. and anti-clockwise for the right-hand side doors fig.98 Unlocking and locking Childproof locks The childproof lock prevents the rear doors being opened from the inside. as described above. Fig. rotate the groove in the door using the ignition key. fig. the door can be opened from the outside only. 60 Child safety lock on the left-hand side door – With the door open. It is only possible to activate it and deactivate it manually. This function is independent of the electronic opening and locking systems of the vehicle. 60. 61. 60. Fig. It only affects the rear doors. When the childproof lock is activated. clockwise for the left-hand side doors. as described below: Activating the childproof lock – Unlock the car and open the door you wish to childproof. rotate the groove in the door using the ignition key clockwise for the right-hand side doors and anti-clockwise for the left-hand side doors fig. – With the door open.

Always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle.g. If you sell the vehicle. 62 • • Safety First Always keep the key tab in a safe place. The steering lock could engage suddenly. Therefore: fig. Risk of accident. electric windows). and you would not be able to steer the vehicle. take your key tab to an Authorised Service Centre. Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle. Unauthorised use of your vehicle could result in injury. please give the plastic key tab to the new owner. Plastic key tab Spare keys cannot be issued without the key number on the key tab B A. C one key tab A with the key number. Never leave any of the vehicle keys in the vehicle. 62 A with folding key bit. • • Fig. This could result in people being trapped in the vehicle in an emergency. Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . A fig. 62 Set of keys Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. The doors can be locked using the remote control key. Risk of accident. damage or theft. in case of emergency they may not be able to leave the vehicle or look after themselves. Protect the keys from moisture and excessive vibration. Never leave the key tab in the vehicle. WARNING • • • Incorrect use of the keys can result in critical injuries. Caution There are electronic components in the key and remote control. Duplicate keys If you need a replacement key.Unlocking and locking 99 Keys Key set The set of keys includes a remote control. a key without a remote control and a key tab with the number of the key. The key set belonging to your vehicle consists of the following items: • • • one remote control key B one key without remote control A. Unsupervised use of a key could mean that the engine is started or that electrical equipment is used (e.

Press the button fig. the battery indicator on the key fig. . The range is reduced when the batteries start to lose power. Fig. Once this time has passed.100 Unlocking and locking Radio frequency remote control Locking and unlocking the vehicle The remote control key can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle from a distance. the key shaft is released. 63 Assignment of buttons on the remote control key Locking the vehicle . 2 on the vehicle briefly flash. The remote control transmitter and the batteries are integrated in the key. 64 Range of the remote control Using the button fig. 63. it will lock once more. 63 A . 63 (arrow) on the control. Also. The doors and the tailgate are 2 fig. The receiver is in the interior of the vehicle. Fig. Selective unlocking* 1 When the button A is pressed once the driver's door is unlocked. 3 Unlocking the tailgate. The maximum range of the remote control depends on various conditions. 1 fig. all others remain locked. 63 A until all indicators 3 A is pressed. When the unlocking button minutes remain for opening the door. will flash. 63 A Unlocking the vehicle unlocked.

in case of emergency they may not be able to leave the vehicle or look after themselves. For this reason. • • • • Incorrect use of the key can result in critical injuries.g. Always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle. the remote control key will have to be re-synchronised page 101. The vehicle can be locked using the remote control key. the key fitted with the remote control A and B the normal key A. Unsupervised use of a key could mean that the engine is started or that electrical equipment is used (e. The remote control functions only when you are in range fig. Never leave any of the vehicle keys in the vehicle. 1 If the vehicle is unlocked using the A button. accidents or the theft of your vehicle. Changing the battery If the battery indicator does not flash when the buttons are pushed. fig. When the button is pressed once more. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . – Lock the vehicle using the driver side door lock with the remote control key page 100. always replace the dead battery with another of the same size and power. – Unlock the vehicle from the driver side door using the key without the remote. – In a time of maximum 30 seconds the following operations must be carried out: • • page 100. Note Synchronising the remote control key Synchronising the remote control key – Use both keys that have been delivered with the vehicle A page 99. fig. Risk of accident. 63. the vehicle will be locked again automatically if any of the doors or the tailgate are not opened within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle. 64 (red area). WARNING Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle. electric windows). the battery must be replaced. • If the vehicle cannot be opened and closed using the remote control.Unlocking and locking 101 Press the button 1 A twice to unlock all doors. This function prevents the vehicle from remaining unlocked if the unlocking button is pressed by mistake. all doors and the tailgate will be unlocked. 62. This could result in serious injuries. Caution Use of inappropriate batteries may damage the radio frequency remote control. This could result in people being trapped in the vehicle in an emergency. – Turn the ignition ON using the key without the remote control. For the sake of the environment The flat batteries must be disposed of in accordance with regulations governing the protection of the environment. • The radio-frequency remote control can also be programmed so that only the driver's door is unlocked the first time that the unlocking button on the radio frequency remote control key is pressed.

If you do not switch on the ignition within 15 seconds. Use the lock on the driver door to unlock the vehicle. The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to break into the vehicle or steal it. 30 seconds. This is done as follows: Anti-theft alarm system* Description of anti-theft alarm system* The anti-theft alarm triggers an alarm if unauthorised movements are detected around the vehicle. When does the system trigger an alarm? The system triggers an alarm if the following unauthorised actions are carried out when the car is locked: • • • • • • • • Mechanical opening of the vehicle with the vehicle key Opening a door Opening the bonnet Opening the tailgate Switching on the ignition Movements in the vehicle Undue manipulation of the alarm Battery handling The horn sounds and the indicators flash for approx. Switch on the ignition within 15 seconds. confirming at the same time the synchronisation. Opening the doors mechanically (emergency opening) If the remote control function fails.102 Unlocking and locking – Operate the button once for locking on the remote control. the indicators will flash. • • • Unfold the key by pressing the button shown by the (arrow). Audible and visible alarms are triggered if the car is opened using the mechanical key. – Operate the button once for unlocking on the remote control for more than 2 seconds. The remote control key will have to be resynchronised. The anti-theft alarm system remains active. but an alarm is not triggered immediately. The anti-theft alarm system is automatically switched on when the vehicle is locked. How is the alarm switched off? When the vehicle is unlocked via the unlocking button of the remote control or when the key is inserted in the ignition lock. Up to eight remote control keys can be used. This may be repeated up to 10 times depending on the country. the alarm is triggered. the electronic immobiliser recognises a valid vehicle key and deactivates the anti-theft alarm system. Spare remote control keys are available from Authorised Service Centres. – The key will have been programmed and the vehicle will unlock. they must be matched to the locking system. . It is possible that the vehicle could no longer be opened and closed with the remote control if the button is repeatedly pressed outside of the effective range of the radio frequency remote control. When the ignition is switched on. you will have to use the key to unlock the car. or if unauthorised access is gained to the vehicle. The system is then primed.

The alarm system remains activated. access is gained to a second secured zone (e. This flashing will be different to that for an activated alarm. • The alarm is triggered immediately if one of the battery cables is disconnected while the alarm system is active. Deactivation – Press the button on the remote control twice. Activation – It is automatically turned on with the anti-theft alarm. 2 emitters and a receptor. when the vehicle is locked mechanically with the key and when the button on the remote control is used. Only the volumetric sensor is deactivated. the warning signal is triggered again.Unlocking and locking 103 If. after the alarm goes off. The system consists of 3 sensors. • • Note WARNING • • The “safe” security system remains deactivated if the volumetric sensor is deactivated. the alarm will not function correctly due to interference with the sensor. Note Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . For those vehicles in which a separate sunblind is fitted in the passenger compartment. this will be indicated by a flashing of the indicator on the driver's door. Volumetric sensor* Monitoring or control function incorporated in the anti-theft alarm* that detects unauthorized vehicle entry using ultrasound. the tailgate is opened after a door has been opened). Vehicle monitoring remains active even if the battery is disconnected or not working for any reason.g. • If the alarm has been triggered by the volumetric sensor.

66 Detail of the tailgate inner trim: recessed handle for closing the tailgate Opening the tailgate – Pull on the release lever and lift the tailgate gate will then open.* An audible warning is also given if the tailgate is opened while the vehicle is moving faster than 6 km/h. Fig.* . using a light movement. 65 Tailgate: Opening from the outside fig. 65. however if it is unlocked then the opening system is operative and the boot may be opened. If the tailgate is locked. The tail- Closing the tailgate – Grip the tailgate by one of the two handles on the interior lining and close it. 1 or the button A on A warning appears in the instrument panel if the tailgate is open or not properly closed. then it cannot be opened. It is activated by using the handle on the tailgate Fig. To the locking / unlocking status. The system may or may not operate depending on the situation of the vehicle. press the button the remote control key.104 Unlocking and locking Tailgate Opening and locking The operation of the tailgate opening system is electric.

Unlocking and locking

105

WARNING
The tailgate must not be opened when the reverse or rear fog lights are lit. This may damage the lighting units. Do not close the tailgate by pushing it down with your hand on the window. The glass could shatter. Risk of injury!

Emergency opening This allows the vehicle to be opened if the central locking does not operate (for example if the battery is flat)

• • •

Always close the tailgate properly. Risk of accident or injury.

• Ensure the tailgate is locked after closing. If not, it may open unexpectedly while driving.
Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. A locked vehicle can be subjected to extremely high and low temperatures, depending on the time of year. This could cause serious injuries/illness. It could even have fatal consequences. Close and lock both the tailgate and all the other doors when you are not using the vehicle.

• Never close the tailgate without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others. Make sure that no one is in the path of the tailgate. • Never drive with the tailgate open or half-closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning!
If only the boot is opened then do not leave the key inside. The vehicle may not be opened if the key is left inside.

Fig. 67 Tailgate: emergency opening

There is a groove in the boot allowing access to the emergency opening mechanism. Opening the tailgate from inside the luggage compartment – Insert the key bit in the groove and unlock the locking system, turning the key from right to left, as shown by the arrow fig. 67.

Safety First

Operating instructions

Tips and Maintenance

Technical Data

106

Unlocking and locking

Windows
Opening or closing the windows electrically The front and rear electric windows can be operated using the controls in the driver's door.

Buttons in the driver door
1 A Button for window in front left door 2 A Button for window in front right door

Buttons for rear windows*
3 A Safety switch for deactivating the electric window buttons in the rear

A 5 A
4

doors Button for window in rear left door Button for window in rear right door *

Safety switch

3 Safety switch A in the driver door can be used to disable the electric window buttons in the rear doors.

Safety switch not pushed in: the buttons in the rear doors are enabled. Safety switch pushed in: the buttons in the rear doors are disabled.

Fig. 68 Section of the driver door: controls for the front and rear windows

WARNING
Never close the tailgate without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others. Make sure that no one is in the path of a window. Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if they have access to the keys. Unsupervised use of a key could mean that the engine is started or that electrical equipment is used (e.g. electric windows). Risk of accident. The doors can be locked using the remote control key. This could result in people being trapped in the vehicle in an emergency. The electric windows will work until the key has been removed from the ignition and one of the front doors has been opened.

• • • •

Incorrect use of the electric windows can result in injury.

Opening and closing the windows – Press the button – Pull button to open a window. .

Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.

to close a window

Always close the windows fully if you park the vehicle or leave it unattended . You can use the electric windows for approx. 10 minutes after switching off the ignition if neither the driver door nor the front passenger door has been opened and the key has not been removed from the ignition.

Unlocking and locking

107

WARNING (continued)

• If necessary, use the safety switch to disable the rear electric windows. Make sure that they have been disabled.
Note
If the window is not able to close because it is stiff or because of an obstruction, the window will automatically open again page 107. If this happens, check why the window could not be closed before attempting to close it again.

– Use the key to lock the vehicle from outside and hold the key in the lock position for at least one second. The one-touch function is now ready for operation.
1 2 The buttons page 106, fig. 68 A and A have two levels for opening the window and two for closing it. This makes it easier to open or close windows to the desired position.

One-touch closing does not work when the ignition has been switched off, even if the key is in the ignition. The automatic open and close function will not work if the battery has been temporarily disconnected, or if the battery is flat. The function then has to be reactivated. The one-touch function and roll-back function will not work if there is a malfunction in the electric windows. Contact an Authorised Service Centre.

One-touch opening and closing One-touch opening and closing means you do not have to hold down the button.
One-touch closing – Pull up the button for the window briefly to the second position. The window closes fully. One-touch opening – Push down the button for the window briefly to the second position. The window opens fully. Reset the automatic closing function for the front side windows and the automatic opening for all windows – Close all windows.

Roll-back function The windows have a roll-back function. This reduces the risk of injuries when the windows are closing.

• • • •

If a window is obstructed when closing automatically, the window stops at this point and lowers immediately . If this happens, check immediately (within 10 seconds) why the window could not be closed before attempting to close it again. After 10 seconds the normal automatic function resumes. If the window is still obstructed, the window stops at this point. If there is no obvious reason why the window cannot be closed, try to close it again within five seconds. If you wait longer than 5 - 10 seconds, the window will open fully when you operate one of the buttons. One-touch closing is reactivated.

Safety First

Operating instructions

Tips and Maintenance

Technical Data

108

Unlocking and locking

The one-touch function and roll-back function will not work if there is a malfunction in the electric windows. Contact an Authorised Service Centre.

– When the windows are fully closed, the indicators flash once. Using the remote control

WARNING
Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only intend to be gone for a short time. Please ensure that children are never left unsupervised in the vehicle. The electric windows will work until the key has been removed from the ignition and one of the front doors has been opened.

• • •

Incorrect use of the electric windows can result in injury.

– Push the lock button on the remote control for about 3 seconds. All windows which function electrically will be either opened or closed. – Press the unlock button to interrupt the function. – When the windows are fully closed, the indicators flash once.

• Never close the tailgate without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others. Make sure that no one is in the path of a window. • Never allow people to remain in the vehicle when you close the vehicle from the outside. The windows cannot be opened even in an emergency.
Note
The roll-back function is deactivated if the windows are closed from the outside of the vehicle using the ignition key for convenience closing page 108.

Sliding/tilting roof*
Opening and closing the sliding/tilting roof The sliding/tilting sunroof is opened and closed using the rotary button when the ignition is switched on.

Convenience opening and closing*
Using the door lock – Hold the key in the door lock of the driver door in either the locking or the unlocking position until all windows are either opened or closed. – Release the key to interrupt this function.
Fig. 69 Detail of the sunroof: rotary button for sliding/tilting sunroof

Unlocking and locking

109

Closing the sliding/tilting sunroof
A – Turn the rotary button to position A

WARNING (continued)

page 108, fig. 69

.

Opening/tilting the sliding/tilting sunroof
B – Turn the rotary button to position A. The sunroof opens to the convenience position where wind noise is reduced. C – To open the roof further, turn the switch to position A and hold the switch in this position until the roof opens to the desired position.

Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if they have access to the keys. Unsupervised use of a key could mean that the engine is started or that electrical equipment is used (e.g. electric sliding/tilting sunroof). Risk of accident! The doors can be locked using the remote control key. This could result in people being trapped in the vehicle in an emergency.

The sliding/tilting sunroof continues to function until one of the front doors is opened and the key removed from the ignition.

Tilting the sliding/tilting sunroof
D – Turn the rotary button to position A.

Convenience closing*
Using the door lock – Hold the key in the door lock of the driver's door in the locking position until the sliding/tilting sunroof is closed. – Release the key to interrupt this function. Using the remote control – Push the lock button on the remote control for about 3 seconds. The sliding/tilting sunroof is closed. – Press the unlock button to interrupt the function.

Always close the sliding/tilting roof fully if you park the vehicle or leave it unattended . The sliding/tilting sunroof can be operated for up to about ten minutes after the ignition has been switched off, provided the driver door and the front passenger door are not opened. Sunroof blind The sunroof blind is opened together with the sliding/tilting roof. If required, it can be closed by hand when the sunroof is closed.

WARNING
Never close the sliding/tilting sunroof without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others. Make sure that no one is in the path of the sliding/tilting sunroof.

• • •

Incorrect use of the sliding/tilting sunroof can result in injury.

Note
The sliding/tilting sunroof rotary button remains in the last position selected if the roof is closed using convenience closing from outside the vehicle and will have to be re-positioned the next time you drive.

Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.

Safety First

Operating instructions

Tips and Maintenance

Technical Data

If the sliding/tilting roof has been opened again by the roll-back function.110 Unlocking and locking Roll-back function of the sliding/tilting roof* The sliding/tilting roof has a roll-back function which prevents larger objects getting trapped when the roof is closed. Please note that the sunroof will now close without the roll-back function. The roll-back function does not prevent fingers getting pinched against the roof opening. insert it in the opening as far as possible (pushing against the spring) and close the sliding roof. 70 Detail of the sunroof: rotary button for sliding/tilting sunroof Remove the lever from the cover fastening. The sliding/tilting sunroof stops and opens again immediately if it is obstructed when closing. • • • Remove the plastic cover by inserting a screwdriver in the rear section. 70 until the sliding/tilting roof has closed fully. Fig. 71 Emergency closing handle . Fig. Fit the lever back into position. it A can be closed only by pressing the rotary button at the front in position A fig. the sunroof may be closed manually. Operation in the event of a breakdown In the event of a breakdown.

Risk of accident. A warning lamp lights up in the control panel. Always use your dipped headlights if it is dark or if visibility is poor. A warning lamp lights up in the instrument panel. Switching on the rear fog lights (vehicles with no front fog lights) – Pull the switch out of position to the last stop.Lights and visibility 111 Lights and visibility Lights Switching lights on and off Switching on the fog lights* – Pull the switch out of position or to the first stop. Fig. • The dipped beam headlights will only work with the ignition on. This is a reminder to switch off the lights. The symbol in the light switch lights up. 72 to position . Switching on the rear fog lights (vehicles with front fog lights) – Pull the switch out of position or to the second stop . 72 Detail of the dash panel: Switch for lights. . Switching on dipped headlights – Turn the light switch to position Switching off the lights – Turn the light switch to position 0. Switching on the side lights – Turn the light switch fig. If the lights are left on after the key has been taken out of the ignition lock. The side lights are not bright enough to illuminate the road ahead and to ensure that other road users are able to see you. The side lights come on automatically when the ignition is turned off. a buzzer sounds when the driver door is opened. Note • Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . fog lights and rear fog light WARNING Never drive with just the side lights on.

If you are towing a trailer equipped with a rear fog light on a vehicle with a factory-fitted towing bracket. The rain function switches on the headlights if the continuous wipe function is switched on for longer than 5 seconds. the lights are automatically activated. • . Automatic lighting If the automatic headlight control is switched on. the fog lights or rear fog light cannot be switched on in addition. 73 Automatic lighting Note If the daylight driving automatic light function is switched on. • The use of the lighting described here is subject to the relevant statutory requirements. this indication will light up. Activation – Rotate the switch to the position “Auto”. Therefore. • For those vehicles with the automatic headlight system. for example. it will sound if the position lights are activated. The use of the lighting described here is subject to the relevant statutory requirements. Do not put stickers on the windscreen in front of the sensor. the rear fog light on the car will automatically be switched off. When the switch is in this position. The indication “Auto”. dipped headlights are automatically switched on by a light-sensitive sensor if you drive into a tunnel. Automatic lighting WARNING • If automatic headlight control is switched on. the dipped beam must be switched on. changes to red.112 Lights and visibility • • • • If the coming home* feature is activated. the headlights will not be switched on in fog or heavy rain. This may cause disruptions or faults in the automatic lighting system. as soon as visibility conditions are reduced. The dipped beam headlights are switched off if the continuous wipe or the intermittent wipe functions are switched off for longer than 255 seconds. when the key is removed from the ignition. the acoustic signal will only sound if the light or if the vehicle is not fitted with the coming control is in the position home function. The rear fog light is so bright that it can dazzle drivers behind you. the acoustic signal for the dipped beam headlights will not sound. You should use the rear fog light only when visibility is very poor. • Fig.

If you wish to reactivate the system. In the dark.Lights and visibility 113 Coming home / leaving home function* After dark the area around the car is lit up with the aid of the coming home / leaving home function. you must start from the beginning. before this time is up. To avoid this. – Remove key from ignition switch. • For those vehicles fitted with the “Dot Matrix” display. lights and visibility” menu. all of the doors and the tailgate are closed. the coming home function will illuminate the vehicle and its surroundings by switching on the dipped headlights. make longer journeys whenever possible. To deactivate the function – Turn light switch to position 0 When the light switch is at position “0” the leaving home function is not activated. the rear lights and the registration plate lighting remain on for about 90 seconds. If. While one of the doors or the tailgate are open. However. Note Instrument and switch lighting / Headlight range control When the system is activated and it is dark. Leaving home function* The function is activated when the vehicle is unlocked using the remote control. Coming home function* To activate the function – Put the light switch into the position or in the “Auto” position for those vehicles fitted with the automatic lighting function. The lighting time is defined at the time of manufacture. • Observe all relevant statutory requirements when using the lighting systems described here. the system will be deactivated and the lights will not come on. the rear lights and the registration plate lighting for about 40 seconds. 74 Detail of the dash panel: Regulation for instrument and switch illumination and headlight range control Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . the dipped headlights. this will place a heavy demand on the battery. the leaving home function will light the dipped beam lights. if all of the doors and the tailgate are closed after the 90 seconds have passed. rear lights and number plate lights when the driver's door is opened. • If the vehicle is used often during the night for short trips using the coming home function. another 40 seconds of lighting is given. the Coming Home time (about 40 seconds) can be adjusted using the “Configuration. Fig.

5. When the headlights are switched on. Switch the engine off. it is possible to avoid dazzling oncoming traffic more than necessary. and for an automatic move the selector lever to P. Use the warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users to your vehicle. 2 To lower the beam. 75 Detail of the dash panel: Hazard warning light switch If your vehicle breaks down: 1. 74 A. turn the thumb wheel down A from the basic setting 0. Fig. . the brightness of the instruments and switch lighting can be regulated to suit your requirements by turning the 1 thumb wheel page 113. The headlights can only be adjusted when the dipped beam is switched on. Vehicles with gas discharge lamps are not fitted with headlight range control. Those vehicles fitted with xenon gas discharge headlights are fitted with an automatic headlight range system. A you can adjust the headlight range to the load level that is being carried in the vehicle. Press the button to switch on the hazard warning lights 3. 4. . This means that the headlights will be adjusted to suit the load level of the vehicle and “nodding movements” when pulling off and braking are automatically compensated for. the driver has the best possible lighting for the road ahead using the correct headlight settings. 6. Park your vehicle at a safe distance from moving traffic. At the same time.114 Lights and visibility 1 Instrument and switch lighting A Hazard warning lights The hazard warning lights are used to draw the attention of other road users to your vehicle in emergencies. Dynamic headlight range control Vehicles with gas discharge lamps (“xenon lamps”) are equipped with dynamic headlight range control. 2 Headlight range control A 2 Using the electrical headlight range control. On a manual gearbox engage 1st gear. In this way. fig. Apply the handbrake. 2.

• • • • • reaching the tail end of a traffic jam there is an emergency your vehicle breaks down due to a technical defect you are towing another vehicle or your vehicle is being towed.Lights and visibility 115 7. for instance when: The use of the hazard warning lights described here is subject to the relevant statutory requirements. • Never park where the catalytic converter could come into contact with inflammable materials under the vehicle. for example dry grass or spilt petrol. Indicator and main beam headlight lever The turn signal and main beam lever also operates the parking lights and the headlight flasher. You should switch on the hazard warning lights to warn other road users. 76 A to indicate right. in order to warn vehicles following behind. This could start a fire! • The battery will run down if the hazard warning lights are left on for a long time. 76 Turn signal and main beam headlight lever • The turn signal and main beam headlight lever has the following functions: Switching on the turn signals 1 – Move the lever all the way up fig. and 2 all the way down A to indicate left. All turn signals flash simultaneously when the hazard warning lights are and the switched on. If the vehicle accelerates or continues to travel at over 40 Km/h. the hazard warning lights are automatically switched off. Switching on hazard warning lamps The hazard warning lights come on automatically in the event of sharp braking at speeds of over 60 Km/h or if the ABS is activated for any length of time. That is that the two turn signal indicator lamps will flash at the same time. Safety First Operating instructions Note Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . Fig. Always use the hazard warning lights and a warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users to your stationary vehicle. Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle. The hazard indicator lamp in the switch warning lights also work when the ignition is switched off. WARNING The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. even if the ignition is switched off.

• If the turn signal lever is left on after the key has been taken out of the ignition lock. The corresponding warning lamp or flashes in the combi-instrument. If a turn signal bulb is defective. an acoustic signal sounds when the driver door is opened. If the lights are switched on. The turn signal will flash several times. The corresponding warning lamp will also flash. . WARNING The main beam can dazzle other drivers. • Note – Pull the lever back towards you to switch the main beam headlights off again. 3 page 115. a buzzer gives an audible warning while the driver door is open. The flashes when the turn signals are operated. 76 A to switch on the The turn signals only work when the ignition is switched on. provided a warning lamp trailer is correctly attached and connected to the vehicle. Switching on parking lights – Switch off the ignition and remove the key from the lock. Switching main beam on and off – Turn the light switch to position – Press the lever forward main beams. This is a reminder to switch off the turn signal.116 Lights and visibility Signalling a lane change 1 2 – Push the lever up A or down A to the point where you incur resistance and then release the lever. unless of course you wish to leave the parking light on. the headlight and the rear light on the corresponding side of the vehicle light up. The parking lights will only work if the key is removed from the ignition. The warning lamp instrument. Risk of accident! Never use the main beam headlights or the headlight flasher if they could dazzle other drivers. The warning lamp then comes on in the combi-instrument. You should signal bulbs are damaged. • The main beam headlights can only be switched on if the dipped beam then comes on in the combiheadlights are already on. warning lamp have the bulb replaced. fig. – Move the lever up or down to turn on the right or left-hand parking lights respectively. If the trailer turn does not light up. Headlight flasher 4 – Pull the lever towards the steering wheel A to operate the flasher. the warning lamp flashes at double speed. • When the parking lights are switched on. • The headlight flasher comes on for as long as you pull the lever – even if no other lights are switched on. .

77 is used to select the following positions: Fig. Interior light switched on Push the switch to the position Interior light switched off O Push the switch to the position O fig.Lights and visibility 117 Interior lights Front interior light Note If not all the vehicle doors are closed. The interior lights are automatically switched on when the vehicle is unlocked or the key removed from the ignition lock and turn off about 20 seconds after the closure of the doors. 10 minutes. This prevents the battery discharging. . The interior lights are switched off when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is switched on. 77 Detail of the roof: Front reading light A The switch A fig. Front reading lights Fig. 77 . Switching on the reading light B Press the button A to switch on the reading light. the interior lights will be switched off after approx. providing the key has been removed and the courtesy light position selected. Switching off the reading lights B Press the button A to switch off the reading light. 78 Interior roof lining: Front lights Courtesy light position Rocker switch in flat position (not activated). Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data .

118 Lights and visibility Rear interior and reading lights* Interior lights or both reading lights switched on 5 Turn the control to position A. . 79 A. the interior and reading lights are switched Switching on the reading light 2 4 Turn the switch to position A (left reading light) or to position A (right reading light). 80 Sun visor on the driver side The sun visors for the driver and the front passenger can be pulled out of their mountings in the centre of the vehicle and turned towards the doors fig. 79 Detail of the roof: Rear interior light and reading lights C fig. The interior lights are switched off when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is switched on. Note If not all the vehicle doors are closed. Courtesy light position 3 Turn the control to position A. The interior lights are automatically switched on when the vehicle is unlocked or the key removed from the ignition lock The light turns off about 20 seconds after the closure of the doors. Fig. 10 minutes. Visibility Fig. 1 fig. 79 A is used to select the following positions: Sun visors The switch Interior light switched off 0 In switch position off. the interior lights will be switched off after approx. providing the key has been removed and the courtesy light position selected. This prevents the battery discharging. 80 1 A.

Position A. Intermittent wipe 1 – Move the lever up to position A.shorter wipe pauses. The windscreen wiper lever Switching off the wipers fig. Tips and Maintenance Technical Data Safety First Operating instructions . Continuous wipe 3 – Move the lever up to position A. The wipers will keep running for approximately four seconds. Windscreen wipers Front windscreen wipers The windscreen wiper lever controls the windscreen wipers and the automatic wash and wipe. This prevents the battery discharging. Fig. The lamp* in the roof lining will go out when the vanity mirror cover is pushed back or the sun visor is pushed back up. Control to the left . Slow wipe 2 – Move the lever up to position A. A – Move the control A to the left or right to set the length of the intervals. The wiper will start to move faster if you keep the lever pressed down for longer than 2 seconds. Four wiper interval stages can be set A using switch A. The wash function will start immediately and the wipers will start with a slight delay. When you open the cover 2 A a light* in the roof turns on.Lights and visibility 119 The make-up mirrors in the sun visors have covers. The wash and wiper systems will function at the same time at speeds of over 120 km/h. control to the right . Wash and wipe automatic system 5 – Pull the lever towards the steering wheel . Note The roof lamp* will turn off about 10 minutes following the removal of the ignition key. Brief wipe 4 – Move the lever down to position A to give the windscreen a brief wipe.longer wipe pause. 81 Windscreen wiper and windscreen wash lever – Return the lever back to the rest position. 81 has the following positions: 0 – Move the lever to position A.

The set speed will be resumed when the vehicle starts again. always move the wiper arms to the service position (horizontal). the windscreen wipers only operate when the ignition is on and the bonnet closed. In vehicles fitted with alarms and in certain versions. the higher the vehicle speed the shorter the intervals. a new cleaning cycle begins without performing the final wipe. The washer fluid could otherwise freeze on the windscreen and obscure your view of the road. you should not use the wash / wipe system unless you have warmed the windscreen with the heating and ventilation system. When the lever is moved to the 0 position. When the “intermittent wipe function” is on.120 Lights and visibility Optional heated windscreen in the wiper blade* area In some countries and with some versions. the intervals are directly proportional to the speed. To reactivate the “automatic” function the ignition must be turned off and on again. When in use. Before removing any objects that may be trapped in the side areas of the windscreen. the wipers do not go as far as the rest position. 81 or A is selected when the vehicle stops. If the windscreen wiper function is activated within three seconds of the automatic function. The wiper will try to wipe away any obstacles that are on the windscreen. This way. Caution In icy conditions. The windscreen will be wiped again after approximately five seconds once the “automatic wipe/wash system” has been operated while the vehicle is in transit (automatic function). 2 The next speed down will automatically be selected if speed A 3 page 119. they move to the rest position. • • • • Note The windscreen wipers will only work when the ignition is switched on. This function is activated by turning the exterior heated rearview mirror* control forwards page 124. Remove the obstacle and switch the wiper back on again. The wiper will stop moving if the obstacle blocks its path. • Always note the corresponding warnings on page 209. . you could damage both the wiper blades and the wiper motor. • • • • WARNING In cold conditions. there is the possibility of heating the windscreen in the area of the windscreen wiper blades in order to aid deicing in the zone. If you switch on the wipers when the wiper blades are frozen to the windscreen. fig. always check that the wiper blades are not frozen to the glass before using the wipers for the first time. • • Worn and dirty wiper blades obstruct visibility and reduce safety levels.

83. depending on the amount of rain.Lights and visibility 121 Rain sensor* The rain sensor controls the frequency of the windscreen wiper intervals. A – Move the control A to the left or right to set the sensitivity of the rain sensor.high sensitivity. This may cause sensor disruption or faults. Fig. You will have to switch the rain sensor back on if you switch off the ignition. This is done by switching the wiper intermittent function off and back on. Switching on the rain sensor 1 – Move the windscreen wiper lever into position A fig. • Note Do not put stickers on the windscreen in front of the sensor.low sensitivity The rain sensor is part of the interval wipe function. 83 Windscreen wiper lever Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . Switch to the left . Switch to the right . 82 Rain sensor* Fig.

– Return the lever back to the rest position. . • • Note The windscreen wiper will only function when the ignition is switched on and the tailgate is closed. The wiper then wipes for approximately 4 seconds. page 209. – Return the lever back to the rest position. always check that the wiper blade is not frozen to the glass before using the wiper for the first time. “Changing Switching on the interval wipe 6 – Press the lever forwards to position A fig. with the windscreen wipers switched on. the rear windscreen wiper will make one wipe.122 Lights and visibility Rear window wiper The windscreen wiper lever operates the windscreen wiper and the wash and wipe system for the rear window. Switching on the windscreen wiper and washer system 7 – Press the lever fully forwards to position A fig. Switching off the interval wipe function 6 – Pull the lever back from position A towards the steering wheel. WARNING Fig. The wash function will start immediately and the wiper will start with a slight delay. In reverse gear. The washer system stops and the wipers function. and then in intervals again. • • A worn or dirty wiper blade will obstruct visibility and reduce safety. 84 Window wash and wipe lever: Rear window wiper Always note the corresponding warnings on the front windscreen wiper blades”. 84. 84 . The wiper will continue to function for a short period if you switch off whilst the wipers are in motion. The windscreen wash system will function as long as you hold the lever in this position. this could damage both the wiper blade and the wiper motor. The wiper will wipe the window approximately every 6 seconds. If you switch on the wiper when the wiper blade is frozen to the glass. Caution In icy conditions.

The anti-dazzle function is cancelled if reverse gear is engaged. When the anti-dazzle function is activated the interior mirror will darken automatically according to the amount of light it receives (for example from the headlights of a vehicle behind). The headlight washers are activated automatically when the windscreen washer is used and the windscreen wiper lever is pulled towards the steering wheel for at least 1. Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror* The automatic anti-dazzle function can be switched on and off as desired. Manual anti-dazzle function for interior mirror In the basic mirror position. Clean off stubborn dirt (insects. Note To ensure that the headlight washers work properly in winter. Warning lamp is lit. for instance when filling the fuel tank. 85.) from the headlights at regular intervals. To remove water. A – Press button A B fig. 85. Anti-dazzle function The anti-dazzle function is activated every time the ignition is switched on. etc. The green indicator lamp lights up in the mirror housing. • • Fig.5 seconds – provided the dipped headlights or main beams are switched on. Warning lamp A goes out: Switching on anti-dazzle function A – Press button A fig. the headlight wipers will be activated every three cycles. Switching off anti-dazzle function Mirrors Interior mirror It is dangerous to drive if you cannot see clearly through the rear window. Pull the lever to the back to select the anti-dazzle function. 85 Automatic antidazzle interior mirror. the lever at the bottom edge of the mirror should be at the front.Lights and visibility 123 Headlight washer system* The headlight washers clean the headlight lenses. keep the nozzle holders in the bumper free of snow and remove any ice with a de-icer spray. the windscreen wipers will be activated from time to time. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data .

124 Lights and visibility • • Note 2. 4. Turn the rotary knob to position the mirror so that you have a good view to the rear of the vehicle. open the door and press the switch Folding exterior mirrors back out to the extended position* Fig. – To unfold the mirror again. The automatic anti-dazzle function will only work properly if the sun blind* for the rear window is retracted and there are no other objects preventing light from reaching the interior mirror. Turn the control to the position L (left exterior mirror). Doing so could prevent the anti-dazzle function from working well or even from working at all. Turn knob to position R (right exterior mirror). Basic setting of exterior mirrors 1. 86 A so that the heated rear view mirrors warm up and the heated windscreen* in the wiper blade rest area is activated page 120. Heating the exterior mirrors* 1 – Turn the knob forwards to the central position fig. Exterior mirrors The exterior mirrors can be adjusted using the rotary knob in the centre console. Synchronised mirror adjustment 1. Turn knob fig. 3. do not do so in front of the sensors. This will help prevent damage. Folding in exterior mirrors* – Turn the control fig. 86 Exterior mirror control – Turn the knob to another position to fold the exterior mirrors back out . You should always fold in the exterior mirrors if you are driving through an automatic car wash. 86 to position to fold in the exterior mirrors. . Folding wing mirrors using convenience closing* – The wing mirror folds automatically using the convenience closing (operated by the control or the key). Swivel the rotary knob to position the mirror so that you have a good view to the rear of the car . 86 to position L (left exterior mirror). If you have to stick any type of sticker on the windscreen.

as this will interfere with the mirror adjuster function. Risk of accident. Note • • The rear view mirrors can be adjusted separately or simultaneously. • If the electrical adjustment ever fails to operate. The right exterior mirror will be adjusted at the same time (synchronised). Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . Do not readjust the mirror housing by hand. WARNING • The rear view convex or aspheric mirror increase the field of vision however the objects appear smaller and further away in the mirrors. If you use these mirrors to estimate the distance to vehicles behind you when changing lane. • If possible. Turn the rotary knob to position the mirror so that you have a good view to the rear of the vehicle. knocked when parking the vehicle). Risk of injury! For the sake of the environment The exterior mirror heating should be switched off when it is no longer needed. you could make a mistake. • Make sure that you do not get your finger trapped between the mirror and the mirror base when folding back the mirrors. The following guideline applies to vehicles with electric exterior mirrors: If the mirror housing is moved as a result of exterior force (e. the mirrors must be folded in electrically to the final position. Fuel is wasted otherwise. as described before. use the interior mirror to estimate distances to vehicles behind you. the mirrors can be adjusted by hand by lightly pressing the edge of the mirror glass.g.Lights and visibility 125 2.

Otherwise your seat could move unexpectedly while the vehicle is moving. If the airbag is triggered. The driver seat and front passenger seat can be adjusted in many ways to suit the physical requirements of the vehicle occupants. they may sustain critical injuries. safe driving page 7. Your vehicle has five passenger places. • It is important for the driver and front passenger to maintain a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dash panel. “Child safety”. WARNING If the driver and passengers assume improper sitting positions. and to ensure that the seat belts and airbag system provide maximum protection page 19. This also applies to passengers. • The front seats and all head restraints must always be adjusted to body size and the seat belt must always be properly adjusted to provide you and your passengers with optimum protection. Failure to respect the minimum distance means that the airbag will not protect you. two individual front seats and three places on the rear seat. The distance between the driver and the steering wheel or between the front passenger and the dash panel should always be as great as possible. • Every occupant in the vehicle must properly fasten and wear the seat belt belonging to his or her seat. Each seat is equipped with a three-point seat belt. you will assume an incorrect sitting position. Risk of fatal injury. while adjusting your seat. This could increase the risk of an accident and therefore injury.126 Seats and stowage Seats and stowage The importance of correct seat adjustment Proper seat adjustment optimises the level of protection offered by seat belts and airbags. relaxed posture that does not cause drowsiness. • • • Never transport more people than there are seats available in the vehicle. • • • • fast and easy operation of all controls on the instrument panel. observe the warning note in the page 46. • Adjust the driver or front passenger seat only when the vehicle is stationary. In addition. The correct seat position is very important for: WARNING (continued) • Always keep your feet in the foot well when the vehicle is moving. you could sustain severe injuries due to an incorrect sitting position. An incorrect sitting position exposes you to an increased risk of injury in the event of a braking manoeuvre or an accident. never rest them on the dash panel. Children must be protected with an appropriate child restraint system page 46. . Risk of fatal accidents. Special guidelines apply to installing a child seat on the front passenger seat. out of the window or on the seat. When installing a child seat. “Child safety”.

or as close as possible to the same level as the top of your head and.Seats and stowage 127 Head restraints Correct adjustment of head restraints Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of occupant protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in most accident situations. Fig. 88. 87 and fig. 87 Viewed from in front: Properly adjusted head restraints and proper belt adjustment Adjusting the head restraints page 128. Incorrectly adjusted head restraints also increase the risk of injury during sudden or unexpected driving or braking manoeuvres. WARNING • • • • Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted increases the risk of severe injuries. Fig. Improperly adjusted head restraints could lead to death in the event of a collision or accident. The head restraints must always be adjusted according to the occupant's size. 88 Viewed from side: Properly adjusted head restraints and proper belt adjustment – Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same level as the top of your head. as a very minimum at eye level fig. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data .

page 14 and Adjusting height (front seats) – Press the button on the side and pull upwards to the desired position. – Push head restraint down. Risk of injury. there is a risk of serious injury. – Adjust the head restraint to suit body size page 13. “Correct adjustment . – Make sure that it engages securely into position. • • Never drive if the head restraints have been removed.128 Seats and stowage Removing or adjusting head restraints The head restraints can be adjusted by moving them up and down. press the button and push head restraint downwards. – Make sure that the head restraint engages securely in one of its positions page 14. 89 Adjusting and removing the head restraints Fitting the head restraint – Insert the head restraint into the guides on the rear backrest. WARNING Never drive if the head restraints are in an unsuitable position. – To lower the head restraint. • After refitting the head restraint. Adjusting height (rear seats) – Press the button on the side and pull upwards to the desired position. Angle adjustment (front seats) – Press the head restraint forward or back to the required position. Fig. 89 (arrow). press the button and push head restraint downwards. you must always adjust it properly for height to achieve optimal protection. – Pull head restraint out of fitting without releasing the button. – Press the button fig. • Please observe the safety warnings of head restraints”. page 127. – To lower the head restraint. Removing the head restraint – Push the head restraint up as far as it will go.

This adjusts the seat height in stages. While adjusting your seat. The backrest curvature of the cushioned area is determined by the settings made in the lumbar region. 2 A Adjusting the seat height* To reduce the risk of injury to the driver and front passenger during sudden braking manoeuvres or an accident. Adjust the driver or front passenger seat only when the vehicle is stationary.Seats and stowage 129 Front seats Adjustment of the front seats 3 A Adjusting the backrest angle – Take your weight off the backrest and turn the hand wheel. never drive with the backrest tilted far to the rear. This supports the natural curvature of the spine very effectively. 90 are mirrored for the front right- 1 A Adjusting the seat forwards and backwards – Pull up the grip and move the seat forwards or backwards. 1 – Then release the grip A and move the seat further until the catch engages. fig. you will assume an incorrect sitting position. WARNING • Fig. The further the backrests are tilted to the rear. Risk of fatal accidents. 90 Front left seat controls Never adjust the driver or front passenger seat while the vehicle is in motion. The maximum protection of the seat belt can be achieved only when the backrests are in an upright position and the driver and front passenger have properly adjusted their seat belts. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . • The control elements in hand seat. 4 A Adjusting the lumbar support* – Take your weight off the backrest and turn the hand wheel to adjust the lumbar support. the greater the risk of injury due to improper positioning of the belt web! Exercise caution when adjusting the seat height or forwards/backwards position. • – Pull the lever up or push down (several times if necessary) from its home position. Injuries can be caused if the backrest is tilted without due care and attention.

The rear head restraints may have to be removed before folding the seat forwards if the front seats have been moved far back page 128. . 91 Thumb wheel for the front seat heating Fig. – Pull the release button on the backrest (sectioned backrest) forwards in the direction of the arrow – Fold down the backrest. Rear seat bench Fold down the seat back Fig. 92 Folding the seat backrests down – Turn the appropriate thumb wheel fig. The left thumb wheel controls the left seat and the right thumb wheel the right seat. 91 to switch on the seat heating. The seat heating only works when the ignition is switched on. The seat heating is switched off in the 0 position. please do not kneel on the seat or apply sharp pressure at a single point to the seat cushion and backrest.130 Seats and stowage Heated seats* The front seat cushions and backrests can be heated electrically. Caution To avoid damaging the heating elements.

The centre console with drinks holder The centre console has a drinks holder. WARNING Always keep the stowage compartment cover closed while the vehicle is in motion to reduce the risk of injury during a sudden braking manoeuvre or in the event of an accident. 93 Folding up the rear seat back Fig. WARNING • Please be careful when raising the backrest! Injuries can be caused if the backrest is tilted without due care and attention. The compartment can be opened by pulling the lever fig. The red marking should no longer be visible fig. 94 Passenger side: Stowage compartment – Fold the backrest back and push the backrest firmly into the lock. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data .Seats and stowage 131 Folding up the seat back Stowage compartments Stowage compartment on the front passenger side Fig. 93. 94.

During normal or sudden driving manoeuvres. 95 Stowage area under the front seats A A is opened by pulling on the cover. There are two open positions of 15 and 60 degrees depending on the pressure applied to the cover. • Never place hot drinks in the drink holders.5 kg. WARNING The folding tables may not be folded down whilst the vehicle is in motion and anyone is seated on the second row of seats. • • The drawers will hold a maximum weight of 1. • WARNING Do not drive with the drawer cover open. 95 – To open the table. Fig. There is an injury risk for passengers if the cargo is released in case of sudden braking or an accident. the hot drink could be spilled. Fig. To close the drawer. .132 Seats and stowage Stowage compartment under the left-hand side front seat* There is a stowage locker with a cover under the front lefthand side seat. 96 Folding table on left front seat The locker* fig. In the 60 degree position. sudden braking or an accident. Danger of scalding. open it up in the direction of the arrow fig. 96. Risk of injury during a sudden braking manoeuvre! The table must therefore be closed and properly secured whilst the vehicle is in motion. press the cover until it locks into position. Folding table* Folding tables are fitted to the rear of the front seat backrests. the cover will collapse if too much pressure is applied.

sharp or heavy objects in hanging articles of clothing. braking or cornering) and distract the driver.g. These objects could be flung through the passenger compartment when the vehicle is moving (e. – To close the compartment. WARNING • Do not store loose objects on the dashboard. Do not leave any hard. Clothing hung on the coat hooks must not restrict the driver's view. and could damage the vehicle. reverse the procedure. – Pull the sliding internal cover to the right. for example. Other stowage areas Other stowage areas can be found: • • in the centre console. • • WARNING • Do not close the external cover with the loader cover open. Ensure that no objects can fall from the centre console or other stowage areas into the driver foot well while the vehicle is moving.Seats and stowage 133 Caution When driving. During sudden braking manoeuvres or accidents. especially those involving airbag deployment. The hooks for hanging are found on the pillar between the front and rear side windows. these objects could injure the vehicle occupants. Risk of accident. do not leave open containers in the cup holders. Stowage compartment with the CD charger* The CD* loader is located under the front right hand seat To access the loader – Open the external cover by operating the button on this cover. The coat hooks are intended only for use with light articles of clothing. – Press the “EJECT” button. Risk of accident. The drink might be spilt on braking. while accelerating. in the side trims of the luggage compartment. In the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre. clutch or accelerator. Risk of accident. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . you will not be able to use the brake.

Emptying the ashtray – Extract the ashtray and empty. in front of the gear lever. • • Opening and closing the ashtray – To open the ashtray. 98. these could cause injury in the case of an accident. Hot ash could ignite the paper in the ashtray. there are two drink holders fig. sudden braking or an accident. glass or ceramic). Danger of scalding. the hot drink could be spilled. fig. During normal or sudden driving manoeuvres. Fig. Never use rigid materials (for example. lower the cover. 98 Ashtray located in the front drinks holder WARNING Never place hot drinks in the bottle holder. . lift the cover – To close. WARNING Never put paper in the ashtray. cigarette lighter* and electrical sockets Ashtray* Fig. 97. 97 Front drinks holder On the centre console.134 Seats and stowage Front drinks holders Ashtrays*.

never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. 100 or to that of the luggage compartment*. Fig. 100 Socket. WARNING The electrical sockets and any appliances connected to them are also functional with the ignition switched off and the key removed. 99 The cigarette lighter is located in the electric socket on the front of the centre console Fig. WARNING Improper use of the cigarette lighter can lead to serious injuries or start a fire. Carelessness or negligence when using the cigarette lighter can cause burns. • The cigarette lighter also works when the ignition is off and when the ignition key is removed. risk of injury. – Wait for the lighter to pop out slightly. Electrical accessories may be connected to the 12 volt socket in the front centre console fig.Seats and stowage 135 Cigarette lighter* Electrical sockets Electrical equipment can be connected to any of the 12 volt sockets. 99 to activate it . Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . front – Press on the cigarette lighter fig. • • Take care when using the cigarette lighter. centre console. Improper use of the sockets or electrical accessories can lead to serious injuries or cause a fire. The appliances connected to each socket must not exceed a power rating of 120 Watt. To avoid the risk of fire. To avoid the risk of injury. never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. – Pull out the cigarette lighter and light the cigarette on the glowing coil.

101 Auxiliary audio connection – Lift the AUX cover fig. Auxiliary audio connection (AUX-IN) Fig. 101. Before using any electrical accessories. see the instructions on page 191. Using electrical appliances with the engine switched off will drain the battery. . – Insert the pin fully (see the radio manual).136 Seats and stowage • • Note Apple* iPod connector® The iPod connector® is located below the passenger seat. please see the Radio handbook. 102 iPod connection below passenger seat For information concerning the use of this equipment. Fig.

fire extinguisher Warning triangle Fig. The emergency warning triangle can be fitted in the side lining of the boot. please see the Radio handbook. warning triangle. 103 USB* connection below passenger seat Fig. First-aid kit and fire extinguisher The first-aid kit* can be housed in a stowage box in the left side lining of the luggage compartment. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . First-aid kit. • Note The warning triangle is not part of the vehicle's standard equipment. 104 Housing for the emergency warning triangle in the boot For information concerning the use of this equipment.Seats and stowage 137 USB* Connection There is a USB port below the passenger seat.

injuring vehicle occupants. Observe the expiry date of the contents of the first-aid kit. • • • • • • Note The first-aid kit and the fire extinguisher are not part of the vehicle's standard equipment. always keep in mind that a change in the centre of gravity can also cause changes in vehicle handling. – Place heavy objects as far forward in the luggage compartment as possible. Please observe the following points to ensure the vehicle handles well at all times: – Distribute the load as evenly as possible. loose objects in the passenger compartment can be flung forward. therefore. Before acquiring accessories and emergency equipment see the instructions on page 191. You should purchase a new first-aid kit as soon as possible after the shelf-life date of the first-aid kit has expired. When you transport heavy objects. The first-aid kit must comply with legal requirements. Ensure that the fire extinguisher is fully functional. . Note The ventilation slots in front of the rear side windows must not be covered as this would prevent stale air being extracted from the vehicle. Hard objects on the shelf could chafe against the wires of the heating element in the rear window and cause damage. • • Always store objects in the luggage compartment and secure with suitable straps. WARNING • Loose luggage and other loose items in the vehicle can cause serious injuries. be checked regularly. • Loose objects in the luggage compartment can suddenly move and change the way the vehicle handles. Caution Luggage compartment Stowing luggage All luggage must be securely stowed. “Safe driving”. – Secure luggage in the luggage compartment with suitable straps on the fastening rings.138 Seats and stowage The fire extinguisher* is attached to the luggage compartment carpet by velcro. The fire extinguisher should. The sticker on the fire extinguisher will inform you of the next date for checking. The fire extinguisher must comply with legal requirements. During sudden manoeuvres or accidents. This is especially important for heavy objects. • • Please observe information on safe driving page 7.

• • For those vehicles fitted with a sunroof*. only luggage racks and accessories approved by SEAT should be used. However. A maximum load of 40 kg only is permitted for each roof carrier system support bar. • Distribute the load evenly. Ensure that. For this reason. in its rest position and pull outwards. the maximum load permitted for the entire roof (including the support system) of 75 kg must not be exceeded nor should the total weight of the vehicle be exceeded. WARNING Do not place heavy or hard objects on the luggage compartment cover. Removing the cover – Disengage the loops B A fig. ensure that it does not interfere with the load on the roof carrier system when opened. taking special care when fitting the front bar in the holes designed for this and the rear bar between the marks on the upper part of the rear door frame while respecting the correct direction of travel indicated in the installation manual. the load must be distributed evenly over the entire length. any change in the normal vehicle behaviour due to a change in the centre of gravity or an increased wind resistance must be taken into account. Fig. • It is imperative to precisely follow the fitting instructions included for the rack. 105 Luggage compartment cover • Pay special attention to the tightening torque of the attachment bolts and check them following a short journey. retighten the bolts and check them at regular intervals. Not following these instructions may lead to paintwork damage or marks on the bodywork. a suitable speed and driving style must be used. when placing items of clothing on the luggage compartment cover. See the chapter on “Technical Data”. When transporting heavy or large objects on the roof. this will endanger the vehicle occupants in case of sudden braking. • Note Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . rear visibility is not reduced.Seats and stowage 139 Luggage compartment cover Roof carrier* Please observe the following points if you intend to carry loads on the roof: • For safety reasons. – Extract the cover from its slot. If necessary. 105 A from the retaining pins A.

The required temperature inside the vehicle cannot be lower than the ambient temperature. Ventilation and Air conditioning Heating and ventilation Controls and equipment Fig. Rear window heating 2 This function A will be switched off automatically approximately 20 minutes after being switched on. which is needed to defrost the windows quickly. Maximum heat output. press the appropriate button A or 3 A. 106 A and A and the control A you can set the temperature. air distribution and the airflow. for example when passing through a tunnel or in queuing traffic . 2 – To switch a function on or off. Air recirculation mode 3 Air recirculation mode A prevents strong odours in the outside air from entering the vehicle interior. It can also be switched off beforehand by pushing the button Temperature 1 With the regulator A the heating level is determined.140 Heating. is only available when the engine has reached its operating temperature. the display window in the lower left of the button is lit. 106 On the dash panel: Heater controls 1 4 5 – Using the controls fig. When the function is activated. . Ventilation and Air conditioning Heating.

no ambient air enters the vehicle interior. for safety reasons. Note Please observe the general notes page 149. WARNING For road safety all windows must be clear of ice. • • In air recirculation mode. you should never leave the air recirculation mode switched on for longer periods.Heating. This is essential to ensure good visibility. – Air distribution to foot well – Air distribution to the windscreen and the foot well. – Air distribution to the upper body. Ventilation and Air conditioning 141 With low outside temperatures. Please familiarise yourself with the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system. including the anti-fog/defrost functions for the windows. and condensation. not possible in this position. Air distribution 4 Control A for setting the flow of air in the required direction. Therefore. The windows can quickly fog over if the heating is switched off. The airflow should always be set at the lowest speed when driving slowly. snow. – Air distribution towards the windscreen. Blower 5 The airflow can be set at four speeds with the control A. Air recirculation is. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . as this increases the risk of an accident. the air recirculation increases the effectiveness of the heating system by warming the air inside the passenger compartment rather than the air from outside.

107 On the dash panel: Climatic controls 3 A Button The climatic or semi-automatic air conditioning system only works when the engine is running and the turbine is switched on. There are four speed settings for the airflow. 3 4 A or A. The airflow should always be set at the lowest speed when driving slowly. and condensation. including the anti-fog/defrost functions for the windows. snow. air distribution and the airflow. Please familiarise yourself with the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system. WARNING For road safety all windows must be clear of ice. The heating will be switched off automatically approximately 20 minutes after switching on. When the function is activated. press the appropriate button A. the display window in the lower corner of the button is lit.142 Heating. Button – Air recirculation mode page 144 Air distribution control page 143 Blower switch. It can also be switched off beforehand by pushing the button. 1 5 6 – Using the controls fig. Ventilation and Air conditioning Climatic* Control switches Fig. 2 – To switch a function on or off. This is essential to ensure good visibility. 107 A and A and the control A you can set the temperature. ventilation and air-conditioning system on/off 4 A 5 A 6 A – Rear window heating. page 143 . 1 A Temperature selector page 143 2 A Button AC – Heating.

fig. page 142. – Turn the blower switch to one of the settings 1-4. – Use the air distribution control to guide the flow of air in the required direction: (to the windscreen).Heating. Heating and cooling the interior Fig. (to the foot well) and (to the windscreen and to the foot well). Ventilation and Air conditioning 143 Note Please observe the general notes page 149. 108 On the dash panel: Climatic controls Heating of the vehicle interior – Turn the temperature selector the required temperature. – Turn the temperature selector anti-clockwise until the desired cooling output is reached. 107 AC . (to the upper body). Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . 108 1 A clockwise to select Cooling the passenger compartment – Switch on the air conditioner using the button fig. – Turn the blower switch to one of the settings 1-4.

Heating system Maximum heat output. The air conditioner fuse is faulty. Fig. Ventilation and Air conditioning – Use the air distribution control to guide the flow of air in the required direction: (to the windscreen). If the air conditioning system cannot be switched on. which is needed to defrost the windows quickly. but also the air humidity in the vehicle interior is reduced. Air recirculation mode Air recirculation mode prevents fumes or unpleasant smells from entering the vehicle. The blower is switched off. not only the temperature. (to the foot well) and (to the windscreen and to the foot well). this may be caused by the following reasons: • • • • • • The engine may not be running. Have the air conditioner checked by a qualified workshop. is only available when the engine has reached its operating temperature. The ambient air temperature is lower than +3°C. 109 On the dash panel: Climatic controls . (to the upper body). Air conditioner When the air conditioning system is switched on. This improves comfort for the vehicle occupants and prevents misting of the windows when the ambient air humidity is high.144 Heating. The air conditioning system compressor has been temporarily switched off because the engine coolant temperature is too high. Another fault in the vehicle.

no ambient air enters the vehicle interior. 109 prevents strong odours in the outside air from entering the vehicle interior. If the air conditioning system is switched off. 2C-Climatronic* Control switches The controls allow separate adjustment of air conditioning settings for the left and right. Ventilation and Air conditioning 145 Air recirculation mode page 144. as this increases the risk of an accident. For reasons of safety. With low outside temperatures. With high ambient temperatures. 110 On the dash panel: 2C Climatronic controls Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . air recirculation is not possible when the control for air distribution is set to the windscreen setting . Therefore. for example when passing through a tunnel or in queuing traffic. Fig. the windows can quickly mist over. you should never leave the air recirculation mode switched on for longer periods. the air recirculation increases the effectiveness of the air conditioning system by cooling the air inside the passenger compartment rather than the air from outside. fig. the air recirculation increases the effectiveness of the heating system by warming the air inside the passenger compartment rather than the air from outside.Heating. WARNING In air recirculation mode.

The temperature can be adjusted separately for the left and right sides of the vehicle interior. Button – defrost function for the windscreen. snow. 110 A 14 or A in order to adjust the temperature on the left-hand side or the right-hand side respectively. airflow and distribution are automatically regulated so that a specified temperature is attained as quickly as possible and then maintained. “AUTO” is shown . and condensation. Button – Manual air recirculation mode Button – Central air distribution Button – Downward air distribution Button – Upward air distribution Display of the selected interior temperature for the right side. page 145. 10 A Blower control page 147 11 A Button OFF – Switches the 2C-Climatronic on and off page 147 12 A Button AUTO – Automatic temperature. At temperatures over 3°C. The air drawn in from outside the vehicle is directed at the windscreen. ventilation and air distribution control 13 A Button 14 A page 146 ECON – Switches heating. they are indicated in the display. Please familiarise yourself with the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system. 1 A 2 A 3 A 4 A 5 A 6 A 7 A system off Temperature selector for the right side page 146 WARNING For road safety all windows must be clear of ice. fig. Switching on automatic mode – Press the button AUTO on the display. the air conditioning system will be switched on automatically and the blower speed will be increased by one level in order to dry the air. The air recirculation mode. ventilation and air-conditioning – The functions will be switched on when the buttons are pressed. 9 – Press the temperature control buttons page 145. The temperature can be adjusted separately for the left and right sides of the vehicle interior. fig. Also. it may be turned off by pushing the button. Button – Rear window heating. including the anti-fog/defrost functions for the windows.146 Heating. Temperature selector for the left side page 146 Note Please observe the general notes page 149. 8 A 9 A Display of the selected interior temperature for the left side. will be switched off as soon as the defrost function is switched on. if switched on. Ventilation and Air conditioning The air conditioning system only works when the engine is running and the blower is switched on. However. the de-icing and rear heated window functions will turn on along with their corresponding yellow symbol. When these functions are activated. This is essential to ensure good visibility. Press the button again to switch off the function. The heating will be switched off automatically approximately 20 minutes after switching on. Automatic mode In automatic mode air temperature. The button lights up yellow and the symbol appears in the display. The button lights up yellow and the symbol appears in the display. 110.

It can be changed as necessary to suit individual preferences or particular circumstances.5°C (86°F). airflow and distribution as required. 111 On the dash panel: 2C Climatronic controls 5 A. the blower speed and the air distribution are regulated automatically. A comfortable interior climate is quickly reached when a temperature of +22°C (72°F) is set in automatic mode. The symbol AUTO will 10 disappear from the display. automatic mode provides the best comfort for the vehicle occupants in virtually all conditions throughout the year. 111 A to ECON or press the airflow control A. It is possible to select interior temperatures from +16°C (61°F) to +29. so there is no need for manual adjustment. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . airflow or ECON .Heating. Manual mode In manual mode you can adjust the air temperature. Automatic mode is switched off whenever an adjustment is made using the buttons for the air distribution. The temperature will continue to be regulated within the parameters manually selected by the user. Climatronic automatically maintains a constant temperature. The temperature of the air supplied to the interior. These are approximate temperatures and the actual temperature may be slightly higher or lower depending on the ambient conditions. The system also allows for the effect of strong sunlight. We recommend 22°C (72°F). Ventilation and Air conditioning 147 – Press the temperature selectors to set the desired temperatures for the left and right sides of the interior. Fig. press one of the buttons 3 fig. Switching on manual mode – To enter manual mode. Therefore.

The selected temperature is displayed above the selector. fig. In this setting the system runs at maximum cooling output and the temperature is not regulated. . The set temperature can then only be reached if it is higher than the ambient temperature. turns the Climatronic off. For reasons of safety. and possible to open and close some of the air vents separately. The temperature continues to be regulated. the air recirculation increases the effectiveness of the heating system by warming the air inside the passenger compartment rather than the air from outside. Ventilation and Air conditioning Temperature There are separate temperature selectors for the left and right sides of the vehicle interior.148 Heating. Always have the blower running at a low setting to ensure a constant flow of fresh air into the to the minimum -1. you should never leave the air recirculation mode switched on for longer periods.5°C (86°F) is selected the display switches to HI. as this increases the risk of an accident. . 111 A to switch air recirculation mode on or off. It is switched on if the following symbol appears in the display . 2 – Press the button page 147. If the air conditioning system is switched off.5°C (86°F). the display switches to LO. for example when passing through a tunnel or in queuing traffic. Air recirculation mode prevents strong odours in the ambient air from entering the vehicle interior. the windows can quickly mist over. air recirculation is not possible when the control for air distribution is set to the windscreen setting . Therefore. These are approximate temperatures and the actual temperature may be slightly higher or lower depending on the ambient conditions. If a temperature below 16°C (61°F) is selected. In this setting the system runs at maximum heating output and the temperature is not regulated. Switching the air conditioning system on and off Pressing the button ECON switches off the air conditioning system to save fuel. With high ambient temperatures. vehicle. no ambient air enters the vehicle interior. Pushing the button Air recirculation mode Air recirculation mode prevents fumes or unpleasant smells from entering the vehicle. the air recirculation increases the effectiveness of the air conditioning system by cooling the air inside the passenger compartment rather than the air from outside. Air distribution The air distribution is adjusted using the buttons . It is possible to select interior temperatures from +16°C (61°F) to +29. It is also WARNING In air recirculation mode. If a temperature above 29. With low outside temperatures. Blower 10 The airflow may be adjusted freely using the control A.

Do not cover these slots with articles of clothing or other objects. as smoke drawn into the air conditioning system leaves a residue on the evaporator. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data Caution Note . switch off the air conditioner with button ECON to prevent further damage and have it checked by a qualified workshop. and to prevent the windows misting over. The air conditioning should be turned on at least once a month. • The air conditioning system operates most effectively with the windows and the sliding/tilting roof* closed. the pollen filter must be replaced at the intervals specified in the Service Schedule. If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due to use in areas with very high levels of air pollution. condensation can drip off the evaporator in the cooling system and form a pool underneath the vehicle. Do not smoke while air recirculation mode is on.Heating. However. this is completely normal and there is no need to suspect a leak. an Authorised Service Centre should be consulted to check the system. the pollen filter must be changed more frequently than stated in the Service Schedule. we recommend that you take the vehicle to a qualified workshop should problems occur. • • • If you suspect that the air conditioner is damaged. producing a permanent unpleasant odour. • The air from the vents flows through the passenger compartment and is extracted by slots designed for this purpose. • If the humidity and temperature outside the vehicle are high. including dust and pollen. • Keep the air intake slots in front of the windscreen free of snow. the air inside can be cooled more quickly by opening the windows for a short period. if the sun has heated up the vehicle. • Repairs to the air conditioning system require specialist knowledge and special tools. If a decrease in the cooling capacity is detected. to lubricate the system gaskets and prevent leaks. ice and leaves to ensure heating and cooling is not impaired. Ventilation and Air conditioning 149 General notes The pollen filter The pollution filter (a combined particulate filter and activated carbon filter) serves as a barrier against impurities in the outside air. For the air conditioning system to work with maximum efficiency. Therefore.

Fig. • • To avoid accidents. 112 down – Adjust the steering wheel in this way until the correct position is set fig. 113. Risk of accident. – Push the lever under the steering column . 113 Proper sitting position for driver – Adjust the driver seat to the correct position. Fig.150 Driving Driving Steering Adjusting the steering wheel position The height and reach of the steering wheel can be freely adjusted to suit the driver. the steering column should be adjusted only when the vehicle is stationary. – Then push the lever up again firmly . 112 Adjusting the steering wheel position fig. WARNING Incorrect use of the steering column adjustment function and an incorrect seating position can result in serious injury. .

fig. If you fail to observe the minimum distance. contact an Authorised Service Centre. Both warning lamps will light up if the ESP or ABS systems are faulty. you can switch off the ESP by pressing button fig. 114 Detail of the centre console: ESP button The Electronic Stabilisation Program (ESP) contains the electronic differential lock (EDL) and the traction control system (TCS). the airbag will not protect you. • Fig. Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position.Driving 151 WARNING (continued) Safety Electronic stabilisation programme (ESP)* ESP helps make driving safer in certain situations. • • If you adjust the steering wheel so that it points towards your face. or in any other manner (e. When driving. or on the inside of the rim). In such cases. The ESP function works in conjunction with the ABS. always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. in the centre of the steering wheel. For example: • • Safety First Operating instructions when driving with snow chains. If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm. Make sure that the steering wheel points towards your chest. • Adjust the driver seat or steering wheel so that there is a distance of at least 25 cm between the steering wheel and your chest page 150. you could receive severe injuries to the arms. The Authorised Service Centre will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary. hands and head. Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . 113. In specific circumstances where you require less traction. when driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces. The ESP is started automatically when the engine is started. 114 .g. the driver airbag will not protect you properly in the event of an accident. Risk of fatal injury.

page 169. Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic situation. . Turn the ignition key to this position and let go of the key. 115 the ignition and the engine are OFF and the steering may be locked. for example. 115 Ignition key positions 0 Ignition switched off.152 Driving • when rocking the vehicle backwards and forwards to free it from mud. particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer. You should press the button to switch the ESP back on when you no longer need wheel spin. It will light up continuously if there is a malfunction in the ESP. This should be kept in mind. That is to say. It will start flashing to indicate that ESP is counteracting an unstable driving condition. Ignition lock Position of the ignition key • • • • When does the button light up or flash? It lights up when the ignition is switched on and should go out again after about 2 seconds. these systems are not available while ESP is not activated. Do not let the extra safety afforded by ESP tempt you into taking any risks when driving. 1 Switching on the ignition or glow plug system A • Please refer to the corresponding warning notes on ESP in “Intelligent technology”. turn the steering wheel until it locks with an audible sound. For the Steering lock to operate without the ignition key. This will help prevent theft of the vehicle . The TCS and EDL are also switched off if the ESP is switched off. If the key cannot be 0 12 turned or is difficult to turn from position A to position A. this can cause accidents. You should always lock the steering wheel when you leave your vehicle. WARNING The electronic stabilisation program (ESP) cannot defy the laws of physics. It will light up continuously if the ESP is switched off. steering lock A In the position fig. • • Fig. move the steering wheel (to take the load off the steering lock mechanism) until the key turns freely.

The engine can only be started using a genuine SEAT key with the correct code. – Turn the ignition key to the starting position page 152. Caution The starter motor will only work when the engine is stopped (ignition key 2 position A). the starter will then only have to turn the engine. • They could accidentally start the engine or work electrical equipment such as the windows possibly resulting in an accident. the ignition key must be turned to 0 the position A. Note The vehicle cannot be operated properly if you do not have a genuine SEAT key.Risk of accident! • Always remove the key from the ignition lock when leaving the vehicle. Electrical components with a high power consumption are switched off temporarily. even if you only intend to be gone for a short period. This can result in serious injury. The engine is started when the key is in this position. • Starting and stopping the engine Starting petrol engines The engine can only be started using a genuine SEAT key with the correct code. being used. The immobiliser will be activated again automatically as soon as you pull the key out of the ignition lock. Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates the electronic immobiliser automatically when the key is inserted into the ignition. Each time that the vehicle must be started. The steering lock could be activated immediately . WARNING • Wait for the vehicle to come to a standstill before removing the ignition key from the lock. The repetitive start prevention lock of the ignition prevents possible damage to the starter motor if the engine is already running.Driving 153 2 Starting A Electronic immobiliser The immobiliser prevents unauthorised persons from driving the vehicle. Unsupervised use of the keys could result in the engine being started or electrical systems. – Move the gear lever to the neutral position and depress the clutch pedal fully and hold it in this position. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . such as the electric windows. This is especially important if you must leave children or disabled people in the vehicle.

Risk of injury. If the engine does not start immediately. Do not press the accelerator. turn the key to position A to start the engine. the engine may be a little noisy for the first few seconds until oil pressure has built up in the hydraulic valve compensators. – Move the gear lever to the neutral position and depress the clutch pedal fully and hold it in this position. This helps the engine reach operating temperature faster and reduces emissions. – Turn the ignition key to position page 152. • • Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running. an odourless and colourless poisonous gas. This is quite normal. see page 248. This is quite normal. After starting a very hot engine. the starter motor must not be allowed to run on with the engine. When starting from cold. they could explode or cause the engine to run at high revs. – Let go of the ignition key as soon as the engine starts. If there are problems starting the engine. Risk of fatal accidents. 115 indication lamp will light for engine pre-heating. switch off the starter after about 10 seconds and try again after about half a minute. When starting from cold. Fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it. Before attempting to push-start or tow a vehicle to start it. Risk of engine damage. The vehicle should not be pushed or towed for more than approximately 50 metres to start the engine. It can also cause death. the starter motor must not be allowed to run on with the engine. the fuel pump fuse should be checked page 232. Never use “cold start sprays”. fig. and no cause for concern. driving at full throttle and over-loading the engine. the starter will then only have to turn the engine. The WARNING • Never start or run the engine in unventilated or closed rooms. Starting diesel engines The engine can only be started using a genuine SEAT key with the correct code. For the sake of the environment Do not warm up the engine by running the engine with the vehicle stationary. .154 Driving – Let go of the ignition key as soon as the engine starts. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of consciousness. • • • Caution When the engine is cold. Note and follow the instructions page 248. “Fuses”. The exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide. the engine may be a little noisy for the first few seconds until oil pressure has built up in the hydraulic valve compensators. “Jump-starting”. If the engine still does not start. you should avoid high engine speeds. You should drive off as soon as you start the engine. you may need to press the accelerator briefly. – Turn the ignition key to the starting position. 1 A. and no cause for concern. 2 – When the warning lamp goes out. you should first try to start it using the battery of another vehicle.

The steering lock can engage immediately when the key is removed from the ignition lock. 115 0 A. Start the engine as soon as the glow plug warning lamp page 81 goes out. an odourless and colourless poisonous gas. Fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it. Switching off the engine – Stopping the engine. • Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . It is also possible that it will turn itself on once more if the temperature of the coolant increases due to the elimination of built-up heat in the engine compartment or if this is heated due to prolonged exposure to the heat of the sun. do not use any other major electrical equipment while the glow plugs are pre-heating.Driving 155 Glow plug system for the diesel engine To avoid unnecessary load on the battery. you should first try to start it using the battery of another vehicle. For the sake of the environment Do not warm up the engine by running the engine with the vehicle stationary. You should drive off as soon as you start the engine. driving at full throttle and over-loading the engine. it may take longer than normal (up to one minute) to start the engine after refuelling with diesel fuel. “Jump-starting”. Risk of fatal accidents. Before attempting to push-start or tow a vehicle to start it. even if the ignition is switched off. This is because the system must eliminate air first. It can also cause death. Risk of injury. This helps the engine reach operating temperature faster and reduces emissions. After the engine is switched off the radiator fan may run on for up to 10 minutes. The vehicle cannot be steered. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of consciousness. • • Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running. you should avoid high engine speeds. As you cannot brake in the normal manner. • • • Caution • • Never switch off the engine until the vehicle is stationary. WARNING Never start or run the engine in unventilated or closed rooms. Risk of accident. they could explode or cause the engine to run at high revs. Starting the engine after the fuel tank has been completely run dry If the fuel tank has been completely run dry. • – Turn the ignition key to position page 152. WARNING When the engine is cold. Risk of engine damage. Never use “cold start sprays”. The brake servo works only when the engine is running. The vehicle should not be pushed or towed for more than approximately 50 metres to start the engine. there is a greater risk of accidents and serious injury. You will need more strength to brake the vehicle when the engine is switched off. The exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide. fig. Note and follow the instructions page 248.

the engine could overheat when it is switched off. 116 Detail of the centre console: Shift diagram of a 5-speed manual gearbox . Manual gearbox Driving a car with a manual gearbox Fig. When the engine is running. Fig. before engaging this gear wait about 6 seconds with the clutch pressed in fully in order to protect the gearbox. The reverse gear can only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary. – Slide the gearlever to the left. you should idle the engine for approx. 2 minutes before you switch it off. and then into the reverse position shown on the gear lever. Risk of engine damage. For this reason. 117 Detail of the centre console: Shift diagram of a 6-speed manual gearbox Selecting the reverse gear – The vehicle should be stationary with the engine idling. The reversing lights come on when the reverse gear is selected and the ignition is on. – Place the gear lever into neutral gate and push the lever all the way down.156 Driving Caution If the engine has been driven hard for a long period. Press the clutch right down.

This causes premature wear and damage to the clutch.Tiptronic driving position (this program is similar to the operation of a manual gearbox). This position is similar to the neutral position for manual gearboxes). Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . the vehicle will start to move as soon as a gear is engaged and the clutch released. D Drive position (economic driving program). • When changing gear. you should always depress the clutch fully to avoid unnecessary wear and damage. +/.Driving 157 WARNING When the engine is running. Reverse position. The pressure of your hand could cause premature wear on the selector forks in the gearbox. • Do not hold the car “on the clutch” on hills. Note Fig. S Sports driving position. Neutral position (lever locked). Risk of accident. • Do not rest your hand on the gear lever when driving. 118 Section of centre console: selector lever on cars with an automatic gearbox / direct shift gearbox Selector lever positions indicated on the cover P R N Parking position (lever locked). • Automatic gearbox* / DSG automatic gearbox* Selector lever positions • Never select the reverse gear when the vehicle is in motion.

If you select the sport programme. Selecting the sport programme – Move the lever to position S.158 Driving Driving programmes The automatic gearbox / direct shift gearbox (DSG) has three programmes. 120 Deactivating the lock Releasing the selector lever lock – Start the vehicle. Selector lever locking The selector lever lock prevents gears from being engaged inadvertently. . the programme is designed for a sports mode. Selecting manual programme (tiptronic) This programme allows the vehicle to be driven as if with a manual gearbox. that is. the full power of the engine. This programme may be accessed using the selector lever or from the steering wheel controls when this option it is fitted page 161. S. This position is shared by all programmes for reversing. Fig. This programme is not recommended for use on the motorway or in the city. – Put the selector lever into position D to drive forwards – Put the selector lever into position R to reverse. a programme which changes up at higher engine speeds to use Fig. 119 programme selection Selecting the economic programme – This programme selects a higher gear earlier rather than remain in a lower gear. which would cause the vehicle to move.

– Release the brake and accelerate. The selector lever does not need to be put into the positions P or N for this. a light jerk will be felt. the lever is prevented from passing from P and N to any other gear without first pressing the brake pedal. the lock is automatically released in position N. fig. from R to D) the lever will not lock. Driving – Press and hold the foot brake. Short stop Driving with an automatic gearbox* / DSG automatic gearbox* The drive and reverse gears are automatically engaged. – Release the button and wait a few seconds for the gear to engage. The selector lever must be put in the position P in order to remove the key.Driving 159 – Press and hold the brake pedal. – Apply the handbrake firmly.g. – Hold the vehicle stationary with the brake pressed down (for example at traffic lights). – Press on the button on the selector lever knob (on the left. For rapid changes of position (e. D or S). – Select a gear for driving (R. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . at the same time press the button on the selector lever. move the lever to the position P and release the button. With the automatic lock. At higher speeds. 121. Fig. The lock is only activated when the vehicle is stopped or at a speed of less than 5 km/h. 121 Driving – Press the gear lever towards (-) to select a lower gear. – Press in the button on the selector lever knob. Parking the vehicle – Press the foot brake and hold to bring the vehicle to a stop. Driving slowly – Move the selector lever to the position D and press to the right to put the lever into Tiptronic mode. – Do not press the accelerator. If the lever remains in the position N more than one second then it is locked.

apply the handbrake and move the selector lever to position P. the gearbox changes to the next highest gear. even for short periods. • Never allow the vehicle to coast down a gradient with the selector lever in positions N or D. • The footbrake must not be held for a long period of time. WARNING The driver should never leave the vehicle while the engine is running or with any gear selected. • When the engine is running and the positions D. Descending gradients – With the gear engaged. • Before descending a steep gradient. So that the engine speed does not become excessive. not even lightly. Depress the brake pedal and move the selector lever to the Tiptronic gate to return to 3rd gear. For example. Apply the handbrake or depress the foot brake to hold the vehicle in position. even when the engine is not running.160 Driving Hill stop – Hold the vehicle. If for any reason you must leave the vehicle with the engine running. For descents. S or R are selected. release the brake and accelerate. • Caution Never use the automatic gearbox to hold the vehicle stationary on a hill. – Do not try to slow the vehicle using another forward gear (engine braking). • Never accelerate while changing the position of the selector lever (risk of an accident). using the foot brake to prevent rolling back. always hold the vehicle using the footbrake to avoid rolling back. it is necessary to hold the vehicle with the foot brake because the vehicle will creep at a low speed. as this may overheat the gearbox and cause damage. WARNING (continued) • If you must stop on a hill. if 3rd gear is used on a very steep gradient. The steeper the gradient the lower the gear must be for effective engine braking. the engine braking is insufficient and vehicle accelerates. . • • If the vehicle is allowed to roll with the engine stopped but the selector in position N then the gearbox may be damaged because it will not be lubricated. in all cases. reduce speed and use the Tiptronic programme to select a lower gear. the use of the Tiptronic programme is recommended to keep the speed reduced. • The selector lever must never be moved into the positions R or P while moving (risk of an accident). continuous braking will cause overheating of the brakes and a reduction or even a loss of braking power and a significant increase in braking distances.

Fig. the automatic gearbox / direct shift gearbox does not change down until the point is reached where the engine could no longer overrev. Fig. If a lower gear is selected. 122 Changing gear with Tiptronic The manual programme can be selected with the levers on the steering wheel irrespective of the driving mode which has been preselected.Driving 161 Using the Tiptronic gear system The Tiptronic system allows the driver to manually select gears General points about the Tiptronic gear system Changing gear with the selector lever – Put the lever in the position D and press towards the right to enter the Tiptronic gate fig. 122. Changing gear using the steering wheel levers – Press the right lever (+) towards the steering wheel to change up fig. 123. – Press the left lever (-) towards the steering wheel to change down fig. 123 Steering wheel with levers for the automatic gearbox Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . If the “tiptronic” is selected whilst the vehicle is in motion and the automatic gearbox / direct shift gearbox is in the 3rd gear in selector lever position D. – Press the gear lever forwards (+) to select a higher gear. the “tiptronic” will then also be in the 3rd gear. the automatic/DSG gearbox automatically shifts up to the next gear shortly before the maximum permitted engine speed is reached. General points about the Tiptronic gear system When accelerating. 123. – Press the gear lever back (-) to select a lower gear.

. the following message* will appear in the instrument display: HANDBRAKE ON. this prevents you driving with the handbrake applied . 124 and guide the handbrake lever down fully . The warning lamp goes out when the handbrake is released.162 Driving • Note Applying the handbrake – Pull the handbrake lever up firmly Releasing the handbrake – Pull the lever up slightly and press the locking knob in the direction of the arrow fig. Always apply the handbrake firmly. WARNING Never use the handbrake to slow down the vehicle when it is in motion. which can impair the function of the brake system and could lead to an accident. The steering wheel controls may be used in all selector lever positions while driving. This also causes premature wear on the rear brake pads/linings. as braking is only applied to the rear wheels. Caution Always apply the handbrake before you leave the vehicle. 124 Handbrake between the front seats Always apply the handbrake when you leave your vehicle and when you park. The first gear should also be selected. fig. Also. lights up when the handbrake is applied The handbrake warning lamp and the ignition switched on. The braking distance is considerably longer. If you drive faster than 6 km/h with the handbrake on. Risk of accident! If it is only partially released this will cause overheating of the rear brakes. 124. Handbrake Using the handbrake The handbrake should be applied firmly to prevent the vehicle from accidentally rolling away. • • Fig. an audible warning is given.

Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. In the event of an emergency. turn the front wheels so that they point away from the kerb. it may become extremely hot or cold inside the vehicle. Always note the following points when parking the vehicle: – Use the foot brake to stop the vehicle. WARNING Take measures to reduce the risk of injury when you leave your vehicle unattended. – Always take you car keys with you when you leave the vehicle .8 m centre of the rear bumper: 1. by releasing the handbrake or the gear lever / selector lever. – Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition lock.Driving 163 Parking The handbrake should always be firmly applied when the vehicle is parked. spilt fuel etc.3 m Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . The measuring range of the sensors starts at approximately and depending on the nature of the obstacle at a distance of: • • • If the vehicle is facing uphill. • • • side of the rear bumper: 0. Depending on weather conditions. Additional notes on parking the vehicle on gradients: Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle would roll against the kerb if it did start to roll. and could become trapped in the vehicle in an emergency. Secure the vehicle as normal by applying the handbrake firmly and selecting first gear. for example. Description The acoustic parking aid system will measure the distance between the rear of the vehicle and any possible obstacle using four ultrasonic sensors located on the rear bumper. locked doors will delay assistance to occupants. Never allow vehicle occupants to remain in the vehicle when it is locked. – Apply the handbrake. turn the front wheels so that they point towards the kerb. If the vehicle is facing downhill. They could set the vehicle in motion. • • Acoustic parking aid system* Rear parking aid The parking aid system will use an acoustic signal to warn of the approach of any object towards the rear of the vehicle. Turn the steering wheel slightly to engage the steering lock. They would be unable to open the vehicle from the inside. WARNING (continued) • • Never park where the hot exhaust system could ignite inflammable materials. such as dry grass. This can be fatal. – The first gear should also be selected. low bushes.

A brief acoustic signal confirms the activation and correct function of the system. • Obstacles with uniform edges and bumps may not be detected immediately by the system due to their geometry. so the system will not give any further warning. when not driving with a trailer. these can cause damage to the vehicle. Reversing The distance warning will begin as soon as an obstacle is detected by the system. To avoid system malfunctions. tyres. • Please note that low obstacles detected by the system may no longer be registered by the sensors as the car moves closer. The frequency of the bleeps emitted by the system will increase rapidly as the vehicle approaches the obstacle. the system ready indication will not sound either. the sensors should be sprayed for only a very short period and from a distance of more than 10 cm. the sensors must be kept clean and free of ice and snow. as the trailer's electric connecter will be plugged into the vehicle. so there is a risk of damaging the vehicle in such cases. remove the trailer hitch. the parking aid system will not be activated by the engagement of the reverse gear when pulling a trailer. The driver must take full responsibility for parking and other manoeuvres.. If there is no ready signal or no acoustic warning signal then the parking aid loudspeaker is faulty and may not warn of obstacles. When cleaning with high pressure washers or steam cleaners. construction machinery. Survey the approach of the wall to the side of the vehicle (using the mirrors) Caution • • • • The parking aid system does not replace use of the mirrors for manoeuvres. WARNING Always look out for small children and animals because the system will not always detect them. etc. a continuous signal sounds (stop signal). Within a short distance of about 25 cm. . Be especially careful when manoeuvring into a corner between two perpendicular walls. • The parking aid is not a replacement for driver awareness. the acoustic signal warning of the fault will not be emitted every time the system is reactivated (by engaging the reverse gear).164 Driving Activation The system is activated by engagement of the reverse gear.. Trailer towing For vehicles fitted with a tow bar by the manufacturer. To ensure that the system works properly. other vehicles with PDC) may interfere with the operation of the system. Certain kinds of obstacles (such as wire fences. The driver should not reverse any further. Thus. Distant ultra-sonic sources (hammers. If the fault continues until the ignition is turned off. Have the fault repaired by an Authorised Service Centre as soon as possible. this indicates that there is a fault in the parking aid system. Periodic cleaning of the sensors. Possible faults If a continuous bleep sounds for some seconds when the reverse gear is engaged. thin posts or trailer draw bars. high kerbs or painted railings etc) may not always be detected by the system. Always pay attention when reversing to avoid accidents. rectangular objects. Take special care around this type of obstacle such as corners. chains. take care not to damage or scratch them. • • The sensors have blind spots in which obstacles may not be detected.

traffic or weather conditions. 125 A to the left to ON. Switching the cruise control system on and off WARNING It could be dangerous to use the cruise control system if it is not possible to drive at constant speed.18) When the speed regulator (CCS) is turned off the indicator is turned off. The vehicle will accelerate under its own weight. snow). Switching off the system B – Either push the switch A to the right to OFF or turn the ignition off when the vehicle is stationary. Risk of accident. When the speed regulation is on and a speed is programmed. aquaplaning. Use the foot brake to slow the vehicle.* 18) Depending on model version. loose chippings.Driving 165 Cruise control system (CCS)* Description The cruise control system is able to maintain the set speed in the range from approx. 30 km/h to 180 km/h. • • It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the current road. you may take your foot off the accelerator. the indicator on the instrument panel is lit. slippery surfaces. Note The cruise control cannot maintain a constant speed when descending gradients. 125 Turn signal and main beam lever: Switch and rocker switch for CCS • For safety reasons the cruise control system should not be used in dense traffic. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . the speed regulator is completely deactivated if the 1st gear is engaged. Fig. Switching on the system – Push the switch B fig. Risk of accident. This will prevent you using it by mistake.g. in sections with bends or where roads conditions are poor (e. Always switch off the CCS when you have finished using it. Once the speed setting has been saved.

127 A to increase the speed. Setting a lower speed A – Press the lower part SET– of the rocker switch A to reduce the speed. the new speed is stored. The vehicle will continue to accelerate for as long as you keep the rocker switch pressed. Setting a higher speed A – Press the upper part RES+ of the rocker switch fig. When you release the switch. the current speed is set and held constant. Fig. When you release the switch. Fig.166 Driving Setting speed* Adjusting set speed* The speed can be altered without touching the accelerator or the brake. The vehicle will automatically reduce its speed for as long as you keep the switch pressed. 126 Turn signal and main beam lever: switch and rocker switch for CCS A – Press the lower part SET of the rocker switch fig. the new speed is stored. 126 A once briefly. when you have reached the speed you wish to set. 127 Turn signal and main beam lever: switch and rocker switch for CCS When you release the rocker switch. .

The speed will have to be stored again. Risk of accident. This will not be the case. To resume the cruise control. Risk of accident. WARNING It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the current road. B when the lever A is moved in the direction of OFF without fully being inserted. if the vehicle is accelerated to over 180 km/h. if the vehicle speed is more than 10 km/h higher than the stored speed for longer than 5 minutes. however. 127 A. 128 A.Driving 167 When you increase speed with the accelerator and then release the pedal. traffic or weather conditions. traffic or weather conditions. fig. Control of the set speed is switched off if you reduce speed by depressing the brake pedal. WARNING It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the current road. You can reactivate the control by pressing once on the upper part A of the rocker switch RES+ page 166. Switching off the system temporarily* Turning off the cruise control system* Fig. • • • if the clutch pedal is depressed. release the brake or clutch pedal or reduce the vehicle speed to less than 180 km/h and press once on the upper part of the A rocker switch RES fig. 129 Turn signal and main beam lever: switch and rocker switch for CCS The cruise control system will be switched off in the following situations: • Safety First if the brake pedal is depressed. 128 Turn signal and main beam lever: switch and rocker switch for CCS Fig. Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . the system will automatically restore the set speed.

or when the vehicle is stationary. .168 Driving Vehicles with a manual gearbox A The system is completely turned off by moving the control A all the way to the right hand side (OFF engaged). N. Vehicles with automatic gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox To completely turn off the cruise control system. engage the gear selection lever into one of the following positions: P. R or 1 or stop the vehicle and turn the ignition off. ignition off.

The brake assist system intervenes here. or if the vehicle has to be towed. It then very quickly builds up the full brake pressure so that the ABS can be activated more quickly and efficiently. Do not let the extra safety features tempt you into taking any risks when driving. The brake assist system switches off automatically as soon as you release the brake. thus reducing the braking distance. The braking distance is increased considerably as the brake servo does not function. if you press the brake pedal very quickly. for example if the vehicle is being towed. you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder to make up for the lack of servo assistance. most drivers brake in time. you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder than normal. The risk of accident is higher if you drive too fast. • • • Brake assist system (BAS)* In an emergency. if you do not keep your distance from the vehicle in front. The brake assist system cannot defy the laws of physics. If the brake servo is not functioning. If the brake servo is not functioning due to a malfunction.Intelligent technology 169 Tips and Maintenance Intelligent technology Brakes Brake servo The brake servo amplifies the pressure you apply to the brake pedal. and when the road surface is slippery or wet. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . This results in unnecessarily long braking distances. Slippery and wet roads are dangerous even with the brake assist system! Therefore. Never let the vehicle coast with the engine switched off. it is essential that you adjust your speed to suit the road and traffic conditions. The increased accident risk cannot be reduced by the brake assist system. but not with maximum force. the brake assist system registers an emergency situation. Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal. It works only when the engine is running. WARNING • WARNING The braking distance can also be affected by external factors. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

WARNING (continued) • The effectiveness of ABS is also determined by the tyres fitted page 214. If a malfunction should occur in the ABS.170 Intelligent technology Anti-lock brake system and traction control M-ABS (ABS and TCS) Anti-lock brake system (ABS) The anti-lock brake system prevents the wheels locking during braking. should it be disconnected for example WARNING The anti-lock brake system cannot defy the laws of physics. Slippery and wet roads are dangerous even with ABS! If you notice that the ABS is working (to counteract locked wheels under braking). the system will reduce the braking pressure for this wheel. you should reduce speed immediately to suit the road and traffic conditions. When the TCS is off. However. Only in exceptional circumstances.” . the warning lamp is lit. accelerate and climb a gradient in slippery conditions where this may otherwise be difficult or even impossible. it may be turned on or off pushing the button on the centre console. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) is an important part of the vehicle's active safety system. Description and operation of the traction control system during acceleration (TCS) TCS reduces engine power to help prevent the drive wheels of front-wheel drive vehicles losing traction during acceleration. If necessary. The TCS should normally be left switched on at all times. When using the snow chains. The braking distance could even be longer if you brake on gravel or on fresh snow covering a slippery surface. This is a deliberate warning to the driver that one or more of the wheels is tending to lock and the ABS control function has intervened. The system works in the entire speed range in conjunction with ABS. The TCS is switched on automatically when the engine is started. the best possible control is retained as the wheels do not lock. when slipping of the wheels is required. Do not let the extra safety features tempt you into taking any risks when driving. The driver is made aware of this control process by a pulsating of the brake pedal and audible noise. Traction control system (TCS) The traction control system prevents the drive wheels from spinning when the car is accelerating. the effectiveness of the ABS could be severely limited. When driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces When the vehicle is bogged-down. ABS will not necessarily guarantee shorter braking distances in all conditions. How the ABS works If one of the wheels turns too slowly in relation to the road speed. If you brake hard on a slippery road surface. TCS helps the vehicle to start moving. Do not “pump”. In this situation it is important to keep the brake pedal fully depressed so the ABS can regulate the brake application. and is close to locking. • • • • • With compact temporary spare wheel. • If the running gear or brakes are modified. to free it by “rocking. the TCS will also be out of action.

this can cause accidents. The electronic stabilisation program helps to reduce the danger of skidding. The electronic stabilisation programme (ESP) consists of ABS. Note To disconnect using the ESP button page 151. EDL. Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic situation. The forces acting on the braked wheel bring the vehicle back to a stable condition.g. if the car is starting to skid). and constantly compares them with the actual behaviour of the vehicle. • Modifications to the vehicle (e. • • Caution The system uses the steering wheel angle and road speed to calculate the changes of direction desired by the driver. WARNING • • It must be remembered that ESP cannot defy the laws of physics. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can cause the system to reduce engine power when this is not desired. running gear or any components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the efficiency of the ABS.g. EDL and TCS. • Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic situation.Intelligent technology 171 The TCS should be switched on again afterwards as soon as possible. If the desired course is not being maintained (for instance. WARNING • It must be remembered that TCS cannot defy the laws of physics. the brake system. then the ESP compensates automatically by braking the appropriate wheel. If the vehicle tends to oversteer. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can cause the system to reduce engine power when this is not desired. the brake system. Electronic stabilisation program (ESP)* General notes The electronic stabilisation program increases the vehicle's stability on the road. Caution Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . In order to ensure that TCS function correctly. particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer. ESP and TCS. Electronic Stabilising Program (ESP)* ESP reduces the danger of skidding by braking the wheels individually. Do not let the extra safety afforded by ESP tempt you into taking any risks when driving. Modifications to the vehicle (e. particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer. the system will act on the front wheel on the outside of the turn. • In order to ensure that ESP functions correctly. This should be kept in mind. This should be kept in mind. running gear or any components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the efficiency of the ABS and TCS. to the engine. to the engine. Do not let the extra safety afforded by TCS tempt you into taking any risks when driving. all four wheels must be fitted with the same tyres. this can cause accidents. all four wheels must be fitted with the same tyres.

this can cause accidents. the brake system. Do not let the extra safety afforded by EDL tempt you into taking any risks when driving. Caution Modifications to the vehicle (e. The traction control system (TCS) The traction control system prevents the drive wheels from spinning when the car is accelerating page 170. to the engine. The system will control the revolutions of the drive wheels using the ABS sensors (in case of an EDL fault the warning lamp for ABS lights up) page 78. it is able to balance out differences in the speed of the driven wheels of approximately 100 rpm caused by a slippery road surface on one side of the vehicle. WARNING • When accelerating on a slippery surface. Despite EDL. To prevent the disc brake of the braked wheel from overheating. Electronic differential lock (EDL)* The electronic differential lock helps prevent the loss of traction caused if one of the driven wheels starts spinning. The vehicle will continue to function normally without EDL. the driver is not informed that the EDL has been switched off. g. . It does this by braking the wheel which has lost traction and distributing more driving force to the other driven wheel via the differential. the EDL cuts out automatically if subjected to excessive loads. At speeds of up to approximately 80 km/h. EDL helps the vehicle to start moving. for example on ice and snow. WARNING (continued) • Always adapt your driving style to suit road conditions and the traffic situation. This could impair the vehicle's stability. For this reason. press the accelerator carefully. running gear or any components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the operation of the EDL page 191. accelerate and climb a gradient in slippery conditions where this may otherwise be difficult or even impossible.172 Intelligent technology Anti-lock brake system (ABS) The anti-lock brake system prevents the wheels locking during braking page 170. the driven wheels may start to spin. The EDL will switch on again automatically when the brake has cooled down.

WARNING • • New tyres do not give maximum grip to start with. During its first few hours of running. If you need to make an emergency stop. The rate of wear of the brake pads depends to a great extent on the conditions under which the vehicle is operated and the way the vehicle is driven.Driving and the environment 173 Driving and the environment Running-in Running-in a new engine The engine needs to be run-in over the first 1. New brake pads should be run-in carefully for the first 200 km.000 kilometres – Do not drive faster than three quarters of top speed.500 km. Braking effect and braking distance The braking effect and braking distance are influenced by driving situations and road conditions. New brake pads must be “run-in” and do not have the correct friction properties during the first 200 km. drive short distances or have a sporty driving style. During the first 200 km. If you often drive in town traffic. From 1000 to 1500 km – Speeds can be gradually increased to the maximum road speed or maximum permissible engine speed (rpm). you can compensate for the reduced braking effect by applying more pressure to the brake pedal. This may cause an accident. the braking distance will be longer with new brake pads than with brake pads that have been run-in. The efficiency of the brakes depends directly on the brake pad wear. the reduced braking capacity may be compensated by pressing on the brake pedal a little harder. the internal friction in the engine is greater than later on when all the moving parts have bedded in. we recommend that you have the thickness of your brake pads checked by an For the sake of the environment If the engine is run-in gently. Drive particularly carefully in the first 500 km. Up to 1. However. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . and require runningin. the life of the engine will be increased and its oil consumption reduced. – Avoid high engine revolutions. – Do not tow a trailer. Running-in tyres and brake pads New tyres should be run-in carefully for the first 500 km. – Do not accelerate hard.

This also applies when new brake pads are fitted. In general. it is advisable to reduce speed and change to a lower gear (or move the selector lever to a lower gear if your vehicle has automatic transmission). Continuous braking will cause the brakes to overheat and will increase the braking distance.174 Driving and the environment Authorised Service Centre more frequently than recommended in the Service Schedule. Heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake fluid is left in the system for too long. However. WARNING (continued) • Non-standard or damaged front spoilers could restrict the airflow to the brakes and cause them to overheat. do not replenish with too much engine oil page 204. This prevents the brakes developing their full braking effect. braking power may set in later than normal. or if you are driving on roads which have been gritted with salt. for example after driving through water. the braking distance will be increased considerably. – Never tow the vehicle to start it. The brake fluid must be changed every two years at the latest. unburnt fuel can enter the exhaust system and escape into the environment. or possibly frozen (in winter): the brakes must be “dried” through careful braking. This makes use of engine braking and relieves the brakes. Observe the relevant instructions before purchasing accessories page 191. • Never let the vehicle coast with the engine switched off. Exhaust gases purification system Catalytic converter* To conserve the useful life of the catalytic converter – Always use unleaded petrol. the reduced braking capacity may be compensated by pressing on the brake pedal a little harder. On steep descents if the brakes are excessively used they will overheat. This impairs the braking effect. • New brake pads must be run-in and do not have the correct friction during the first 200 km. Before driving down a long steep gradient. Contact a qualified workshop immediately and avoid unnecessary journeys. use jump leads if necessary page 248. “Topping up engine oil ”. . – Do not run the fuel tank dry. • Very heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake fluid is left in the system for too long. • If brakes are wet or frozen. The braking distance is increased considerably as the brake servo does not function. reduce speed immediately and have the vehicle inspected at the nearest qualified workshop. Apply and then release the brakes alternately. • If a brake circuit fails. If you drive with wet brakes. – For engine oil changes. WARNING Longer braking distances and faults in the brake system increase the risk of accidents. “Modifications”. The catalytic converter can also be damaged by overheating. the exhaust warning lamp will light up when any of the described symptoms occur page 72. If you notice misfiring. after heavy rainfall or after washing the car. uneven running or loss of power when the vehicle is moving. If this happens. the braking effect will be reduced as the brake discs will be wet. • • Never let the brakes “rub” by applying light pressure.

Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . • Diesel engine particulate filter* The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates soot produced by burning diesel. Failure to comply could result in fire.Driving and the environment 175 WARNING The catalytic converter reaches very high temperatures! Fire hazard! Never park where the catalytic converter could come into contact with dry grass or inflammable materials under the vehicle. SEAT importers and distributors will gladly provide information about the technical preparation of your vehicle in addition to necessary maintenance and repair possibilities. In order to facilitate this process. given that the fuel system may be damaged. Vehicles equipped with a diesel engine particulate filter must not be refuelled using biodiesel (RME). Do not apply additional underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes. Caution Caution Never fully drain the fuel tank. The diesel engine dust filter eliminates most of the soot from the exhaust gas system. If the vehicle is only used for short trips then the soot will build up in the particulate filter. Quite often the problem can be remedied by changing to another brand of fuel. For the sake of the environment Even when the emission control system is working perfectly. This depends on the sulphur content of the fuel used. occasional journeys at speeds of • In some countries it is possible that a vehicle model is sold under conditions where some spare parts are not available or that the Authorised Service Centres may only carry out limited repairs. more than 60 kmh should be made. • • WARNING • The diesel engine particulate filter may reach extremely high temperatures. See the chapter “Refuelling”. which could cause overheating and damage the catalytic converter. The soot particulates accumulate in the filter where they are regularly burned. the irregularity of the fuel supply may cause ignition problems. in this case. Automobile organisations will have information about service station networks selling unleaded fuel. This allows unburnt fuel to enter the exhaust system. catalytic converter or the heat shields on the exhaust system. there may be a smell of sulphur from the exhaust under some conditions. These materials could catch fire when the vehicle is driven. the following must be taken into consideration: For vehicles fitted with a catalytic converter ensure that unleaded petrol is available for the journey. it should not enter into contact with flammable materials underneath the vehicle. Driving abroad Notes For driving abroad.

176

Driving and the environment

Adhesive strips for headlights
If you have to drive a right-hand drive vehicle in a left-hand drive country, or vice versa, the asymmetric dipped beam headlights will dazzle oncoming traffic. To prevent dazzling, you must apply stickers to certain parts of the headlight lenses. Further information is available from your Authorised Service Centre. The rotary system should first be disconnected in vehicles fitted with selfadjusting headlights. Contact a specialist workshop.

Covering simple headlights for driving on the left

Fig. 131 Left headlight

On the right-hand side headlight, if you are changing from driving on the right-hand side to the left-hand side fig. 130. On the left-hand side headlight, if you are changing from driving on the righthand side to the left-hand side fig. 131.

Fig. 130 Right headlight

Driving and the environment

177

Covering simple headlights for driving on the right

On the left headlight, if you are changing from driving on the left-hand side to the right-hand side.

Covering bi-xenon headlights for driving on the left

Fig. 132 Right headlight

Fig. 134 Right headlight

Fig. 133 Left headlight

On the right headlight, if you are changing from driving on the left-hand side to the right-hand side.
Fig. 135 Left headlight

Safety First

Operating instructions

Tips and Maintenance

Technical Data

178

Driving and the environment

On the right-hand side headlight, if you are changing from driving on the right-hand side to the left-hand side page 177, fig. 134. On the left-hand side headlight, if you are changing from driving on the righthand side to the left-hand side page 177, fig. 135.

Covering bi-xenon headlights for driving on the right

Fig. 137 Left headlight

On the right headlight, if you are changing from driving on the left-hand side to the right-hand side. On the left headlight, if you are changing from driving on the left-hand side to the right-hand side.

Fig. 136 Right headlight

Trailer towing
What do you need to bear in mind when towing a trailer?
Your vehicle may be used to tow a trailer when fitted with the correct equipment. If the car is supplied with a factory-fitted towing bracket it will already have the necessary technical modifications and meet the statutory requirements for towing a trailer. For the after-market fitting of a trailer towing bracket see page 193.

Driving and the environment

179

Connectors Your vehicle is fitted with a 12-pin connector for the electrical connection between the trailer and the vehicle. If the trailer has a 7-pin plug you will need to use an adapter cable. This is available from any SEAT dealer. Trailer weight / draw bar loading Never exceed the authorised towing limit. If you do not load the trailer up to the maximum permitted trailer weight, you can then climb correspondingly steeper gradients. The maximum trailer weights listed are only applicable for altitudes up to 1,000 m above sea level. With increasing altitude the engine power and therefore the vehicle's climbing ability are impaired because of the reduced air density. The maximum trailer weight has to be reduced accordingly. The weight of the vehicle and trailer combination must be reduced by 10% for every further 1,000 m (or part thereof). The gross combination weight is the actual weight of the laden vehicle plus the actual weight of the laden trailer. Where possible, operate the trailer with the maximum permitted draw bar weight on the ball joint of the towing bracket, but do not exceed the specified limit. The figures for trailer weights and draw bar weights that are given on the data plate of the towing bracket are for certification purposes only. The correct figures for your specific model, which may be lower than these figures for the towing bracket, are given in the registration documents Section “Technical data”. Distributing the load Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy objects are as near to the axle as possible. Loads carried in the trailer must be secured to prevent them moving.

Tyre pressure Set tyre pressure to the maximum permissible pressure shown on the sticker on the inside of the fuel tank flap. Set the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in accordance with the trailer manufacturer's recommendations. Exterior mirrors Check whether you can see enough of the road behind the trailer with the standard mirrors. If this is not the case you should have additional mirrors fitted. Both exterior mirrors should be mounted on hinged extension brackets. Adjust the mirrors to give sufficient vision to the rear.

WARNING
Never transport people in a trailer. This could result in fatal accidents.

• •

Note

Towing a trailer places additional demands on the vehicle. We recommend additional services between the normal inspection intervals if the vehicle is used frequently for towing a trailer.

Find out whether special regulations apply to towing a trailer in your country.

Ball coupling of towing bracket*

Depending on the model version, the ball coupling for the towing bracket may be found in the tool box. The ball coupling is provided with instructions on fitting and removing the ball coupling of the towing bracket.

Safety First

Operating instructions

Tips and Maintenance

Technical Data

180

Driving and the environment

Heating

WARNING
The towing bracket ball coupling must be stored securely in the luggage compartment to prevent them being flung through the vehicle and causing injury.

At very high temperatures and during prolonged ascents, driving in a low gear and high engine speed, always monitor the temperature indicator for the coolant page 55. Electronic Stabilisation Program* Do not switch off the ESP* when towing a trailer. The ESP* makes it easier to stabilise if the trailer starts to snake.

Note

By law, the ball coupling must be removed if a trailer is not being towed and it obscures the number plate.

Driving tips Driving with a trailer always requires extra care.
Weight distribution The weight distribution of a loaded trailer with an unladen vehicle is very unfavourable. However, if this cannot be avoided, drive extra slowly to allow for the unbalanced weight distribution. Speed The stability of the vehicle and trailer is reduced with increasing speed. For this reason it is advisable not to drive at the maximum permissible speed in unfavourable road, weather or wind conditions. This applies especially when driving downhill. You should always reduce speed immediately if the trailer shows the slightest sign of snaking. Never try to stop the “snaking” by increasing speed. Always brake in good time. If the trailer has an overrun brake, apply the brakes gently at first and then firmly. This will prevent the jerking that can be caused by the trailer wheels locking. Select a low gear in good time before going down a steep descent. This enables you to use the engine braking to slow down the vehicle.

Driving economically and with respect for the environment
General notes Fuel consumption depends largely on your personal driving style.
Fuel economy, environmental impact and wear on the engine, brakes and tyres depend largely on three factors:

• • •

Personal driving style Conditions of use (weather, road surface) Technical requirements

By adopting an economical driving style and anticipating the traffic situation ahead, you can easily reduce fuel consumption by 10-15%. This section suggests methods of lessening the impact on the environment and reducing your operating costs at the same time.

Depending on your personal driving style. The ambient temperature has a decisive influence. oil consumption can be up to 1 litre per 1. Directly after a cold start. you will need to brake less and thus accelerate less. A badly serviced engine can consume up to 10% more fuel than necessary. when fuel consumption will return to a normal level. The engine and catalytic converter need to reach their proper working temperature in order to minimise fuel consumption and emissions. The illustration shows the different rates of fuel consumption for the same distance at both +20°C and -10°C. Fig. for instance when you can see that the next traffic lights are red. Your vehicle will use more fuel in winter than in summer. let the vehicle roll slowly to a stop. Wherever possible. 138 Fuel consumption in litres per 100 km at two different ambient temperatures Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . If you think ahead when driving. This figure then drops to 20-30 litres per 100 km after about one kilometre. Avoid short journeys Regular servicing By taking your car to an Authorised Service Centre for regular servicing you can establish a basis for good fuel economy before you start driving. Check the oil level every time you fill the tank page 203. The engine only reaches its working temperature after about four kilometres.Driving and the environment 181 Think ahead when driving A vehicle uses most fuel when accelerating. You should therefore avoid short journeys. Oil consumption depends to a great extent on the engine load and engine speed. the engine uses about 50-70 litres of fuel per 100 km. A wellserviced engine gives you the benefit of improved fuel efficiency as well as maximum reliability and an enhanced resale value.000 km.

Regular care Regular and expert care helps to maintain the value of the vehicle. turpentine. road dirt. These are toxic and highly flammable. Caution Never attempt to remove dirt. For the sake of the environment WARNING • Car care products can be toxic. the more damage they do to the paintwork. or carry out any maintenance. Never use a dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes. Keep out of children's reach. Soak dirt. WARNING (continued) your vehicle. bird droppings. The best way to protect the car against environmental contaminants is to wash and wax it frequently. tar. soot or road salt and other aggressive materials remain on the vehicle.182 Cleaning and caring for your vehicle Cleaning and caring for your vehicle General notes Regular washing and care help maintain the value of your vehicle. Car care products Car care products are available from your Authorised Service Centre. • Never use fuel. After the period when salt is put on the roads it is important to have the underside of the vehicle washed thoroughly. mud or dust with plenty of water. mud or dust if the surface of the vehicle is dry. This may also be one of the requirements for acknowledging warranty claims in the event of corrosion or paint defects. Observe the disposal information on the package. There is a fire / explosion risk. switch off the engine. • Left over car care products should not be disposed of with ordinary household waste. engine oil. The longer substances such as insects. High temperatures (for instance in strong sunlight) further intensify the corrosive effect. This could damage the paintwork or glass on your vehicle. try to select ones which are not harmful to the environment. Always read and observe the instructions and warnings on the package before using car care products. Improper use could damage your health or • . For this. industrial deposits. The use of certain products may produce noxious vapours. they must always be kept closed in their original container. resinous tree sap. • When purchasing car care products. these should be used in well ventilated areas. nail varnish remover or other volatile fluids. • Before you wash your vehicle. apply the handbrake firmly and remove the key from the ignition. Keep the product instructions until you have used up the product. Failure to comply could result in poisoning.

the effect on the paint depends to a large extent on the design of the car wash. WARNING Washing by hand Washing the vehicle – First soften the dirt with plenty of water and rinse off. Risk of accident. After cleaning the vehicle – If possible. • • • The ignition must always be switched off before the vehicle is washed. – Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with water. – Rinse the sponge or glove as much as possible. mud or dust if the surface of the vehicle is dry. last using a different sponge or glove. Risk of injury. After the car has been washed. Never use a dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes. do not direct the water into the lock cylinders or the gaps around the doors. WARNING Moisture. You must “dry” the brakes by applying the brakes carefully several times page 173. – If it is cold. dry the rubber seals and the surfaces they touch with a cloth to prevent them freezing. “Braking effect and braking distance”. the inside of the wheel housings etc. Moisture. ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. the brakes could respond later than normal as the brake discs and brake pads will be wet. Never attempt to remove dirt. avoid sudden braking directly after washing the vehicle. Risk of accident. Washing the vehicle in cold weather: if the vehicle is rinsed with a hose. Use only light pressure. Start on the roof and work your way down. a glove or a brush. ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. “Braking effect and braking distance”. – Dry the surface of the vehicle gently using a chamois leather. the brushes used. or even frozen in winter. the filtering of the wash water and the type of detergents and wax solutions used. sill panels etc. However. – Clean the wheels. – Clean the vehicle with a soft sponge. You must “dry” the brakes by applying the brakes carefully several times page 173. – Special car shampoo should only be used for very stubborn dirt. etc. Apply silicone spray to the rubber seals. Protect your hands and arms from cuts on sharp metal edges when cleaning the underbody. • • Caution Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data .Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 183 Care of the vehicle exterior Automatic car washes The paint is so durable that the car can normally be washed without problems in an automatic car wash. This could scratch the paintwork or glass on your vehicle.

Waxing the car – Always observe the instructions for the high-pressure cleaner. ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. plastic. Even at large spraying distances and short cleaning times. maintain a sufficient distance from sensitive materials for example: flexible hoses. oil-laden waste water entering the sewerage system. etc. This prevents toxic. • • Caution Do not use water hotter than 60°C. The closer the nozzle is to the surface. sound proofing. This could damage the car. – Increase the spraying distance for soft materials and painted bumpers. avoid sudden braking directly after washing the vehicle.184 Cleaning and caring for your vehicle luggage compartment. Regular waxing protects the paintwork. You must “dry” the brakes by applying the brakes carefully several times page 173. – If possible. This could cause them to freeze. washing vehicles anywhere else may be prohibited. Moisture. Otherwise there is a risk of malfunction. WARNING Never wash tyres with a concentrated jet or cylindrical jet (“rotating nozzle”). • • For the sake of the environment In the interests of environmental protection. A good coat of wax helps to protects the paintwork from environmental contaminants page 182. the car should be washed only in specially provided wash bays. You need to apply wax to your car if water does not form small drops and run off the paintwork when it is clean. the greater the wear on the material. This may cause an accident. Washing the car with a high pressure cleaner Be particularly careful when using a high pressure cleaner! To avoid damage to the vehicle. – Never use concentrated jet nozzles or so-called “dirt blasters” . . Note Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. – Do not use a high pressure cleaner to remove ice or snow from windows page 185. particularly those concerning the pressure and the spraying distance. visible and invisible damage can occur to the tyres. it is advisable to protect the paint with a coat of hard wax at least twice a year. Good quality hard wax is available from your Authorised Service Centre. Even if a wax solution is used regularly in the car wash. It is also effective in protecting against minor scratches. In some districts. This is especially important for bumpers painted in the same colour as the vehicle. or bonnet. Risk of accident.

clean them with special solventfree plastic cleaning and care products. Wax deposits have to be removed with a special cleaner that is available from your Authorised Service Centre. Caution • Caution Never use warm or hot water to remove snow and ice from windows and mirrors. Wax deposits on the windscreen could cause the wiper blades to judder. and the gloss cannot be brought back by applying wax. Removing snow – Use a small brush to remove snow from the windows and mirrors. push it in one direction only. “Waxing the car”. If normal washing fails to clean plastic parts. Polishing is only necessary if the paint has lost its shine. Cleaning windows and exterior mirrors Cleaning the windows – Moisten the windows with commercially available. grease and silicone deposits. Removing ice – Use a de-icer spray. This could cause the glass to crack! Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data .Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 185 Polishing the paintwork Polishing brings back gloss to the paintwork. Use a clean cloth or chamois leather to dry the windows. • Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material. Do not move it to and fro. Caring for plastic parts Solvents will damage plastic parts. Use window cleaner or a silicone remover to clean off rubber. A window cleaner specifically for removing wax will stop the blades juddering if added to the windscreen washer fluid. Polish can be obtained from your Authorised Service Centre. – Dry the windows with a clean chamois leather or a lint-free cloth. • The use of liquid air conditioners directly over the air vents of the vehicle may damage the plastic parts if the liquid is accidentally spilled. alcohol based glass cleaner. The car must be waxed after polishing if the polish used does not contain wax compounds to seal the paint page 184. If possible use a de-icing spray to remove ice. If you use an ice scraper. • • Do not polish your vehicle in a sandy or dusty environment. They will be soiled with wax deposits that would smear the windows. oil. Chamois leathers that have been used on painted surfaces are not suitable for use on windows. Caution To prevent damage to the paintwork: Do not use polishes and hard wax on painted parts with a matt finish or on plastic parts. Grease removing cleaners will not remove wax deposits.

they will not freeze so quickly. 1. The doors will be easier to open. . dry cloth. Use an industrial cleaner to remove brake dust. Door lock cylinders The door lock cylinders can freeze up in winter. Polish chrome parts with a soft. bonnet and rear lid will remain pliable and last longer if they are treated with a suitable care product (for example silicone spray). To de-ice the lock cylinders you should only use spray with lubricating and anti-corrosive properties. 2. do not put stickers over the heating elements on the inside of the window.186 Cleaning and caring for your vehicle • The heating element for the rear window is located on the inner side of the window. 2. windows. Apply a specialist care product to the rubber seals. Use a sponge or a cloth to remove stubborn stains. Do not clean or polish chrome parts in a sandy or dusty environment. Care of rubber seals If rubber seals are well looked after. Clean chrome parts with a damp cloth. Cleaning chrome parts 1. Any damage to the paint on steel wheels should be repaired before the metal starts to rust. Caution To prevent scratching chrome surfaces: • • Never use an abrasive care product on chrome. The weather strips on the doors. 1. If this does not provide satisfying results. use a specialist chrome cleaning product. they will not freeze so quickly in winter. If rubber seals are well looked after. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the windscreen wiper blades. To prevent damage. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the rubber seals. Steel wheels – Clean steel wheels regularly using a separate sponge. Cleaning windscreen wiper blades Clean wiper blades are essential for clear vision. Chrome cleaning products will remove stains and coatings from the surface. Use window cleaner to clean the windscreen wiper blades. Caring for rubber seals will also prevent premature ageing and leaks. 2.

ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Every three months – Apply a hard wax compound to the wheels. Even at large spraying distances and short cleaning times. “Braking effect and braking distance”. This may cause an accident. The protective coating could be damaged when driving. catalytic converter or the heat shields on the exhaust system. You must “dry” the brakes by applying the brakes carefully several times page 173. visible and invisible damage can occur to the tyres. WARNING Do not apply underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes. by stone impact. Cleaning alloy wheels Every two weeks – Wash salt and brake dust from alloy wheels. – Use an acid free detergent to clean the wheels.g. Always use an acid-free detergent for alloy wheels. before and after the winter season. WARNING • • • • Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. “Braking effect and braking distance”. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . This may cause an accident. Even at large spraying distances and short cleaning times. avoid sudden braking immediately after washing the vehicle. It is important to remove road salt and brake dust by washing the wheels at regular intervals.Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 187 WARNING Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. The heat of the exhaust system or the engine could cause them to ignite! This is a fire hazard. Car polish or other abrasive agents should not be used. Moisture. the damaged area should be repaired immediately. We recommend that repair work and additional anti-corrosion work is carried out by your Authorised Service Centre. and reinstated if necessary. avoid sudden braking immediately after washing the vehicle. Underbody sealant The underside of the vehicle is coated to protect it from corrosion and damage. ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. If the protective coating is damaged. e. Alloy wheels require regular attention to preserve their appearance. You must “dry” the brakes by applying the brakes carefully several times page 173. Risk of accident. Risk of accident. If possible. otherwise the finish will be impaired. visible and invisible damage can occur to the tyres. We recommend that the protective coating under the body and on the running gear should be checked. Moisture. If possible.

You may cut yourself on sharp-edged metal parts. If this job is carried out. • • • Allow the engine to cool before you clean the engine compartment. . If the airbag inflates. avoid sudden braking immediately after washing the vehicle. • Never touch the radiator fan. ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. The anti-corrosion protection is usually removed if the engine compartment is cleaned with grease removing solutions. engine washing should be carried out only by a qualified workshop or a suitable filling station. always observe the safety warnings page 198. the entire engine compartment should be thoroughly cleaned before and after the salting period. Anti-corrosion treatment The engine compartment and the surface of the power unit are given anticorrosion treatment at the factory. use a special solvent-free plastic cleaning product. apply the parking brake firmly and always remove the key from the ignition before you open the bonnet. WARNING Never clean the dash panel and surface of the airbag module with cleaners containing solvents. Risk of accident. Failure to comply could result in injury. Care of the vehicle interior Cleaning plastic parts and the dash panel – Use a clean. Do not clean the underside of vehicle wheel arches without protecting your hands and arms. seams. disintegrating plastic parts can cause substantial injuries.188 Cleaning and caring for your vehicle Cleaning the engine compartment Take special care when cleaning the engine compartment. you should ensure that all surfaces. For this reason. For this reason. The polluted water must be cleaned in an oil separator. WARNING • When working in the engine compartment. – If this does not provide satisfactory results. Good corrosion protection is particularly important in winter when the car is frequently driven on salted roads. we recommend having this work performed by them. If possible. joints and components in the engine compartment are given anti-corrosion treatment afterwards. even when the key is removed from the ignition! For the sake of the environment Fuel. Switch off the engine. Solvents cause the surface to become porous. grease and oil deposits could be removed when the engine is washed. damp cloth to clean plastic parts and the dash panel. or if you have the engine cleaned. To prevent the salt corroding the vehicle. Your Authorised Service Centre is able to provide the correct cleaning and preserving products and has the necessary equipment. WARNING (continued) • Moisture. It is temperature-controlled and could start automatically.

shoe cream. slight colour variations in high-quality natural leather are normal. – Then wipe off with a soft. so a degree of care is required in everyday use and when looking after the leather. Dust and grit in the pores and seams can scratch and damage the surface. Cleaning cloth seat covers and fabric trim Cloth seat covers and fabric trim on the doors. Leather care – The leather should be treated regularly (about twice a year) with a special leather-care product. Cleaning leather* Normal cleaning – Moisten a cotton or woollen cloth with water and wipe over the leather surfaces. etc. However. Caution Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material. the finished leather has a certain sensitivity to grease and dirt. two tablespoons diluted in one litre of water) and a cloth. – Then wipe off with a soft. use a gentle soap solution. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . SEAT does everything possible to preserve the special qualities of leather. the leather should be protected against direct sunlight to prevent it from fading. – If this does not provide satisfactory results. dry cloth. Because of the natural properties of the specially selected hides employed. can be cleaned with a special interior cleanser or with dry foam and a soft brush. wax polish. dry cloth. which is available from your Authorised Service Centre. spot removers or similar products on leather.Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 189 Caution Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material. as a natural product. Cleaning wooden trim* – Clean the wooden trim with a clean cloth moistened with water. – Do not let the water soak through the leather or soak into the seams. • Caution Do not use solvents. headlining etc. – Apply these products very sparingly. Cleaning stubborn stains – More stubborn dirt can be removed using a mild soap solution (pure liquid soap. If the vehicle is left standing in the sun for long periods.

stubborn stains should be removed by a qualified workshop. • Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat belt yourself.190 Cleaning and caring for your vehicle • To avoid damage. allow seat belts to dry completely before rolling them up. . Cleaning seat belts – Carefully pull the dirty seat belt right out and leave it out. Ensure that the belts do not come into contact with corrosive fluids. The seat belts must not be removed or modified in any way. • Check the condition of all seat belts at regular intervals. Cleaning seat belts A dirty belt may stop the seat belt working properly. retractor mechanism or buckle of any of the belts is damaged. as this can impair the strength of the webbing. – Do not roll up the seat belt until it is dry. Caution After cleaning. WARNING • Do not use chemical cleaning agents on the seat belts. fittings. – Clean the dirty seat belts with a gentle soap solution. – Allow the seat belt fabric to dry. If you notice that the belt webbing. Keep the seat belts clean and check all seat belts regularly. If large stains form on the belts the belt will not retract correctly into the automatic belt retractor. the belt must be replaced by a specialist workshop. Otherwise the belt retractors could become damaged.

Authorised Service Centres have the necessary experience and facilities to ensure that parts are installed correctly and professionally. This way. If any additional electrical components are fitted which do not serve to control the vehicle itself (for instance a refrigerator box. legal requirements and recommendations from the manufacturer regarding accessories and parts. This can seriously impair safety. other systems may be affected by the faults. WARNING Accessories. parts replacement and modifications 191 Accessories. Any equipment subsequently installed which has a direct effect on the vehicle and/or the way it is driven (e. SEAT dealerships will be happy to provide you with the latest information about the use. even if these parts have been approved by an official testing agency or are covered by an official approval certificate. If they are. lead to excessive wear of components. For this reason SEAT cannot assume responsibility for any non-genuine parts used. safety and suitability of parts not approved by SEAT. we recommend that all work should be performed by an Authorised Service Centre using genuine and SEAT® approved parts and accessories. there is a danger of resulting injury if the airbag is triggered in an accident. and also invalidate your vehicle registration documents. SEAT is not able to assess the reliability. laptop or ventilator fan. these must bear the CE mark (European Union manufacturer conformity declaration). Due to the way the electronic components are linked together in networks. etc. For this reason.g. SEAT can guarantee that the product in question is suitable. Despite continuous observation of the market. Modifications Modifications must always be carried out according to our specifications.). reliable and safe. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . We recommend you use only SEAT Approved Accessories® and SEAT Approved Spare Parts®. SEAT Authorised Service Centres cannot be held liable for any damage caused by modifications and/or work performed incorrectly. Your vehicle is designed to offer a high standard of active and passive safety.Accessories. parts replacement and modifications Accessories and parts Always consult an Authorised Service Centre before purchasing accessories and parts. we recommend that you consult your Authorised Service Centre. for example telephone holders or drink holders. Unauthorised modifications to the electronic components or software in the vehicle may cause malfunctions. cruise control system or electronicallycontrolled suspension) must be approved by SEAT for use in your vehicle and bear the e mark (the European Union's authorisation symbol). and before making technical changes to your car. should never be fitted on the covers of. Before purchasing accessories and parts. the airbags. or within the working range of.

for example. An external aerial is needed to give the equipment its optimal range.192 Accessories. for example an Authorised Service Centre. Note Please observe the operating instructions of your mobile telephone / two-way radio. external aerial incorrectly installed. tilting it backwards into a horizontal position and then screw in again. Here you will receive information concerning the technical possibilities for retrofitting this equipment. SEAT has approved your vehicle for use with mobile telephones and two-way radios providing the following conditions are observed: Failure to observe the above conditions could cause the electronics to malfunction. • If you use mobile telephones or two-way radios in the vehicle without an external aerial. transmitting power of maximum 10 watts. when. Roof aerial* The vehicle may be fitted with a collapsible roof aerial* with anti-theft system*. First consult your Authorised Service Centre if you wish to use a mobile telephone or a two-way radio with a transmitting power in excess of 10 watts. If you are distracted while driving you could have an accident. To return to working position Continue in the reverse order to that given in the previous instruction. which can be folded backwards. transmitting power in excess of 10 watts. going through an automatic carwash. Caution Mobile telephones and two-way radios You will require an external aerial for mobile phones and twoway radios. Mobile telephones and two-way radios should be fitted only by a qualified workshop. danger of injury if the airbag is triggered. • • The correct installation of an external aerial. WARNING • Always concentrate primarily on driving. To fold Unscrew the aerial rod. electromagnetic radiation in the vehicle could exceed authorised limits. . The most common causes of faults are: • • • no external aerial. • Never attach the telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units or within the range of the airbags. parts replacement and modifications WARNING Incorrectly performed modifications or other work on your vehicle can lead to malfunctions and cause accidents. This also applies to external aerials that have not been correctly installed.

Fig. parts replacement and modifications 193 Fitting a towing bracket* It is possible to fit a towing bracket to the rear of the vehicle. 139 Attachment points for towing bracket Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data .Accessories.

.194 Accessories. A The attachment points for the towing bracket A are underneath the vehicle. and an electrical socket must be used to connect to the vehicle's electrical system. • WARNING Towing brackets should be fitted by specialists. e. • If the electrical socket is incorrectly installed.g. Therefore.g. The towing bracket securing bolts must be tightened using a torque wrench. fitting of a trailer bracket is not recommended due to the design of the bumpers. The distance between the centre of the ball coupling and the ground should never be lower than the measurement indicated when the vehicle is fully loaded including the maximum resting weight. this must be completed according to the instructions of the towing bracket manufacturer. Cupra. WARNING (continued) • If the towing bracket is incorrectly installed. before fitting a towing bracket. the rear bumper must be removed and reinstalled. there is serious danger of an accident. . parts replacement and modifications If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the vehicle is purchased. Certain vehicle components. Observe the legal requirements in your country (e. please contact an Authorised Service Centre to check whether your cooling system needs modification. this could cause damage to the vehicle's electrical system. The figures in the illustration show the dimensions and attachment points that must be observed if you are retrofitting a towing bracket. • For your own safety. the fitting of a separate warning lamp). please observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the towing bracket. This requires specialist knowledge and tools.040 mm Caution • • • Fitting a towing bracket Driving with a trailer implies additional work for the vehicle. Measurement for securing the towing bracket: B A C A D A E A F A G A 65 mm (minimum) 350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle) 357 mm 569 mm 875 mm 1.).. Note For the sports model (FR.

− Never smoke or use any naked flame when filling the fuel tank of the vehicle. with fuel. you have to carry a spare fuel canister. The tank flap is at the rear of the vehicle on the right. please observe the following points: Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . The canister could be damaged in an accident and leak. Insert a hand and pull the locking device back Open the cap and take out the plug. Never attempt to fill beyond this point. If the automatic filler nozzle is operated correctly. or a spare fuel canister. This is an explosion hazard. Releasing the fuel tank flap by hand If the central locking system fails. as this will fill the expansion chamber. the fuel tank flap can be opened manually as follows: • • • • Fig. The tank holds approximately 55 litres. Fuel may leak out if ambient conditions are warm. The tank cap is secured with an anti-loss attachment Fuel is highly inflammable and can cause serious burns and other injuries. − Follow legal requirements for the use of spare fuel canisters. turning it anti-clockwise.Checking and refilling levels 195 Checking and refilling levels Refuelling The fuel cap cover opens automatically with the central locking system. – Close the drawer. Closing the tank cap – Screw the tank cap to the right. The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is given on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tank flap. Make sure you hear it click into place. WARNING • Unscrewing the tank cap – Lift the lid. until the point of feeling a “click”. – Unscrew the cap. − For safety reasons we do not recommend carrying a spare fuel canister in the vehicle. it will switch itself off as soon as the tank is “full”. 140 Tank flap open Open the tailgate Remove the cover from the right side trim in the luggage compartment. where further notes on fuel can be found. in exceptional circumstances. • If.

Danger of death. causing the fuel fumes to ignite. corresponding to the standard DIN EN 228. As a result. You may use petrol with a higher octane number than the one recommended for your engine. − Insert the fuel nozzle into the mouth of the canister as far as possible. • • Caution Fuel spills should be removed from the paintwork immediately.196 Checking and refilling levels WARNING (continued) Petrol Petrol types The correct petrol types are listed on a sticker inside the fuel tank flap. However. unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and cause damage. − Never fill the spare fuel canister inside the vehicle or on it. Petrol additives Petrol additives improve the quality of the petrol. 95. Only unleaded petrol. This helps prevent an electrostatic charge building up. • Caution • High engine speed and full throttle can damage the engine when using petrol with an octane rating lower than the correct grade for the engine. For this reason you should use good quality petrol . An irregular fuel supply could cause misfiring. Fuel vapours are explosive. This may be fatally explosive. 98 RON (RON = “research octane number”). Petrol types are categorised according to their octane number. g. For the sake of the environment Do not try to put in more fuel after the automatic filler nozzle has switched off. this may cause the fuel to overflow if it becomes warm. performance and service life of the engine. For the sake of the environment Just one full tank of leaded fuel would seriously impair the efficiency of the catalytic converter. − Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the luggage compartment. Never run the tank completely dry. 91. An electrostatic charge could build up during filling. may be used for vehicles with catalytic converters (EN = “European Norm”). Always place the canister on the ground to fill it. Even one full tank of leaded fuel would permanently impair the efficiency of the catalytic converter. − If the spare fuel canister is made of metal. this has no advantage in terms of fuel consumption and engine power. the filling nozzle must be in contact with the canister during filling. e. The quality of the petrol influences running behaviour.

If you decide to use biodiesel in your vehicle. Your Authorised Service Centre can also be consulted to know if the vehicle has been prepared for biodiesel use. These additives will help to prevent corrosion. an increase in gas emission may occur during operation of the independent heating.Checking and refilling levels 197 containing additives. • • • • Biodiesel is a methylester obtained from rapeseed oil. • • • • Things to note about RME fuel (biodiesel) The performance of a vehicle using biodiesel maybe somewhat reduced.214 (FAME) Standard. keep the fuel system clean and prevent deposits from building up in the engine.V. EN means European Norm. following a fuel change. also change the fuel filter.214 compliant. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . about every 300 or 400 km. Your Authorised Service Centre or automobile association will be able to advise on where you can obtain RME biodiesel fuel. At outside temperatures below -10°C. It must have a cetane number (CN) of at least 51. note the instructions in the inspection and maintenance plan. Fuel consumption of a vehicle using biodiesel may be slightly higher. If the date sticker of the vehicle includes the number PR 2G0 optional equipment) this means that that vehicle has been prepared for biodiesel use. Caution RME fuel can damage the fuel system in vehicles that are not suitably adjusted. In case of low exterior temperatures and a biodiesel fuel percentage of higher than 50%. we recommend that. Notes on filling with fuel page 195. The cetane number indicates the ignition quality of the diesel fuel. we recommend using winter diesel fuel. RME fuel can be used in winter at temperatures down to approx. Also. The biodiesel fuel must comply with the DIN EN 14. For this reason. the German standards institute.”. please use only RME fuel which is DIN E 14. • • If you use biodiesel that does not meet the required standard. Diesel Diesel* Diesel fuel must correspond to DIN EN 590 (EN = “European standard”). -10°C. FAME is the English abbreviation “Fatty Acid Methyl Ester” The fuel filter may become clogged when fuel is changed to biodiesel. • • Note DIN is a German abbreviation for “Deutsches Institut für Normung e. If good quality petrol with additives is not available or engine problems occur. the fuel filter could become clogged. • RME fuel* Only those vehicles fitted with special equipment (number PR 2G0 for biodiesel use) may use biodiesel corresponding to the standard DIN EN 14214. the required additives must be added during refuelling.

engine oil. Please observe the relevant instructions page 191. For this reason we recommend that you have service fluids and consumables replaced by an Authorised Service Centre. coolant.198 Checking and refilling levels • If the vehicle is to remain parked for more than about two weeks. e. Caution Do not mix fuel additives (“thinners”. provided you use winter-grade diesel which is safe to -15°C. All service fluids and consumables. 3. Before starting any work on the engine or in the engine compartment: 1. For this reason. Wait for the engine to cool down. or similar additives) with diesel fuel. SEAT provides a constant flow of information to the Authorised Service Centres concerning modifications. Move the gear stick to neutral or the selector lever to position P. 4. However. 2. In countries with different climatic conditions the diesel fuel sold generally has different temperature characteristics. difficulties may be experienced at sub-zero temperatures because the fuel thickens due to wax separation. . Filter pre-heater Your vehicle is fitted with a fuel filter pre-heater. Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be carried out cautiously. Working in the engine compartment Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment Winter driving Diesel can thicken in winter. are being constantly developed. Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition. Apply the handbrake. we recommend filling the fuel tank with biodiesel and driving about 50 km in order to avoid damage to the injection system. spark plugs and batteries. It can be used at temperatures as low as -22°C.g. The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a hazardous area . “winter-grade diesel fuel” is available in some countries during the cold months. simply place the vehicle in a warm place for a while. making it well equipped for operation in winter. This ensures that the fuel system remains operational to approx. Check with an Authorised Service Centre or filling stations in the country concerned regarding the type of diesel fuels available. Winter-grade diesel When using “summer-grade diesel fuel”. if the fuel has waxed to such an extent that the engine will not start at temperatures of under -24°C. Keep children away from the vehicle. -24°C. Raise the bonnet page 200. 5. You should not do any work in the engine compartment unless you know exactly how to carry out the jobs and have the correct tools! Have the work carried out by a qualified workshop if you are uncertain. 6.

e. − Always have a fire extinguisher on hand. The vehicle could move.g. • If you have to work underneath the vehicle. Failure to observe this point will result in serious malfunctions and engine damage! Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . Keep children away from the vehicle. the cooling system will be pressurised! If work has to be carried out on the fuel system or on electrical components. even when the engine has been switched off and the key removed from the ignition! Do not unscrew the cap on the expansion tank when the engine is hot. It is temperature controlled and could start automatically. checking and refilling fluids. etc. there is a risk of accident!.Checking and refilling levels 199 WARNING All work on the engine or in the engine compartment. A hydraulic jack is insufficient for securing the vehicle and there is a risk of injury. there is a risk of sustaining burns. Safety First Operating instructions Caution When changing or topping up service fluids. loose clothing and long hair do not get trapped in rotating engine parts. safety risk from the rotating parts. Never spill liquids on a hot engine or on a hot exhaust gas system.. Before starting any work remove jewellery. you must observe the following safety notes in addition to the above warnings: − Always disconnect the battery. radiator fan. • • • • • Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition. and wear tight-fitting clothes. smoke or coolant escaping from the engine compartment. Danger of death. hands and arms by covering the cap with a large. in the engine compartment. If the coolant is hot. otherwise the alarm will be triggered. The vehicle must be unlocked when this is done. The battery could explode. Apply the handbrake and move the gear stick to neutral or selector lever to position P. and from the high-voltage ignition system. • Always make sure you have not left any objects. such as the drive belts. Never open the bonnet if you see steam. − Never work near naked flames. alternator. thick cloth to protect against escaping coolant and steam. − Do not smoke. WARNING (continued) • • If any work has to be performed when the engine is started or with the engine running. Never touch hot engine parts. This is a fire hazard. you must use suitable stands additionally to support the vehicle. then allow the engine to cool before carefully opening the bonnet. Danger of death. make absolutely certain that you fill the fluids into the correct reservoirs. potentially fatal. Wait until no more steam or coolant is emitted. tie back and cover hair. − Ensure that jewellery. You should also observe the following points: − Never touch the electrical wiring of the ignition system. such as cleaning cloths and tools. • • Avoid causing short-circuits in the electrical system. even if the handbrake is applied. − Always think carefully about pressing the accelerator if a gear is engaged in either an automatic or manual gearbox. There is a risk of burns. • • • Protect face. Otherwise. involves the danger of injury and scalding as well as the risk of accident or fire. Never touch the radiator fan. there is an additional. particularly at the points where the jump leads are attached page 249.

– To release the bonnet. Fig. Before opening the bonnet ensure that the windscreen wipers are in rest position. smoke or coolant escaping from the engine compartment.200 Checking and refilling levels For the sake of the environment Service fluids leaks are harmful to the environment. The bonnet will be released by a spring action . 141 Detail of the foot well: The release lever for the bonnet is located in the driver side foot well – Lift the bonnet using the release lever (arrow) and open the bonnet. pull the lever under the dashboard fig. 141 in the direction indicated (arrow). If you find spots of oil or other fluids. – Release the bonnet stay and secure it in fixture designed for this in the bonnet. 142 Arrester hook for bonnet. . WARNING Hot coolant can scald! • Never open the bonnet if you see steam. Opening the bonnet The bonnet is released from inside the vehicle. For this reason you should make regular checks on the ground underneath your vehicle. have your vehicle inspected in a qualified workshop. Fig.

WARNING If the bonnet is not closed properly. increased consumption and a higher emission level. always observe the safety warnings page 198. the oil can be used for both types of engines. – At a height of about 30 cm let it fall so it is locked. As the use of high quality oil is essential for the correct operation of the engine and its long useful life. use only those oils that conform to the requirements of the VW standards. The specifications (VW standards) set out in the following page should appear on the container of the service oil. it could open while you are driving and completely obscure your view of the road. high quality. then carefully open the bonnet. The bonnet must be flush with the surrounding body panels. long starting time. Risk of accident. If the bonnet does not close. stop the vehicle immediately and close the bonnet properly. The use of this type of oil may have some repercussions on the performance of the engine for example. do not press downwards. always check that it is properly secured.Checking and refilling levels 201 WARNING (continued) Engine oil Engine oil specifications The engine oil used must conform with exact specifications. • Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . If a top up is required then different oils may be mixed as long as they all conform to the VW standards. If it is not possible to find oil conforming to the VW standards then oil conforming to the ACEA or API standards with an appropriate viscosity at atmospheric temperature should be used instead. – Release the bonnet stay and replace it in its support. If you notice that the bonnet latch is not secured when the vehicle is moving. when topping up or replacement is necessary. • When working in the engine compartment. the container will display together the different standards for petrol and diesel engines. smoke or coolant is emitted from the bonnet. Risk of accident. Open it once more and let it fall as before. multi grade oil that can be used in all seasons of the year except for those regions affected by extreme cold. Specifications The engine comes with a special. Closing the bonnet – Raise the bonnet slightly. • Wait until no more steam. • After closing the bonnet.

19) Viscosity: Ability to flow. an oil change is not required. 143 Types of oil according to temperature Engine type Petrol Diesel Diesel Injector Pump a) Diesel Injector Pump Motor 118 kWa) Diesel Engines with Particulate filter (DPF)a) a) Specification VW 501 01/ VW 502 00/ VW 504 00 VW 505 00/ VW 505 01/ VW 507 00/ VW 506 01 VW 505 01/ VW 507 00/ VW 506 01 VW 506 01/ VW 507 00 VW 507 00 Only use recommended oils. Fig. Mono-grade oil Single grade oils are generally not suitable for all year round use. When the ambient temperature falls outside the limits of the scale for a short period. The deterioration caused by these additives is not covered by the warranty. . These oils are only useful in a climate that is constantly very cold or very warm. due to ranges of viscosity19) .202 Checking and refilling levels Oil properties Viscosity The viscosity class of the oil is selected according to the diagram. Engine oil additives No type of additive should be mixed with the engine oil. otherwise you may damage the engine.

0 litres per 1. Fig. for instance during sustained high-speed motorway cruising in summer. wait a few minutes for the oil to drain back into the sump. – Wipe the dipstick with a cloth and insert it again. Consumption can be up to 1. we recommend finding an engine oil that conforms to the corresponding VW specifications and keeping it in the vehicle.Checking and refilling levels 203 – Raise the bonnet Note Before a long trip. – Park the vehicle on an even surface. preferably when filling the tank and before a journey. – After stopping the engine. pushing it in as far as it will go. When the engine is working hard. always observe the safety warnings page 198. do not top up with oil. 1. – Pull the dipstick out again and check the oil level fig. WARNING Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be carried out cautiously. when towing a trailer or climbing on mountain A passes. 144 Engine oil dipstick.0 l). This way. The position of the dipstick is shown in the corresponding engine compartment diagram page 260. 0. C If the oil level is in area A. • When working in the engine compartment. you may top up with oil (approx. If the oil level is in area A fig. 144 A. Checking the engine oil level The engine oil dipstick indicates the level of the oil. For this reason the engine oil level must be checked at regular intervals. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . the correct engine oil will always be available for a top-up if needed. 144. page 200. pushing it in as far as it will go. – Pull out the dipstick. Before opening the bonnet. It is normal for the engine to consume a certain amount of oil. the oil level should preferably be kept within area A and not above this. you must top up with oil (approx.000 km. B If the oil level is in area A.5 l). – Replace the dipstick. read and observe the warnings in “Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment” on page 198.

read and observe the warnings in “Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment” on page 198. – Unscrew cap from oil filler opening fig. wait a while and check the oil level before adding any more oil. – Top-up oil in small amounts. Contact an Authorised Service Centre. This could result in damage to the engine and catalytic converter. WARNING Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil comes into contact with hot engine components when topping up. Engine oil specification page 201. Topping up engine oil Top up gradually with small quantities of oil. Otherwise oil can be drawn in through the crankcase breather and escape into the atmosphere via the exhaust system. 145 In the engine compartment: Engine oil filler cap For the sake of the environment A The oil level must never be above area A. – To avoid over-filling with engine oil. you should top-up using small quantities. Fig. 145. Contact a qualified workshop. The position of the oil filler opening is shown in the corresponding engine compartment diagram page 260. using the correct oil. Before opening the bonnet. . Caution A If the oil level is above the area A do not start the engine. This could result in damage to the engine and catalytic converter. B – As soon as the oil level is in area A. carefully close the cap.204 Checking and refilling levels Caution A If the oil level is above the area A do not start the engine.

the necessary special tools and specialist knowledge required. keep your arm horizontal to help prevent oil from running down your arm.even if frost protection is not required. Hot oil may cause burn injuries. It has to be large enough to hold all the engine oil • • • For the sake of the environment Never pour oil down drains or into the ground.Checking and refilling levels 205 Changing engine oil The engine oil must be changed at the intervals given in the service schedule. This could result in engine damage. Use a suitable container when draining the used oil. The cooling system must be filled with a mixture of water and at least 40 % of our coolant additive G 12+ or an additive with the specification TT-VW 774 F (it is dyed purple). If greater frost protection is required in very cold climates. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . It would also reduce the cooling effect. We recommend that you have the engine oil changed by an Authorised Service Centre. Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into contact with engine oil. the percentage of coolant additives should not exceed 60%. • • • • • • Before opening the bonnet. When removing the oil drain plug with your fingers. Any damage caused by the use of such additives would not be covered by the factory warranty. Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must be stored in a safe place out of the reach of children until it is disposed of. -40°C. the proportion of the antifreeze additive G 12+ can be increased. Wait for the engine to cool down. “Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment”. read and observe the warnings page 198. However. Caution No additives should be used with engine oil. WARNING Only change the oil yourself if you have the specialist knowledge required! Coolant Coolant specifications Coolant is a mixture of water and at least 40% coolant additive. This mixture gives the necessary frost protection down to -25°C and protects the alloy parts of the cooling system against corrosion. we recommend that you have the engine oil and filter changed by an Authorised Service Centre. Wear eye protection to avoid injuries caused by splashes of oil. A mixture with 60% coolant additive will give frost protection to approx. as this would reduce the frost protection. It also prevents scaling and raises the boiling point of the coolant. The concentration of coolant must always be at least 40% . Booklet “Service Because of the disposal problems. The two different oil change intervals are shown in the schedule”.

causing the vehicle to breakdown. The coolant additive G 12+ (purple) can be mixed with the additive G 12 (red) or G 11. read and observe the warnings in “Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment” on page 198. There is a toxic risk. The coolant additive G 12+ must be added in sufficient quantities to provide anti-freeze protection at the coldest ambient temperatures that can be expected. Opening the coolant expansion tank – Switch off the engine and allow it to cool. Always keep the coolant additive in the original container which should be stored out of the reach of children. • • • • Caution Other additives may give considerably inferior corrosion protection. the coolant could freeze. – To prevent scalding.206 Checking and refilling levels WARNING The coolant additive is toxic. there is a risk of suffering exposure! Checking the coolant level and topping up The correct coolant level is important for fault-free functioning of the engine cooling system. The resulting corrosion in the cooling system can lead to a loss of coolant. Never mix G12 (red colour) with G 11. At extremely cold ambient temperatures. cover the cap on the expansion tank with a thick cloth and carefully unscrew the cap . . causing serious damage to the engine. Checking coolant level – Look into the open coolant expansion tank and read the coolant level. Fig. As the heater would also not work in this situation. The same applies to coolant that you have drained off. 146 In the engine compartment: Coolant expansion tank cap Before opening the bonnet.

– Do not fill above the “MAX” mark. always observe the safety warnings page 198. Otherwise. Always top up with new coolant. Large coolant losses are an indication of leaks in the cooling system. See a specialised workshop immediately and have the cooling system checked. Closing the coolant expansion tank – Screw the cap on again tightly. Otherwise the excess coolant will be forced out of the cooling system when the engine is hot. In this case use only water and bring the coolant concentration back up to the correct level as soon as possible by putting in the specified additive page 205. the cooling system is pressurised! Do not unscrew the cap on the expansion tank when the engine is hot. WARNING (continued) • When the engine is warm or hot. Make sure that the coolant meets the required specifications page 205. When working in the engine compartment. Do not use a different type of additive if coolant additive G 12+ is not available. The position of the coolant expansion reservoir is shown in the corresponding engine compartment diagram page 260. The coolant additive G 12+ (dyed purple) may be mixed with G 12 (dyed red) and also with G 11. • Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . wait for the engine to cool down before putting in cold coolant. Topping up coolant – Only use new coolant. there is a risk of engine damage. • When mixed with other additives the colour of G 12 will change to brown. top up with coolant. Failure to do so will result in engine damage! • If a lot of coolant has been lost. If this occurs you should have the coolant changed immediately. Caution WARNING Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be carried out cautiously.Checking and refilling levels 207 – If the level is underneath the “MIN” mark. This is a burn injury risk. Do not fill above the “MAX” mark. This avoids damaging the engine.

Approved windscreen cleaning products exist on the market with high detergent and anti-freeze properties. WARNING Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be carried out cautiously. We recommend that you always add a product to the windscreen washer fluid. Plain water is not enough to clean the windscreen and headlights. always observe the safety warnings page 198. • When working in the engine compartment. Please follow the dilution instructions on the packaging. The windscreen washer and the headlight washing system are supplied with fluid from the windscreen washer fluid container in the engine compartment. • Always use approved windscreen cleansing products diluted as per instructions. the tiny holes in the fan-shaped nozzles could become blocked. • Never put radiator anti-freeze or other additives into the windscreen washer fluid. Caution Fig. If you use other washer fluids or soap solutions. these may be added all-year-round. 147 In the engine compartment: Cap of windscreen washer fluid reservoir. The reservoir is located on the right-hand side of the engine compartment.208 Checking and refilling levels Washer fluid and windscreen wiper blades Topping up washer fluid The water for cleaning the windscreen should always be mixed with washer fluid. .

• Do not pull the windscreen wipers forward unless they are in the service position. If this does not produce the desired results. or cleaned if they are soiled. A – Press on the side tabs A and release the blade moving it in the 1 direction of the arrow A fig. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . • fig. They should be checked by a qualified workshop and corrected if necessary. Never use fuel. they should be replaced if they are damaged. If the windscreen wipers smear. 148 Changing the front wiper blades Clean the windscreen wiper blades and all windows regularly. Changing wiper blades can be done in both the rest and horizontal positions. This could damage the windscreen wiper blades. – Push the wiper arms back against the windscreen. Changing the windscreen wiper blades – Lift the wiper arm away from the windscreen. 148. the setting angle of the windscreen wiper arms might be incorrect. WARNING Do not drive unless you have good visibility through all windows! • • Fig. Damaged wiper blades should be replaced immediately. 148. • Never move the windscreen wiper or windscreen wiper arm manually. – Move the blade towards the arm in the opposite direction of the 1 arrow A. nail varnish remover. • • Caution Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers could scratch the windscreen. This could cause damage. you will benefit from an improved visibility. Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen. Otherwise the bonnet could be damaged. 148. Note Fitting the wiper blade 2 3 – Insert the tab A into the slot A of the blade The wiper arms can be moved to the service position only when the bonnet is properly closed.Checking and refilling levels 209 Changing the front windscreen wiper blades If the windscreen wiper blades are in perfect condition. The wiper blades should be changed once or twice a year. paint thinner or similar products to clean the windows.until it clicks into position fig.

fig. Never use fuel. it should be replaced if damaged. press the wiper blade into the retainer. hold the top end of the wiper arm. or cleaned if soiled. refer to a qualified workshop.210 Checking and refilling levels Changing the rear wiper blade A good rear wiper blade is essential for clear rear vision. Removing the wiper blade – Lift the wiper arm away from the glass 1 2 – Unclip the wiper blade A and pull A fig. Change as required. Check the condition of the wiper blade regularly. – With the other hand. The wiper blades should be changed once or twice a year. paint thinner or similar products to clean the window. This could cause damage. Fitting the wiper blade – With one hand. 149. 149. . Never move the windscreen wiper by hand. Damaged wiper blades should be replaced immediately. 149 Changing the rear window wiper blade Clean the windscreen wiper blades and all windows regularly. If the windscreen wiper scrapes. If this is not sufficient. WARNING Do not drive unless you have good visibility through all windows! • • • • • Fig. nail varnish remover. Caution A damaged or dirty window wiper could scratch the rear window.

Before opening the bonnet. The brake fluid reservoir has a black and yellow cap. 150 In the engine compartment: Brake fluid reservoir cover – Read the fluid level at the transparent brake fluid reservoir. However. Fig. It should always be between the “MIN” and “MAX” marks.Checking and refilling levels 211 Brake fluid Checking the brake fluid level The brake fluid is checked at the intervals given in the service schedule. Old brake fluid impairs the braking effect. We recommend that you have the brake fluid changed by an Authorised Service Centre. This also considerably reduces the boiling point of the brake fluid. it will absorb water from the ambient air. It is important that you use only use brake fluid compliant with the US standard FMVSS 116 DOT 4. For this reason the brake fluid must be renewed every two years. The brake fluid level drops slightly when the vehicle is being used as the brake pads are automatically adjusted as they wear. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . read and observe the warnings page 198. there may be a leak in the brake system. If the water content in the brake fluid is too high. A display on the instrument panel will warn you if the brake fluid level is too low page 72. Brake fluid absorbs moisture. if the level goes down noticeably in a short time. please read and follow the warnings in “Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment” on page 198 in “Working in the engine compartment”. Heavy use of the brakes may then cause a vapour lock which could impair the braking effect. In the course of time. The position of the brake fluid reservoir is shown in the corresponding engine compartment diagram page 260. WARNING Before opening the bonnet to check the brake fluid level. Changing the brake fluid The brake fluid must be renewed every two years. the brake system could corrode. We recommend the use of Genuine SEAT brake fluid. WARNING Brake fluid is poisonous. or drops below the “MIN” mark.

Have the brake fluid changed every two years at the latest. When handling cables and electrical equipment. • Brake fluid should be stored in the closed original container in a safe place out of reach of children. sparks. Rinse battery acid from eyes immediately for several minutes with clear water. read and observe the warnings page 198. Wipe off any brake fluid from the paintwork immediately. and rinse off with plenty of water. Do not tilt the batteries. Neutralize any acid splashes on the skin or clothing with a soapy solution. This could spill acid through the vents. naked lights and smoking are prohibited! • Before opening the bonnet to check the brake fluid level. avoid causing sparks and electrostatic . consult a doctor immediately. This would seriously affect the efficiency of the brakes and the safety of the vehicle. skin and clothing from acid and particles containing lead. Wear protective gloves and eye protection! Fires. • • Fires. • Caution Brake fluid could damage the paintwork. There is a toxic risk. Battery acid is very corrosive and caustic. Heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake fluid is left in the system for too long. WARNING Always be aware of the danger of injury and chemical burns as well as the risk of accident or fire when working on the battery and the electrical system: • Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes. naked lights and smoking are prohibited. Wear protective gloves and eye protection. A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the battery is under charge. Keep children away from acid and batteries! For the sake of the environment Brake fluid must be drained and disposed of in the proper manner observing environmental regulations. sparks. Then seek medical care immediately. This may cause an accident. If acid is swallowed by mistake.212 Checking and refilling levels WARNING (continued) Battery Warnings on handling the battery Wear eye protection Battery acid is very corrosive and caustic.

Never use a defective battery. the ignition and all consumers. • Never disconnect the battery if the ignition is switched on or if the engine is running. This could damage the electrical system or electronic components. or one which has thawed. you need only switch off the light. Never charge a frozen battery. If the colour in the window is colourless or bright yellow. • Do not expose the battery to direct sunlight over a long period of time. Before working on the electrical system. The round window (“magic eye”) on the top of the battery changes colour.Checking and refilling levels 213 WARNING (continued) • If the vehicle is left standing in cold conditions for a long period. depending on the charge level and electrolyte level of the battery. Never reverse the polarity of the connections. protect the battery from frost. This may be fatally explosive. tap the window gently until they disperse. as the intense ultraviolet radiation can damage the battery housing. This could cause an electrical fire. the electrolyte level of the battery is too low. Replace a damaged battery immediately. Never short the battery terminals. If it “freezes” it will be damaged. The position of the battery is shown in the corresponding engine compartment diagram page 260. A flat battery can freeze at temperatures around 0°C. • Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by unlocking the vehicle before you disconnect the battery! The alarm will otherwise be triggered. • • • • • Ensure that the vent hose is always connected to the battery. Checking the electrolyte level The electrolyte level should be checked regularly in highmileage vehicles. Switch off all electrical consumers before reconnecting the battery. Have the battery checked by a qualified workshop. When disconnecting the battery from the vehicle electrical system. you must switch off the engine. This could result in explosions and chemical burns. The batteries should be charged in a well-ventilated room only. When a light bulb is changed. Reconnect first the positive cable and then the negative cable. charge. disconnect first the negative cable and then the positive cable. – Check the colour display in the "magic eye" on the top of the battery. • A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the battery is under charge. The negative cable on the battery must be disconnected. – If there are air bubbles in the window. Always replace a battery that has frozen. The colours green and black are used by the workshops for diagnostic purposes. Safety First Operating instructions Caution Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . in hot countries and in older batteries. – Open the bonnet and open the battery cover at the front in “Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment” on page 198 in “Warnings on handling the battery” on page 212. • • Keep children away from acid and batteries. High-energy sparks can cause injury.

the wheels and/or tyres should be stored in a cool. Wheels General notes Avoiding damage – If you have to drive over a kerb or similar obstacle. – Keep grease. cracks or blisters. This ensures you will be able to install them correctly when you replace them. the battery should be checked by a qualified workshop between the scheduled services. They must be disposed of appropriately and must not be disposed of with ordinary household waste. All work on the vehicle battery requires specialist knowledge. – When removed. If you often drive short distances or if the vehicle is not driven for long periods. performance and safety specifications of your vehicle. we recommend you have the vehicle battery checked by an Authorised Service Centre where it will be recharged or replaced. This standard applies as of 2001.214 Checking and refilling levels Charging and changing the vehicle battery The battery is maintenance-free and is checked during the inspection service. If the battery has discharged and you have problems starting the vehicle. drive very slowly and as near as possible at a right angle to the kerb. oil and fuel off the tyres. – Inspect the tyres regularly for damage (cuts. – Store tyres in a vertical position if they are not fitted on wheel rims. as batteries using special technology have been installed and they must be charged in a controlled environment. If this happens. Replacing a vehicle battery The battery has been developed to suit the conditions of its location and has special safety features. Remove any foreign objects embedded in the treads. etc. the battery might be damaged. For the sake of the environment Batteries contain toxic substances such as sulphuric acid and lead. Genuine SEAT batteries fulfil the maintenance.). • • . WARNING We recommend you use only maintenance-free or cycle free leak-proof batteries that comply with the standards T 825 06 and VW 7 50 73. Before starting any work on the batteries. you must read and observe the warnings in “Warnings on handling the battery” on page 212. dry and preferably dark location. Storing tyres – Mark tyres when you remove them to indicate the direction of rotation. Charging the battery The vehicle battery should be charged by a qualified workshop only.

1. • • Never drive with damaged tyres. Tyre pressure The correct tyre pressure is especially important at high speeds. If the tyre pressure is too low or too high. 2. the tyres will wear prematurely and the vehicle will not handle well. Tyres with directional tread pattern An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the direction of rotation on tyres with directional tread. causing an accident! • • At continuously high speeds. For Winter tyres. Always observe the recommended tyre pressures. The tyres should be checked immediately by an Authorised Service Centre. Concealed damage Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily visible.2 bar to the values given on the sticker. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load you are carrying. Drive particularly carefully to avoid risk of accident. Checking tyre pressure The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the inside of the tank flap. The slightly raised pressures of warm tyres must not be reduced. Always observe the direction of rotation indicated when fitting the wheel. according to the type and make of tyre and the tread pattern. 3. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . you must add 0. The pressure should therefore be checked at least once a month and before starting a journey. Risk of accident! For the sake of the environment Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel consumption. In this way it becomes too hot. excessive noise and wear. stop the vehicle immediately and check the tyres for damage. a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes more. If you notice unusual vibration or if the vehicle pulls to one side when driving. The tyre pressures should only be checked when the tyres are cold. WARNING A tyre can easily burst if the pressure is too low. This guarantees optimum grip and helps to avoid aquaplaning.Checking and refilling levels 215 New tyres New tyres have to be run-in page 173. The values refer to Summer tyres. The tread depth of new tyres may vary. Read the required tyre inflation pressure from the sticker. WARNING • New tyres do not have maximum grip in the first 500 km. This may cause an accident. this may indicate that one of the tyres is damaged. If you notice unusual vibrations or the car pulling to one side. and this can cause tread separation and tyre blow-out.

6 mm high “tread wear indicators” fig. Wear indicators The original tyres on your vehicle have 1. Wheel balance The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. heavy acceleration and hard braking all increase tyre wear. various factors encountered in normal driving can cause them to become unbalanced. Depending on the make. which results in steering vibration. 151 running across the tread. Driving style Fast cornering. there will be six to eight of them evenly spaced around the tyre. Fig. Tyre pressure Incorrect tyre pressure causes premature wear and could cause tyre blow-out. Worn tyres must be replaced. The minimum tread depth required by law is 1. 152. as they otherwise cause excessive wear on steering. suspension and tyres. However. For this reason.216 Checking and refilling levels Tyre service life The service life of tyres is dependent on tyre pressure. A wheel must also be rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted. the tyre pressure should be checked at least once per month page 215. 152 Changing wheels Incorrect wheel alignment causes excessive tyre wear. Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced. If tyres show excessive wear. All the tyres will then last for about the same time. driving style and fitting. Incorrect wheel alignment Fig. Markings on the tyre sidewall (for instance the letters “TWI” or other symbols) indicate the positions of the tread wear indicators. 151 Tyre tread wear indicators Changing wheels around If the front tyres are worn considerably more than the rear ones it is advisable to change them around as shown fig. . impairing the safety of the vehicle.6 mm (measured in the tread grooves next to the tread wear indicators). you should have the wheel alignment checked by an Authorised Service Centre. Different figures may apply in export countries .

Failure to do so could result in an accident. “Eufonia”. The tyre walls of this type of tyre are reinforced. Risk of accident. the tyre walls keep the tyre up (emergency use). Starting driving in emergency conditions When the loss in tyre pressure is displayed on the instrument panel. We recommend you contact your Authorised Service Centre. or if the vehicle vibrates or rattles. The faulty tyre should be replaced as soon as possible. Vehicles that are factory-fitted with puncture-proof tyres20) indicate on the instrument panel when there is a loss of tyre pressure. Worn tyres do not grip well at high speeds on wet roads. If more than one tyre is being used under emergency conditions. • At continuously high speeds. – Avoid sharp turns and rapid manouevres.Checking and refilling levels 217 WARNING There is a serious danger of accidents if a tyre bursts during driving! Driving on puncture-proof tyres (emergency use) – Leave the ESP/TCS (electronic stabilisation programme) switched on. “SSR” or “ZP”. Loss of air pressure in the tyre is shown on the instrument panel. under ideal conditions (for example. Puncture-proof tyres are marked on the tyre wall as follows: “DSST”. this reduces the distance which can be travelled. “RFT”. • The tyres must be replaced at the latest when the tread is worn down to the tread wear indicators. no load) further. When the tyres lose air. a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes more. This causes it to overheat. this implies that at least one tyre is being driven in emergency conditions End of emergency operation . • • • Keep chemicals such as oil. – Avoid driving over obstacles (for example. “RSC”. – Drive carefully and at moderate speed (80 km/h maximum). If tyres show excessive wear. The tyre rim should be checked for damage at a specialised workshop and replaced as necessary. “ROF”. or switch on. 20) Do not drive on if: Depending upon version and country. The vehicle may still be driven for at least 80 km and. There is also a greater risk of “aquaplaning”. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . Puncture-proof tyres* Puncture-proof tyres will usually allow the vehicle to continue even when one of the tyres has a puncture. Always observe the recommended tyre pressures. check whether there is smoke coming from the tyres or a smell of rubber. This can cause tread separation and tyre blow-out. kerbs) or potholes. Damaged wheels and tyres must be replaced immediately! For the sake of the environment Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel consumption. you should have the running gear checked by an Authorised Service Centre. stop the vehicle. – If the ESP/TCS is frequently activated. fuel and brake fluid away from tyres. If this is the case.

.218 Checking and refilling levels • • • • smoke is coming from one of the tyres. A knowledge of tyre designations makes it easier to choose the correct tyres. The tyres and wheel rims are an essential part of the vehicle's design.. the driving quality of the vehicle is impaired and there is a risk of accident.” means. The manufacturing date is also indicated on the tyre sidewall (possibly only on the inner side of the wheel). for example: 195/65 R15 91T This contains the following information: 195 Tyre width in mm 65 Height/width ratio in % R Tyre construction: Radial 15 Rim diameter in inches 91 Load rating code T Speed rating The tyres could also have the following information: WARNING When driving in emergency conditions. Avoid sharp turns and rapid manoeuvres. • • Note • • A direction of rotation symbol “Reinforced” denotes heavy-duty tyres. “DOT . and brake earlier than usual. New tyres and wheels New tyres and wheels have to be run-in. both front tyres or both rear tyres together). 1103 . Tyres should be replaced at least in pairs and not individually (i. They are familiar with the procedure and have the necessary special tools and spare parts.. there is a smell of rubber. If one or more tyres is being driven in emergency conditions. The tyres and rims approved by SEAT are specially matched to the characteristics of the vehicle and make a major contribution to good road holding and safe handling . Avoid driving over obstacles (for example. Any Authorised Service Centre has full information on the technical requirements when installing or changing tyres. as well as the proper facilities for disposing of the old tyres. for example. there is a rattling noise. the driving quality of the vehicle is considerably impaired. Radial tyres have the tyre designations marked on the sidewall. Therefore defects in the tyre can not be deteced with a visual inspection. Snow chains must not be used on front tyres used in emergency conditions. • • • • Drive carefully and at moderate speed (80 km/h maximum). Puncture-proof tyres do not “deflate” on losing pressure as they are supported by the tyre walls. wheels or wheel trims. the vehicle vibrates. kerbs) or potholes. . We recommend that work on tyres and wheels is carried out by an Authorised Service Centre.. that the tyre was produced in the 11th week of 2003.e.

If you have no alternative. Risk of accident. you may not use wheel bolts from a different car even if it is the same model page 191. you must ensure that the flow of air to the brakes is not restricted. This ensures that wheels are fitted securely and that the brake system functions correctly. The use of wheels or tyres which have not been approved by SEAT for use with your model may invalidate the vehicle's type approval for use on public roads. the wheel could become loose while driving. Refit the normal road wheel as soon as possible. it is not generally possible to use the wheels from other vehicles. All four wheels must be fitted with radial tyres of the same type. the correct wheel bolts with the right length and correctly shaped bolt heads must be used. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . Wheel bolts Wheel bolts must be tightened to the correct torque. Never apply grease or oil to them. In certain circumstances. This could cause them to overheat. Failure to do so could impair vehicle handling. the wheel bolts and threads could be damaged. Risk of accident.Checking and refilling levels 219 WARNING We recommend that you use only wheels and tyres that have been approved by SEAT for your model. Avoid running the vehicle on tyres that are more than six years old. size (rolling circumference) and the same tread pattern. • For technical reasons. WARNING If the wheel bolts are not tightened correctly.you should only use the spare tyre for a short period of time and drive with extra care. you should drive slowly and with extra care at all times. The design of wheel bolts is matched to the rims. This can also apply to wheels of the same model. • • • The wheel bolts must be clean and turn easily. For the sake of the environment Old tyres must be disposed of according to the laws in the country concerned. Use only wheel bolts which belong to the wheel. • • • • • Never use old tyres or those with an unknown “history of use”. Note Caution The prescribed torque for wheel bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm. they could loosen whilst the vehicle is in motion.for example with winter tyres . If wheel trims are retrofitted. If different wheel rims are fitted. • If the spare tyre is not the same as the tyres that are mounted on the vehicle . If the prescribed torque of the wheel bolts is too low. Risk of accident! If the tightening torque is too high.

. this could lead to tyre damage and thus. The design of summer tyres (width. Otherwise they will impair handling. The speed rating code following speed limits Q S T H max. Remove wheel hub covers and trim rings before fitting snow chains. WARNING Observe the fitting instructions provided by the snow chain manufacturer. All tyre sizes listed in the vehicle documentation also apply to winter tyres. Otherwise. “New tyres and wheels”. If you have a flat tyre. Winter tyres must be inflated to a pressure 0. “New tyres and wheels” determines the : WARNING The maximum speed for the winter tyres must not be exceeded. 180 km/h max. including tension device. damage the tyres and wear out very quickly. They are quieter. must then be fitted over the wheel bolts. do not wear so quickly and reduce fuel consumption. 160 km/h max.220 Checking and refilling levels Winter tyres Winter tyres will improve the vehicles handling on snow and ice. please refer to the notes on the spare wheel page 218. tread pattern) gives less grip on ice and snow. Winter tyres lose their effectiveness when the tread is worn down to a depth of 4 mm. For the sake of the environment Fit your summer tyres in good time. available in any Authorised Service Centre. Snow chains Snow chains may be fitted only to the front wheels. an accident risk. In winter conditions winter tyres will considerably improve the vehicles handling. rubber compound. vehicles which can exceed the speed rating of the fitted tyre must have an appropriate sticker in the driver's field of view. In some countries. These stickers are available from your Authorised Service Centre. The legal requirements of each country must be followed. Use only radial winter tyres. Vehicles with summer tyres handle better when the roads are free of snow and ice. and only to certain tyre sizes page 258. Caution You must remove the snow chains to drive on roads which are free of snow. 190 km/h max. For safety reasons cover caps. Winter tyres must be fitted on all four wheels. Information on permitted winter tyre sizes can be found in the vehicle's registration documents.2 bar higher than the pressures specified for summer tyres (see sticker on tank flap). Do not have winter tyres fitted for unnecessarily long periods. Snow chains must have fine-pitch links which do not protrude more that 9 mm. 210 km/h page 218.

the speed limit for using snow chains is 50 km/h.Checking and refilling levels 221 Note In some countries. The legal requirements of the country should be followed. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data .

risk of accident. • • • • • • Jack* Hook for removing wheel covers* or hub caps* Box spanner for wheel bolts* Reversible screwdriver with handle (including hexagonal interior) for the wheel bolts. WARNING • Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to tighten the wheel bolts.222 If and when If and when Tools. level ground. there is a risk of injury. risk of accident. risk of injury. – Take the onboard tools out of the vehicle. this must be secured by suitable stands. tyre repair kit and spare wheel Vehicle Tools The vehicle onboard tools are located under the floor panel in the luggage compartment . Towing eye Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts* Some of the items listed are only provided on certain models / model years. . If work is to be carried out underneath the vehicle. • • • Use the jack* only on firm. Never start the engine when the vehicle is on the jack. The tool kit includes: WARNING (continued) • The jack* supplied by the factory is only designed for changing wheels on this model. by pulling it up with a finger in the fitting. The screwdriver is a combination tool. It is impossible to tighten the bolts with the torque required. Otherwise. or are optional extras. – Lift the cover of the luggage compartment. On no account attempt to use it for lifting heavier vehicles or other loads.

Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . No other type of tyre (normal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on the compact temporary spare wheel rim. Note Tyre repair kit* The tyre repair kit (for vehicles not including a spare wheel) is stored under the floor panel in the luggage compartment. WARNING • • • Fig. 153 Luggage compartment. How to use the compact temporary spare wheel Should you ever have a punctured tyre. These vehicles are supplied with a tyre repair kit. • • The temporary spare wheel is stored under the floor panel in the luggage compartment and is attached by a thumbnut. hard braking and fast cornering. Access to the spare wheel The tyre pressures must be checked and corrected as soon as possible. Never use two or more compact spare tyres at the same time. This spare wheel has been specially designed for your vehicle. Avoid heavy acceleration.2 bar. the compact temporary spare wheel is only intended for temporary use until you can reach a workshop. • Emergency wheels must never be used on vehicles fitted with Brembo brakes. Higher speeds can cause an accident. Failure to do so could result in an accident. snow chains must not be used on the compact temporary spare wheel. Do not drive faster than 80 km/h. Snow chains For technical reasons. risk of accident. it cannot be changed with the spare wheel from another vehicle. The tyre pressure for the spare wheel is 4. risk of accident.If and when 223 Compact temporary spare wheel* The compact temporary spare wheel (spare wheel for vehicles with no puncture repair kit) should only be used when really necessary. The standard-size road wheel should be replaced as soon as possible. Please note the following restrictions when using the compact temporary spare wheel. Your vehicle is equipped with the Tyre Mobility System “Tyre repair kit”. If you should have a puncture on one of the front wheels when using snow chains. No other type of tyre (normal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on the compact temporary spare wheel rim. thus. You can then attach the snow chains to the wheel taken from the rear and use this wheel to replace the punctured front wheel. fit the compact temporary spare in place of one of the rear wheels.

fig. Switch on the hazard warning lights.224 If and when The tyre repair kit consists of a container with sealing compound to repair the puncture and a compressor to generate the required tyre pressure. – If you have a flat tyre or puncture. Note Please observe legal requirements when doing so. Changing a wheel Change the wheel as described below – Pull off the hub cap. page 225. 154. WARNING • Note Seek professional assistance if the repair of a tyre puncture is not possible with the sealing compound. – If you are towing a trailer. See – Slacken the wheel bolts – Raise the car with the jack in the corresponding zone – Take off the wheel and then put on the spare wheel – Lower the vehicle. or put the selector lever to position P for those vehicles with an automatic gearbox. Put the hazard warning lights on and place the warning triangle in position. If you have to change the wheel on a gradient. park the vehicle as far away from the flow of traffic as possible. block the wheel opposite the wheel being changed by placing a stone or similar object under it to prevent the vehicle from rolling away. – Apply the handbrake firmly. Choose a location that is as level as possible. . They should wait in a safe area (for instance behind the roadside crash barrier). Caution Wheel change Preparation work What you must do before changing a wheel. – Switch off the engine. – All passengers should leave the vehicle. – Take the vehicle tools and the spare wheel out of the luggage compartment. This is for your own safety and also warns other road users. unhitch it from your vehicle. – Engage the first gear. The kit will reliably seal punctures up to a size of about 4 mm caused by the penetration of a foreign body into the tyre.

Fig. The prescribed torque is 120 Nm. • In the interest of safety. drive at moderate speeds until the wheel bolt torque has been checked. 154 Changing a wheel: Removing the wheel trim Removing – Insert the extraction hook from the tools into the designated ring. – Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench. • If you notice that the wheel bolts are corroded and difficult to turn when changing a wheel. – Place the wheel with the defective tyre in the luggage compartment and secure it.If and when 225 – Tighten the wheel bolts firmly in diagonal sequence with the box spanner – Replace the hub cap. – Check the tyre pressure of the newly fitted tyre as soon as possible. they must be replaced before having the wheel bolt torque checked. located in one of the bolt hole covers of the wheel cover fig. After changing a wheel After changing the wheel there are still tasks to complete. – Put the tools and jack back in the luggage compartment. Wheel trims The wheel trims must be removed to gain access to the wheel bolts. Note Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . – Pull off the hub cap. 154.

Then press the wheel cover onto the steel rim so that it engages all round. – An adapter is required to unscrew or tighten the anti-theft wheel bolts. Loosening the wheel bolts The wheel bolts must be loosened before raising the vehicle. – Grasp the box spanner by the end and turn it about one full turn to the left fig. Put pressure initially on the point of the cut out for the valve.226 If and when Wheel covers* The wheel covers must be removed for access to the wheel bolts Removing – Remove the wheel cover using the wire hook. . 155. Fitting – Fit the wheel cover onto the wheel rim by pressing it firmly. – Grasp the box spanner close to the end and turn the bolt to the right until it is secured. Tightening – Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the wheel bolt. – Hook this into one of the cut-outs of the wheel cover. 155 Changing the wheel: Loosening the wheel bolts Loosening – Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the wheel bolt. Fig.

Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . Hold on to the vehicle for support and take care not to slip. you may be able to loosen it by pushing down the end of the spanner carefully with your foot. • Note • If the wheel bolt is very tight. Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to loosen or tighten the wheel bolts.If and when 227 WARNING Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn before raising the vehicle with the jack. loosening the wheel bolts more than one turn can result in an accident.

157. if necessary. Do not fit the jack anywhere else. Failure to do so could result in an accident. There is also a risk of injury since the jack can slip off suddenly if it is not properly engaged. Use a large and stable base. – Align the jack so that the arm of the jack fits around the rib under the door sill and the movable base plate of the jack is flat on the ground fig. A position has been made for each wheel.228 If and when Raising the vehicle The vehicle must be raised with a jack to remove the wheel. slippery surface (such as tiles) use a rubber mat or similar to prevent the jack from slipping. 156. Fig. – Raise the vehicle until the defective wheel is just clear of the ground. – Locate the jacking point under the door sill closest to the wheel being changed fig. On a hard. Fig. • • The vehicle can be damaged if the jack is not applied at the correct jacking points. – Wind up the jack under the jacking point until the arm of the jack is directly below the vertical rib under the door sill. 156. 157 Fitting the jack . 156 The jacking points WARNING Take all precautions so that the base of the jack does not slip. An unstable surface under the jack may cause the vehicle to slip off the jack. the jack must be fitted on solid ground offering good support. Therefore. Recesses at the front and rear of the door sills mark the jacking points fig.

The hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle makes it easier to turn the wheel bolts when they are loose. 158 Wheel change: Hexagon socket in screwdriver handle to turn the wheel bolts after they have been loosened Anti-theft wheel bolts A special adapter is required to turn the anti-theft wheel bolts.If and when 229 Removing and fitting the wheel For removing and fitting the wheel. Fitting a wheel – Screw in the wheel bolts and tighten them lightly using the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle. inspect the condition of the wheel and hub mounting surfaces. 158. If tyres with a specific direction of rotation are fitted. The reversible screwdriver blade should be removed when the tool is used for this purpose. These surfaces must be clean before fitting the wheel. Fig. Removing a wheel – Unscrew the bolts using the hexagonal tool in the handle of the screwdriver (vehicle tool) and place them on a clean surface fig. Fig. The wheel bolts should be clean and turn easily. the following tasks must be completed. note the direction of rotation. 159 Anti-theft wheel bolt Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . Note Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to loosen or tighten the wheel bolts. Before fitting the spare wheel. Change the wheel as described below after loosening the wheel bolts and raising the vehicle with the jack.

230 If and when – Insert the adapter onto the wheel bolt and push it on as far as it will go page 229. For the sake of the environment If you want to dispose of the sealant bottle. The foreign object can be left inside the tyre. Tyres with directional tread pattern Tyres with directional tread pattern must be fitted so that they rotate in the correct direction. avoid accelerating or braking hard or taking curves at high speed. Tyre repair kit (Tyre-Mobility-System)* General Observations and safety advice Your vehicle is equipped with the tyre repair kit called the Tyre mobility system. The code number should be noted and kept in a safe place. in an emergency. The tyre will not give optimum performance. fig. tread wear and aquaplaning. you must drive extremely carefully. the defective tyre should be replaced as soon as possible so that all tyres again rotate in the correct direction. This is particularly important when driving on wet roads. The Tyre Mobility System will allow you to safely repair damage to a tyre by penetration of a foreign object to 4mm diameter. Always note the direction of rotation indicated when fitting the wheel. your car should be taken carefully to the nearest specialised workshop. There is also a guide to using the compressor. . you have to mount the spare wheel so it rotates in the wrong direction. A directional tread pattern can be identified by arrows on the sidewall that point in the direction of rotation. • • A tyre that has been repaired with sealant should only be used provisionally. Therefore. Beneath the floor of the stowage compartment there is a sealant and a compressor which should be used in case of puncture. If. The sealant comes with instructions for use. go to a company that treats waste products. 159. and for a short time. • • Follow the instructions for your safety and use on the compressor and the sealant packaging. WARNING The sealant should not be used if the tyre has been damaged as a result of going flat. – Loosen or tighten the wheel bolt as appropriate. as it is only by using the code number that a duplicate adapter can be obtained from an Authorised Service Centre. Do not drive at more than 80 km/h. – Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the adapter. Code number The code number of the anti-theft wheel bolt is stamped on the front of the adapter. This is important so that these tyres can give maximum grip and avoid excessive noise. To benefit from the advantages of tyres with this type of tread pattern.

– Disconnect the compressor from the vehicle mains. – Engage the first gear. – All passengers must leave the vehicle. Preparation work What you must do before changing a wheel. – Apply the handbrake firmly. To repair the puncture. – Remove the compressor and hose.” – Unscrew cap from the valve of the affected wheel. Apply the sealant – The instructions for using the sealant correctly are on the packaging Inflate the tyres. – Connect the compressor and check the tyre pressure with the pressure gauge. – Take the tyre repair kit from the luggage compartment. Caution Take the utmost caution when repairing a flat tyre on a gradient.If and when 231 Note Seek professional assistance if the repair of a tyre puncture is not possible with the sealing compound. – Check the cap on the tyre valve. – Tighten the fastening nut onto the tyre valve. once the preliminary tasks are done. or put the selector lever to position P for those vehicles with an automatic gearbox. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . – Connect the compressor power supply to the 12 Volt socket. – Check whether the puncture can be mended using the Tyre Mobility System “General observations and safety advice. Repairing the puncture – If you have a flat tyre or puncture. Note Please observe legal requirements when doing so. This is for your own safety and also warns other road users. park the vehicle as far away from the flow of traffic as possible. WARNING Put the hazard warning lights on and place the warning triangle in position. Finish the repair – Remove the compressor hose from the valve. follow these steps. They should wait in a safe area (for instance behind the roadside crash barrier).

– Identify the fuse for the failed component page 234.232 If and when – Put the tools back in the luggage compartment. . fit it onto the blown fuse and pull the fuse out. 160 Left side of dash panel: Fuse box cover – Switch off the ignition and the component concerned. – Replace the blown fuse (which will have a melted metal strip) with a new fuse of the same ampere rating. 161 Fuse box cover in engine compartment – Take the plastic clip from inside the fuse cover. Note The compressor should not operate more than 6 minutes Fuses Changing a fuse If a fuse has blown it must be replaced Fuse cover underneath the steering wheel – Switch off the ignition and the component concerned. 161. – Prise off the fuse cover in the engine compartment by pressing the tabs towards the centre of the cover fig. Fig. – Identify the fuse for the failed component page 234. Fuse cover in engine compartment Fig.

you could cause damage to another location in the electrical system. If you replace a fuse with a stronger fuse. fit it onto the blown fuse and pull the fuse out. – Replace the blown fuse (which will have a melted metal strip) with a new fuse of the same ampere rating. • If a newly replaced fuse blows again after a short time.If and when 233 – Take the plastic clip from inside the fuse cover (at left-hand end of the dash panel). – Carefully fit the fuse cover back on to ensure no water can enter the fuse box. Failure to comply could result in fire. Note • • Always keep some spare fuses in the vehicle. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . This could also cause damage to other parts of the electrical system. Colour coding of fuses Colour light brown red blue yellow natural (white) green orange red white Amperes 5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 80 Colour blue grey violet Amperes 100 150 200 WARNING Never “repair” damaged fuses and never replace them with fuses with a higher rating. The fuses are located behind a cover at the left-hand end of the dash panel and on the left-hand side of the engine compartment. These reset automatically after a few seconds when the overload (caused for example by frozen windows) has been corrected. The individual electrical circuits are protected by fuses. These are available from SEAT dealers. the electrical system must be checked by a qualified workshop as soon as possible. The electric windows are protected by circuit breakers.

234 If and when Fuses on left side of dash panel Fuses Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Electrical equipment Diagnosis/instrument lighting control unit/ Headlamp range control/ Flow gauge/ heated windscreen control unit Engine control unit/ ABS-ESP control unit/ Automatic Gearbox/ Instrument panel/ Trailer /Light switch / Brake sensor / servosteering/ right and left headlamp control unit Airbag Heating/ Reverse switch/ ASR-ESP switch/ Telephone/ Fillers/ electrochrome mirror Right xenon headlamp Left xenon headlamp Vacant Trailer pre-installation kit (guided solution) Vacant Vacant Vacant Central locking Diagnosis/ Light switch/ Rain sensor Automatic gearbox/ Heating/ ESP control unit/ Automatic gearbox lever Cable control unit Vacant Alarm Vacant Fog lamp Kit (guided solution) Vacant 5 10 10 5 7.5 5 Amperes 10 5 5 5 5 5 .

0l 147 kW 4 speed TFSI)) Fan switch Electric windows (front) Vacant Rear window heater Rear electric windows Engine (fuel pump relay/ flowmeter) Convenience controls Vacant Automatic gearbox Vacuum pump Vacant Sunroof Convenience controls Vacant Headlight washer system Heated seats D2L Engine (2.0 l 147 kW 4 speed TFSI)) Vacant Fan switch Rear wiper motor/ Wiring control unit 12 V socket/ Lighter Tow bar pre-installation Tow bar pre-installation Operating instructions Electrical equipment Amperes 10 40 30 25 30 15 25 20 20 30 25 20 30 10 40 15 15 15 20 Tips and Maintenance Technical Data .If and when 235 Number 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 Safety First D2L Engine (2.

Fuses layout. is subject to alterations. engine compartment. while correct at the time of printing. If discrepancies should occur. left part Fuses Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Clean Steering column Cable control unit ABS AQ gearbox Instrument panel Vacant Radio Telephone 15 5 Electrical equipment Amperes 30 5 5 30 15 5 .0 l 147 kW 4 speed TFSI) D2L Engine (2. Please note that the above list. please refer to the sticker on the inside of the fuse cover for the correct information for your model.0 l 147 kW 4 speed TFSI) Vacant Electrical equipment Amperes 15 10 10 Some of the electrical items listed in the table are only fitted on certain models or are optional extras.236 If and when Number 45 46 47 48 49 Tow bar pre-installation Vacant D2L Engine (2.

6.0 D2L High-pressure fuel pump 24 25 26 ARF. main relay (relay n° 100) Amperes 5 10 5 25 30 20 5 10 30 15 30 15 5 5 10 15 10 40 40 40 50 Tips and Maintenance Technical Data 23 T 71 diesel EGR 2.6 SLP engine 1. change valve Right lighting Left lighting 1.0 FSI 147 kW) Vacant Gateway Petrol injection module supply Diesel injection module supply Coil Engine T71 / 20 FSI Pump relay ADS pump Horn Vacant Clean Vacant Lambda probe Brake pedal. speed sensor Engine 1.9 TDI Glow plug relay Safety First Operating instructions .If and when 237 Number 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Electrical equipment Main relay in the FSI / diesel engine compartment / injection module supply Main relay in the engine compartment D2L (2.

while correct at the time of printing. Internal fuse box Ventilator < 500 W / Ventilator > 500 W PTCs (Supplementary electrical heating using air) Trailer fuse voltage supply in internal fuse box Central locking control unit (4F8 with autolock) Electrical equipment Amperes 150 200 80 100 50 / 80 100 50 Some of the electrical items listed in the table are only fitted on certain models or are optional extras.238 If and when Number 28 29 30 KL15 Electric windows (front and back) Electric windows (front) X . is subject to alterations. Please note that the above list. .relief relay Electrical equipment Amperes 40 50 30 40 Position in engine compartment: side box Fuses Number B1 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 H1 Alternator < 140 W Alternator > 140 W Power steering Multi-terminal voltage supply “30”.

thus reducing efficiency. A bulb should only be replaced by one of the same type. this means that. the bulbs that most affect road safety should have spares in the vehicle. 22) On this type of headlight. Fingerprints vaporise in the heat.P21W Reverse gear (passenger side) . the bulb changes must be made by the SEAT dealer.P21W Position . there is no need to change the bulbs for the whole life of the vehicle. At the very least. It is highly recommended to keep a box of spare bulbs in the vehicle. The type is inscribed on the bulb.5 times the light flux and have an average lifespan of 5 times more than that of halogen bulbs. Main headlights Dipped beam . any replacement work should be done by a SEAT dealer.W5W Registration plate light Registration plate light .PY21W Xenon headlights21) / self-adjusting* Dipped and main .P21W Rear tailgate light unit Fog lamp (driver's side) .C5W • Note Due to the difficulty in accessing the lamps. except due to unusual circumstances.D1S22) Flash and additional main .H1 Position . given that complex elements must be removed from the vehicle and a reset must be made on the automatic control system incorporated. either on the glass part or on the base.P21W23) Turn signals .H3 Fixed rear light Stop/Position . 23) Electronically controlled single filament bulb for Stop/side bulbs.If and when 239 Bulb change General notes Before changing any bulb first turn off the equipment concerned. The Xenon bulbs discharge 2. Do not touch the bulb glass. However. the following is a description of how to change the bulbs except for the fog lights and interior bulbs.H1 Position W5W Turn signals PY21W 21) Fog lights Fog lights . If the bulb blows it will not work in either position or Stop position.W5W Turn signals .H7 Main beam .W5W Indicator Indicator . Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . causing a reduction in the bulb life and condensation on the mirror surface.

– Installation is done in the reverse order. 163 Turn signal lamps Turn signals Dipped headlights Main beam headlights Side lights – Raise the bonnet. 163 A to the left and pull. – Remove the bulb by pressing on the lamp holder and rotating at the same time to the left.240 If and when Main headlight lamps Turn signal lamps Fig. . – Rotate the lamp holder A fig. 162 Main headlight lamps A A B A C A D A Fig.

1 fig. – Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so that the rim of the attachment plate is on the reflector cut-out. 165 Dipped headlights – Raise the bonnet Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . 164 Dipped headlights Fig. 164 A in the direction of the arrow and 2 fig. 3 fig. 165 A from the bulb.If and when 241 Dipped beam lights – Remove the loops remove the cover. Fig. 165 A pressing inwards – Remove the connector – Disengage the retainer spring and to the right.

167 A from the bulb. 167 Main beam headlights – Raise the bonnet – Remove the cover C fig. 166 A by pulling on this. . Fig.242 If and when Main beam lights – Remove the connector – Press the spring 1 fig. 2 fig. – Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so that it sits correctly into the cut-out on the reflector. 166 Main beam headlights Fig. – Installation is done in the reverse order. 167 A inwards and to the right.

• Fig. – Installation is done in the reverse order. Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . 169 A outwards. Rear lights • - On the body Indicator. – Replace the bulb by pulling this out and inserting the replacement. – Remove the cover Safety First D fig. 168 Side lights - Fig. side and brake light On the tailgate Left-hand side: side and foglight.If and when 243 Side lights – Extract the lamp holder 1 fig. 169 Side lights – Raise the bonnet. Right-hand side: side and reverse light. 168 A by pulling on this.

– To refit follow the steps in reverse order. 170 Indicator. See the arrow fig. 172 Removing the lampholder – Open the tailgate. side and brake lights on the bodywork Position light. fog light and reverse light on the tailgate Fig. side and brake lights on the bodywork Fig. – Pull the cover off. . 171. 171 Lights on the tailgate – Press on the side pin outwards and take out the lamp holder.244 If and when Indicator. Fig. taking special care when fitting the lamp holder. – Extract the failed bulb and change it for a new one.

– First place the indicator in the opening in the bodywork. – Installation is done in the reverse order. – Insert the lamp holder in the indicator guide until it clicks into place. 172. – Remove the failed glass bulb and replace with a new bulb. 173. rotating it to the left and outwards.If and when 245 – Take the lampholder out pressing on the securing pins and extract it outwards page 244. 173. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . 2 – Insert the lamp as shown by the arrow A fig. – Remove the lamp holder from the indicator. fig. – Replace the faulty lamp. 173 Indicator – Press the indicator on one of its sides to take it out. Side indicators Fig. arrow A. fixing 1 the tabs fig.

– Installation is done in the reverse order.using the flat side of a screwdriver fig. Fig. 174.246 If and when Luggage compartment lights – Press the lamp sideways and remove it from its housing fig. . 174 Luggage compartment light Fig. 175 Luggage compartment light – Extract the tulip shaped fitting by pressing on the inside edge of this -arrow. 175.

177 Registration plate light – To remove the bulb holder. moving it in the direction of the arrow and outwards fig. – Installation is done in the reverse order. unscrew the bolts fig. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . 176 Registration plate light Fig. Fig. 177. 176.If and when 247 Registration light – Remove the lamp.

Jump-starting Jump leads The jump lead must have a sufficient wire cross section. Fig. 179. Fig. The wire cross section must be at least 25 mm2 for petrol engines and at least 35 mm2 for diesel engines. moving it in the direction of the arrow and outwards fig. • Note • The discharged battery must be properly connected to the vehicles electrical system. as shown in the figure fig. 179. using the flat side of the screwdriver. . the battery can be connected to the battery of another vehicle to start the engine. otherwise electricity could flow as soon as the positive terminals are connected. Jump leads Jump leads must comply with the standard DIN 72553 (see manufacturer's documentation).248 If and when Sunroof light – Remove the lamp. The vehicles must not touch each other. – Installation is done in the reverse order. 178 Removing sunroof light If the engine fails to start because of a discharged battery. 179 Removing sunroof light – Carefully remove the lamp.

Connect one end of the red jump lead to the positive fig. 180 How to connect the jump leads 8. Start the engine of the vehicle with the boosting battery and let it run at idling speed. Connect the other end of the black jump lead A to a solid metal component which is bolted on to the engine block. connect it to a point near the battery 5. If the engine fails to start. 7. 1. switch off the headlights (if they are switched on). Jump lead terminal connections – Switch off the ignition on both vehicles . A terminal of the vehicle with the flat battery 2. 180. Connect one end of the black jump lead to the negative terminal A on the battery of the vehicle providing assistance. Removing the jump leads In A B fig. 10. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data .If and when 249 How to jump start X 4. Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment. Do not . Start the engine of the car with the flat battery and wait one or two minutes until the engine is “running”. Starting 6. Connect the other end of the red jump lead to the positive + terminal A in the vehicle providing assistance. 180 + . Before you remove the jump leads. the flat battery is A and the charged battery A. Fig. Connect the battery clamps so they have good metal-to-metal contact with the battery terminals. 9. When the engine is running. disconnect the leads in reverse order to the details given above. This helps minimise voltage peaks that are generated when the leads are disconnected. 3. or onto the engine block itself of the vehicle with the flat battery. switch off the starter after about 10 seconds and try again after about half a minute. Turn on the heater blower and rear window heater in the vehicle with the flat battery.

flames and lighted cigarettes away from batteries. If a battery freezes. otherwise electricity could flow as soon as the positive terminals are connected. danger of explosion. “Working in the engine compartment”. Note The vehicles must not touch each other. it should be replaced.250 If and when WARNING Please note the safety warnings referring to working in the engine compartment page 198. Failure to comply could result in an explosion. • Do not bend over the batteries. This could result in chemical burns. • Do not attach the negative cable from the other vehicle to parts of the fuel system or to the brake line. battery acid could leak and cause chemical burns. . Danger of explosion! Even after the battery has thawed. • Keep sparks. • • The battery providing assistance must have the same voltage as the flat battery (12V) and approximately the same capacity (see imprint on battery). Observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the jump leads. The jump lead attached to the positive battery terminal must not touch metal parts of the vehicle. this can cause a short circuit. Failure to comply could result in an explosion. • The non-insulated parts of the battery clamps must not be allowed to touch. Danger of explosion. The gas emitted from the battery could be ignited by sparks. • • Do not connect the negative cable from the other vehicle directly to the negative terminal of the flat battery. • Never use jump leads when one of the batteries is frozen. • Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment.

Caution When tow-starting. However. – Switch on the ignition. Fig. 181 The front right section of the vehicle: Fitting the front towing eye WARNING The risk of accidents is high when tow-starting. – Keep the clutch pressed down.If and when 251 Towing and tow-starting Tow-starting The use of jump leads is preferable to tow-starting. Towing eyes Fig. fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it. We recommend that you do not tow-start your vehicle. The vehicle being towed can easily collide with the towing vehicle. if your vehicle has to be tow-started: – Engage the 2nd or the 3rd gear. Jump-starting is preferable page 248. – As soon as the engine starts. This helps to prevent driving into the towing vehicle. – Once both vehicles are moving. 182 Fitting the towing eye to the rear of the vehicle Please observe the following points if you use a tow-rope: Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . release the clutch. press the clutch and move the gear lever into neutral.

The ignition of the vehicle being towed must be switched on to prevent the steering wheel from locking and also to allow the use of the turn signals. As the brake servo does not work if the engine is not running. Do not tow further than 50 km. windscreen wipers and washers.252 If and when Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle – Drive slowly at first until the tow-rope is taut. insert a screwdriver into the lower slot and lever gently. 182 threaded hole. Fitting the towing eye – Take the towing ring from the onboard tools. If a breakdown vehicle is used. Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle – Ensure that the tow-rope remains taut at all times when towing. You should only use a tow-rope if you do not have a tow-bar. you will need more strength to steer than you normally would. the vehicle must be towed with the front wheels raised. – Screw the towing eye as shown by arrow anti-clockwise to the limit position in the front page 251. However. As the power assisted steering does not work if the engine is not running. • • • • Towing vehicles with an automatic gearbox Put the selector lever into position “N”. Attach the tow-rope or the tow-bar only to the towing eyes provided or a towing bracket. • For technical reasons. 181 or rear page 251. – Remember that the brake servo and power steering are not working in the vehicle you are towing. accelerate gently. Brake earlier than you would normally. – Pull the lower front cover down and leave the cover hanging on the vehicle. there is always a risk of overloading and damaging the anchorage points. fig. – Begin and change gears cautiously. If you are driving an automatic vehicle. especially when using a tow-rope. – Remove the cover of the screw hole. . Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle and take care to avoid jerking the tow-rope. vehicles with an automatic gearbox must not be tow-started. Driving style Towing requires some experience. • • Note Observe legal requirements when towing or tow-starting. you must apply considerably more pressure to the brake pedal than you normally would. Switch on the hazard warning lights of both vehicles. When towing on an unpaved road. It is advisable to use a tow-rope made of synthetic fibre or similarly elastic material. observe any regulations to the contrary. Both drivers should be familiar with the technique required for towing. Tow-rope or tow-bar It is easier and safer to tow a vehicle with a tow-bar. Do not drive faster than 50 km/h when towing a vehicle. horn. fig. Inexperienced drivers should not attempt to tow-start or tow away another vehicle. A tow-rope should be slightly elastic to reduce the loading on both vehicles. but with a more gentle pressure on the brake. Then accelerate gradually.

The vehicle must then be towed with the front wheels raised. • The steering wheel is locked when the vehicle has no electrical power. Towing should be carried out by a qualified person. the front wheels must be raised during towing. • The towing eye should always be kept in the vehicle. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . you must raise the drive wheels while the vehicle is being towed. and towing should be carried out by a qualified person. Please refer to the notes on page 251.If and when 253 If damage to your vehicle means that there is no lubricant in the gearbox. • • If the vehicle has to be towed more than 50 km.

.

Abbreviations used in this paragraph of the Technical Data Abbreviation kW bhp at rpm Nm l/100 km g/km CO2 CN RON Meaning Kilowatt. indication of the knock resistance of petrol. Research octane number. Fuel consumption in litres per 100 kilometres Carbon dioxide emissions in grams per kilometre.engine speed. Carbon dioxide Cetane number. The vehicle data card included in the inspection and maintenance schedule in the vehicle registration documents shows which engine is fitted in the vehicle. formerly used to denote engine power Revolutions per minute . for different models. Newton metres. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . Brake horse power. indication of the ignition quality of the diesel. All data in these documents are valid for the basic model as offered in Spain. engine power measurement. for special vehicles and for other countries.General notes on the technical data 255 Technical Data General notes on the technical data What you should be aware of General notes All data in the official vehicle documents take precedence over this data. unit of engine torque. The figures may be different if additional equipment is fitted.

This is located on the lefthand side of the vehicle in the lower area of the windscreen. Type plate The type plate is located on the left rib inside the engine compartment. Vehicle data The data sticker is placed on the inside of the spare wheel recess in the luggage compartment. 183: Production control number Vehicle identification number (chassis number) Model code number Model designation / engine power output Engine and gearbox code letters Paint number / interior trim code Optional equipment codes Consumption CO2 emissions Fig. It is also located on the right-hand side of the engine compartment. CO emissions and consumption 2 A A Consumption (l/100 km) / CO2 Emissions (g/km) urban B A Consumption (l/100 km) / CO2 Emissions (g/km) motorway C A Consumption (l/100 km) / CO2 Emissions (g/km) mixed Vehicles for certain export countries do not have a model plate. .256 General notes on the technical data Vehicle identification data The most important data are given on the type plate and the vehicle data sticker. 1 A 2 A 3 A 4 A 5 A 6 A 7 A 8 A 9 A fig. The following information can be found in the vehicle information This vehicle data is also contained in the Service Schedule. 183 Vehicle data sticker – luggage compartment The information given in numbers 2 to 9 are also shown in the Service Schedule. Vehicle identification number The vehicle identification number (chassis number) can be read from outside the vehicle through a viewer in the windscreen.

Urban cycle Extra urban cycle Combined CO2 emissions The consumption and emission figures are calculated in accordance with the EC test requirements 1999/100/EC. the weather and the condition of the vehicle. The gas composition is then analysed to evaluate the CO2 content and other emissions. The road speed ranges from 0 to 120 km/h. In the extra urban cycle the vehicle undergoes frequent acceleration and braking in all gears. as in normal everyday driving. The figures for fuel consumption and CO2 emissions of the vehicle are also found on the vehicle data sticker. The exhaust gases are collected during both driving cycles to calculate carbon dioxide emissions. These test requirements specify a realistic test method based on normal everyday driving. The average overall consumption is calculated with a weighting of around 37% for the urban cycle and 63% for the extra urban cycle.General notes on the technical data 257 How are the figures measured? Fuel consumption The consumption and emission details shown on the vehicle data sticker differ from one vehicle to another. City driving is then simulated. The fuel consumption and emissions figures given are based on the weight category of the car. The following test conditions are applied: The urban cycle starts with an engine cold start. Note Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . • Actual consumption may vary from quoted test values. road and traffic conditions. depending on personal driving style. which is determined according to the engine/gearbox combination and the equipment fitted.

The approved trailer weights are valid for vehicles in EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (in certain circumstances up to 100 km/h). at least 4% of the actual trailer weight is a legal stipulation for a drawbar load. The figure quoted includes 75 kg to allow for the weight of the driver. Never exceed the gross axle weight rating or the gross vehicle weight rating. The slightly raised pressures of warm tyres must not be reduced . WARNING • Please note that the centre of gravity may shift when transporting heavy objects. the weight of the vehicle will increase . leading to accidents. injuries and damage to the vehicle. with small. Always adjust your speed and driving style to suit road conditions and requirements. we recommend that you always tow approaching the maximum drawbar load. Towing a trailer Trailer weights Trailer weights The trailer weights and drawbar loads approved are selected in intensive trials according to precisely defined criteria. WARNING • • For safety reasons. In the interest of road safety. Drawbar load The maximum permitted weight exerted by the trailer drawbar on the ball joint of the towing bracket must not exceed 75 kg. • Never exceed the maximum trailer weights or the draw bar loading. leading to accidents.258 General notes on the technical data Weights Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a fuel tank filled to 90% capacity and without optional extras.g. snow chains. . The figures may be different in other countries. wheel bolts Tyre pressures The sticker with the tyre pressure values can be found on the inside of the tank flap. If the allowed axle load or the allowed total weight is exceeded. All data in the official vehicle documents take precedence over these data . The tyre pressure values given there are for cold tyres. the driving characteristics of the vehicle may change. empty and light-weight single axle trailers or tandem axle trailers with an axle base of less than 1 metre). injuries and damage to the vehicle. This also applies to countries where higher speeds are permitted. If the maximum permissible drawbar load cannot be met (e. Wheels Tyre pressure. you should not drive at speeds above 80 km/h when towing a trailer. For special versions and optional equipment fittings or for the addition of accessories. this may affect the vehicle's handling and lead to an accident. If the permissible axle load or the permissible total weight is exceeded. the driving characteristics of the vehicle may change. The response of the trailer on the road will be poor if the drawbar load is too small.

the wheel bolts and threads could be damaged. the tightening torque of the wheel bolts should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench . If the torque of the wheel bolts is too low. Correct tyre pressure is very important. Consult the chapter “wheels” of this manual. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low. Risk of accident! If the tightening torque is too high. tyre and snow chain size. Wheel bolts After the wheels have been changed. The tightening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm. they could loosen whilst the vehicle is in motion. particularly at high speeds. WARNING Check the tyre pressure at least once per month. • • Note We recommend that you ask your Authorised Service Centre for information about appropriate wheel. Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data .General notes on the technical data 259 Snow chains Snow chains may be fitted only to the front wheels. there is an increased danger of accidents.

. 184 Diagram for the location of the various elements 1 A 2 A 3 A 4 A 5 A 6 A Radiator expansion tank Windscreen washer fluid reservoir Engine oil filler cap Engine oil dipstick Brake fluid reservoir Vehicle battery (underneath the cover) The checking and replenishment of the service fluids are carried out on the components mentioned above. Never fill with incorrect fluids. the levels of the different fluids in the vehicle must be checked. Overview Further explanations. These operations are described in the page 198. to do so may cause serious damage to the engine.260 Technical Data Technical Data Checking fluid levels From time to time. instructions and restrictions on the technical data are contained as of page 255 Fig.

7 rpm in Nm at rpm in cm 3 63 (86)/ 5000 132/ 3800 4/ 1390 10. capacity Compression Fuel Performance figures Maximum speed Acceleration from 0-80 km/h Acceleration from 0-100 km/h Weights Gross vehicle weight Weight in working order (with driver) Gross axle weight. 172 9.Technical Data 261 Petrol engine 1. rear Permitted roof load Trailer weights With no brakes. in sec.4 litre 63 kW (86 bhp) General engine data Power output in kW (bhp) Maximum torque No. gradients up to 12% With brakes. front Gross axle weight. gradients up to 12% 620 1000 in kg in kg in kg in kg in kg 1746 1351 890 895 75 in km/h in sec.5 ± 0. of cylinders.3 95 Octane petrol Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data .1 13.

rear Permitted roof load in kg in kg in kg in kg in kg 1783 1280 936 890 75 in km/h in sec. capacity Compression Fuel Performance figures Maximum speed Acceleration from 0-80 km/h Acceleration from 0-100 km/h Weights Gross vehicle weight Weight in working order (with driver) Gross axle weight.262 Technical Data Engine oil filling capacity Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 3. 95 RON .7 rpm in Nm at rpm in cm 3 75 (102)/ 5600 148/ 3800 4/ 1595 10.6 litre 75 kW (102 bhp) General engine data Power output in kW (bhp) Maximum torque No. front Gross axle weight.5 ± 0.2 litres Petrol engine 1. of cylinders.8 11. 184 7.5 Premium unleaded. in sec.

of cylinders. in sec. gradients up to 12% Engine oil filling capacity Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4. 210 6.8 litres 640 1200 Petrol engine 2. Manual General engine data Power output in kW (bhp) Maximum torque No. gradients up to 12% With brakes.8 Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data .5-0.Technical Data 263 Trailer weights With no brakes.0 110 kW (150 bhp). capacity Compression Fuel a) rpm in Nm at rpm in cm 3 110 (150)/ 6000 200/ 3500 4/ 1984 11.0 8.5 98 octane or 95 octanea) Slight power loss Performance figures Maximum speed Acceleration from 0-80 km/h Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in km/h in sec.

5 98 octane or 95 octanea) With a slight power loss . 5. gradients up to 12% Engine oil filling capacity Engine oil capacity with oil filter change. of cylinders.0 110 kW (150 bhp). gradients up to 12% With brakes.5-0. capacity Compression Fuel a) rpm in Nm at rpm in cm 3 110 (150)/ 6000 200/ 3500 4/ 1984 11.3 litres 660 1400 in kg in kg in kg in kg in kg 1830 1335 989 883 75 Petrol engine 2. front Gross axle weight. rear Permitted roof load Trailer weights With no brakes. Automatic General engine data Power output in kW (bhp) Maximum torque No.264 Technical Data Weights Gross vehicle weight Weight in working order (with driver) Gross axle weight.

front Gross axle weight.4 Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data .4 9. 208 6. gradients up to 12% Engine oil filling capacity Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 5.3 litres 680 1400 in kg in kg in kg in kg in kg 1870 1375 1024 888 75 in km/h in sec.Technical Data 265 Performance figures Maximum speed Acceleration from 0-80 km/h Acceleration from 0-100 km/h Weights Gross vehicle weight Weight in working order (with driver) Gross axle weight. gradients up to 12% With brakes. rear Permitted roof load Trailer weights With no brakes. in sec.

3 ± 0.266 Technical Data Petrol engine 2.5 7.5 98 octane or 95 octanea) With a slight power loss Performance figures Maximum speed Acceleration from 0-80 km/h Acceleration from 0-100 km/h Weights Gross vehicle weight Weight in working order (with driver) Gross axle weight. front Gross axle weight. in sec. of cylinders.0l 136 kW (185 bhp) General engine data Power output in kW (bhp) Maximum torque No. gradients up to 12% With brakes.8 . rear Permitted roof load Trailer weights With no brakes. capacity Compression Fuel a) rpm in Nm at rpm in cm 3 136 (185)/ 5100-6000 270/ 1800-5000 4/ 1984 10. 221 5. gradients up to 12% 700 1400 in kg in kg in kg in kg in kg 1904 1409 1050 896 75 in km/h in sec.

of cylinders.3 ± 0.5 98 octane or 95 octanea) With a slight power loss Performance figures Maximum speed Acceleration from 0-80 km/h Acceleration from 0-100 km/h Weights Gross vehicle weight Weight in working order (with driver) Gross axle weight.0l 147 kW (200 bhp).2 7. 229 5. Manual General engine data Power output in kW (bhp) Maximum torque No. rear Permitted roof load in kg in kg in kg in kg in kg 1904 1409 1046 897 75 in km/h in sec. in sec. capacity Compression Fuel a) rpm in Nm at rpm in cm 3 147 (200)/ 5100-6000 280/ 1800-5000 4/ 1984 10.3 Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data .Technical Data 267 Engine oil filling capacity Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 5. front Gross axle weight.3 litres Petrol engine 2.

229 5.3 ± 0.2 . in sec. Automatic General engine data Power output in kW (bhp) Maximum torque No.2 7. gradients up to 12% With brakes.5 98 octane or 95 octanea) With a slight power loss Performance figures Maximum speed Acceleration from 0-80 km/h Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in km/h in sec. of cylinders.0l 147 kW (200 bhp). capacity Compression Fuel a) rpm in Nm at rpm in cm 3 147 (200)/ 5100-6000 280/ 1800-5000 4/ 1984 10.3 litres 700 1400 Petrol engine 2.268 Technical Data Trailer weights With no brakes. gradients up to 12% Engine oil filling capacity Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 5.

gradients up to 12% With brakes.3 ± 0.0l 177 kW (240 bhp) General engine data Power output in kW (bhp) Maximum torque No.Technical Data 269 Weights Gross vehicle weight Weight in working order (with driver) Gross axle weight. of cylinders. front Gross axle weight. gradients up to 12% Engine oil filling capacity Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 5.5 98 octane or 95 octanea) With a slight power loss Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data .3 litres 620 1200 in kg in kg in kg in kg in kg 1939 1444 1076 902 75 Petrol engine 2. rear Permitted roof load Trailer weights With no brakes. capacity Compression Fuel a) rpm in Nm at rpm in cm 3 177 (240)/ 5700-6300 300/ 2200-5000 4/ 1984 10.

244 4. gradients up to 12% Engine oil filling capacity Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 5.9 6.8 . front Gross axle weight.270 Technical Data Performance figures Maximum speed Acceleration from 0-80 km/h Acceleration from 0-100 km/h Weights Gross vehicle weight Weight in working order (with driver) Gross axle weight. rear Permitted roof load Trailer weights With no brakes.3 litres 720 1400 in kg in kg in kg in kg in kg 1945 1450 1047 926 75 in km/h in sec. in sec. gradients up to 12% With brakes.

6 11. capacity Compression Fuel Performance figures Maximum speed Acceleration from 0-80 km/h Acceleration from 0-100 km/h Weights Gross vehicle weight Weight in working order (with driver) Gross axle weight.9l TDI 77 kW (105 bhp) General engine data Power output in kW (bhp) Maximum torque No. front Gross axle weight. gradients up to 12% 680 1400 in kg in kg in kg in kg in kg 1868 1365 1015 896 75 in km/h in sec.3 rpm in Nm at rpm in cm 3 77 (105) 4000 250/1900 4/1896 19 ± 0.5 Min 51 CZ Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . in sec. rear Permitted roof load Trailer weights With no brakes. 185 7.Technical Data 271 Diesel engine 1. of cylinders. gradients up to 12% With brakes.

front Gross axle weight. of cylinders. Manual General engine data Power output in kW (bhp) Maximum torque No.272 Technical Data Engine oil filling capacity Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.2500 4/ 1968 18.3 Diesel engine 2.5 ± 0.3 9. 205 6. capacity Compression Fuel Performance figures Maximum speed Acceleration from 0-80 km/h Acceleration from 0-100 km/h Weights Gross vehicle weight Weight in working order (with driver) Gross axle weight.5 Min 51 CZ .0l 103 kW (140 bhp). in sec. rear Permitted roof load in kg in kg in kg in kg in kg 1885 1390 1042 885 75 in km/h in sec.3 rpm in Nm at rpm in cm 3 103 (140)/ 4000 320/ 1750 .

in sec. capacity Compression Fuel Performance figures Maximum speed Acceleration from 0-80 km/h Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in km/h in sec.0 103 kW (140 bhp).3 litres 690 1400 Diesel engine 2. gradients up to 12% Engine oil filling capacity Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4. gradients up to 12% With brakes.5 ± 0.Technical Data 273 Trailer weights With no brakes. Automatic General engine data Power output in kW (bhp) Maximum torque No. 205 6. of cylinders.3 rpm in Nm at rpm in cm 3 103 (140)/ 4000 320/ 1750 .3 9.5 Min 51 CZ Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data .2500 4/ 1968 18.

5 Min 51 CZ . capacity Compression Fuel rpm in Nm at rpm in cm 3 100 (136)/ 4000 320/ 1750 .3 litres 710 1400 in kg in kg in kg in kg in kg 1925 1430 1077 890 75 Diesel engine 2. Manual General engine data Power kW (CV) Maximum torque No.0l 100 kW (136 bhp). of cylinders.274 Technical Data Weights Gross vehicle weight Weight in working order (with driver) Gross axle weight. gradients up to 12% With brakes.5 ± 0. front Gross axle weight. gradients up to 12% Engine oil filling capacity Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4. rear Permitted roof load Trailer weights With no brakes.2500 4/ 1968 18.

203 6. gradients up to 12% With brakes. rear Permitted roof load Trailer weights With no brakes. in sec. front Gross axle weight.3 litres 690 1400 in kg in kg in kg in kg in kg 1885 1390 1042 885 75 in km/h in sec.4 Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data .Technical Data 275 Performance figures Maximum speed Acceleration from 0-80 km/h Acceleration from 0-100 km/h Weights Gross vehicle weight Weight in working order (with driver) Gross axle weight.4 9. gradients up to 12% Engine oil filling capacity Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.

Automatic General engine data Power output in kW (bhp) Maximum torque No.5 ± 0.276 Technical Data Diesel engine 2.5 Min 51 CZ .2500 4/ 1968 18. rear Permitted roof load Trailer weights With no brakes. gradients up to 12% 710 1400 in kg in kg in kg in kg in kg 1925 1430 1077 890 75 in km/h in sec. of cylinders.4 9. 203 6.0 100 kW (136 bhp). front Gross axle weight. gradients up to 12% With brakes.4 rpm in Nm at rpm in cm 3 100 (136)/ 4000 320/ 1750 . capacity Compression Fuel Performance figures Maximum speed Acceleration from 0-80 km/h Acceleration from 0-100 km/h Weights Gross vehicle weight Weight in working order (with driver) Gross axle weight. in sec.

2500 4/ 1968 18.3 litres Diesel engine 2. rear Permitted roof load in kg in kg in kg in kg in kg 1901 1406 1048 894 75 in km/h in sec.Technical Data 277 Engine oil filling capacity Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.5 ± 0. front Gross axle weight. in sec. capacity Compression Fuel Performance figures Maximum speed Acceleration from 0-80 km/h Acceleration from 0-100 km/h Weights Gross vehicle weight Weight in working order (with driver) Gross axle weight. 214 5.0l 125 kW (170 bhp) General engine data Power output in kW (bhp) Maximum torque No.5 Min 51 CZ Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data . of cylinders.2 rpm in Nm at rpm in cm 3 125 (170)/ 4200 350/ 1750 .9 8.

278 Technical Data Trailer weights With no brakes. gradients up to 12% Engine oil filling capacity Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres 700 1400 . gradients up to 12% With brakes.

5 l Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data .459 mm 949 mm/ 788mm 2.315 mm/ 1.517 mm This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim. 55 l.2 bar.768 mm 1.7 m Front Track widtha) 1.Technical Data 279 Dimensions and capacities Dimensions Length. Reserve 7 l. 3 l/ 5.578 mm 10.509 mm 1. Winter tyres: The pressure of these tyres is the same as the summer tyre pressure plus 0. width Height at kerb weight Front and rear projection Wheelbase Turning circle 4.533 mm a) Rear 1. Capacities Fuel tank Windscreen washer fluid container with headlight washer Tyre pressure Summer-grade tyres: The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the inside of the tank flap.525 mm 1.

280 Technical Data .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Acoustic signal . . . . . . . . 77 Brakes . . 157 Automatic lighting . . . . 136 Aquaplaning . . . . . . . Side airbags . . . . . 170 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Airbags Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Before starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 BAS . . . 191 Alternator Warning lamp . . . . 134 Aspects to take into account before starting the vehicle . . . . . . . 78 Anti-theft alarm system . . 226 Apple iPod connector . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . 145 Air conditioning system General notes . . . . . . . . . 146 Automatic wiper/wash function for the rear window 122 Auxiliary audio connection: AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Deactivating anti-dazzle function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Air conditioner* 2C-Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . 30 41 34 37 31 Alterations to the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Acoustic warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror* Activating the anti-dazzle function . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Ashtray* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Adjusting the seat belt height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 B Ball coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Automatic mode 2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Air conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Manual air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Brake assist system . . 173 Braking distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Airbag covers . . . . . . . . 82 Brake pads . . 169 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Anti-theft wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Battery Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Air recirculation mode 2C-Climatronic . . . 8 Belt tension device Disposal . . . 63 Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Accessories . . . 183 Automatic gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Airbag system . . . . . . . . 32 Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Index 281 Index A ABS . . 31 Belt tension devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Brake pad wear indicator* Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Winter conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Alarm system Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Automatic car washes . . . . 169. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Ambient temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Clot